HomeMy WebLinkAboutOrdinances Book 11, Page 325, No Resolution NumberCONTENTS
Ixnonvvrox „__„
Plate
ARTICLECIIAPTER 1 -GENERAL
azo Gncur. ............_.�_.._........,. ........ .._........... 9
CHAPTER ]-\CIIUNG DESIGN AND PROTECTION
'w N -11r I't-1 nox nr Srarexs .en Cnrcrn_ 21
210 Iluacn lYa. vin .�.._...
A0 Snnm ....._ .. .. .... ]]
2J0
0 Orncvaacxi 1'aoncr,ox .. - - ....._.... ]6
2S
280 Lscmxsxc ,bourns .. _ 60
_..-.......,_ 7,
CIIAPTER J_w'IIUNG METIIODS .{XD 31ATERIALS
]w ('11CO._ Rc9asuY-xra roa {Ynsxv So
]10
CO._
a3
"0 Orax Rima Ox Lrsuurvu - - "`
J2a Coxcuuv
7]
]JJ ,\axw[p Uwau 9a
]!G Xox-Ma,wluc Strawrnu _ ........ 95
JJO C Enruar¢ Cuu S9
. 9xdtauuu wwunawr R'urxv....... ..._.
N] Nox-Marwure
S,...C. E.naatoxs
JJ1 Uxolarswsrn Earaxa+o.. - 100
N4 Ihcu 91uau Coxvusr """ - - IOJ
JJI Euauua Muxutc Tunac �...... .. ... IW
JSa I•t[asau }'lent Coxvusr �. .. .... 1W
JS[ Uxuarr.roa 1Gcax'.Ya ...... 107
J56 Crocus Mau.
.. ....... las
110
Is
J70 Ourur, Sx'star axp Jvnci,ax Doan wnv�Ftnncs 119
J7) Canrar- ary Curov< Dosu ___.._.
Jl[ AuvrluaY CVnau """'^"•�--- 1:0
781
J90 Pauuarwiap ➢aruaxw .-,--"•"_.•."^"_. 12J
-_._._.....�_..�...__ 139
CIIAPTER 4 -EQUIPMENT FOR GENERAL USE
IwFraysvu C'oans
410 Lscutixo Furuua. I-rantowsu 1-sxry` IJI
w
-cra.nxv It[can
I27 Aevu...axcas Hossnu _......_.....__.._
......_....__.._ 1Jd
10
Covravuru .. ....._._....... Ir -
NS
CONTENTS
430 Turarno wxn Tu........ Vavus linrtud•rise
M, Srcae6arr Two ....._._�.__...__..._.._.___ 169
__..._._._.._,._,,..__.. li)
1i0 N[aa,mu .xn Nucrou 179
180 Srvaaw Ilnnn,n ...-..__._....._.
_..._... ....._.__..._..._...__._..., 191
CIL\PrER 5-SPECL{L OCCUP:\XC1E5
sw Il+r,r,.nra Ixwr+exa _. las
SIO t..uau axe S+u,ua Occcrncru-__"�-•���
s_v '!noun I.rrwo,+c Morrox-, ..^_______ 219
!3J 31r.nnx•I9crc,c Smoux oxo lSmuallouaea _ _.. °19
310 Jlon�x-IYncu """"crou __ Lwnexs..._ 2t)
CIL\MER 6 -SPECIAL EOCII'MENr
651 Srcra wsv 0111". Lnnnxa
610 Curti are !lam ...-. ._...
6:5 7acuxr Coxnvnau_....._.._.__.__'.._.. .. 211
NY
G0 Ser,v a wxn R«vusxSrp+W Erwrsraxr.. .. ]1!
a99 o.w- ... . as
169X.R[r FAvrrxaxr _ . 261
Gla Macuraa Two '-_.-'-"—.'""...•._... '69
C1IAMER 2 -SPECIAL CONIMTIOXS
]w Elven tar* Lscnma
,la Cu¢m on FLmrxaxr Onunxc car )fou 7xu 771
foo 3'vau Ronan Coxcerrcu ..... 273
720 Quern nxv Pgan -_---�
era+r Ornanxv car Lsu Titan
3a Vncrs
775 Aaxmal'a�nca, Iww.P.uur 1'nxu nxv Swm
Curcm _ 2b0
730 V, Nrnxo._. __
785
CIIAPTER S-co""UNICATIOX SYSTEMS
RA Ccxxvrrtannx Curmu .
uY gwum Es:rxue __--.—.-- 21a
' •-.-..___. ._ 297
CII 1I'TP-R 9 -CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
CoxrraYrno+
Tn01AMEa I0 -TABLES, bLtr.RAMS AND RXAMPLES
aa_. ......._...._-_.._.,_
in
"MOM
lay
INTRODUCTION
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this Code is the
Practical safeguarding of persons and of buildings and
their contents, from electrical hazards arising from the
use of electricity for light, heat, power, radio, signalling
and for other purposes. It covers the electric eon•
ductms and equipment installed within or on public
and private buildings and other premises, including
yards, carnival and parking lots, and industrial Sob -
stations: also the conductors that connect the installa-
tions to a supply of electricity, and other outside con-
ductors adjacent to the premises.
It does not cover installations in mines, ships, rail•
way cars, automotive equipment, or the installations
or equipment employed by a n&ay, electric or com-
munication utility in the exercise of its function as a
agility, and located outdoor, or in buildings used ex•
elusively for that purpose.
The provisions of this Code constitute a minimum
standard. Compliance therewith and proper mainte.
Ranee will result in an installation reasonably free
from hazard but not necessarily efficient or eonven-
feat This Code is to be regarded neither as a design
specification nor an instruction manual for untrained
Persons. Good service and satisfactory results will
often require larger sizes of wire, more branch ch,
cults, -and better types of equipment than the ini-
mum which is here specified.
Wiring LaYOuL It is recommended that architects
when drass•ing plans and specifications make provi-
sion for ample raceways for wiring, spaces for equip-
ment, and allowances for future increases in the use
of electricity. In laying out an installation for con-
slanl-Potential systems, provision should be made for
disthlrural centers located in easily accessible places
for convenience and safety of operation,
It is elsewhere provided in this Code that the num-
ber of wires and circuits confined in a single enclosure
bevaryingly restricted. It is strongly recommended
that arebgecta and others provide similar restrictions
wherever practicable, to the end that the effects of
in
eak-dolsmi froshort-circufts or grounds, even
though reaultm ing fire and similar damage it confined
' e
INTRODUCTION r
to wires, their insulation and enclosurel, may not
serin-
volve entire vices to premise. nor interruptions of
—critial and independent servfcea.
Enforcement and Interpretation• This Cade i, in-
tended to be suitable not only for the use o1 insurance
inspectors but also for mandatory application by gov.
ernal bodies exercising legal jurisdiction over else•
trimemcal installations. The administrative authority SUP-
'—sing such cnivrcemenl of the Code will have the
responsibility for making interpretations ofthe rules,
for deciding upon the apbrsnal of equipment and nsate-
rish, and for granting the special Permission eontetn-
Plated in a number of therules.
In order to promote uniformity of interpretation
{ and application of this Code, lite Electrical Committee
1 of the National Fire Protection Association figs estab-
lished a formal procedure for rendering interpretations
I In case of question. ADPlicali0na for interpretations
should be addreued to the National Fire
Protection
I Auoeiativn Ise- page .167 for procedure for securing
official interpretations of the Code).
It Is customary to revise this Cade periodically to
conform with developments in the art and the roll,
of experience, and the latest edition of the Code should
always be used
With reference to the approval of specific items of
equipment and materials contemplated by the Code,
it is pointed out IhaI fn order to avoid the necessity
for repetition of examinations by different —ram—,
frequently with inadequate facilities for surh work,
and to avoid the confusion which would result from
_rAictfng repona as to the sunabifity of device, and
materials c,za fined for a g;vcn purpose, it is mces-
ury that surh examinations should be made snider
standard conditions, and the record made generally
available t d and romulgalicn by organintinm Prop-
erly equipP qualified for experimenut testing.
Inapecuons of the run of goads at factories, and ser•
vice -value determination through field ia3p6e4ion.
Fundamental Rales• Throughout the Code ora
paraauph- which -tate only fundamentab or objec-
tive, of ufeguardinR. These are followed by par.
-
papbs setting forth the recogai<ed methWa and Retail
•
2-
a INTRODUCTION
by which the purpose and latent of the fundamental
may be satisfied. Accordingly, when employed, the
rules stating a fundamental only will appear as the
first paragraph of an article or section.
Definitions. Article 100 contains definitions of a
number of terms used in this Code which will facili-
tate their correct interpretation and application. For
definitions of terms not so listed, reference may be
made to the Anmerican Standard Definitions of Elec-
trical Terms. ASA C42.
Code Arrangement The first four chapters of the
Code arc of general application. Chapters 5, 6 and 7,
apply to installations which involve special occupan-
cies, special equipment or other special conditions.
These chapters are supplementary to, or amendatory
Of. the general rules, and the latter apply under such
circumstances except as so amended for the particular
conditions. Chapter 8 governs installations of com-
munication systems, and is independent of the preced-
ing chapters except as they may be specifically re-
lerred to. Chapter 9 covers construction specifica-
tions. The larger tables, examples and the diagrams
are collected in Chapter 10.
CHAPTER I. GENERAL
ARTICLE 100—DEFINITIONS
DeRnitiom hick dapnute thew in the American Standard
DeRmriona of Elc<trical rerma. C{_, are markcJ imh an aawriak
2'
Th—nor au ark,d eah<r Aurcr tram the American S,ar,d
and o. are rot (.orad is rhe U41 cdawa
[Accessible: (As applied to wiring methods). Not
permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the
building; capable of being removed without disturb•
ing the building structure or finish.
.Aceesn'ble: (As applied to equipment. Admitting
.loapproach because not guarded by ocked doors,
elst evation or other effective means. (Sec also "Readily
Accessible.")
Appliance: Appliances are current -consuming cyuip-
ment fixed or portable; for example heating, cooking
and small motor -operated equipment.
Approved: Acceptable to the authority enforcing
this coda
Ask sel: A synthetic not1-flammable insulating
liquid which, when decomposed by the electric are,
evolves only nota-e:p;oarve gases.
Branch Cireuft: That portion of A wiring system
extending beyond the final overt -mm device pro-
tecting the circuit
A d cite act —1-4 ler aru<S ei,<uir pRreniw, rota u
0a a.�l J:tet c ...ler er<,mad Lrc+ttn.e d<ria. is nor <ovrid
wW a rb[ a.<rcurr¢t dnKe Cro,ttr.r.( mhe cirtV1L
Building: A struqure which stands alone or which
is cut off from adjoining slruclum, by unpierced fire
walls.
'Cabinet: An enclosure dedc•nrd either for surface
or flush mounting. and provided wrlh it frame, matt or
trim in which swinging dear, are hung, (See cutout
box-)
Communication Clrech; A circuit which isart of
a so-called '•cectnl e,am,•n s stcrt�^ p
ok—A. d,.•Knf .nwnarr.
aR anal LurY•+r u,z+. ra¢hmc, ax ,arV.h:w auL<,<„vrr
CRY.Ia '
C ait-Bmsdrer: A device designed to open under
abnormal earditicus a <wrent-carrying Bireme wohrot
injury to Itaell The at
as tau I ,n this cndn applies
In. ARTICLE 100
only to the automatic type designed to trip on a pre-
determined overload of current.
'Concealed: Rendered inaccessible by the structure
or finish of the building, Wires in concealed rata
ways are considered concealed, even though they may
become accessible by withdrawing them.
Connector, Pressure (Solderless): A pressure con-
hector is a connector in which contact between the
conductor and the connector is obtained without the
use of solder by means of mechanically applied pres-
sure.
'Controller: A device, or group of devices, which
serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, the
electric power delivered to the apparatus to which it
is connected.
'Cutout Box: An enclosure designed for surface
mounting and having swinging doors or covers se-
cured directly to and telescoping with the w-slls of the
box proper. (Sec cabinet.)
aDenund Factor: T11e demand factor of any system
or part of a system, is the ratio of the maximum de•
mond of the system, or part of a system, to the twat
connected load of the system, or of the part of the
system under consideration.
Device: A unit of an electrical system which is in-
tended to carry but not consume electrical energy,
Disconnecting Means: A device, group of devices,
or other means whereby the conductors of a circuit
can be disconnected from their source of supply.
sDustproaf: So constructed or protected that an
accumulation of dust will not interfere with its suc-
cessful operation.
•Duattight: So constructed that dust will not enter
the enclosing case.
Dray:
'Continuum: Contiqunus duty is a requirement
of service that demands operation at a substantially
constant load for all indefinitely long time.
aintermlttent: Intermittent duty is a requirement
of service that demands operation for alternate in-
tervals of (1) load and nn lead, or (2) load and
rest; or (J) load, no load and rest.
DEFINITIONS 11
'Periodic: Periodic duly -i< a type of intermittent
duty in which the load conditions are regularly re-
current.
•Short -Time: Shorl-time duty is a requirement
of service that demands operation at a substantially
constant load far a short and definitely specified
time.
•Varying: Varying duty is a requirement of ser-
vice Thal demands operalion at loads, and for inter-
vals of time, both of which may he subject to wide
variation.
See wLle in ''tion {rl: far illaatrmiova of vuiau is -
al aver.
•Electric Sign: A fixed or portable, celf-eonufned
electrically illuminated appliance with words or sym.
bpis designed to convey iolorinati- or attract ancts-
tioo.
[Enclosed: Surrounded by a case which will pre-
vent a .denral -matt of a person will, live parts.
Equipment: A Reneral term including material,
fillings, device., apphanres, fixlnres• appnwlms. and
the like. u,ed as a part of, or in connection wish, an
electrical inslal:aocn.
Explosion -Proof: See Article 500.
Exposed: 01 aPidivl In live parts) Exposed means
that a live part cam Le inadccnrudy nm,hol ,r ap.
aclwd ,carer 1171, a talc di•4pce 1., env parvo
,.
,.s applied to I," , nal —wh:y guarded or u.dated,
'Exposed: L\v applied m
to wiring mhi,40. Acces-
sible: not cooly " .
.Ext emally Operable: (As applied to cr)uipment
that is co,�, al m a case or calourt). Capab.e .4 be-
ing np-10 tall -out exposing the pr,atnr to contact
"illi live Parts.
FecdeC Aray conductors of a wiring system be-
tceco the aervicc equ potent, ,r the g,ovrat, s%itch-
board „l an ,haloed plant, andr the branch circuit ovcr-
runenm dcvmc.
twiring uihi
o, ohc1lpart of a sy,,c. which filerdug
pruy
,o performs a mechanical rather Than an
<Icclrrcal function,
3Z6
qb
F
17 ARTICLE 100
Garage: A building or portion of a building in
which one or more self-propelled vehicles carrying
volati:e, flammable liquid for fuel or Low" are kept
for use, sale, stooge, rental, repair, exhibition or
demonstrating purposes, and all that portion of a
building which is on or below the floor or floors on
which such vehicles arc kept and which is not sepa-
rated therefrom by suitable cutoffs.
.Guarded: Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed or
othcrwfse protected, by means of suitable covers or
easings, barriers, rails or screens, mats or platforms,
to remove the liability of dangerous contact or ap-
proach by persons or objects to a point of danger.
Hazardous Location: See Article 500.
Hoistway: A hoistway is any shaftemy, hatchway,
well -hole, or other vertical opening or space in which
an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to operate.
•Isolated: Not readily accessible to persons unless
special means for access are used.
'Lighting Outlet: An outlet intended for the direct
connection of a lampholder, a lighting future or a
pendent cord tamfoaGng in a lampholder.
Location:
Dry Location: A location not normally subject
to dampness or wetness. A location classified as
dry may be temporarily subject to dampness or
wetness, as in the case of a his under con-
struction.
Damp Location: A location subject to a moder-
ate degree of moisture, such as some basements,
acme barns, some cold storage warehouses, and the
like.
Wet Location: A location subject to saturation
with water or other liquids, such as locations ex-
posed to the weather, wash '.cons in garages, and
Tike locations. Installations underground or in con-
crete slabc or masonry in direct comfit with the
earth, shall be considered as "et locations.
Low -Energy Power Circuit: A circuit which is not
nremote-control or signal circuit but which has the
power suppply limited in accordance with the nquire-
.cuts of CUs9 2 remote -control circuits. See Article
725.
DWINITIOVS H
Such dl-iu indude cleans door osenen and eje il. used
in the tlKi of «morerued phonsararhr.
Matter Service: The service conductors and service
equipment supplying a group of buildings under one
management.
Multi -Outlet Assembly: A type of surface raceway,
desih-ned to hold conductors and plug receptacles,
assembled in the field or at he factory.
•Outlet: A point on the wiring system at which cur-
rent is taken to Supply fixtures, lamps. Healers, motors
and current -consuming equipment generally.
'Outgne Lighting: An arrangement of incandescent
lamps or gaseous tubes to outline and call attention to
certain features such as the shape of a building or the
decoration of a window.
PeneBiased: A single panel, or a group of panel
units designed for assembly in the form of a single
panel; including buses and with or without switches
m
and/or autoatic overcurrent protective devices for
the control of I.Rht, heat, or power of small
individual as will as aggregate capacity; designed to
be placed m s cabinet or cutout box placed in or
agaimt a wall or partition and accessible only from
the from. (See Switchboard.)
Portable Appliance: An appliance capable of being
di,ireadily dilymused where established practice or the ton•
ons of Sc make it nese—ey or Convenient for it
to be d<tacl:<d from iH source of current LY means
of flea:ble cord and attachment of g.
.Qualified Perron: One familiar with the canstrua
tion and cptratwn of the apgarama and the haaa:ds
i.:valv<d.
•Raceway: forh ,Iding w-Irn, cables or
tus-bars, which a designed eapresSly for, and used
vsly far, Ih.t Putpase.
Ra . (r ,--arae^' r . °d. • :ais.a m' ' 1 rel dw term
1.-.: ,.. set .F r.e ]�_,i rn:�' .•ase a.7::r. rran.al
e, ia___. ai �-, :de.r - .•., :ar m..aln.r r.�-ewars,
¢•d c•ral u.uP, wanVs.,i:��.p an] a aq fnien.
s•Rasril;ht: So con slrurtrd or pwtntr•1 •'lest
"P.—to a bcatmg con cats nyt r.aa in the entranre
of wat".
•Reath] A<ceaibie: f apaat n( Uein; :sorbed
q.1k;y fyr cVe... —, re revel, cr msq<clien, wnhouL
la ARTICLE 100
requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to
climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to port-
able ladders, chairs, ole.
'Receptacle Outlet: An outlet'quippcll n•ith one ar
more receptacles. not of the sac.• -shell type, or pro-
vided with one or more points of attachment within
one foot or less, intended to receive attachment plug
caps.
Remote -Control Circuit: Any electrical circuit
which controls any pther circuit through a relay or
an equivalent device,
SesUblo Equipment: Equipment enclosed in a case
ar cabinet that is provided with means for scaling or
locking so that live parts cannot be made accessible
without opening the enclosure. The equipment may
or may not be open ble without opening the enclosure.
Service: The conductors and equipment for dclivtr-
fng energy from theelectricity supply system to the
wiring system of the premfscs served.
'Service Cable: Service conductors made up in the
form of cable.
Service Conductors: That portion of the supply
conductors which extends from the street main or
duct or from transformers to the service equipment
of the premises supplied. For overhead conductors
this includes the conductors from the last line pole
to the service equipment
Service Drop: That portion of overhead service
conductors between the pole and the first point of
attachment to the building.
Service -Entrance Conductors: That portion of ser-
vice conductors between the terminals of service
equipment and a point outside the building, clear of
building walls, where joined by tap or Splice to the
service drop or to street mains or other source of
supplY.
Where unke
'here efuigmenl b located aatafde Ilia budding walls,
may be ns emran« eanduasn, or 'hey may 1,sm•
u«ly suuide Its Lul« dina.
'Service Equipment: The necessary equipment, usu-
ally consisting of circuit -breaker or switch and fuses.
and their accessories. Located near point of entrance
of supply conductors to it building and intended to
DEPLYTPIONS I1
constitute the main control and means of cutoff for
the supply to that building.
Service Raceway: The rigid metal conduit, electrical
metallic tubing, or other raceway, that encloses ser•
vita•entrance conductors.
Setting: (Of eircuh-breaker). The value of the cur-
rent at which it is set to trip,
Show -Window: A show•-windoly is any window
used or designed to be used for dlaplaying of Roods
or advertising material, whether it fc fully or party
enclosed or entirely open'.tthe rear, and wbeWer or
not it has a platform .,atJ higher than the street
floor level,
Special Permission: The written consent of the
authorities enforcing this lade.
Switch.:
'Oeneral-Use Switch: A switch intended for use
as a switch in general distribution and branch
circuits. It is rated in amperes and is capable of in-
terrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.
'Isolating Switch: A switch intended fur isolating
an electric ciqu,, 11-inthe source c•f puuer. It has
no interrupting sling andis intended to be oper-
ated only after Ill. circuit has been opened by some
other means.
Motor -Circuit Switch: A switch, rated in horse•
power, capable of interrupting the m—ratim oper-
ating overlord cement of a meter of the same horse-
power as the switch at the rated v 1tage.
Signal Circuit: Any cicetrieal circuit which supplies
energy to a device which gives a « ;rlminhi' signal,
Such eircu:ta Ivie nruila
ethos r>air._a. -trot teat., s::1 the Isle.
Switchboard: A lactic single panel, fume, me ascan-
bly of panda. un wlyds six mounted, on the tare or
back or budl, swnch<s, uver<urrent and utter pratec-
Live devices, Looses, and usually instruments. Switch-
boards are geler illy accessible tram the rear Ss wdl
as from the front and arc not intended to be irstalitd
In eabuw_ ts" 1'anelbuud.)
'Vaporu thu So enclosed that vapor will not eater
the eodosure•
327
I
f
if ARTICLE 110
'Ventilated: Provided with a means to permit civ.
culation of the air sufficiently to remove an excess of
heat, fumes or vapors.
.Voltage (of a circuit): The greatest effective dif-
ference of Potential between any two conductors of
the circuit concerned.
On "'I"'gnema ouch a JPhme Imlre, .Inrl< Phaaa Jndrs
eat 7"vire dirnt currcny there may Ge euiaua circmu of nrl:
am roln,es.
Voltage to Ground: In grounded circuits, the volt-
age between the given conductor and that point or
conductor of the circuit which is grounded; in on.
grounded circuits, the greatest voltage between ilio
given conductor and any other conductor of the cir-
cuit.
Watertight: So constructed that moisture will not
enter the enclosing case.
'Weatherproof• So con:trucled or protecInd that
,.Posure to the weather will not interfere with its suc-
cessful operation.
ARTICLE 110—GENERAL
1101. Approval. The conductors and equipment re.
quired or permitted by this code shall be acceptable
only it approved. See definition of "Approved" in
Article 100.
1102. Wiring Methods. Only wiring methods res
ogniztd as suitable are included in this code. Special
types of wiring may be used only where recognized
as suitable under this and other article, of this code
The recognized methods of wiring may be installed in
any type of building or occupancy except as other-
wise provided in this coda
1103. Mandatory and Advisory Rules. Mandatory
rules of this code are characterized by the use of the
word "shall:' Advisory rules arc characterized by
the use of tic word "should," or are slated as recon-
mendations of that which is advised but not required
1104. Special Chapters Amendatory of General
Roles, The provisions of Chaplcrs 5, 6 and 7 of
this code are supplementary to„or amendatory of, the
general provisions of Chapters I to 4, inclusive, and
GENERAL V
the latter apply under such circumstances except as
so amended for particular conditions.
1105. Mechanical Execution of Work Electrical
equipment shall be installed in . .,at and workman-
like manner and all unnecessary and complicated wit.
mg avoided where practicable. Conductors,raceways,
and equipment shall be carefully secured in place and
attached to fitting..
1106. Mounting of Equipment Electrical equip-
nent shall be firmly secured to the surface on which
it is mounted. \Voaden plugs driven into holes in
masaory, concrete, plaster or similar materials shall
notbe depended on for security.
1107. Valtagea Throughout this code the voltage
considered shall be that at which the circuit operates,
whether the current is supplied by a battery, gener-
ator, transformer, or rectifier.
110& Conductor Ganges. Conductor sues are given
in American Wire Gauge (AWG).
1109. Conductors: Conductor3 normally used to
tarry current shall be of copper unless otherwise pro-
vided in this .d,. Where conductor sizes are given
I. thin code, they shall apply to copper conductora.
!.old
f other materials are used. the sue shall be changed
accordinglySte s<ctito 3107.
1110. D” on( Agencler. Unless approved for
the purpose, ra conductors or equipment ahall be
located rn a damp or wet lacati.n; where exposed to
goer, lumea, .para, Squids, ar other agenthaving
e deteri,,ating effect on the <onducton or equipment;tsar where exposed to .eeeaive temperatures.
1111. Light and Power from Rahway Conductors,
Circuas lar lighting and Power shall not be connected
to any syattm containing srollty will. with is ground
refer.,' u pt in <leclr'e railway ears, tar house.,
pewit houste..r P ... eng1 r and lreiyhl .ta1i00s aper -
,ted in c.nnecti.n -,I e.ect", railways
1112. Working Spa. About Electrical Equipment.
SuuL:< working apace stall be provided and main-
tatr.W a!aouf vii e:ear+tel equiymcrt
a Hwueoral Dimsndoulk Esce•t as elsewhere
its,
.r etmited i. Ih,
s p a coils. Ile Af 1". tai t.,
me..was 07 the woek:ny apace m front
.f live parte,
ARTICLE 110
operating at not more than 600 volts• which must be
handled while alive, shall not be less than:
1. For parts of more than 150 volts to ground on
one side of the working space and no bare live or
grounded parts on the otter side of the working space,
yi feet.
2. For parts of more than 150 volts to ground on
one side of the working space and bare live or ground-
ed parts on the other aide of the working space, 4 feeL
3. For parts of 150 volts or less to ground on one
side of the working space and no bare live or ground-
ed parts on the other side of the working space, 1%
feet.'
4. For parts IT 150 volts or less to ground on one
aide of the working space and bare live or grounded
Partson the other side of the working space, 2% (CCL
Fm' Malar, rt1u.<4 See Article 710.
b. Clear Spaces, Working spaces adjacent to ex -
Dosed live parts shall not be used as passageways.
e Elevation of Equipment The elevation of the
equipment at (cast 8 feet above ordinarily accessible
working platforms usually affords protection at least
equivalent to that provided by the horizontal clear-
ances of paragraph a and may be used in lieu thereat.
1113. Guarding of Live Parts. Except as elsewhere
required or Permitted by this code, exposed live parts
of electrical equipment operating at 50 volts or more
shall be guarded against accidental contact by enclo-
sure or by locating the equipment as follow,:
a In a room or enclosure which is accessible only
to qualified persons;
IT. On a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform, so
elevated and arranged as to exclude unqualified per,
sons;
I% Elevated 8 feet or more above the floor;
d. So that it will be protected by a guard nil if
the equipment operates at 600 volts or less
For melon rax aemio. sell
1114. Enclosure of Arcing Putt Parts of elechi-
cal equipment which in ordinary operation produce
arca, sparks, flames or molten metal• shall be enclosed
unless separated and isolated freta all combustible
GEVERAL it
material. For hazardous I ... tion, ase Article 500.
For motors see sections 4308 and 4310.
1115. Interrupting Capacity. Device, intended to
break current shall have an mterrul,ng capacity sum-
tient for the voltage employed and for the current
which must be interrupted.
1116. General Plan of Investigation. Material,
devices, fittings, apparatus, and appliances designeJ
for use under this code shall be judged chiefly with
reference to the following considerations which also
determine the classiftcatan by types, sizes, voltage;
current capacities, and specific uses:
t Suitability for installation and use in conformity
with the provisions of this code.
IT. Mechanical strength and durability, including,
for parts designed to enclose and protect other equip-
mens, the adequacy of tilt protection thus providesL
c. Electrical im-didioa
d. Healing effects under normal conditions of use
and also under abndrnul conditions liable to arise in
service.
e. Arcing effect&
1117. Connections to Terrniusl& Connection of
conductors to tcrmmai parts shall unurc a thoroughly
good connection without damagmg the e.nduelarsand
ahall be made by .feat, .f Pressure connectors (in-
eluding set screw lyPe), solder lugs, or spl¢e, to flex -
ibis leads eifhtl sofd'It d. brazed or canted, except
thatNo. 8 or smaller soisd conductors and Na 10 or
smaller stranded conductor. may be connected by
means of clamps orf screws with terminal plates hav
ing upturned lugs• erminals fer mnre than one con•
duct., shall be of a type approved for the purpose.
1118. splices. Conductan shall he ,a spliced or
join,d as t„ be meeiumnlly and ,helr,ra0v sea urs,
wRh_t sold,, and, ..less an of pn•v,d splicing d'.
vie is used, toll thenbe soldered with a Insible
nte1a1 or alloy .r brazed or weldcJ. .\II splits and
joints ..d the Tree ends of condu:ton shall be I—
Bred with an insulation equal t. tlut on the eondut-
1o—
1119. Insulation Resistance. All wiring shall bit so
in.talfed that when c 11Pltled the system will be (-
AM
s
20 ARTICLE. Ila
from short-circuits and grounds, and in order that a
re.sonable factor of satrty ,lay be provided the fnl-
lowing table ofinsulatum r,•islanrcg is suggested as
a guide where the insulation is subjected to test.
1. Fcr ci,eoil, of No. la or N.. 17 sire, I,W0.009 ahmr.
Fcr 'rcuh. of Na. In cr lar<er cn•l aciV aft co Jucion rc
upon
feed WrhTa11c.1blar d Cb.,, enn. a, o
10. 0l thio «d< as Iollvwl:�
21 to 10 amperta, in<luai<e._.�-._ ^SO.OW ohms
L to Ito anaK«a, indmire_._.-
10P1I t[ov ro ammperra, ir<c!uv.,iv+ee--_ IW"M oohmms,
25.(yO ohm+
MI to iWanme—. inel.4"..�_ N.W. ohms
Over '00.=p -______ 3.000 ohm.
2. The obove value, eh,li Ir dewrmined with all 161—A..pan<II-cal , fuaehold—, .—ho. and ev<rcurrent d-
J;,
in
plm
J. U .Pholde,., r«<rado, futn n ure., o, grli.aoleo
wn«wJ,hIh< ms i um «ratio« p,rmdled ler branch d—O.
rvapbpPbn:a1. orae shall be ouehdi the salon .mal:eJ in Para-
p
a. 3%111. climatic—liliom are .,,h that the wiring or equip
mint is""" w eat«.ive humidlq, it way be n«.scary w
mwldr the fareavine Vrovi.iovs
1120. Marking. The maker's name, trademark, or
other identification symbol shall be placed on all Cleo
tricot equipment. Other markings shall be provided
giving voltage, current, wattage, or other ratings as
arc prescribed elsewhere in this code.
POLARITY IDENTIFICATION
CHAPTER 2. WIRING DESIGN AND
PROTECTION
ARTICLE 200—POLARITY IDENTIFICATION
OF SYSTEMS AND CIRCUITS
2001. General. All interior wiring systems, except
as provided in ...tions 2007, 2512, 2514, 2515, 2516,
2517 and 5083 shall have a grounded conductor which
Is continuously identified throughout the system,
pt as permitted by paragraph b of section 2005.
2002. Connection to Grounded System. No interior
wiring shall he electrically connected to a supply sys-
tem unless the latter contains, for any grounded "n-
ductor of Ih< interior Dy,,,-. as corresponding con-
ductor which is grounded.
2003. Circuits Derived from Auto -Transformers.
Branch circuits as described in article 210 shall not
be supplied through auto-t-nsformers (transformers
in which a part of the winding is common to both
primary and seconderY circuus) unless the 'system
supplied has an identified grounded conductor which
n
I. solidly conected to a similar identified grounded
conductor of the system supplying the suto-trans-
former.
2001, Conneet ane to Screw -Shell.. An identified
conductor, if run to a lampholder, shall be connected
to Ih< "rew'-ahell.
2005. Mean. of Identification of Conducto_ Iden-
lificatioo for ... duct.,..1.11 be secured as follows:
a. Insulated eonductara of Nn. 6 or smaller, except
eanductars 'ef the wea[herpr.cf type, shall have an
outer nfer.ti6catis,n as -palfud in pan graph d of see-
ds- 93101.
4 Insulted conductor. larger than No. 6. and
wealherpr✓af c,.n•lurmrli of all aur, if u,ed ul.j. .,
shall have an cuter'* , filaticn as .peti0ed m para
graph d of —1, -1 291111E er aL.11 be hten66,4 by illi•
tapctrve insrking at lerm:nai. during process of imtal-
luica
a Flexible cords shall be identified as provided in
art:vo 4401:2.
72 .ARTICLE We
d. Terminals of devices shall be identified as pro
vided in section 2008.
2006. Identified Conductor in Identified Circuits
Only. Conductors having ,vhitc or natural Fray cov-
ering shall not be used other than as conductors for,
which identification is rcgmred by section 2U01, ex-
cept under the following cond,ions, and then only if
they are, fu other respects, suitable for use as un.
grounded conductors in the circuit,
a. Identified conductors, rendered permanently on.
identified by painting or other effective means at each
outlet where the conductors are visible and accessible,
may be used as unidentified conductors.
The fartaainR permits the uw of two -vire <aLle baring ova
hick and one white Co.due-or on Awite 611« tapped from th+
outside leg. of v J-wire .ynem err anY Iwo cvndumara ata of.
« quem if the Wini ed condveI" err be 1w-0. <abl. I,
«nd'led Permm<nt1Y -1,11.1171d al 1«mival..
It. Cable containing an identified conduator may be
used for single -pole, three-way or four-way switch
loops if the connections are so made that the unidenti.
fied conductor is the return conductor from the switch
to the outlet.
Thio ¢<eyliop mates it uvv«<«ary to paint the l iinit
of We idmufed «vdunar a! -be awa<b oude4
u \ flexible cord, for connecting a portable appli-
ance, having one conduct.r i,entilieI ere «qub.d by
section 941102 may be used even though there is no
grounded conductor in the circuit supplying the out-
let to which it is connected.
2007. Unidentified Circuits. Two -wire branch ch,
quits and mulli-wire A. C. circuits May be tapped from
the ungrounded conductors of circuits having identi-
fied grounded neutrals. Switching devices in such cir-
cuits shall have a pole in each ungrounded conductor,
except as provided for motor controllers in section
4384. Polyphase circuits need not have one conductor
grounded and identified, except as required by section
2514, but ff one conductor is grounded it shall be
Identified. Other unidentified ungrounded systems or
circuits may be used only by special permission.
2008. Identification of Terminale. All devices pro-
sidedlvith ternlinals for tap allachment of conductors
and intend
c for conneetiod to more than one side of
the circuit shall have, unless specifically excepted, a
POLARITY IDENTIFICATION
pair ofconne,ting terminals properly marked for
Id,ntifscati... unless the electrical connection of a
terminal intended to be connected to the grounded
conductor is clearly evident.
a. Ponell wit. and Devices. The terminals of
fighting paneiboards and of devices having a normal
current rating of aver 30 amperes need not be marked
I., identification, except as required in paragraphs e .
and f of this section for polarsaed recepl., c, for at-
tachment plugs and polarized attachment -plug caps.
bis
. Utilisation AppCel The terminals of utiliza-
tion appliances need not be marked to indicate the
proper connection to the grounded conductor. It the
terminals of uliliaion appliances, of which single -
pole switches form an integral Part, are marked.lo'
identification, the terminal connected to the avaitch
shall be the unidentified terminal
e. Portable AppQ+ocea The terminals of portable
appliancca aced oat be marked for identification.
d. Single•pol. D.,ke.. Devices, to the terminals
of which only one side of the line is connected, peed
not have terminal. marked for identification.
a. Two-wbs RecePtaclas and Cepa. Two -wire it-
uchment•plug receptacles without sacw +hells. and
Two -wire attachment Plug caps, -mitt. of the Polar{t
type, need not have their termillala marked for ideati.
fication. Two -wire po.armed receptacles for altach-
meet plug. and, polanaed utachenent-plug ups shall
have the terminal intended int cennectian to the
grounded conductor tltarktd for identile.tioa.
L Thres-wlre Receptseln and Caper. Three- ire
attachment -plug receptatlea and threawire attach-
ment -plug taps,. one t<rmina] of which may be coed
for the connection of a graundiag conductor, .h+II
have such terminal identified in a manner differing
from that .Pecified in section 20039. The other terral-
-I, cared sol be marked for identification.
g S vw-shsQj� In the case of devices with ser—
.hell,. the identified terminal shall be the -,C oo-
dated w lte screw -shell. This does not aPPto
see., hrl1. which serve as i0xholdcra
h, 8crew•.hell Device. with Leada. In the ore of
K,w ,h<II device. with attached !tads, rhe conductor
329
0
0
to
r -
A
24 ARTICLE 210
attached to the strew -shell shall have white or natural•
gray finish. The outer finish of the other conductor
Aa
be of a solid solar that will not be confused with
the white or natural -gray finish ts•hidt is to indicate
the grounded conductor,
2009. Means of Identification of Terminals. The
marking of terminals shall be done by means of a
metallic plated coating substantially white in color,
such .s nickel or zinc, or tlhe terminals may be of
material substanti311y white in color. The other I-
Oninals sltall be of a readily distinguishable different
Color -
ARTICLE 210. BRANCH CIRCUITS.
2101. Scope. The provisions of this article shall
Apply to branch cirtuits supplying ligihtiug or ap
anrc loads or combination, of such loads. If motor,,
or m*Io,,perated appliances, are connected to any
circuit supplying lighting or other appliance loads•
the provisions of both this article and Article 430
all apply. Amide 4J0 shall apply if branch circuit
supplies only motor loads.
2102. Other Article Provisions. The provisions
applyiug to branch circuits referred to in the follow.
mgtable
are exception, to the provisions of this
article or are supplementary thereto, and shall aply
to branch circuits supplying the loads referred to
therein:
Section
Busways . ..... .......................... 3647
Cranes and Hoists .......................... 6142
Elevators .................. ......... 6251
Infra -red Industrial Hwting Equipment ...... 4237
instruments .................................93843
Moto..................................Article 430
Organs ...................................... 6506
Remote -Control, Low -Energy Powecand
Signal Circuits . ...Article 725
Sign. and Outiinc Lighting ................... 6006
Sound Retarding and Reproduction .. „ 6406
Systems over 6DO Volts ................7141 to 7144
Systems under 50 Volta ... ' 7204
Theatres and Similar Occupancies ..5241, 5286, 5292
Weldon ...............................Article 610
BRANCH CIRCUITS
J1032103. Classification` Branch circuits recognized by
.
article shall be classified in accordance with rho
maximum Permitted rating or setting of the ov<rour.
rent device and the classifications for other titan in.
dividiial branch circuits, shall be 15, 20, 30 and 50
amperes. When conductors of larger size are used
to provide for voltage drop, the rating or sctthul of
rhe sP"ified av<rcurrent device shall determine Abe
circuit claaffi<ation.
General Provisions
2111. Mulli-Wlra Hunch Circuits, Branch circuits
recognized by this article may be installed as mulli-
wue circuits. A multi -wire branch circuit as referred
to herein is a circuit tonsisling of two or more un•
grounded conductors having a potential difference
bet,v<en them, and an identified grounded conductor
baying equal potential dig<rence between it and each
ungrounded conductor of the circuit and which 5.
conn«ted to the neutral conductor of the system.
2112 Color Code, If insfailed in raceways, as
open work, or aA mncwsled knob and lube work, the
conductors of multi -wire branch circuits and'2-wire
branch circuits connected to the same system shall
...form to the folloxing color code. Three -wire cir-
cuiti—one black, one white, one red: 4 -wire circuits—
one black, one white, one red, one blue; $•wire Cir-
cuit. ---one black, one white, one red, one blue, one
yellow. 1f more than one multi— r. branch circuit I.
domed through 1' single ruenay the ungrounded con.
durtOt es the -11'eci ied. llcnit may be of colon other
stun those spat[ b All arcmt 1. h,l".s of the
amt m!.r shall d e,i1froed In the oma ata
grounded Ie<Jer <6nducter tgrougheut the installation.
2113. Voltage. Dranch c!,rlai , supplying lamp•
he:Ctrs, fiA'o < 1 or res<;aacks of the standard IS -
a r.:pere or less non; sha;l nrq steed 150 volt, to
ground, ucrpt (tl m in.iustr�al esul.iishmems the
velssge m.y exceed 150 valL to ground but shall rot
exceed Jldl suit. to Rrwrd for Lro rch cieuib sul�ply-
inK lighn.g fixture. only Chat are equipped tither
with
I mogd.burewI"phulden or w.h
lav:phc!du. cCiti« tYGe. r< appruvcd for the aP?lira-
trn, mcu.:rd lot less than (f leer from the
whsh d. rot have awJch <crtr.l as an integral pan
If tis, fixture; (2) io railway prep<rif<, as described
2s ARTICLE 210
in section 1111, (3) for intra -red industri
al heating
appliances as described in section 42,17, dsrdling
o«npanaes, dm voltage between conductors supply-
ing lamphulders of the acresv-shell type, receptacles,
or .pPlia...., shall not casted 150 voI[s, except that
the voltage between conductors supD15•'nR only Per-
manently connected appliance, or po "1" appliance.
of more than 1,650 watts may exceed 150 volts.
2114. Heavy -Duty Lampholden. Heavy-duty lamp-
holders as referred to in this article shall include'
EJison-base lampholders of the mogul type, and oilier
lampholdfng dcs•ices required !or lamps exceeding
the maximum Wring of the nleJiunt-base lamp as
provided in section 94103.
2115. Branch Cirluits Required. Branch cittuit3
shall be installed as follows:
A
, Lighting and Appliance Circuit.. For lighting,
and for appifances not specifically provided for to
paragraph h, branch circuits shall be pr
tion
computed for a
u
computed load not [.a than that determined by sea
The number of circuits shall be not less than that
determined from the total computed load and the
capacity of circuits to be used, but in ever case the
number 31131! be sufficient for the actual load to be
served.
1Vhere Che IoaJ is computed on a "walls per square
foot" basi,, the total l..d, in so lar as pr3cti%I3 shall
be evenly proportioned among the branch circuits ac-
cording le their .,.city,
It Iirhlirt< u.11a to he imlallyd "'Tei_ether thav 700 per
emh poxrr (actor, ,re rye •rani b of ,retain 2I1$ for mu,mvm
ampere Imd hxr.h.d .
meMrAatl�atacn11—i
elf amtrerrl hranrh �rFcuit atievio�ull dlf
Ar<rr<, h
300 quare het (at•pr........ 2 emu Dcr a.uare Irot) AI seer
ra
Sc. E,ample Fa 1, Cbapler 10.
I. Receptacle Circuits (Dwelling Occupant(,.),
For the small appliance load in kitchen, laundry,
pantry, dining room and breakfast roam of dwelling
occupancies, one or more branch circuits shall be D+o•
vided for all receptacle outlets (other than outlets for
clocks) in these rooms and such circuits shall have
no other outlets. Tire conductora of such circuits shall
be not smaller tMn no. IL '
Sm accdsv 212404.
ARANCII CIRCUITS 27
u Other Cfrcedt.. For specific load, not otherwise
pprovided for in paragraph, A or b, branch circuits shall
be as required by oil'<r sections of the code.
2116. Calculation of Load. The he
circuit load
for lighting, and appliances shall be computed in As.
cordance with the Provi'i. of this section. Where
in normal operation the maximum load of a branch
circuit will continue for long periods of time, such as
store lighting and similar lo.ds, the minimum unit
loads specified in this section shall be increased by
25 per cent in order that the wiring system may have
sulfi<icnl branch circuit and (ceder capacity to insure
safe operation.
R. 0e..rid L18hdn8• For general illumination:
I. In Llued O..0 .nciea In the occupancies
Ifaled in the Cable In section 2203, a load of not lea
than the una load of Culumn A shall be included for
eachsqu.,c foot of fl—r arca.
In dcte+mininl the I.ad on the "watts per square
foot" basis, the I our arca shall be computed from the
outside dunenuans of the building, apartment or area
involved, and the number of goo.; not including open
porch., gauges in con nation with dwelling occu-
pancies, nor unfinished spaces in basements or attics
of dtacllinRa•
All receptacle outlets of IS•amyere or itis rating in
aingle-f.mfV and multi -family dwellings and in gue,t
rooms of patels (except those connected to the re•
e<Ptacl< <iamis Apes ed in paragraph b of section
2" 2115) may be'0"'er<d as outlets for general ilium•
'0"' and no additional load need be included for
such outlets. The provisions of paragraph b of this
scarlet^ ., le11 r pOcaupande..eln eotherco< uuptan< a, A
load of not Ira than Che unit IoaJ spaifieJ in para•
graph L of this section shall be included for each
outlet.
b OChee Load.. For lighting other than general
fllumWlwn and for appliances other than motors, a
load .I riot less than the unit load specified below
.hall be included for Cath -det.
•Uudeu supplying Apcafic appliance, and
usher tosyls .. ..:\mp• rating of appl-mal
Uutics s,rWng heavy.dmy lamp-
"Adcra 5 ampere,
.Uthcr nutlet. ISS ..Peru
330
0
i 331
ARTICLE.110
•For mown, am S<uions 43M and 4316.
}Thin nroviaian not arPlipble m rmePmde oudets connected
to ,I:c ,;pinna .eanKd ppxxraPb b of s<nio,h 2113 or to
mq.tade oudets PmeidN fur the nnmtivn o[ toed Liebling
unite b SxOitau acn'icivR and rmlaunaevL
c. Exceptions. The minimum load for outlets spe-
eifhud in paragraph b $hall be ntodlfued as follows:
I. Ranges. For household electric ranges, the
branch circuit load may be computed in accordance
with Table 29, Chapter 10,
2.Show-Window Lighting. For show -window
Ifghting a load of not less titan 200 watts for each
along its base, may be allowed nvlieu of ti erizontallspecified
load per outlet.
3. Multi -Outlet Assemblies. Where fixed multi.
outlet assemblies are cutployed, each five feet or frac.
tion thereof of each separate and continuous Icnglh
shall be eonsi,lcrcd as one outlet of not less than 1%
ampere capacity; except in locations where a number
of appliances are likely to be used simultaneously,
when each on4 foot or traction thereof shall be con.
sidered as an outlet of not less than 114 amperes.
4. Telephone Exchanges. Shall be waived for
manual switchboards and Switching frames in tele-
phone exchanges.
d. Existing Installations. Additions to existing in.
stallations shall conform to the following:
1. Dwelling Occupancies. New 616its or exten.
sions to existing circuits may be determined in ac.
co -lance with paragraph, a or b of this section; except
that portions of existing structures not previously
either
Of ,ed. or additions to the which exceeds SOO square hfeetgin structure,
shall be
determined in accordance with paragraph a of this
Section.
2. Other Than Dwelling Occupancles. When add.
ing new circuits or extension, to existing circuits in
other than dxvdling occupancie,, the provisions of
Paragraphs a or b of this section shall apply.
Specific Requirements
2121. Conductors. Circuit conductors shall con-
form to the following:
BRANCH CIRCUITS
"Carrying Capacity. Shall have a carrying cap.
.City ofnot less than the rating of the branch circuit
and not less than the maximum load to be served
b. Minimum Size. Shall be not smaller, than No. 8
for ranges of 8y kw or more rating, nor smaller than
No. 14 for other loads.
S. rararapb b of Sada. 216.
c. Exceptions.
1. Range Loads. See Note 4 of Table 29, Chapter
10. Where the maximum demand of a range of 8;f
kw or more rating 13 computed according to Column
A of Table 29, Chapter 10, the neutral <onductor of a
three -wire bunch circuit supplying a household eIta
trio range may be smaller than the u.4munded con.
doctors but shall have a carrying capacity at least 70
per cent of the currcm-carrying capacity of the on.
QQrounded conductors and shall not be smaller than
No. 10.
Calle ay.mhllin eirh the n<utnl eondvrar amilkr ,ban W
ar<raacdcd <ceduarr alias 4 b marled,
2. Taps. Taps to individual limphetders or fix-
tures, taps not over 18 inches long to individual out.
lets, or taps to infra -red lamp industrial heating appli.
ances, may be of Tess spacity than the branch circuit
nting; but not fns than the load to be served and
not smaller than 5a 12 for SO-impee circuits and
No. 14 for other circuits.
3. Pasture Wires and Cords. Fixture wires and
cords nis Le of smaller aim, bol not less than the
sisRspeafi,d in Paragnpi, d of section 2403.
Tat ( J Cbastu 10. 1<r xbo nrylna eaeauV of Gros
sriru ad arcs
4. Outlet Devices. Outlet devices may have less
arty.rX <aparty than th, Lnrd, circuit rating but
notlea thin tin types and rffi.ga specified in pars.
graphs a and b of s«ion 2123.
2122. Ovetterrent Protection. The nling or, sea
ring of overcurr<nt d ices shall ecn
Iowmit; form to the !04
s.
Rating. Shall be not in <aceu of the carrying
capacity of the urcmt eooduetor.
Is. Simile Applianes. S1-11 net ezeeed 150er I'm
Of the nh.rg of rhe appl.anee, ,f the c. C." supplies
only a sj:c spF:'encs of or more rating.
30 ARTICLE 210
C. Exeepti003.
I. Taps and Futuro Wires, Taps, fixture wires
and cords as permitted in paragraph a of section 2121
may be considered as protected by the circuit over.
current device.
2123. Outlet Devices. Outlet devices shall con.
form to the following:
s. Lampholders. Lampludders shall have a rating
of not less it,.. the load to be served; and when cora
nerved to circuits having is rating of 20 amperes and
over shall be of lire heavy-duty type.
b, Rtteptaclea. Receptacles 311311 have a rating of
not less than the load to be served; and when eon.
nected to circuits having two or more outlets shall
conform to the following:
IS -amp, circuits........ Not over 15 -amp, rating
20 -amp, circuits .......... ...20 -am ratio
30 -amp. circuits ...........20 or 30-p. rating
SO -amp, circuits ................50;amp. rating
•See wregrapis e3 v[ Ibis aecdoa.
Recepudea connected to circuits of marc than 150
volts between ...ducjors shall be of such design that
attachment plug c90 used on circuits of other vola
a9e3 on the same preini3e3 cannot be inserted in them.
Q Exceptions:
1. Range Loads. See Note 4 of Table 29, Chap-
ter 10.
2. Lampholders- Medium -base lampholders of the
Porcelain unswitched type and Lampholders for fluor.
escent lamps may be connected to 20 -ampere branch
circufta if only faxed lighting units are supplied.
Fiats Ggbhinx uvfts are phare that are immd.,h ,......,. ,.
3. Receptacles. Receptacles rated at 15 amperes
may be connected to the 20 -ampere circuits referred
to In paragraph c-2 for the connection of fixed light-
ingorals; to 20 -ampere circuits conforming to the
Provisions of paragraph b of section 2115; and to 20.
ampere circuits supplying only small appliances and
lisht ng units with heavy-duty lampholden.
2124. Receptacle Outlets Required Receptacle out.
It
shall be installed as fellows:
BRANCH CIRCUITS
a.. General. Wherc portahin cords are used, except
where the atiarhmenl of cords by other mean. is spa
eifi,ally per mnmd.
A mrd .........
ne.maveni
t, euiu, ad
mrd -dull
u mnnd<rd a accphx.e ounr�
Is. Dwelling Type Occupancfea. In every kitchen,
dining ro ln, Lnakia,t roam, living panni parlor,
library, Icn, sun rnonh, recreation room amt bedroom,
oneecgaxle outlet shall he prwi4cd taevery very 20
linear
c' or or maPm frar10n thvrcoi of the Saul
(grans) dwau,, around the roan, a; .,a cd hori.
zunlally along the wall ar the fl.:nr line. The recep.
ode .utters shalh in so lar as Practicable, be spaced
equal dh.unac< al'art. At lean one receptacle outlet
shall Lc instilled L -r t cnnn,ction of laundry appli-
ances. This raepuck shill be of a 3-Pu1e type de-
signed for grounding. Receptacle mllcli in floor shall
not he w mted as part of tl,c squired number of re.
eept,ide outlets ullew lecand close to the wall.
Sea Ra 0n 1. Clueur to
2125. Maximum Load. Tire ma.imum load shall
conform la tire following:
a Molar -Operated Appliances, The total load
shall not exceed Sq per cent of the branch circuit rat.
lost if ."aux-opermcd appliancca are supplied. If
circuit sal,phes Oily inoror-operaicd appliance loads.
Article 430 is to apply.
Is. Other Loafs. The lout load shall not exceed
the branch circwtng. In computing the load oI
nd
lighting units w'b;ch ,!,ploy ballash i. transformeri or
mn
aut_mfor, the load shall be based on rim total
of the .."pert rating of suds units and or on the
wattage of tire lampa.
e. Exuptiona:
1, Range Loads. See Note 4 of Table 29. Chap•
ter 10.
2126. Permissible Loada, Individual branch cir.
coils may suPldY any h,.,di. Branch circuits having
two or mule oudets may supply only loads as fo;laws:
s. Is. and 20 -Ampere Branch Circuits. Lighting
unRa and/or appl+ances. The rating of any one port.
able appliance shall out exceed W per teat oI the
V
32 ARTICLE 210
branch circuit rating. The total rating of fixal appli-
ances shall not exceed 511 per «rat of the branch
cuit rat,uK if Lg.nul. unjta or portable appliances are
also supplied.
b, 30 -Ampere Branch Clrcuite. Fixed lighting
units in other thou dwelling a<cupanaes: or aPPli-
ancee in any occupancy. The rating ui any one Port-
able appliance shall not exceed 24 amperes.
e 60 -Ampere Branch Circuits. Fixed lighting
units in other tLan dwelling oceupancies: or fixed
Cooking appwa
liances: or fixed rant;, and ter heater;
or fnfra-red lamp industrial hearing appliances.
The rano fn<d" m ureJ in rhir action recatnfay cord eoa.
necdona wberq vthaww pemined.
2121. Table of Requfremente. Tlm acquirements
for Circuits Laving Fsva or more outlets (other than
the receptacle circuits of paragraph b of stttion 2115)
as specifically provided for above arc summarized in
the following table:
Branch Circuit Requirements
(Typo R RIF, RIV. RU, T, and TW coml.'ta.a
In rmaway or cw,.)
CIRCUIT MTI\G IS dmR 24 .\rap, 30 Amp. 30 A.,
COSDCCTORS:
(Mit. Suet
Cimuie 1Vha 11 12 ]0 6
a 14 14 14 12
y""re Ntra
aria Cord.•
OVF.RCURRENT
1'ROTF.CFIVN IS Amp. 20 Amp. 30 Amp, 30 Amp.
OUTLET DEVICES-
1-imphotd... Anr lleavr Ileac Ilse
1'crmi.N Typo UUVt 11uVy rami
Re<eptadd May
Raena 13 Amp. 20 AMM 201,30 SO Amp,
Amp.
MAXIMUM
LO.W .
13 Amp- R 20 Amp. 30 Am30 Amp,
F WAD SIDLE Src, 2126 Sea: 126 Sae `126 See, 2126
• p
i5ae SrKc��on 313J<],
i5ae Salian 213JaJ.
FEEDERS 13
ARTICLE 220—FEEDERS
2201. Feeder Sue. Fierier conductors shall be oat
smaller than spaified in Tahles 1 and 2 0( chapter 10 for the Computed feeder load as determined by pter
Pion 2203. A 2 -wire feeder supplying two or more
see -
2 -wire branch circuits, or a ,-hire feeder supplying
more than two 2 -wire branch circuits, or two or .tore
,-winm
re b
l0.ranch Circuits, shall be not smaller than No.
If a feeder Carries the total current supplied by
the service•entrance conductors, such feeder, for ser -
,fees of No. .n
smaller, shall be of the same size
as the service -canna conductors,
Tl a any time it . found that feeder conductors
will be, or arc, ovvloaded, the (ceder capacity shall
be fncreaaed to comply +%ith the provisions of Table,
and 2 of 0131fcr 10 for the actual load served.
Sae Ems—. Ny, 1 eo S It Chapter 10.
2202. Voltage Drop- The size of the feeda con-
ductars ahoutd be such that voltaKe drop up to the
firul dirtrihutfon point (or the load as computed by
section 1- s. will not Le more than J per cent for
paver loads, and not Mort Ihan 1 per cent for light-
ing loads or combined hghting and Power load.
2207. Calctdatfan Of Load. The computed load of
a feeder shall be
not less Ihan the sum o[ all branch
<irtuit Iwds auDPfi<d LY the feller, as determined by
section 2116, subject to It,, f.,,Iowing provision:
s. Oenenl Llghting. The demand (actors specified
In this paragraph may f:< pto c
branch __n I.ad (or ....qalplied li", 11 the omputed bark
Sac paraerapb a
Unit Loads and Peed<r Demand Pactors
Th coir < oral IAe d. a....a f.
pw Grp.,G aaifarcr uu. irAr vats::.u�..nf �avumplaml.r
In a:e. c1 alis trend bard L; 6:ay<r
vd ,o ,sect :.oda eras ro v:era__�'y�•Ir are cl R. J 1ed iY�fa�
a'a:oxo, mrh ,mi.'Lf.cn x it d as aU rkr I.ad
I.i.lr N 4 imposes seri Ilia aa;.a<u ,�,
ar.r.r._a r sato In ic.va ufa
a. w'ten .•.rife r.+'LIK I:IAr'st r3aey va ro W Enna:l•d,
d w.•r:4ruu raw k•a:3 b uaW .,
e , aria rr G iacrea..1. • r4 emJ.ar:r eaprr.tl
34 ARTICLE 220
COL A COL 0
Tyre of Unit Load Load to .hkh
O«upa my I.- So. F6 Rema., Ihan- Demand
t wSurI Annliy (33'-110 F.I.,
•See Caraaraph a of thio rection.
-Forruhl<Nen ro arm in hmpiralr ova 6oteh wM1erc eosin
b ilhrina is likely b he u.ed an enc rime; a. iv op<carina comm,dlmnma..IniIs roomy, ere, a deman4 tactor or IW par ant
-Mall .I..lr"L
FEEDERS 31
b.ShawlWindow Lighting. For show-windo+,
lighting, a load o,
not less than 200 +tat1. shall be
included tar each linear foot of show -window moa3-
ured horizontally along its base.
e. Small Appliances, The shall appliance load
sP<cifird in subparagraph c•1 and the mnlputed
branch circuit load for rcnptacld oudeta in cillo, than
dwelling ISecuPancies, for which the allowance is not
more: dun 1% amperes Per owlet, may be included
with the general Lghtmg load and subject to the dt-
mand (actors in paragraph a of this section.
1. Dwtgin� O«upon<i<a In single-family dwell-
ings. in individual alurbncrtts of multifamily dwell•
inns luting provisions for tonkinK by tenants, and in
each ha,l suite ha+•ing a serving pantry; a feeder
load of not Iris Ihan 1,500 watts shill be nlcludr,l for
small appliancef fPnrtahle apt,liances supp,i, from
re<cptulrs el IS amperc or ria ratio,;) m dining
room, kiahen and laundry. If the load is subdivided
through riv. or more ('ceder, lh< rompuled load for
each shall iridal, not kis than 1,500 watts for small
appliances.
d. Electric Rangel The feeder load for household
electric ranges and
olhtr coakmg appliances, fudi-
, vfdually rated mnre than M ka•, may be calculated
in accordance with
Table M. Chapter 10.
In -der m prided fee a ble f,turt 'nnallafien of rrnso a!
bi{a ralinrr. Ir a r u-: rn hf tnar �er< cancer of kr. than
ipaeiMr mr+a,�inum domand,iraly<1. rhe leeaer ra a.ial t< nm kx
29.
Chapter 10. gt-,i6e1 iv (:clam A of Table
Where ? number of ranges are saDPlied by a 3•
phase, 1-4r. (eedcr, the currcn( shall b, computed
on the basis of the demand of twf<e the maximum
number of ranger conna-led between any ewe ph an
oiree.
Sc, gympic No. a, CM1rcaer 10.
s• Fled ADDlfandes (Other elan Rangte). Where
lour a more fiord app .ancvs, in .'J,,lwn ,, an Neari<
range el ranRra. are <our—rd M the same fredfr m
a I lint a or to ihi.family dw'rllmR, a demand (actor n
25 her cent may hr apPhce to the lade app:utac load•
mss fncludmg the electric range.
f, Motors. Fnr motors, a load computed afford•
inn m Ile Pronsion of aciduria 4314 and 4316 shall
be fndwtd,
332
Fi
]a ARTICLE 230
g. Neutral Feeder Load. Thencutml feeder Ica
d
shall be fire maximum unbalance of the load deter-
mined by section ZZ03. The maximum unbalanced
load shall be the maximum connected load between
the neutral and any one ungrounded conductor; ex.
sept that the load thus obtained shall be multiplied by
140 per cent for $•wire, 2.phase systems. For a feeder
supplying household electric ranges. the maximum
unbalanced load shall be considered as 70 per cent qE
the load ori the ungrounded conductors as deter.
mined in accordance with Column A oY Table Zp,
Chapter 10. For 3 -wire d•e or single-bhase a -c
4-n•ire, 3-phase and Swire, 2 -phase systems, a further
demand -factor of 70 per cent may b, applied to that
portion of the unbalanced load in excess of 200
amperes.
See F•-^plet 1. 2. 2 and 4. Chapter 11
2204. Common Neutral Feeder. A common nevi
Ira( feeder may be employed for too or three s<b of
3 -wire feeders, or two acts of 4 -wire or S -wird feeders.
When N metal endmnres, all conductors of feeder
circuits employing a common neutral feeder shall be
contained Within the same enclosure as provided in
section 3018.
220S. Diagram of Feeders. If required by he
authority enforcing this code, . diagram showitng
feeder details shall 6e supplied previous to installation.
This diagram should shore: Area in square feet; Toad
(before applying demand -factors); demand.factors
selected; computed load (after applying demand-fac.
ton); and the size of conductors.
ARTICLE 230• -SERVICES
General Requirement.
2301. one Set of Service Cogductor Only. 1. gem
eral, a building shall be supplied through only one set
of service conductors, except;
a. Where more than out service drop is permitted
by section 2321.
Is. Buildings of multiple occupancy may have two
or more separate sets of service.entrance conductors
which are upped from one aOrrict, deep, or two on
more 'cub -acts of aervlce- m. cc conductors may be
tapped from a single act of main service conductor.
SERVICES
a Io a single occupancy, where a act of service
conductors is alrcad7 imtalled for one class of ore,
nae additional act may be installed for a different elaaa
of use.
2302 Service from One BuBding Through Auothar.
No overhead service, na underground service, and no
service from an isolated plant shall supply one build.
ing through another, unless such buildings are under
single occupancy or management. Conductors in con-
duit or duct placed under at least two inches of con•
vete beneath a building, or buried in two inches of
brick maaoary or in concrete within a wall, ,ball be
eaesideIt outside the building.
2301 1 -cilia of Servlet Condsetor. Service
conductor shall have an ia.ukting covering which
will normally withstand exposure to atmospheric and
other conditlour of cue and whfc6 shall prevent any
dctrimeoul leakage of torrent to adjacent Coaducton,
objects, or the ground,
a. UdnaaLtd Netter.l, to the ase of service
eotsdxtors char hoe a nominal voltage to ground of
not or, than 208 volts, a grounded central service
conductor without an insulating covering may be in.
staled.
•b. Undergrotsnd Except as provided In paragraph
a, underground service <oedneton n to the point of
attachment to service equipment shall he covered with
ruLber, cambric rh<rmaplattie, paper or orher ap-
proved insulating mac<ral. Service conductors in-
.I.Ved underground or in ceocrete slab. or masonry
in direct contact with earth, shall be ked -covered or
of other types specially approved tot tbe purpoaa
Q &rola Drops. Fx<ept as yrovided in paragrapph
service drrp :enduar,rs in multiPI—riductar cables
efu11 be rubberKovered or ehrrmopWtm covered. All
.Pio individual <onducmrr then be .I-t-bbcmtre ll
a weatherprwf (type Wpf.
d. On go-riev of or Etste tiag Bitildlets, Except
as provided in Paragraph a, amide rund__ exuod-
int' long the ertoier of or entnmq Duild{nQa ,hall
be rsabbertor<r,d tar ehem]oDla.tic covered it in ract-
vny; or in .errwe cooks OPtn individual rtmdue.
tors wbich ,mer he builo.g shall be ruLber•co.erad
la ARTICLE 230
or thermoplastic covered, but where on the exterior
of the building only may be weatherproof (type WF).
2304. Size of Service Condutten. Service cotsdac-
lora shall have adequate current -carrying eapacg to
safely conduct the current for the loads supplied wllh-
out a temperature rise dctrimeoul to the in.u..4
covering of the conductors, and shall have adequate
mechanical strength.
a. Service -Entrance Conductor. Serviaentranee
conductors, indudjpg underground services, shall have
a current -carrying capacity su0icient to carry the load
as determined by section 2203, and in accordance with
Tubles 1 and 2 of Chapter 10. They shall not be
.malice than No. 8, except for installations consisting
of a single branch circuit, in which case they shall
be not smaller than the conductors of the branch
circuit and in no case smaller than No. 12. The use.
lral of the service -entrance conductors shall have a
current -carrying cayacity in conformity with ims.
graph g of aectton 2203, and shall be the same size as
the ungrounded conductor when the ungrounded cots.
doctors are No. 8 or smaller.
It h rewmmepdM Clot a minimum of there Nu 6 wadamaa
6e mid far INV tetmlktwm.
b. Service Drops. Conductors io service drops shall
be or
smaller than No. 10 if of ao(t copper, or No.
12 if of medium or hard -drawn copper.
Ceedvrton 1. a hvildlne trmn a pole en wbkh •miser
•:,e swiuh ie Inmlted s,91 be wmid<red u t terrke drop and
smWlyd smwd,zly.
2305. Service -Entrance Conductor without Spute.
Service -entrance conductors shall be without .splice
except as follows:
a. Clamped or bolted connections In a meter endo-
sure are permitted.
b. Taps to main service conductor, ora permitted
as Provided in paragraph b,of section 2301, or to in.
divsdusl sib of se- c equipment as provided in para.
graph a of section 2351.
a A connection Is permitted, If properly erichmed.
where an underground service conductor enters a
building and is to be extended to the service equip•
ment or meter in another form of approved service
raceway, or service cable.
SERVICES ])
d. A connection is permitted where service con-
ductor at
extended from a service drop to an out'
aide meter location and returned m connect to the
service -entrance conductors Of an existing installa-
tion.
230& Conductors in Service Raceoy. Conductor,
other than service conductors, groending conductors,
or control conductor from time switches having over.
current protection, shall not be installed in the service
raceway.
• Underground Services
2311, Meehanleal Protection. Underground service
conductors ,hall be protested against mechanical i..
jury by being installed io duct, conduit' in the form
of a cable approved for the purpose or by other ap-
proved means.
2312 Protattlon On Pelta, It underground at -k.
conductor, arc carried up a pole the mechanical pro-
tect{o. ,hall be imtalled In . point at leaat 8 feet
above the ground. Such mechanical protection may
be provided by the use of approved cable, Pipe, tar
other ,PPI-lemeans.
2311 protection When Emedng Building. When
underground service conductor. enter a building, they
.hall h.ve mechanical protection in the form of rigid
or flexible conduit, electrical metallic tubing, auxiliary
gutter., the metal tape of an approved service cable,
or other approved means. The mechanical protee•
tion shall extend to the enclosure for the .,,vice
equipment vales. the service .witch k Installed on a
.witchboard, in which case a bushing shall be provided
which, except where lea d.
conductors are used,
.hall be of the mmlatiag typb
2314. Scaling JIM of Raeaway. When a strike
-""Y or duct enter, from an underground disid-
bmbn gate-, the end within Hae bdiding shall be
waled with .0{able compound w as to prevent flu
enigma of moisture or gaud Sparc or no." duct.
,hall also be waled.
8arvka-Drop Cocducton
2321. Number of Drop. No building shall b. ,up-
pliad fro. the .cmc transformer, or from th. es..
333
/O
.1 IRTICLE M
secondary distribution system, through more than one
service drop, except a, follows:
a Fire Pumpa. If a separate service is required
for fire Pumps.
b. Emergency Lighting. If a separate service is re*
quired for emergency lighting purposes.
c Capacity Requirements. If capacity requue.
mems make nmltiple services desirable.
d Buildings of Large Area. By special permis-
sion, it more than one service drop is necessary due
to the area over which a single building extends.
e., Multiple -Occupancy Bndldinga. By special per.
mission, in multiple -occupancy buildings where there
i, no available space for service equipment accessible
to all of the occupants.
2322. Clearance of Service Droll Service drops
shall not be readily moeasible and shall conform to
the following:
a, Clearance Over Roof. Conductors shall have
a clearance of not less than 8 ft. from the highest
point of roofs over which they pass, except where the
voltage between conductors does not exceed 300 and
the roof cannot be readily walked upon, the clearance
may be not less than 3 feet.
b, Clearance from Ground. Conductors shall have
a clearance of not less than 10 feet from the ground
or from any platform or Projection from which they
might bt reached.
m Clearance from Buildings. Conductors shall
have a clearance of not I... than 36 inches from win-
dows, doors. porches, fire escapee, or similar, locations.
2323. Supporta Independent of Building. Where
practicable, conductors passing over a building shall
be supported on structures which are independent of
the building. If necessary to attach conductors to
roof they shall be supported on substantial structures.
2324, Point of Attachment to Building. In gen•
eml, the point of attachment of a service drop to a
building shall be net less than 10 feet above ground
and shall be at a height to Permit a minimum clear-
ance for service drop conductors of 10 feet above
sidewalks and 18 feet above driveways, alleys and
public roads. The attachment should not be mon
SERVICES 41
than 30 feet above ground unless a greater height is
necessary for proper clearance, Where the form of
the building will not permit placing the attachment
10 feet ar more above the ground, the attachment
may be less than 10 feet provided all other clearances
are obtained and all conductor, and connections with.
in 8 feet of the ground are properly insulated with
rubber or equivalent i ... latioa
2325. Means of Attachment. bfultiple-conductor
cable& used for service drops shall be attached to
buildings by fittil approved foe the purpose.
Service Conduction on or in Budding.
2331. Wiring Methods, Service conductors extend.
fog along the exterior, or entering building., may be
installed as aepante conductors. m cables approved
for the purpose, or enclosed in rigid conduit, or, for
circuits not exceeding 600 volts, in electrical metallic
tubing or ss busways,
k:e pmmnfalremee bvildm .lcaW ,tt h< rvo wirhl, the hd•
_."'a s.owrniav u rnr"ruter m6rovWed wiN &mowart
2332, 11.1simiw Proeecaoa Individual open con.
duet"'. or cable, other than approved service-<mnn<e
cables, .hall not be inua01d within 8 feet of the
ground or wh.re exposed 10 mechanical injury. Ser-
vme-entrance cab'.., if cable to camact with awning.,
shutters, swinging sign,, installed is exposed place.'
fedriveway., near coal chutes or Gibcj Ise exposed
to mechanical injury, shall be al the protected type
or otbe her approvedyrac..�Ali • e!ecencal metallic tubing
2333. Individual Conductors gapc..d to Waatha.
lal. dmf open wrtd. lars,i expand to weather,
sha;l be supported Gn ma4l.". calk., Lnekel., or
other mean., pla.ed at inl.... nal ._cling 9 feet
sn4 separaund the .ondua0r. q least 6 inches from
.alb other and 2 rl Item the surface wired aver;
m at interWs net exceeding 15 kat flex they maintain
the r,.rd.,,0 at learn 12 mrh" apart pot maJ60 voh&
u i<a., condurt,r. may have a .ep&ration of not leis
than 3 inch" I aupyerb arc Placed at fntervas nal
aaceeding 4% feet and c.ad..,,, are t»t leu than 2
inches Ircm dee facia., w;red mer. W I..he ror2
<uadw.to" (type WPI on axtai<e of buildiagsrihall
sr ARTICLE 210
have a clearance from the ground of not less than 8
feet, and a clearance from windows, doors, porches,
etc., of not less than J feet.
2334. Individual Conductors Not Exposed to
Weather. Individual open eonducton not exposed Io
the wcatlier may be supported on glass or porcelain
knobs Placed at intervals not exceeding 4% feet and
maintaining the conductors at least one inch from the
suifacc wired over and a separation of at least 234
inches between conductors.
2335. Individual Wins Entering.Buildings, Indi-
vidual conductors entering buildings shall pass in-
ward and upward through.abating non-combustible,
non-absorptive insulating tubes, or shall enter through
roof bushings, and shall conform to the Provisions of
Article 324. Drip loops shall be formed an the con•
ductors before entering tubes,
2335. Service Cable.. Service cables of a type not
approved for mounting in contact with the —11 shall
hart insulating supporta at intervals not ea ... din, 15
fact, sad maintaining a distance of at least 2 inches
from the
surface wired over, Service cables mounted
in contact with the building shall be supported at
intervals not exceeding 434 feet.
2337. Strviea Hand. Service raceways shall be
equipped with a rainntight service head. Service cables,
unless continuous front pole to service equipment or
meter, shall be equipped with an approved nintight
service head, or be formed in a gooseneck, taped and
Painted and held securely in place by its connection
to service drop conductors below the gooseneck or by
a fitifng approved for the purpose. Drip loops shall
be loris on individual conductors. To prevent the
entrance of moisture, service -entrance conductors shall
not be connected to the service -drop conductors At a
Point above the Toldof the service head or the ter-
mination of service -entrance cable sheaths. If service
heads are used, conductors of Opposite Polarity shall
be brought out through separately bushed holes.
2338. Enclosing Raceways Made Raimigbt. If rigid
metal raceways are insta11fH1 where -Posed to weather
the raceways shall be mad, raintight and arranged to
drain.
SERVICES 43 a
2339. Terminating Raceway at Service Equipment.
If conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or service cable
is used for service conductors, the inner end shall
enter a terminal box or cabinet, or be made up
directly to an equira!"lI fitting, enclosing s.8 live
metal parts, except that fF the service disconnecting
means is mounted oa a swichbe.rd having exposed
bus-hara on the back, the raceway may be equipped
wish a hushing which shall be of the inaulativg type
unless lead -covered conductors an used.
Disconnecting Meana
2351. General. Each set of service -entrance eon.
ductor. shall be providrd with a readily Act: e..ibk
means of discoonecti ig all conductor, from the source
of ,nPPIY.
a. Switch and Circuit -Breaker. The diaconnectfng
moms .hall be manuolly npin6le. Il may consist of
not more than six switehec or tax rircun-Ureaker, in
a cotmnan enclosure, or in a urnup Of separate en•
closures, located at a readily arcessibl< point n"real
to the enhance of the c Iducmre, tido inside or
Outside the budding wall the disconnecting means
shall be of a type apProved for scrv•ice equipment and
for prevailing condmom.
b. Multiple -Occupancy, In a multiple -occupancy
building, each occupant shall have access to his dis-
connecting nc<an,. In a nmltiple-occupancy bu0ding
supplied bye service in cmniormhy wilh Paragraph b
Of section 2301. and having a commn.aa read,,, at•
, s ihle space available, Ilse dwori a ting coram may
consist Of nomore than six swftebts or hrcuft-Ureal.•
ars whicl, shall ronhunth
r to e requirement, a! Pa..graph aof Ibis union.
e D6conii-tiro of Grounded Conductor. if the
"'Ich or circuit -breaker it,,,, not interrupt the
grounded conductor, other n:can< shall be provided in
the service cabinet nr on the awitchboard for diseon-
n ,Isl the grounded conductor from the interior
.;rind.
d, Mart than Ona Bnflding, In a pn>penr mm•
prir;ng mere Ibsen one budding under ung�e mamas
mann, the wndu+face. supp;y,ng each bud4mg served
.M71 W pmvidW rilh a readily .ice .lible areas,.
334
r
as ARTICLE. 230
within or adjacent to tl,e building, of disconnecting
all ungrounded eanduaon from the source of supply,
In garages and oulbuildinga on residential properly
the disconnecting "sans may consist of a snap switch,
suitable for use on boor, scants, including switch
controls at more than one pal
23'2 -Connections Ahead of Disconnecting Meana
Service fuses, nua•ra, high -impedance shunt circuits
(such as Potential coils of meters and control circuits
of tune switches), surge protective capantors, li
ninF arresters and circuts for emergency Iightf"R and
for fire slams as prm•ided in section 2375, may be
connected on to supply sid, of the disconnecting
means. The wiring method for such a control circuit
Shall be one specified for service -entrance conductors.
For dealed acerin Praririem for fire alarm, sprinkler sup
ervi+orY. o wamfimm aYdems. +cc StanJardr of the SanionSl
guard o[ Fin Uaderwritcra
2353. Simultaneous Opening. The disconnecting
means shall simull...o ly disci,",,,, all ungrounded
conductors, except for 3 -wire direct-current or Slagle -
phase circuits or multi -wife lighting circuits.
2354. Types Permitted. The disconnecting means
for ungrounded conductors may be a dmnnally-opar-
able switch or circuit -breaker d the air -break ar oil -
immersed type, equipped warn a handle or lever for
mechanical operation by the hand.
A pmh-brawn I.A. of J,c.,i,.I —vu, control m,1 be .1.4
in
sdJi"na w the manual ba.dle.
2355. Indicating. The disconnecting means shall
plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed
position.
2356. Externally Operable. An enclosed service
er
switch or circuit-breakshall be externxlly operable
unless additional enclosed, exiernallyoprrable switch-
es or circuit -breakers are provided for central of all
individual feeders and circuits supplied through iL
It h raommrndrd do, caber. the eurrcm of atingle risme
or ¢roup of circuit+, is ud`ardeI eter<d. as in arynment•
noun tnnallalie.s, deka be Inaulkd in a e.n,evient lo<miav
no eonuol och +et ara<1> maemd 'mnllnkn, cacti de+len being
enclmed and die .lith or cinuitbnsker bei.¢ ealemally aper•
.W.
2357. Rating of Service Switch A service switch
shall have a rating not less than the load Ii, be r ... icd
determined in accordance with section 2203. Except
SERVICES 45
byspecial permis,fon. 30 -ampere switches shall not
be used for a 2 -wire service supplying more than two
15 -ampere branch circuits.
It is _..mended dial it, service vim, here In all eases, e
rune ria Ito than 60 smAeas. Slid the 6_71, esker vat las
tb . 50 arnAcns.
2358. Connection to Terminals. The service con-
ductors shall be attached to the disconnecting mean,
by pressure eanplctors, clamps or other approved
nuans, except ,that connections which depend upon
solder shall not be used.
2359. Hazardous Laea to Service equipment in-
stalled in li—dous locatiom 5M1a11 conhply with the
requ:rc cros of Article $00.
2360. Service Equipment Grouped. If supplied at
the Same mdc of 'he
buaAing by
more than one oecr-
head service drop ar more than one set of underground
service conductors, the service equipments, except for
services as permft,d in sections 2301-e and
2321, shall be grouped and exh >cl of wryipmnt
marked to identify it.
Overcu ,cl t Protection
2371 ,
Where Required. Each ungrounded service -
entrance conductcr shall have overcurrent protection.
a. In Ungrounded Candocter. Such protection $hall
be provided bun overcurrent device in seri<s with
each unRrvunded serv,ce candu<taq havinR a rating
or sritmq not hiK%,er than the allowable carrying
tapa,ily of the conductcr, except as fallow1.
1. For ort—slartinR currenis, ratings in confirm -
fly with secucm 4342, 4.k.2, ar 4363 may be used.
2. Clrcu:t Ur -l- may have a sewing in conform
icy witb Wrier+pin b and c n! acorea 2403.
3,,"
more than six ri,,.:..h..sl,_ or six ..is
of feses may stye as the over,urrrnt devise.
4. In a mult:pl<•arcuparry Lr :ding. (1) supplied
tr a secs ire ,n -.nl•.riu:ty w;tl, paragraph 1Yii-L,
(23 ,acin. a readay a..... 6 apace. avadab!v, and
t3) Y.avfng more Ih:" Sia uparate subdiv,>iona of the
service, main r.vcrrarre nt hevicta <onfisrlr.g of rot
more Shan six <:rcu3-Lreaktra ix sw u4 of (uses shall
W prov.ded.
4e ARTICLE. 220
b. Not in Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent
device shall be inserted in a grounded service can.
ductor except a circuit -breaker which simultaneously
opens all conductors of the circuit.
C. MoreTban One Building. In a property com-
prising more Ilan one building under single manage-
ment, the conductors supplying each huilding served
"hall be prmectcd by averearrent devices, which may
be locoed in the building servedor fn another build-
ing on the Same property, pro— , they are aeees-
sibla to the occupants of the bufiding served.
2372. Location. The service overcurrent device
shall be an integral Part of the service disconnecting
means or shall he located immediately adjacent there-
to, unless located at the outer end of the service race-
way.
2373. Location of Branch -Circuit Overcurrent De-
vices. If the service overcurrent devices are locked
or scaled, or otherwise at readily accessible, branch.
circuit overcurrent devices shall be installed on the
load side, shall be mounted in an accessible location
and shall be of lower rating than the service over.
current device.
2374. Protection of Special Circuits. If necessary
to prevent tampering, an automatic overcurrent device
protecting service conductors supplying only a special
load such as a water he:htcr, may be locked or scaled
if I ... led so as to be accessible.
2375. Relative Location of Overcurrent Device and
Other Service Equipment. The overcurrent device
shall protect all circuits and devices except as fol-
lows:
a The service switch may be placed on the supply
side.
b. High -impedance shunt circuits for measuring
and control apparatus, such as potential coils of
meters and control circuits of tote switches, and
surge protective capacitors, may be connected on the
supply
"shall
of the service equipment. The wiring
method shall be one specified in section 2331 for ser-
vice -entrance conductor&
a Circuits for emergency lighting may be con-
nected on the supply side of the service evercurreet
SF.Rk9CES
device if separately provided with overcurrent pro-
lection.
d. Crcuits used only for the operslian of fire -alarm
or otic, protcrive signaling systems may be con•
netted on the supply side of the service overcurrent
device if separately provided with overcurrent pro-
tection.
e, The .,it, may beplaced on the supply side of
the overcurrent devise for a111rmling current supply
not in excess of 100 volts het,—n conductors, and
PIIIc conductors between meter and service
equipnhenl are inaallyd by any of tlnc nnllwds sped•
lied in section 2,131 for "'vice cr`nduct—
Grounding and Guarding
2311. Encosmc. Live tarts of scrgce equipment
shall be encased sec that they 11,11 n.:t be r.l. ucd to
shaldrtml S•mnrh unl,ss mounlvd on a swircLL.4ard.
PanelL.ard or n,Nndlcr acre>sib!e to iu,l.0ed per-
s,ms only a,n•I located in a room or enclosure free
front rawly unitiNle natcria1.Su,h an enclomre shall
be provided vitt mcaus (or locking or scaring doors
giving Clt. 10 live pat'&
2382. Grounding• Service equipment shall be
grouoiled as (ollmes:
a Equipmene. The enclosure for service equipment
shall be gronn,kd in the manner spcuhcJ in Article
250. unless (q the voingc does not $areal 150 vola
in ground and sari a,cosurcs are (.1 isolatal from
conducting surface., and (3) unexposed Io ",tall by
pees• ,, or ,al aIs that may also be in contact with
other condo, ling surfaces.
b, Raeenaya Service racelays, and the metal
sheath of service cables, shat! be Krouode4. C—duil
and octal pipe (ram undergrounA supply shall be
co.sal ea snticienlly grounded if conmiyg :cad•
id—lhrd calJe hond,d 4] a ecmtio-ir, underground
Iead•shra,hcd cable system.
a. Flexible Conduit. if a service an of rigid meal
rarra'ay is imerruptod by 111x!47, meal—du,', the
aecto•ns of rigid metal rmcway thus mtrrraidcd shall
be U+�m1u1 r•,Rrtar by a coyl:er con:iu.-tor n ,smaller
Ill.. No. 8. using <Im l'. ,rr other aPprV l mean+.
The conductor and bonding device, shal3 be protected
X3-6
J�
.s ARTICLE 230
from mechanical injury, If the flexible conduit runs
to the service cm,ineh similar bonding shall be in-
stalled between the cabinet and the rigid raceway.
Services Exceeding 600 Volts
gcpnaar�ung ,thee+reree trnnduire" to<th<uLmlJ..9 eprepe, 1.
rhe lollvwmg <ax+:
1. w•hee etrp damn tnmlarmen are lxated out
where veP'de van+lor��{{rn are located 1. fo . a aepante
tv
hvildiug linin the one +erteJ.
r. Where lisp down uan+formen ore lamtwi in the huadina
artel in a ',,'.' mer vault eanfornung 1a rhe m•,uire-
er:,., ,.f . liI'll 11 130, -d under the vole Cant l
of Iter +ul•PIIon. comp. -Y,
In na eine will the pm.idons oI this Acids app1P a Mgip•
m.1 nutJ.reeely rnnnrard to arrvi<e enndvm:•r., anJ een.r-
1,, U ill net uppty to equipment in —4.ulldsr rhe sole con-
- ollhe a.;,0, evmpsnr,
2386. General. Service conductors and equipment
used on circuits exceeding 600 volts between conduc-
tors shall comply with sections 2301 to 2325 inclusi-,
sections 2335, 2381 and 2382, and also the following
sections 2387 to 2392 inclusive.
2387. Wiring Methods. In locations accessible to
other than qualified persons service entrance eondue-
tors of more than 600 votes scall be installed in rigid
conduit, or .,,multiple conductor cable approved for
the purpose. If lht voltage exceeds 15,OW volts be-
tween conductors they shall enter a transformer vault
conforming to the requirements of sections 4541 to
45.87 Conductors in conduit or duct and enclosed by
concrete or brick not less than 2 inches !hick shall
he considered outside of the building,
a. Open Work if open work is emplo3-cd where
n , accessible to other than ' . -vol persons, the
service conductors shall be rigidly supported on glass,
Paarelafn
or
other insulators approved for the Purpose,
which will keep them at Inst 8 inches apart, except
at terminals of equipment. They shall be not less
Ili
an 2 inches from the surface, wired user and for
voltages exceeding 2500 not less than 3 inches.
Is. Service Cable. Where cable conductors emerge
from a meal shCalh or raceway, Ilea insulation of the
conductors shall " p,.,.C, ll from moisture soil
mechanical injury by a pothead or other approved
means.
SERVICES 19
e Conductor Siae. Service conductors 'hall be not
ama�ler than No. 6 unless in cable. Conductors in
cable shall be not smaller than No. S.
d. Supports Service conductors and their sup-
ports, including latorR shall have strength and
stability sufficient to insure maintenance of da ma
clearance with abnormal currents in wet of abort.
circuit.
e. Guarding. Open wires shall be guarded where
accessible to unqualified persons.
2388. Disconnecting Meana. The circuit -breaker or
,he
alternatives for it specified in section 2389 will
constitute the disconnecting means required by sec-
tion 2351.
2389, Overaw,ent Protectfoo. 0 creurrent devices
ov
'hall be prided in accordance with the following:
a. In Vault er Consisting of Met'I.Enclosed
Switchgear. 1f the atrvice equipment is instaUtA in
a transformer vault meeting the yrovisiaon of sections
t ,I eq .rem or consfsU of metal enclosed switchgear.
the requir<menb for or ........ I Drat«tion and df.-
1-11tfng means may be fulfilled by the following:
I. On circuits .I i5,pgg colo or less, oil -filled or
other fuse' of suitable sung and tYP< which conform
to action 71(13 may he used vithotrt switch or eircuib
breaker plaided they may be operand as a discon-
starling means.
2. if"" voltage is 25,000 volts or less ■ non-auto-
cratia oil swfuh and maaLle lose' may be used.
3. Autommic-trip cirruit.hreak<rs may also be used
under the Lmdamon< outlined m uagmpl" 1 and 2.
If there limiutigm are rarr<de,f, n summons -trig
Nnait-Lrrakcr .1"111 he ins"Ctd fnacompliance with
the r<gmrcmenn of ParagnPh I'
4, it the antiage is 15,000 or kali a'wi! 1, wind,
of it terrufning Il:e ro-!wd current of 11;a tran+fmmeq
and—tal.Ie fuse' may be _7 y: aided Iter. ra'itch
is imerlak„a
1 with a .cuit-brrakrr in tP:e sra;nilary
I
ncuft of the 11—f rmrr sa O,at Ihn .wit.h rano,.{
be opened when the <ucmt-Lr<aker is dated.
5%M
axie<hgear referted to in thin
action 'hag —1:11 d sxitc8gear havini a wlstan-
t"I steel Hwetare and a stet! a 1c ,ar. of th.ckns:a
A ARTICLE Ise
not less than ;ti inch, over the side, and top. The en-
closure shall he furnished as an fnlel,�al part of the
equipment. if installed over a wood floor suitable
protection thereto sloth be provided.
b. Not in Vault or Metal Enclosure, If the service
equipment is not in a vault or metal enclosure, the
over -current device shall consist of an anion"lic trip
circuit -breaker of suitable current-carryir8f and in-
terrupting caPacit3• wfth an overcurrent unit in each
I
ngrounded conductor and so arranged that the opera-
tion of any one device will open all ungrounded con-
ductors. if the voltage of the circuit exceeds 5000,
the regulrimi-I of section 7135 shall apply. A circuit -
breaker used as -,,fee equipment sltall be located
as near as possible to where the servicecon
but lding. ductors
enter Ilia building, or else on a pole outside the
e, Fases. Fuses used as permitted in paragraph a
shall have an int”
I.. rating at least equal to the
maximum short-circuit current possible in Itis circuit.
d Cirxuit-Sreakera. Provision shall be made so
that the cfrcuft-breaker is free to open in case the
cfrcuft Its closed on an overload. This can be aceom-
P,lisheby means such as trip-fm
ree breakers, by ul-
tiple breakers having an operating handle per pole,
or, for an air circuit -breaker, by a switch in series
with each Pole of the breaker. A service circuit -breaker
shall indicate <karly acether it is open or closed, and
shall be capable of interrupting the maximum Acirt-
circuit current to which it may be subjected.
2390. Isolating Switches. Isolating switches shall
be provided as follows:
a, Air -break isolating switches shall be installed
ee
betwn oil switches or circuit -breakers used as ser-
vice switches and the supply conductor, except where
such equipment is mounted on removable truck panels
or metal -enclosed switch -Rear units which cannot be
opened unlesa the circuit is disconnected, and which,
if removed tram lite normcraal operating position, auto -
fromll disconnects the cfrcuft-breaker or switch
from all live parte
b. When the fuses used with uon-automatic if
awitcIt in accordance wish 2389-a are o/ a type that
may be .faceted as a disconnect .which, they may
SERVICES sl
serve as the isolating switch if they completely dis•
connect the oil switch and all service egniPmcut flour
the source of supply.
"Air -break isolating swirel,es shall be are ... ible
to qualilicd attendants only. They shall be arranged
so that agrounding mm,enion on the load side can
readily be made. Such grounding means need not be
pea" d for duPlirate isolan,il,g sn'itcllcs, if any, in.
and "mlafntd by the auPPly Company.
2391. Lightning Arrester. A IighlnfnR ...."at
complying with the r<quire,,a of Article 280 shall
he Placed on Carl, ungrounded overhead service Con-
ductor ao the supply side of the service equipment,
if called for by the authority enforcing this code.
2392. Equipment In Secondaries. If elle primary
service equipment .op I one or mare transformers
whose secondary windings feed it single set of mane,
and the primary rirruft-breaker is n"nually operable
from apoint onside the transformer vault, the dis.
connecting mCa., and overcurrenl pr.tection may be
omitted from the secondary circuit, provided the set.
ting of the Prin"ry circuit -breaker is such a. In pro -
tett the secondary circuit. In .110 her uses the sec-
ondary circuit shall be provided with a disconnecting
.,an, soil ....current yrole<ti.n a, required by vari-
ous paragraphs o! ,his anisic.
^llanvatly tivrable"—ke,, "I b than only
v,cooial, Imbae briwren the <i,ran a.r>her and the prim vl
oPrra,ivn, anJ refer. w ucth ,be er<n,n' aeJ <I.:un' n, labia.
ARTICLE 246—OVERCUURENT PROTECTION
Installation
240L Cameral Requirement, ()veno__ P..tee-
tion lar con—ors l, provided for the Purpose of
opening the electric circuit if the ......I ,caches a
value ah,ch a•d1 -use an excessive or 4-Rereu1 tem -
1_o ,l ., the -o-h col or ea ,Ju,t.rt '%
grouitd,d conductor is con.i,I r d to Iso Pr:,la.tcd
from .vrrcnrrenl if a protrcrire device ui a sun able
rasing ,•r ,ruing is Pros i.icJ in each ungrounded con.
doctor of Iter same circuit.
/b
53 ARTICIF- 240
2402. Overcurrent Protection of Equipment. Equip-
ntem shall he Protected against overcurrent as speci•
fled in the references in the following table:
llmnch Circuits .. ....... .. .Article 210
Capacitor.. . .. ...... SccdOns 4607-h, and 4608
Cranes and Hoists ...........Sections 6141 and 6142
Generators ............................Section 4454
Motors .................................Article 430
Over 600 Volts......... •Sections 7141, 7142 and 7143
Panelboards ............................Section 3882
Srrvires ......................Sections 2371 to 2375
Pcmnlc-Control, Loa• Energy andSignal
Circuit. ... .. .... ...... I.. Article 725
Signs and Outline Lighling ............Section G006
Sound Equipment ................... .Seelion 6406
TransformI'S
..........................Article 450
2403. Overcurrent Protection of Conductors. Con.
dila,,, stall be pnuceteJ in arcorclance u•ilh their
current-cuq'in I .apathies• as given in Tables I and
2. Chapter !0, except as follows:
a. Fuses. If the allowable current -carrying cap-
acity of the conductor docs not correspond to a atand-
ord sire fuse, dtc next larger size or rating may be
uud Unt nal escecJing 150 per trot of the allowable
current -carrying capacity of the conductor. Plug fuses
and fu=elmlders shall not be used in ar<uits exceed•
ing 123 colts between conductors, except circuits of
a system having a grounded neutral and no conduc-
tor at more than Iso volls to ground. The screw shell
of plug type fttsehniders shall be connected to the
load side of the circuit.
b, Non -Adjustable -Trip Circuit -Breakers. Non-od-
jurlaM1le-[rip nmuit•breaktr=, .,rcpt a5 mhcrrsvi.e per-
.1,
in sob-par:u;mph 9 of Tanks 1 and 2 of Chapter
I0, shall he rated in accordance wall the current -
carrying capacity of the conductor.
a Adjustable -Trip Circuit -Breakers. Adjustable -
[rip circuit -breakers of the thermal trip, magnetic
lime -delay trip or iroanan..... rip types stall bt set
to opemle at nM more don 150 per cent of the allow.
able ctirrtnt-ralr3ing capacity of the conductor.
Thr Rert of th• [r,rprmmre ,•n the orrrmi„n of Thermally
inn,.11rvl .irtn+tLwalwa ah,m1A I:e t.ken im., ro »Orratinn
ns ai. liratan d rich circ mhnaA-, x,h=n tl•q carr nd,iertr,l
[o r. emelt lov or e.namrtr hixh unu•rrawru.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION S)
d. Fixture Wires and Cords. Fixture wire or flex•
ible card, sizes No. 16 or No. 18, and tinsel cord ,hail
be eonstde..d i s protected by IS•amPer, overcurrent
devices except as provided in section 6251. Flexible
cords approved for use with sprcific appliances, shall
be considered as protettcd by Int overcurrent devices
of the bench circuits of Attici1 210 when conforming
to the following: 20.antpere circuits, No. 18 ant
larger; 30 -ampere circuits, 10 amperes or over cap-
acity. Fixture wires of the sizes permitted (Or larcdps
in paragraph a-2 Of section 2121 shall be considc
as protected by the overcurrent protection of the 20-
amperc. 3i -ampere and 50 -ampere branch circuits of
Article 210.
e. Motor Circuits. The conductors supplying motors
and mr4or•operated appliances shall be considered as
protected by the overcurrent prolective devices speci•
tied in sections 4322, 4324 and 4342.
f. BTu io Circuit' Taps to individual outlets and
eir<mt conductors supplying a single household Ott-
trie range shall be considered as protected by the
branch circuit overcurrent devices schen fn accordance
with the requirements of sections 2121 and 2122.
g, Remote Control Except as provided in Article
725, the tnnducmrs of the control circuits of remote -
control sait1hel shall he co idald as protected•from
overcurrent by overcurrcnt 1-i<es that are not of the
NKalled time -1:g lYP< and are need or set at not
come than Sm! Per cent nl the —ry:ng capacity of the
ream<•umtn,l conductors, as specified in Tables I
and 2 of Chapter 10.
be�oT peerrdAas p,hi+ctlt IaPped from a feeder shall
Y Prr4ected from overcurrent
If
irrt.1.ed in aceerdance with secticn, 2434, 3647 and
43415.
2401, Thermal Device' 7lurmat cutouts, thermal
reI,Yb and ether devices net des:Nntd m open abort•
actin,, slut! act Le used 1•.r Pro:et[i•,n of n;nduc-
torb aa3:nit GS'f.t ClSrrYnl der t0 S!Iv:rt'rlrCa113 Or
aroards but mat be coed m Proton in Or branch
<ucuil mndus.:ra Isom overloud it protected in ae-
cordarct tech ,.erten 4330.
2405. Ungrounded Conductaty, An overcurrent
etvice tics= or ererrurrem It, unit of a tired
brwker) shall be placed in each onx—sided
54 ARTICLE 240
conductor. Circuit -breakers shall open all ungrounded
conductors of the circuit. The number and position
of thq overcurrent units such is trip coils or
relays ,hail he as given in Table 28, Chapter 10.
Individual single•pole crtcuit-brcaken may be used
for the protection of each conductor of ungrounded
2 -wire circuits, each ungrounded conductor of 3 -wire
direct-current or single-phase circuits, or for each on'
grounded conductor of lighting or appliance branch
circuits connected to 4 -wire three-phase systems, or
5 -wire 2 -phase systems, provider) such lighting or ap.
pliance circuits include a grounded conductor.
24015. Services. For services the number of over -
current units shall be as specified in section 2371,
2407, Motors. For motor -running protection the
number of overcurrent units shall be as specified in
sections 4326, 4327 and 4328.
2408. Feeders at Supply Stations. Each conductor
of a constant -potential circuit entering or leaving a
supply station, except grounded neutral conductors
shall be proltcled front excessive current by a circuit.
breakcr, or by an cqusraknI device of approved de.
sign. St. Prmectivt dcvice< shall be of
as neat
as practicable to the point where the condu:tors enter
or Icase the builrlinN. For the outgoing circuits not
connected with other sources of power, the protective
devices may be placed on the supply side of trans-
formers or similar devices.
2409. Grounded Conductor. No overcurrent device
shall be placed to any permanently grounded conduc-
tor, except as follows:
a. Simultaneous Opening. If the overcurrent de.
vice simultaneously opens all conductors of the circuit.
It. Conductors of Branch Circuits. In locations
where the conditions of grounding, or the likelihood
of reversal of connection warrants, the authority en.
forcing this code may require, on sysl%ms having a
grounded neutral or having one side grounded, that
the conductors of 2 -wire branch circuits shall have
an overcurrent device in each conductor.
2410.Change in Size of Grounded Conductor.
where a change occurs in the sire of the ungrounded
OVER.CURRENT PROTECTION SS
conductor, a similar change may be made in the site
of the grounded conductor.
2411. Fusee in Multiple, For the protection of con-
ductors, except the conductor of moroo-branch cir-
cuits, having allowable carrying Capacities exceeding
the rated capacity of the largest approved cartridge
type fuse, cartridge fuses arranged in multiple may b<
used, Drovided as few lusts a, possible are uctd and
the fuses are of the same type, characteristics, and
moist. and provided the (useholder terminals are
mounted on a singe continuous pair Oi bus -bora, or
have an equivalent arrangement that will eliminate
ant Palenliah difference bctnecn the terminals of the
fuse.
Logsdon
243,. Loeatlon In Circuit. Overcurr<nt devices
shall be located at the point where the conductor to
be protected receives its supply, except as follows.
' Service COodoctor' An overcurrent protective
device for service conductors may be located as speci-
tied in section 2372•
b. Smaller Conductor Protected if the overcurrent
device pro[emng the larger conductors also protects
the smaller c 1Cr 1t1.,r m accordance with l able, 1
and 2 of CIIaP
e. Taps Not Over 5 Feet Long. if the smaller
conductors have a <urrenl•carrymg capacity of not
It's than she sum of the allmvahl< current carrying
"Is" , l for the <onJuc� r,of PV!Y.hProri led he more
taVtia
suits or 1wJs, w'hic I she
not over $ fset hag and dors rars[a:.l brym+d the
switchboard, panelboard. or control device, which it
supplies and, except al the Paint of tonneebon to
open u:res on insulators, a <ml.,•ed m r.nelwt, <kc-
Irteal metallic tubing Win metal gm,". when not a
Pact of the switchboard tar panc;bu.:rd.
d Taps Not Over 25 Feet Long. If the smaller
tondurturs have a current"a") cape it
y at 1. 1
one-d:ud slut Of the conducmr from wh¢h IheY are
a,q,plted, lmd provided the eaP is suitably protected
from tneduni<al injury, is ort over 25 flet long. and
termi+utn in a emNle circuit -breaker or set Of fan
which wdi limit the load on she tip to that allowed
337
14 338
s6 ARTICLE :rts
St ARTICLE 240
by Tables 1 and 2, Clsapter 10. Beyond thispoint
the conductors may supply any number of circuit.
break
s, or sets „f :uses.
2435. Location in Premises. Overcurient devices
shall be lucalal where tlsey still be:
a. Readily accessible, except as provided in section
23 72 for soviet cqu,p:nent and section 3650 for bus-
ways.
b. Not exposed to mechanical injury.
0. Not in the vicinity of easily ignitible material,
Enclosures
2436. General. Overcurrenl devices shall be en-
closed in cutout boxes or cabinets, unless a part of a
specially approved assembly which affords equivalent
Protection, or unless mounter] on switchboards, panel.
boards or controllers located in rooms or enclosures
free from easily ignitible material and dampness. The
operating handle of a circuit -breaker may be acres-
s(ble without opening a door or cover.
2437. Damp or Wet Locations. Enclosures for
overcurrent devices in damp or wet locations shall
be of a type approved for such locations and shall be
mounted so there is at (cast one-half inch air space
b,,mven the enclosure and the wall or other support
ing surface.
2438. Vertical Position. Enclosures for overcurrent
devices shall be mounted in a vertical position unless
in individual instances this is shown to be impracti-
cable.
2439. Rosettes. Fuses shall not be mounted in
roaches.
2440. Disconnection of Fuses and Thermal Cutouts
Before Handling. Disconnecting means shall Ira pro.
vidcdn the supply side of all fuses or thermal cut.
outs m circuits of mmc than 150 volts to ground and
cartridge fuses in circuits of any voltage, H accessible
to otlscr than qualified persons, so that each individ-
ual circuit containing fuses or thermal cutouts can be
independently disconnected from the source of elec-
trical energy. except as provided in section 2352 and
except that a single disconnecting means may be used
to control a group of circuits each protected by fuses
rri'F.RCURRENT 1•ROTECTION 52
or th<rnsal cutouts under the conditions described in
section 4410.
24.11. Arcing or Suddedy-Moving Parta. Areing
or suddenly -moving parts shall comply with the fol-
lowing:
S. Location. Fuses and circuit -breakers shall be
so lamed or shicld<d Ilia' persons will not be burned
or otherwise injured by their operation.
eiLh Suddenly -Moving Part.. Handles or lever of
t•breakers, and nmaar part. which may move
suddenly in such a way that persons in the vicinity
are liable to be injured by being struck by them, shall
be guarded or isolated.
Construction and Use of overcurrent Devices
2451. Plug Fuses of the Edison -Base Type- Plug
fuses of the Edison -ba., type shall conform to the
following:
a. Classification. Plug fuse, of this type stall be
eTasihcd at lot 'ver 125 volts, 0 to J0 amperes.
b. Marking. Plug fuse. oI 15 amperes sting or
less shall be dating uishcd Irom (hose of larger rating
Gy an hexagonal oDen.nq in the cap through which
the mica or similar window shows, or by same other
prominent hexagonal feature such as the [arm of the
top or
Cap iudf, ar an heaagoml nceaa or projection
I. she top or P.
2452. Holden for Plug Pasts. HoMera for plug
fuses of JU amperes cr Ica, shall , bl installed un•
fess they comply with "alien 24 u or are made to
<umrdy ash sect... 2453 LY the insertion of an
adaDtcr.
ai:n sal ,: r✓. f,.., 1-b 11�,�iib � ar
A c�l F:re W-,'
4L< „a•a cr Lr tr-..^:... a'�,i rcta.,.-0 art fun�'ar�u,rn LY
24$36
TPlug Fuca and Poaetsofden of Type S.
Y i.e 5 p>•d f'd bare to bt used .,,the ev<r-
eurnnerdcv+cc requ.r<d by Thu code the ,thea and
(us<f�:luen .hall co.furm to the fol. I . rr the•
a:<nrs: d 0
a. Classifications. Mae (saes ash fu
T'p< S h::a•I to a."I..,"'I at h hs<holdrrs est
y M gree 1 VO(U; 0 to
13 amperes, 16 to 30 amperes.
b. Furca Usable Only In Fua<holdera of the game
Classification. Fuses ,1 the i6 to 30 anQrere dasaifi-
Canun shall out be usable w�illt hrsellolders or adap.
tern of the 0 to 15 ampere classification.
o, Fuachslden and Adapters. Fuses, fuscholders,
and adapters shAl be so da:gncd that a fuse other
than a Type S fuse cannot III, used in a fuseholder
or adapter designed for Type S fuses.
it TamPeiability. Fuses, fuscholders and adapters
shall he so designed as to be subject to tampering or
bridging only will, di0icul4y.
is. Live Par(.. Funs sad fuselfoldcn when Install -
cd and assembled logetbe, shall have no live parts
exposed.
E Adapters to be Non -Removable. Fuse adapters
shall be so deigned that when once inserted in a
fuseholder Ihcy cannot be removed, except that adap.
11rs without the Tucking device tray be used in in.
sullalions existing befurc the effective date of this
code.
g, Interchangeability. Fuses, fuscholders and adap.
ters of variuui manufacturers shall be interchange-
able will' each other, and list plugs with adapters
shall be suitable for use in lite Edison -base type
fuseholder.
11. Plug Type. Fuses and fuscholders shall be of
the Plug type.
I. Ampere Rating. Foch fuse, fuseholder and adap.
ter shall be marked with its ampere rating.
j. Marking. Fuses of the 0 to 15 ampere rating
shall be distinguished frons Ill... of larger rating by
an hexagonal opening I. the cap through which the
mica or similar window shows, or some other promi.
trent Ise.agoml feature such as the form of the top
or cap itself, or an Iwxagon.l recess or Projection in
Elie lop or cap.
2461. Cartridge Fuses and Fuseholdere. Cartridge
fuses and fuscholders shall w (urm to the following:
a Classification. Cartridge fuses and fuscholders
.loll be classified as regards current and voltage as
follow.:
O\•ERCURRENT
Na trrr 250 rola
Nm w<r 600 rain
Ampere
Amtrcrn
0. 30
0. 30
31- lS0
31- 60
61.100
61-100
101-200
I0I.200
201-•100
201-400
401-600
401-600
b. Non -Interchangeable. Cartridge fuses and fuse.
holders shall be so dcsigncd that it. will be impossible
to put a fuse of any given cls.. into a fuseholder
which is Jcsiµned for ashcurrent lowit belong,.
erelo, or voltage
higher, than at of the class to which nglt
"Marking Each fuse shall be marked with its
rimpere and voltage slings.
2471. Link Fuel and Fuseholden. IJnk in...
shall be mounted on approved fuscholders.
s. Minimum Rating,Link fuses and fuseholder,
dull be used nnlY in sizes rated at n ur. Ill.. 60o
.rapiers, and only Ly special Permission•
2481. C(rau(hHrcakera. Circuit -breakers shall con.
form to the following;
a. Method of Operation. In general, circuit.
breakers shall be sljable O µ ( Leinclosed and opened
by hand witheul vmPloy(nR any usher source of power,
although orrm.[ opera,:'. may be by Other Vo
such as elatrinl, pnruoaUc. an.l 111, like. Large
circuit-brei.ers which are I" be closed .rad uPrnrd by
declrisi, pncu.,a or o(her Pmrer. shall Le eaPabk
of being closed b -hand for maintenance purposes amt
,hal) also b< <apab'e of being Inpp<d by hand und,,
load svithuut the ua<'f Power.
Is. Injury to Operat0e. Circuit -breakers chill be
orranµeJ and mounted son that their operation is not
likely to ;.lure the operator.
<. Indication. Circuit -broken shall indicate whether
they are in dw open of closed position.
d. Non-Tampetable, An aic circu'T breaker, used
fur him Lsmh cinuifs dorrvSrd in Artini, 210, shall
hs .1 au.h dealµ. that arra;lrration of it. ,ip Point
(cabbra.,m6 or in the came rtgmred for ice open-
liva, will be dig:tuh.
t
•,�;
W ARTICLE sso
e. Marking. Circuit -breakers shall be marked with
their rating in smh a m:,nner that the marking will
be visible after installation.
ARTICLE 250—GROUNDING
2501. Scope. This article treats of protection of
electric installations by grounding.. Insulation. Isola-
tion, and guarding are salable alternatives under ecr-
laid conditions.
Systems and Circuits
2511. Circuits. Circuits arc grounded for the pur-
pose of limiting rico voltage upon the circuit which
might otherwise occur through exposure to lightning
or other voltages higher than that for which the cir-
cuit is dcsigncd; or tolimit the maximum potential to
ground due to normal voltage.
Pot 1.7Z ... ..... fo... r greundipg, see rection 2671•
2512. Two -Wire Direct -Current Systems. TsvO-wire:
direct-current systems supplying interior wiring• and
operating ae not more than 300 volts between conduc-
tors, shall be grounded, unless such system is used
for ;ipplyiog industrial cquipment in limited areas
and the circuit is equipped with aground detector.
1, fs rcommendeJ thee 2 -wire Jiree[eurrmt aoVtema arse xii.,
at amt thin 3W vulir M1rtwrcn ttrnJutten 4e gr nJel it a n -
Ud poet gait he cs1a41,+hrJ 11th (hot 'he nwxmmm Iiff-- of
:ounl,at Letveeo the euiral 'mins and any other ainl 14e
rrtm dor not racrrJ son rola. ❑ it
rrommendeS on drt 2wire
dincrrurrrnl aTnemv Ie na xreunded 'f the vellase le around
of e:[her cendua., would exceed 300 vola afar grounding.
2513. Three -Wire Dircet-Current Systema. The
neutral conductor of all 3 -wire direct-current systems
supplying interior airing shall be grounded.
2514. Allemating-Cuerent Systems. Secondary,
alternating -current systems supplying interior wiring,
and interior alternating -current wiring systems, shall
be grounded if they can be so grounded that the maxi.
mum voltage to ground docs not exceed 150 volts.
,"here a service conductor is uninsulated in accord.
aner with section 2303• paragraph a, the system shall
be grounded.
It ;s weaem<ndM that all<matimyeurrent aroma be areunded
ar provided in this rticle where the voltage tp around kra na
e.cerJ JW vola. IliYhet vuttaae circaiu u,ay Le RreundeJ.
2515. Furnace Circuiu. Electric furnace circuits
need not bt grounded. e
GROUNDING ss
2516. Electric Crane Circuits. Circuits for electric
cranes Operating over combustible fibers in Class III
hazardous locations shall not be grounded. See sec-
tion 5033.
2517. Circuits of Len Than 50 Volta. Circuits of
less than 50 volts need not be grounded, except as
follows:
a. if sup)ilied by transformers Isom systems of
mare lion Iso votes to ground, except as pro•fded jn
paragraph a of section 2545.
b. If supplied by transformers from ungrounded
aystcros.
e. If An overhead outside of buildings.
Location of Grounding Connections
2521. Curent Over Grounding Condurtme. The
grounding of wiring systems, circuits, equipment,
arresters, cable armor, conduit, or other metal race-
way's as a Protective measure shall be so arranged
that there will bq no objectionable passage of current
avec the grounding conductors. The temp—,T, cur-
rents act up under accidental conditions, while the
grcand:of conductors are per(Orming their intended
protective funttiom, arc not to be considered as objee-
lwnable. If an objectionable be of current octan
over a
its conductor, due to the use of multiple
grounds, (U one le mare cf soh grounds shall be
abandoned, or (2) their location ,hail ht changed, or
(3) the continuity Of theeonducWr between the
grounding mnriecuon. shall be suitably 'of cropted,
or (4) other mean. utisfaClcry to the authority en-
Ix<ing this ode shall be ta'<en to limit the torrent.
2122 Oroundfng Coanaetion for Direct -Current
Syetenm. Uire<4current system;. which are to bt
grounded ifull have the grcuoding connection made
at enc or room supylr nations hut' or at individual
wrnces nor elsewberc en mterwr —mg.
2523. Gromdhit , mm-dmm for Altemadng•Cur-
ram Ey,lerrta. Secondary echo mai i n8-ru rent <ir<ui 1.
whish are in he groumled shwa hour a ronnecunn to
a 4n.undmg la pude al each ir,d tvrinhl servile, ea•
cele as pruv:ded far in aviien 2111. Ibe term<ct:nn
,,,all be made on the smpily side of the arrvRe
coanttl:r.4 mean. Each secondary dMO,wion a,.-
tellwhish is 8rcumded shall have at least one ad4i-
62 ARTICLE 250
tional connection to a grounding electrode at the
transformer or elselsiicre. No ton..cliou to a ground-
ing electrode shall l+e made to the grounded circuit
conductor on 1111 load. side of the service dfstonnccting
meats, except as provided for in section 2524,
2524. Two or More' Buildings Served by a Single
Service. If more titan one building is served by the
same service, the grounded circuit conductor of the
wiring system of any building, utilizing one branch
circuit supplied from such service my be connected
to a grounding electrode at such buil( mg, and in the
case of any building utilizing two or more branch
circuits supplied from such service, and in the lase
e s
of a building (musing fivtack, shall be so connected.
2525. Conductor to be Grounded. For alternating -
current interior wiring systems the conductor to be
grounded shall he as follows:
a, Single-phase, 2 -wire: the identified conductor;
b. Single-phase, 3 -,vire: the identified neutral con-
ductor;
e. Multi -phase systems having one wire common
to all phastavthe identified eouunou conductor;
d. 1,=c systems having one phase ground-
ed: the identified conductor;
e. Sfulti.phase systems in which one phase is used
as in (b): the identified neutral conductor. One Phase
only can be grounded.
The fd,eilrwd mnJucar la Brow. 1, low— as '%be ebles
wire."
252& Isolated Systems. For an interior wiring
system or circuit which is required to be grounded
and which is not connected to an exterior secondary
distribution system, the grounding connection shall
be made at the transformer.generator, or other source
of supply, or at the switthboad, on the supply side
of the first switch controlling the system.
- Conductor Enclosures
2531. Exposed Metal. Exposed conductive materi-
als enclosing eleetriy conductors are grounded for the
purpose of prevent g a potential above ground on
the enclosures.
2532. Service Conductor Enclmures. Service race-
ways, service cable sheaths or armoring, if of metal,
shall be grounded.
GROUNDING
2533. Other Conductor Enclosures. Metal imele.
sures for conductor, ,lull be grounded, except im mita
Of It,, than 25 feel which are free from probable con-
tact with ground or grounded metal and which, if
within reach+from grounded surfaces, are guarded
against contact by persona.
2534. Spacing from Lightning Roda. Metal enclo-
sures of conductors shall, wherever practicable, be
kept at least 6 feet sway from lightning rod conduc-
tors. 1V here it is not practiable to secure 6 feel sepa-
ration, they shall be bonded together.
Equipment
2341, Exposed Metal. Exposed eondactive male.
rials enclosing electric egwpmenq or forming . part
of such equipment, are grounded for the purpose of
preventing a polcnual above ground on the equipment.
2542. Fl:ed Equipment—Genarsl. Under any of
the following f fi iho lel exposed, eohich re tarrying
metal para Of fixed rgbe nun which are liable to
become
<nrgizeJ, shill be grounded:
a If equipment fa supplied by means of metal -clad
wiring;
b. II equipment is located in a wet location and Is
not isolated;
e If equipment is located within reach of a person
who can make contact with any grounded surface or
object:
d' If oniihe gruunJment is cated within reach of a Versonstanding
a If equipment it fn a hazardous location; sec
Article 500;
L 1f equipment is in electrical contact with metal
or metal lath;
F If equicmlmt operates with any terminal at
more than ISd volts to ground, except as follows:
1, Endoatres for switches or circuit breakers where
,cRpible to qlified persom only;
g Metal fumesuaof etetaically-heated devices,
empted by special permission, in which case thellimel
,half be permanently and adite ively insulated from
ground;
I. Tramformn emounted oo wooden poles at s
height al more Ill.. 8 feet from the ground
/`
64 ARTICLE 250
2543, Fixed Equipment—Specific• Exposed, non-
current -carrying metal parts of the following kinds of
egmpmcnl, regardless of voltage, shall be grounded:
a. Frames of motors as specified in section 4436;
Is. Controller cases for motors, except lined covers
of snap switches;
e. Electric equipment of elevators and cranes;
d Electric equipment in garages, theatres and
motion picture studios, except pendent lamps on cir-
cuits of seat more than 150 volts to ground;
I, Motion -picture projection equipment;
f.Electric signs and associated equipment, unless
thin
ese are accessible to unauthorized persons and are
also insulated from ground and Ira. other conductive
objects;
g. Generator and motor frames in An electrically
operated organ, unless the generator is effectively in
both from ground and from the motor driv-
ing it;
L Switchboard Games and structures supporting
switching t I Pi rnL except that frames a[ direct-
currenh single -polarity awilchboards need not be
grounded it v ctivcly tasulall, ;
i. X-ray tubes used in therapy. For exceptions see
section 6633.
Far iv-trummu, melon lad -days, sec adions 26:2 to VIC
2544. Non -Electrical Equipment. The following
metal parts shalt be grounded;
a. Franey and tracks of electrically operated
annus;
b. The metal frame of a non -electrically driven ele-
vator car to which electric conductors are attached;
c Hand-operdted metal shifting ropes or cables of
electric elevators;
d. bfUal enclosures such as partitions• grill work,
etc-, around equipment carrying voltages in ucess of
750 Volta between conductors, on in substations
or vaults under the sole control of the supply com-
panY.
2545. Portable EquipmentUnder any of g meithe fol-
lowing conditions, exposed non-current-carryinn
parts of portable equipment shall be grounded:
GROUNDING 67 .
a In hazardous locations;
b. If operated at more than 150 volts to ground,
except:
1. 111o1o13, if guarded;
2, Molal frames of electrically -healed appliances
exempted by section 4238;
3. Fnelosures for Xray tubes used in therapy ex.
empted by section 6633.
,In other than residential occupancies, exposed
metal par's of pble appliances used in damp or
wee locations, or byortapersons alandfng on the ground
or on metal floors or working inside of metal tanks
or boilers, shall be grounded, except where snppced
through an insulating transformer with ungrounded
secondary ad not over 50 vohs.
Thin ......ph .ball nor be «mrrued to ppr<hWl rhe sew .1
iraulauna nan•toar, .rah a arronAa•yy rotwgr grnnr than SO
in
nv:u, d rhe egoaedr mail sant of 1�aPeonnw,r6 Ie
.a<b • uanafarmc• erov�eJ, and srcv,41dN ober <aaJn,—
of tai. armcle are IW'J;<d.
T k raemmeadN roar Ice bees of 11 portable mann wtkh
brte ' :•• 'ban SO vvfla sol Ina iban lin lu to pound
trvurde0. ebrre Ion un W naJds ucumrinbed
254& Spacing from Idshm;ng Rods. Metal tram,.
and cal,. of electric equ.pmant shall, wherever Drac-
tfrable, be kept at Itaat 6 feet away from Ifghlning
I,
conductor. %%'here it is o ,, pr..icablt to secure
6 feet aepuatfan, they shad be bonded together.
Methods cf Grounding
2571. EHetdv. Grounding. The path to ground
tram circus, component, cr rarduclnr enclosures
skald be prrmal:ent and cOnGaucw and shall have ant•
P'e carryinR,tapaory to eondact vilely any currents
;ALI. ,, be Imposed to it, ant I o,11 have I -p l nce
aaii6tntly Iuw In 11-11 he
prunt;al .love ground,
and In N .0 the opera -ion of Il:e Gverccrrept de-
v:cts fn the circuit.
2552. Grounding end to Circuit. The Rreund-
inR ren du: est may bbe <cnrentd la tY.e Rronnrkd
eua er:ndustcr at anY convenient point on tF.e Prem•
¢ea..
fisc. .. Dat saY4tY a+de d D:e service d.aconnocting
2555. Common Grcundfng C•andlxtor, The round•
inR car.d4 or far
crcu.v :i" a!a.i bt nerd for gro:aud
,ng [qupreat, ccr.-un and arh<r meal racew.Y. or
ARTICLE 250
enclosures for conductors. including service conduit or
cable sheath and service equipment.
2554. Common Grounding Electrode. R9nae the
altematiug-current s3'>Icm is cunne<Icd to a roun-
d
ing electrode fn or at a building as specified gm see -
home 2523 and 2524, the cane cicctrndc dull be used
to ground wire enclosures and equipment in or on
that building.
2555. Underground Service. Where served from
a conYauuuus underground ictal -sheathed cable sys-
tem. I in sitealll or armor of underground service
cable Irmallirally connected to the nndermonnd sys-
tem, or underground service conduit containing a
metal slw•alln cable bonded 10 the ugderground sYsrcor
raced not he grounded at the building and stray be in.
sulaled from tie interior eondmt or piping.
2556. ShortSeed ms of Raceway. Isolated sections
of metal mreway ii, cable armor, of ro In" I to be
grounded, shall preferably be grounded by connecting
I., or,
grounded raceway or Armor, but may be
grounded in accordance with section 2557.
2557. FeEquipnbcm boxes, cabinets
on -cm
and fillings
wing metal pans of
other fixed equipment, if naerallieally connected to
grnwnded cable ar-nr or mein raceway,
are consid-
ered to be grounded by surh connection, If not so
emmected thty may be grounded in one of Ile fol.
lowing ways:
a. BY a grounding conductor run with circuit con-
ductors; (his cunducior may be unimulated, but if it
is provided with an imlividual covering and is part of
a cable, the covering shall be finished to show a green
color.
It. By a separate grounding conductor installed the
came as a grounding conductor for conduit and the
like;
e, fly special permission, other means for ground.
ing fixed cquipnent may be used.
2558. Equipment on Structural MetaL Electric
equipment secured to and in contact with it, ground-
ed structural metal frame of a building, shall be
deemed to be grounded. Mcial car frames supported
by metal hoisting cables attached to or running over
GROUNDING dr
sheave,. or drums of elevator machinesshall be deem-
ed to be grounded if the machine is grounded in ac-
cordance with this coda
2559. Portable Equipment. Non -currents ryinIt
metal pans of portable equipment may be grounded fn
any one of the following ways:
a, l means of -he metal enclosure of the conduce
tors fcc ng such equipment, Provided an approved
muiti•prolg plug or equivalcm is used, one prong for
the purpose of grounding the metal enclosure, and
prov+Jed, further, -hal the metal enclosure is attached
to the plug and to lie equipment by connectors ap•
proved or the purpose;
b. By coram of a groun4fng conductor run with the
circuit ton•lurerr, fn cable assent r. or 0exible cards.
provided an appruvrd multi prong plug or eguivalert
I, used, one prang tar lbe purpose u( eonnecung such
gronndmg conductor to the grounded meal raceway
or cable senor; 'ilia cunduaor may Lt nolo sullied
but if an mdia'idual covering ie prowled for this con-
duelor, ft .ball be fnishcd to show a green color;
a ➢v means of a separate flelible ,it. or strap,
,.,..led ar bare, prnlecud as Will as Practicable
against cotchamcal injury.
Epp, /rarenes of Electric Ranges. Frames of ecce•
tele ramps dull he gronnd<J by any of the means
row led for in sections 2557 and 2559, or he may
8e wounded by connection to -he NroundcJ circuit
'onN 1;.1
Epi• Grounding Fqufpment to Circuit Conductor.
The gr,ynded sonic" tonduclar, on the su;tply side
O! YI< xrwe disconnecting m<am may be used far
01 "cling outer housing anA service equipmerlt. The
grounded. cfrcuft <onduclor on the lead side of the
aen•i" it,, oneeting means shall not be used for
grounding equ'pmlr cable armor, ar meal acewava
esprit scconven256O.nn paragraph a of section 2557;
and 'o
Bonding
2571. 'Hooding at Service EqufpmeoL Nh.re the
aoplJy fs coding
Ovr0h d ht .buho system the
eknrllra. tmuinultY of the 9,,unding circ nr for the
Idlowmg equipment and anclOsurra aha'1 be scored
by sena al the mean. pfven in tecuan 237.:
t"%
/7
63 ARTICLE 250
a. The service raceways or service cable armor ar
sheath;
b. All service equipment cncfosurcsronuining ser-
vice entrance conductors. including meter fittings,
boxes or the like, interposed in the service raceway
orarmor;
a Any conduit or armor which forms Part of the
grounding conductor to the service raceway.
2572. Means of Assuring Continuity. Electrical
continuity at service equipment shall be assured by
one of the following means:
a. Bonding equipment to the grounded service con-
ductor in a mawner provided in section 2613.
It. Threaded couplings and threadal bosses on en-
closures with joints made up tight where rigid con-
duit is involved.
I --
Threadless couplings made up light for elec-
trical metallic tubing.
d. Bonding jumpers meeting the other requirements
of his artic:e. Bonding Jumpers shall be used around
concentric or eccentric knockouts which are punched
or otherwise formed so as to impair file electrical con-
nection to ground.
e, Office devices (not locknuts and bushings)•ap-
proved for the purpose.
2573. Metal Armor or Tape of Scrvice Cable. With
service cable having an uninsulatcd grounded service
conductor in continuous electrical contact with its me-
tallic armor or tape, the metal levering is considered
to be adequately grounded.
2574. Voltages Exceeding I50 Volts. The electri-
cal continuity of metal raccttay or metal slteatlhed
Cable which contains any conductor of more than 150
volts to ground shall be assured by one of the meth-
ods specified in paragraphs b, c, d and a of section
2572, ar by one of the following methods:
a. Threadless fittings, made up tight, with conduit
or armored cable;
It. Two locknuts, one inside and one outside of
boxes and cabinets.
2575. Loosely -Jointed Metal Racosrys. EsPan-
aioo jotota and telescoping sections of raceways shall
be made electrically continuous by bonding Jumper
GROL•x DING 69
or other approved means. Metal trough raceways
used in connection with sound recording and repro-
ducing. made up in sections, shall contain aground.
leg conduelmr to which each section shall be bonded.
2576. Hazardous Locations, in hazardous loca-
tions, regardless of the voltage involved, the electrical
cons,
of metallic nc<way, boxes and the like,
¢hall be assured by one of the methods specified in
paragraphs b, d and a of section 2572.
2577. Bonding J ropen. Bonding jumpers shall
conform to the fallowing:
a. Material and Sue. Bonding jumpers shall be
of copper or other corrosion.resistant material and
shall be of sufficient rine to have current -carrying ea-
pactty nal less Than is required for the corresponding
grounding conductor;
b. Attachment. Bonding jumpers shall be attached
to cabinets and the like m a manner provided in sc<-
tion 2613• where used between grounding electrodes
or around anter meters and the like, thay shall be
attached in a manner Prm•tded for in section 2614.
Grounding Electrodes
2581. Water Pipe. A continuous metallic under-
grwnd water piping system shall always be used a,
the g,-aedmg electrode where such piping system I.
"'"I"b:e
258L Osler Arsilable Electrode, Where a water
rysum as described m ntthon 2.81 is not available,
the gn:und:ng con ,e rain r..ay b< made m any of the
fo0ow:ng:
-The metal frame of the building. If effectively
gr6urded,
IS A continuous metallic underground gas piping
.num;
a A Ictal m<taCic un4e1gmund piping system,
m<vl well w.rg, sad t!:e Lire,
2581 Made Eleetrodsa. Where-,letrMe, des<rihed
1n wctinm 2NI -425!!2 are not sva„aF.le, Ila
grqunding e!crr..de .till f'min mf a sirloin p�1e,
dicta ref. boned pace cr mtxr d;nre a -wooed /ar
the purRne sn4 rovf:wm.eg to the fnl:owmg require•
P,(nla'
ARTICLE 250
a. Plate Electrodes. Each Plate electrode shall
Present not less than 2 square feet of surface to late-
rfor soil. Electrodes of it.. or steel Plates shall be
at least ye. inch in thickness. Elce title 9 of non-ferrous
metal shall be at least 0.06 inch in thickness.
b. Pipe Electrodes. Electrodes of pipe or conduit
S
hall be not lass than 31 inch internal diameter, and
if of iron or steel shall be galvanized.
C. Rod Electrodes. Electrodes of rods of steel or
iron shall be at least ;i inch in dieohetcr• Approved
rods of non.ferrous materials or their approved equiv-
alent used for electrodes shall be not less than y inch
in diameter,
d, Installation. Electrodes should, as far as prae-
tcable, he Dnbedded below pernnncnt moisture level.
Except where rock bottom is encountered, pipes
or rods shall be driven to a depth of at least 8 feet
regardless of sire or number of electrodes used. Pipes
or rods celien hiss than standard cnnrnercial length
shall preferably be of ane piece. Such pipes or rods
shall have clean metal surfaces and shall not be cov-
ered n•ith paint, enamel or other pnarty conducting
materials. Where rock bots n is encountered at a
depth of Iess than 4 feet, electrodes shall be buried In
a horizontal trench, and if pipes or rods are used as
the electrode they shall eonhply with paragraphs b
and a of tills section and aliall not be less than 8
feet In length. Each electrode shall be separated at
least 6 feet from any other electrode, including those
used for signal circuits, radio, lightning rods, or any
other purpose.
2584. Resistance. Buried or driven electrodes shall,
if practicable, have a resistance to ground not to ex-
ceed 25 ohms- If the resistance is not as low as 25
ohms, two or more electrodes connected in parallel
Shot] be used,
Ccntimwur metallic un keno d air or car pp P og gnemr
in m.neral %ar,
a rcai+en<e to ar9unJ of leu than ,'ohms. ]final
4e. o of OuiLlina. ar.J tocol cultic „Jergr:.un4 Pmmg sya
tem., mesal well ea+in.a, end the life. hare, ec amoral, a cr to
race ,in or ...ally hal•+w r1 alma, h it eccmmrnJed char in
ttea where r it ne<e MN. ry ore hari<d ar driven n.h,docti.k.h
fcr ¢roundm¢ interior whin¢ gnemr, aJJilivml erounJr h
v <onvauane
to
a rynem arwn.l cenducmr Le PhcN cn rbc dn-
mtunon <' coir. It i+ ala rn + oJN that n fe elccuvJe
¢.9andr when ionillN, and peri9iva11Y allevarJ�, �e cited for
rYlalan<e.
GROUNDING 71
2585. Railway Traeka. Rails or other grounded
conductors of electric railway circuits shall not be
used as a ground for other than railway lightning
arresters and railway equipment, conduit, armored
cable, metal raceway, and eh< like, if other egeclive
grounds are available; mid in nu case shall such rails
or other grounded conductors of railway circuits be
used for grounding interior wiring sysunu other than
those supplied frons the railway circuit itself.
2186. Use of Lightning Rods. Lightning rod con-
ductors and driven pipes, rods or other electrode,
used for grounding lightning rod c, 31.11 not be used
for grounding wiring sysleuls, equipment and the like.
Grounding Conductor
2591. Material. The material for the grounding
conductors shall be a, follow,:
a. For System or Common Grounding Conductor.
The Recording condull"I o1 a wring system shall ba
of copper or atter mrrusinrrresistant material. The
conductor may b< solid or stranded, insulated or bare.
Except in cases of bus -bars, the grounding conductor
ahsll be without Joint or, splice t'nroughom its length.
IF the grounding conductor i, nut of copper, its elec-
trical resistance Drr linear (sof shall not exceed, and
its tensile alrength shall nut be !ea than that of the
allowable COPPe. <onone or for such a purpose.
b. For Conductor Enclosures and Equipment
Only. The grounding conductor for equipment and
for conduit and other metal raceuaya or
renclosures
for conductor, may he a conductor of copper or other
eorrosice.r<sisant maanal, stranded or solid, in.
sul.ed or hart, a bus -has or a rigid Conduit, steel
pipe or <Iertricai metallic tubin, except that under
canditmns favorable to corrosgion a grounding con
doctor
usedr<r or other corrosion-rststant materiai
,hal
2$92. Imtallatfen, A Reminding conductor, Yea 4
or larger, ...Y be attached to the surface on which it
i. peri<d enhout Ibe use of knobs, tube, or insu!.wrs.
It need not bare lgelectimn mdeaa expmaad to avert
mrcdanipl injury, A No. 6 grounding wndu<mr,
vrhhrh a Tree from exposure sat m<chan:aal injury,
m¢y be run along the .octose of tae. bm.dmg tom
sussgtwt wrUn:ut metal corenag or proteaoo, it it
3,4/
.A
yt
73 ARTICLE 230
armor. Grounding conductor amatler roan rv` 6
shall be in conduit, electrical metallic tubing or cable
armor. Metallic enclosures for grounding conductors
MY be continuous from the point of attachment to
cabinet or equipment to the graunJing electrode, and
.hall be securely fastened to the ground clamp or
ting. {Vhert rigid metallic conduit or steel pipe is
used as . grounding conductor, the fnstall.tion shall
amply with the requirements Gf Article 346; where
electrical metallic login. is used, the installation shall
comply with the requirements of Article 348.
2393. Dirett-CurenI Chea le, The carrying tap-
of
the grounding conductor for x direct<utrent
supplysystem or Fen<rator shall be not less than that
of the largest conductor supplied by the system, ex-
eept where the grounded chcuit conductor is a neutral
derived from a balancer winding or , balancer set
Protected in accordance with requirement of para•
graph a of section 4454, the sire of the grounding con-
ductor shall not be less than that of the neutral co
n•
ductor. The grounding conductor shall in no case
2594. 'Alternating -Current Circuits and Service
Equipttunt The size of the grounding conductor for
an alternating -current system, a common grounding
conductor, or a grounding conductor (or aervrce equip-
ment shall be not less than given in the following
t.ble, ,,cert that where connected to electrode, as
described in station 2583, the Rrounding conductor
need not be larger than No. 6 copper or its equivalent:
Sura a, G........ Co.....
Size of lax For wiring
q.r SrnittSraem and1. FerSmice Por Senitt
Cmduemr er yqutralert Jenice Equiammt EOuir•mmt
for Panikkd Cmdutton .,W,—.t Orly Only
Ei....;1 l
per Conduit MOa01e
ere or Plpe Tubi,
2 or .mag. N8 tt.,e) (Iurbl
1 oro 6 51
W °v`o00oa°atow,oro c.u. i ; its
Or. J50,000 [0 600.000 Cat. 0 3 2
Orrr 600.CW to 1 100.000 C.J[. m 1 2
0— I.IOO,aoo Ctit. 000 1 a
GROUNDING rJ
Coad l alp, w rleaMd mwalge tabtva cannot M vnd
alae. y�[fir neund:a` condcnor far wir:n. n:ra See prra•
�• 1 offer .591. {Yoe tiara apply huh w Wrr sad b•
md mvductar,.
2595. Interior Raceway and Equipment The size
o! the grounding conductor for conduit cable 'heath
or armor, and other metal n<ewaya or enclomr<s for
conductors, and for equipment ;haU be not less than
given in the following table• excepe that where the.
nected to electrodes as described rn section 2587 the
grounding conductor need not be larger than Tie. 6
copper or hie equivalent:
P.O.. se Son., of
A wmui< Orncur- Bus a Gaovrea
erne Deme In Circuit aoornna CaB1eadW
All
v/ Roaip�.ent, tbn� «Pule M, Ile
Conduit, eta.. Nee W T.bi.
Eased+ns, (Aspen,) Nq lung) (toe
13 16• yS
30 le y SS
40 12
60 10
100400
g
600 2 1 N
800 0 )< l
1000 001 2
1200 000 1 2
•P.m;aLt'r ndr •hon per rt an yprea.d ub4 ruemblr.
2596• Portable eV Pawl ., Pgoipmevt For
grounding ytruble or pendent egmpmenq the con•
dactnn of which are protected by furca or circuit.
teeak<r rased Or vet ;the
<aceedmg 15 amre
pe.,
Ho. IB <oypr wire may be nasi. Cri.d.ew" of Nm.
16 or Ig copper, whkh are used Ice grounding portable
equipment ,hall be part of an apProeed 6eibl' cord
■u<mbly. Fer groun6:ng Nxtab!e er pendent a.1tai"p•-
mrnt protected at inert IF.:n 13 amperes, tl:. table In
veru:. 2595 .hail be fo::uwed
2397. Oatgne Ug6dng. Wat'd een•qurtevttar-
givg metal Par. 01 wain' fghenF systema may ba
ban"tnaaher by a No. 1/ tnndoctar pr.tetled from
aaut
taa 2555 1. icnr)'adqt, oiaround
rounddahe
e,umP,
lyiwah sec -
74 ARTICLE 250
2598. Common Raceway, A grounding cendador
mayhe run in the lame metal raceway with other
conductors of the System to which it is mnaected
2599. Continuity. No automatic cutout or switch
.hall be placed in the grounding conductor of an is,.
feriae wiring system unless the opening of the cutout
or awilch disconnects all sources of energy,
Grounding Conductor Connections.
2611. Grounding Conductor to Raceway. The point
of Connection of the grounding condo«or to interior
metal raceways, cable armor and the like shall be as
near 23 practicable to the source of supply and shall
be so chosen that no raceway or cable armor is
grounded through a run of smaller size than is called
(or in section 2595.
gr251Z Gannedetion 1t ntilettelettro- tod<Elshatrodll e long
ed as follow.:
a. To Water Pipes. System or common grounding
conductors shall be attached to a water pl," system
on the street side of the water meter or on a mud
water pipe of adequate currcnt•carying capacity as
near as Practicable to the wafer service entrance to
the buildrne. Where practicable, the point of attach•
ment shall be accessible. If the point of attachment
is not on the atr<et aide of the water meter, the water
piping aYstem shall be made electrically continuous by
banding together all part, between the attachment and
the street aide of the water meter or the pipe entrance
which are liable to become diwCnnected, m at meters
and service unions Equipment may be ;,at
to
a cold water pipe near the equipment
A To Ga. Pipes The point of
attachment of a
grounding conductor bs gas piping shall always be on
the re Pr clic of the gas meter, and shall be accessible
where practicable.
I
To Other El<etrodea The grounding conductor
.hall ha attached to other electrodes permitted in sea
Lines 2582 and 2583 at a point which will'aaame a
permanent ground Where practicable the,-poioV of
attachment shall be accessible.
2611 Attachment to dredta sad ltgdrment The
grounding conductor, bond, or bonding Jumper .lull
be attached to circuits, conduits, cabinets, equipment,
GROUNDING yy
and the like, which arc to be grounded, by mean. of
suitable lug., pressure connectors, clamps, or other
approved means, except that connections which de.
pend upon solder shall not be used
2514. Attachment to Electrodes he grounding
Conductor shall be attached to the grounding electrode
by means of (1) an approved bolted clamp of east
bronze or brass or of plain or malleable cast iron, or
(2) a pipe fitting, plug, or other approved device,
screwed into the pipe or into the tilting, or (3) other
equally substantial aftProved mean,. 1'ht grounding
eonduaor shall be attached to the grounding fitting
by meso, of suitable IuR", prcssurt eonnectan, clan:".,
or other apprmed mean,, ....pt that connection;
which depend uyon solder shall not be used Not
more tlun one conductor shall be ConnectedcOnne<d to the
grounding O'elrede by a afoot clamp or frttin.. sto-
les the 1..P or by is of a tyle aPPm,,d for
ouch use.
2615. Oround Clamp". For the grounding eondue-
lor of a whin}: system she ileet-m<la4rinp tyre of
ground clamp . nut considered adequate unless it has
n rigid metal base stated on the water pipe or other
electrode .rad the strap is e( such material and dimer.
.,.no that it is nal liable to stretch during or it,,
installation.
Ground damp, for vas mi esm, rat. At., 'M cn9arr,
Grua. or 1<aJ IeaC+•+IJ rrereralJ In 1 nister. J throe ter
air an aloof, n moa he�l wad®tlr is el ......bw
4ov and ao dedsned,y w amid n:«aav,<d alter 9s, mpr.
?416, Protection of Attachment Ground clamp"
or other fittings, unless approved for general me with-
out protcttion, .lull be Drotected Irom ordimry me•
chariot in)ury (I) by being Pliced where they are
not liable to be damaF<J or (2) by being enclosed in
meal, wood, or equivalent Protective covering.
705y Clean Sictacr. If a ran.conductive protm-
five coaling such as pain ar enamel, is used on the
equipment conduit, couplings or fittings, rvch cm.6.8
shai be removed from thrnd, and other contact sur -
fans is order to incur- a good <1,,,,k., c...."ioa.
Inrriment Trasufm
orer", Ratays, Me.
2621. atrwnent InTrondorm., Circuits The am.
oedary circum 01 c...... and potential faatrumees
342
B-.
A
i9
26 ARTICLE 254
transformers shall be grounded if the primary wind.
ings are connected to circuits of 300 volts or more to
ground, and, if on switchboards, shall be grounded
irrespective of voltage.
2622.Instrument Transformer Cases. Cases ar
frames of instrument transformers shall be grounded,
except that cases or frames of current transformers.
The primaries of which ausedre notc. over 150 volts to
T,
to meters,tcneed not be grounded to supply cur -
2623. Cases of Instruments, Meters and Relays—
Operating Voltage 750 or Leas. Instruments, meters
and relays which operate with windings or working
parts at 750 volts or less shall be grounded as fol-
lows:
a. Not on Switchboards. Instruments, meters, and
relays not located
soon switchboards. which operate
with windings or working parts at 300 volts or more
to ground and accessible to other than qualified per -
ns, shall have the cases and other exposed metal
parts grounded;
Is. On Dead Front Switchboards. Instruments.
meters and relays (whether operated from current and
pomnual transformers, or connected directly in the
iiicuit) on switchboards having no live pans on the
front of the panels shall have the cases grounded;
C. On Liva Front Switchboards. Instruments, met-
ers and relays (whether operated from current and
Potential transformers, or connected directly in the
circuit) on switchboards having exposed live parts on
the front of panels shall not have their cases ground-
ed Mats of insulating rubber or other suitable floor
insulation, shall be provided for the operator if the
voltage to ground exceeds 150.
2624. Cases of Instrgments, Meters and Relays—
Operaung Voltage Over 750. Where instruments,
meters and relays have current-carryinR parts over
750 volts to ground, they shall be isolated by elevation
or protected by suitable barriers, grounded metal or
insulating covers or guards. Their uses shall not be
grounded, except as follows:
a. In electrostatic ground detectors the internal
ground segments of the instrument are connected to
GROUNDING 77
theinstrument case and grounded; the ground det—
tar shall be isolated by elevation.
2625. Inatrumcat Grounding Conductor. The
grounding con4uctor for secon(lary circuits of instru-
ment transformers and for instrument cases shall not
besm.IlTr than No. 12, if of copper, or, if of other
metal, Thati have equal conductance.
- Lightning Arresters
2631. On Secondary Services, 750 Volts or Lena
Where a lightning arrester is installed on a secon-
dary service, the connections to the service conduc-
tors and to grounding conductor shall be as short as
practicable. The grounding conductor may be (1) the
grounded service conductor, or (2) the tomman
gro"1"' 'onductuq ar (3) the service equipment
grounding conductor, or (4) Is a,parate grounding
conductor. The bonding' os. grounding conductor shall
be of copper mat smaller it
No. 14 or of equivalent
corroram.makunl material.
2632. On Primary C'wcuhs, The grounding con-
ductor of a lightning amster yrafeen., a tra.110ma r
which supplies a secondary 8istribution system may
be in ter...ra"nd as falows:
a Metallic Inert eetioa, A metallic intereoa-
necti0n may Lc made to the seecndary neutral pro -
lido that, m addnroa to the direct grounding con-
nection at the artesite:
1. The Rr...ded eondaeter of the secondary has
ei+ewhere a Rraundmg ce.nectiun to a continuous
Initial n: urd<rground water piymR s stem. In urban
water pipe ares where there ate at least taut —I -
pipe canrrcnans on the ".Tutt'! an4 net less than lour
such conneclicna•in each mile of neutral, the metallic
mterc,:nne.tna maY be made to Il:e secondary neu-
Ira1 wish ora—unit a( I- direct ground,eg eenne'd u.,
n the arrester.
Z. The grounded etmduttar of the ateandary Tay.,
Is part of a multi•grwuled neural system, o!
which the pnrsry ecu!ral I: at least Lsr ground
eorneeuam m etch rade of tine is addition to a
geea.:d a each sTrwice.
b. Through Spark O•R Where the
<emherwser<.< adala
du4 9usuh imecaenecioa,atgar
ui8gyd•
ARTICLE 260
if made, shall be through a .,ark g.p IlavinR a 60-
cycle breakdown voltage of at cast twice the primary
circuit voltage blit not necessarily more than 15 kg
and there shall be at least one other ground on the
grounded conductor of the secondary at least 20 feet
distant from the lightning arrester grounding c1cc-
trod c.
e. By Special Permission. Except as above pro-
vided, interconnection of file arrester ground and the
secondary neutral may be made only by special per-
mission.
ARTICLE 280—LIGHTNING ARRESTERS
Industrial Stations
2801. Where Required. Lightning arresters shall
be Provided in industrial stations in locations where
thunder sienna arc frequent sad adequate protection
against lightning is not otherwise provided.
For liehudua .rroten in knardaus hnativar, tee Article 300.
2802. Number Required. A lightning arrester shall
be connected to tacit ungrounded overhead conductor
entering or leaving the station, except that where
there is more than one circuit, a single set of arresters
may be installed on the station bus if means are pro-
vided to protect circuits that may remain disconnected
from the bus.
2803. Where Connected. The arrester shall be con-
nected on the line side of all connected station apps -
.to..
Other Occupancies
2811. Utilisation Equipment. Lightning arresters
installed for the Protection of utiliralinn equipment
may be installed either inside or outside the building
or cuci_urc camsming the equipment to be protected.
Arresters. unless tsulmed by elevation or made other-
wise in:rcessible to unqualified persons, shall be en-
closed, and d the operating voltage of the circuit ex-
ceeds 750 volts between conductors they shall be in.
accessible to unqualified persons.
General
2821. Location—Indoors. Arresters installed in-
doors shall be located well away from other equip-
LIGIITNING ARRESTERS re
Intent. passageway. and combustible pans of build -
Ings, and if containingflat shall be separated front
other equipment by walla meeting the requirements
of section 4542.
2822. Location—Outdoors. If ..resters containing
oil are located outdoors, provision shall be made to
drain away any accum)ulm;on of H.
Oil
�EurtcdhanJ d nKr oat bre J,nae.•mnr t b- .,,,hethe > rJ
It tinder er .her shs,.hrne water,si u a d<rrh of uTerJ
iaeber.
2823. comeerion"Int and MaterbaL The eon.
sections between lite arrester and the line wire or
bus, and bet%lctn arrester mad ground shall be of cop.
Per wire or uLle or the eguiraltnt, and• except as
provided on air "'ary seniles in section 2rU 1, shall
not be smiler than N...6, .,ad shall be nude as short
and as .insight as PraclicaLle, avoiding as far as Dos-
sbble all bends and turns, especi.11y slurp bends.
2824. Insuiath"' Lightning -protection ac......im
such as gap electrodes, and Nuke cod. it used, shall
have an ineulatioo Iron ground or from otlwc con-
doctors at least egnal to the insulation required at
Other Points of the circuit.
48y5, IwladnR Switch. If ieolattnR switebe, or
d;uonnecting devices are used they shill w�itlutand,
in full open Position, a voltaRe test between live parts
10 per tent to excess of the maximum voltage test
they will withstand to ground
M26, Grounding. Lightning arresters shall be
grounded to the manner prcsctbed in Article 250.
343
s0 ARTICLE ]N
CHAPTER 3. WIRING METHODS AND
MATERIALS
ARTICLE 300—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR WIRING METHODS
Oe premiac, where a c,,No.., und,nn... d melaille water•
.
DipinR elwark aynem is rte an,lable v a A tot inx tleetrade
Dapenwrd where it ie vol nrutimble orherwiae to acture a Hound af
dose. corn cinpplu; re hot.- tne� lar the
urt
voice
chi eof IwI.iM�relnnBa�maetnummh evmJNw
wiring sYnem.
u.
Prov
sions of
302 to
20 inclusne. shall eApply lto all wiring in to latio s,
except for remote•comrol, low-ener6ry power and sig-
nal systems as provided in Article 725, and commum.
cation systems as provided in Article Soo.
The prasifinns of Ilia snide are not InUp d to apply le the
oil, hich loan an enua<at to.
of east.......oh as
moron, ma, re", cw and the' like.
tied002'
in Clnpter d ay bolus d forrlMltoaesfnot "Cecil.
fng 600, unless specifically limited in some article of
Chapter 3, and may be used for voltages over 600
where specifically Permitted elsewhere in this code.
3003. Protection Against Corrosion and Meehan,
Cal Injury. Conductors and equipment shall be pro-.
t<cted against corrosion and mechanical injury in ac.
eordance with the following:
a. Corros,oa Metal raceways, Cable armor, boxes,
cabinets and all metallic elbows, couplings, and fit-
tines, unless made of corrosion -resistant material,
shall be suitably Protected against corrosion insiN
and outside (except threads at joints) by a coaling of
approved corrosion -resistant material such as zine,
cadmium, or enamel; except that ferrous raceways,
fittings and boxes protected from corrosion solely by
enamel may be used only indoors and in occupancies
not subject to severe corrosive mflucnces.
Sre 'Hint 7162 for conduit, and sntian 3433 far ebInk.l
meullie robios.
Yea<pxki^r Phnta, gnnnin, hide «liars, mrin, rooms,. sue
h an ferub,er Cama, ails Hawse, came chemical work., til
re6nn,n, pvlu mill; vdgaer m;lb, roonJ hours%, some .code., ancoyd
retire tlanJriana a re �Arl db � xcvranNsa Calc%% a<rrrc
• r bt .mews
GENERAL al
b. Moehardeat Injury I1 .object to mechanical in.
jury, conductors shall be adequately protected
3004. Secured In Placa, liacenays, cable assent.
blies, boxes, cabinets and fittings, shill, unless ocher•
wise Droxided, be securely fastened in place. Race-
way. and cable aaeirbliu slsall be mcChaniwllY so-
cared to Loxes. fitting-, cabineta and other enclosures,
—,Pit.
provided for non.metallic boxes in section
3710.
3005. Rona Contimsens, Raceways and cable as.
aemblirs shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and
from fitting to fitting• Conductor. shall be Cortina•
ovs from outlet to outlet and, except as permitted for
m:t.fary gutters in section 3748, and for "mitteya to
section 3625, there shall be no syhce or tap within the
raceway itself.
least33t0six rout ofgtiree o conductor 11 t Outlets.
ts. Act
outlet and switch Point for the making up of joint.
or the connection of fixture, or devices, except Calera
conductors are ,mended to loop wiliwut joints through
hmDhOldell, receptacle, and afmfl.r devices
3007. Rax". at Outlet" r-mPI .1 Per in
.sellers 3369, a box ,hall be installed at each outlet,
switch,w
or junction point of landau, electrical metallic
t.bmg.
Unfaec metal raceway, armored cable, or noo-
m<talbe -bathed table, and At .,, curler And switch
Omnt of rxcaled knob -and• work
30084 no" and Fittings Whcrs Conductors Am
(!,ought Out. Except as Provided iq s«rico 3009, x
Ec: ar luminal fitting banag a aryarately bushed
I,o:e for each conductor shall be used wherever a
change fs made from conduit. <Iectrkal where tub -
fall, nan•mclonic ah—had cable, armored cable and
...face meul raceway wiring l0 wiring or to
maaaled-kneh-amlauh< vcrek "Pers g
A fittsng used for
eh,a pvrpou dull eengln nes to
Oa cr optic". sad
shall
rat be used at 11 Cori outlet.
1000. Rmbing In Ller of Sox or Filling A bu-h-
in9 maY be used fn Ifeu of a bc, cr lermtnal icing
at ends of omduil or <fenrcal meal!{r tabacg where
conduuua (cave the conduit a teb;na
awiteh!— a a.f,.Im more than 4 condu bhlnd a
L.h leve
Z2 ARTICLE site
the conduit or tubing at control apparatus or in sim-
ilar locations, in which case the conductors shall be
bunched, taped and painted with insulating paint.
Such a busking shall be of the insulating type except
for lead -covered conductors.
3010. Through Studs, Joists and Rafters. When.
,n exposed or concealed n•ork, conductors in insulat-
ing tubes or cables are run through bored holes in
studs, joists or similar %vood members, holes shall be
bored at theapproximate Centel' of wood members,
or at least 2 inches from the nearest edge. Where
there is no Objection because of %weakening the build.
Ing structure, armored or non-memllic sheathed cable
may be laid in notches in the studding or joists if
the cable at those points is Protected against the driv.
ing of nails into it by hawing the notch covered with
a uildsteel Plate at last 1/16 inch in thickness before
bing finish is applied.
3011. Conductors of Different Systema. ConduC-
lors of signal or radio systems shall not occupy the
same enclosure with conductors of light or power Sys-
tes except as Permitted (O
mr elevators in sections
6216 and 6217; for sound recording in section 640S;
for remote -control low -en Power and signal cio-
suits iO section 7292; and communication system in
lapsnof 1000 volts orris
matmay oto cc electPY ric
discharge
closure as file branch circuit conductors. Conductors
of light and poser syat,,Us of 600 volts or 1—may
occupy the same enclosure, without regard to whether
the individual circuits are aIlcrnatillg-current or direct-
current, only if Al conductors are Insulated for the
maximum voltage of any conductor within the In
closure. Conductors of light and power systema of
over 600 volts shalt not OCCUPY the same enclosure
With conductors of light and Power Systems of 600
volts or less, Control, relay and ammeter conductors
used in connection with any motor cur starter may
OCCUPY the Hanle enclosure as the motor circuit con-
ductors.
3012. Number of Conductors in Raceway. In gen-
eral the percentage of the total interior cross-sectional
area of a raceway to he occupied by conductors shall
not be more than will permit a ready installation or
withdrawal of the conductors and dissipation of the
GENERAL e.3
heat gentnted without injury to the insulation of the
conductors. See the fallowing sections of this code:
conduit, sectio
n 3466; electrical metallic tubing, 3486;
surface metal nceavys, 3524; underfloor raceways,
3545; cellular metal door rscewaya, 3564; wireways,
3624; auxiliary gutters, 3.45; theaters, 5212; ai na,
6021-d; elevators, 6214; and sound recording, 6403 anA
6404.
3013. Inserting Conductors in Raetways. Race
Ra.
Mays, except those used for C -Posed wml and having
a removable cover or capping. shall first be installed
as a complete rauway system without the Conduct.,,,Conduuors shall not be ins<rIed until all mechanical
work on tate building which is liable to injure the con-
ductors has been completed, as far as possible. Pull
wires, if used, slsall not be installed until the raceway
G
systemin plaF`capllitC. tale, or an llitC. tale, or anapproved
compomy be used as a lubricant in inserting
conductors in raceways. Cleaning agents or lubri.
ventshaving a deleterious effect on conductor co,er.
lmis .half sot be used.
3014. SuOFarting Vertical Conducts". in Racet".Ya
Conductors m vertical raceways seal be supported at
intervals not greater than those specified in the fol.
lowing table;
No
Is m Nn 0_�_�_sa arsater shin 100 fee
Na N rp 50. N__pol ar<awr sbw 90 test
730000 G Y. to 730.000 G Y..___nnl a.rxer lbav 6e. tee
seamaN,NO lG __...-ora Renu shw 30 ire
stew, C Y. m 7]a0N C. Mnntrr lb.. 10 fen
Abate 730AN C 7t._._ __rte pester lh.o ]f Inc
The following methods of supporting cables arc
recommended:
a, lly ci.mping device. cenetructeal Of or employ.
{rte insulating sledges im<rttd in the ends of the coo•
drat, 1Vith cables having --iAed cambric ar then
in.', i ... lalton it may also be nttosary to
damp the conductor.
6 Sy inserting boxes at the required imemsla In
wbfrh huulating supporta are installed and a<ured in
a aaliafartary manor, to withstand the wefaht of the
randu<lma attached there lo, the bI... being provided
with —c-
344-11
Pr ARTICLE IN'
e. In junction boxes, by deflecting the cables not
less thin 90 degrees and .,lying them horizontally
to a distance not less than twice the diameter of the
cable, the cables .gins carriedon two or more insu-
lating supports, and additionally secured thereto by
tic wires ff desired.
3015. Raceways Exposed to Different Tempera.
tures. If portions of an interior raceway system are
exposed to widely different tcnlperaturn, as in re-
frigerating or cold -storage plants, provision shall be
made to prevent circulation of air front a warmer to
a colder section through the raceway.
3016. Electrical Continuity of Metal Raceways and
Enclosures. Interior metal mcasays, cable armor,
and other metal endosarcs for «mducters, shall bo
metallically joined together into a cuntinuons dec-
trial conductor, and shall he so connected to all
boxes. fittings and cabinets as to provide effective
electrical continuity.
3017. Grounding Metal Enclosures. iafetal mco-
ways, table armor and fittings shall be grounded if
and asprescribed in Article 250.
3016. Allemating-Current Systems in Metal En.
closmcs. Where run in metal r-eng or cable armor;
ur
Micro a current of more than 50 ampere: enters
a metal enclosure; the conductors of circuit, operat-
ing on alternating -current shall be so arranged
as to avoid overheating of the metal by induction.
If the capacity of a circuit is such that it is intprac-
tieahle to run all conductors in one enclosure• addi-
tional enclosures may he used provided the conduc-
tor in any one enrl ze are balanced in size and
include one from each pbasa
Induced turn.. in an endo.... can be molded by so group
fig the andbo.,
in cue m<lourc .bee the corn.. in ave dba•
don wall be aubri-11.11y equal to tha menu. in the opPaalte
dwndua
In the cage of c mollyi.x vacuum car it .... ie dixharae
RtbtinR eYe.ma car sato, n \rat PPanl... and undenPlaalrf
eannnms rermnwd LY srtnrns ]gala w 3u+ i elusive, .he cur•
rents tarried I:Y the nndu<u:re are so mall .hat a sinRµ< con•
Jc<1..r may be It., in a —W, Me— or able armor ilhout
e:u„n11,r.nLle 1r.:n: indnrti..::.
w'h... the educwn .f a cir<ui. mass ..rough individual Iwlra
in the all of a metal cabinet. the einl of inJucl;an .y be
livi m11N by culling Blots in 1be .:cul Let.... the !ndiridual
b.W lhravab wLi<b 11,e mnductara of the circuit mass, r by
.... At she eanducwn in the circuit divest, an .mingling
GCNERAL N
bk k, is<d m cmrt a bole in the mr.l cabinet eufndntll larr4
1 dl tb nnduttera 1 tM <r ,i, and Dr ,d,na iv4,eiduat
hpin a the smua.ing U. for its slyarau canductars.
3019. Underground Runs. Conductors run under-
ground shall comply with the provisions of sections
23,1, 2312 and 2313 as far as mechanical protection is
concerned.
3020. Wiring In Vib tflating Ducts. Electrical in-
eallatiom shall be so made .hal the possible sprad of
fire through Erre-stopped partitions, hollow spaces, of
was a or fire partitions, vertical shafts, ventilating or
air-eonda,oning
it is reduced to a minimum. No
wiring system of any type shall be installed in ducts
for dust, loose stock or vapor removal. Where it is
necessary 90 run a wiring system through air -condi.
tion... ducts or plenum chamh.rc r5,. wi,ino mrthnd
of circuits of such wiling systema shall be so located
:hat it will not be neceatary to install motors or con•
trol e.uipment m the doth, except for temperature
and humidity control. Raceways shall not interfere
with the operation of automatic fire dampers in ducts
Ce aeration hm!d he env.. b lanai.. and mn.acdon of
r._” N umdait from tmtaaun <Larg<a.
ARTICLE 310—CONDUCTORS
3101. General The intent and purpose of the fol-
lowing ru!ea is to provide that —doctors shall have
meclunical strength, Insulation, and carrying capacity
adequate for the P.111 car eonditine, under which
they are to be used.
TM P.wivirs d ,bb arti<!e a r,<e 'r.•ss,d.d to a^Dly to
dmdu<w.a wtiib Icm u u.R+i un el a...<-zenl ouch ed
m.ea < wubn gad the Iu<. ur .E.rh aae e,eaiJN
W d�..twn in th:r cw:<.
3102. Conductor Inadatfen. Candccenra shall be
insulated, eaelpl alien uniaaulal<d a:ndulWn ace
fir J,
perm'dud in the cod1. Cendunur in5ufa-
Uoae as spe.ifie•J in the 4:1!a w.in4 tC.n may L1 use -
for ,n 01 the wirinN mel!'.ods re<ngniied in Ihia
chapter, except se niherwive pravul<:I f,r in me table
or the ccees fO:!nwing, rr car a1,e ire aPcr:Led in
'his
lade, They are su+able fcr bl'1 1111. unless usher.
rine sPlliud.
ARTICLE 310
Latey Rubber
RU
fag.
G< al use.
T-1,
T—
O�<at.
\came
1
90C
=id
PNr1aNM
Thamonlutic
T
TemnR
T2..
14
No. H w 1/0 1-1-1-
RuLLer.CmerN
RF W
GOC
Fiatnre wiring.
Fi:uure wire—
NeItE<rm�f
1+AF
Llmnr.f to ]ens V.
F.lid r
NFJJ
00{{{{;;
Fi.mrc wiring. and u per.
Sanded
vinh<arby<1pnid
tvai<a tui avnable !or
IIGF
muted in aeetim ]IOJ.
A.M.,.0—A
FF01
CIC
Fi.unn wiring.•
Flavum 1Vir
TA
I+OF
I. to J<nl V.
Fl -N,
FF•Ls
3.
Flamm wiring.
51nndmg
HGF
Thermmnlastio
Vaniabcd
caber Tid ore
T,
ViC
i.OP
m W b, Ztu 3109. �•
S.—d<d
isSF
than No. 0 by gpnid ary
mw,en
Asbenos a,:d
Vgmi,hN
Tbrrmnrlanit
1I0C
Dry luafwm telt.
Cambric
Wier-Flau4br
TFF
IaOF
Pluton cairn[.
Suandi.a
zmF
tun 1--d...
cam �yN
ikat
Aden. gvd
VansuhN
Naoiom.
CF
9oC
Fiamre wiring.
Fiamre wi,.
FDrY
19+F
Limited to JOG V.
Adeq CmmN
CSC
FixI,— wiring.
111.1141i:wn1,
AF
252E
LimitN to JW V.
Fiamre wine
JIM
i,o, lar ludo 10
cap .]a Limit to! G V
Cade Rubbn
R
POr.
Gm -1 use.
AA
2.0
392F
l+GP
IImVAalo..t
All
2$C
Genera! me.
RubLer
IOiF
Jloi,mr
Ae
HALL<r
L",
AW
I+OF
en
Geral rue and wa
locations.
Latey Rubber
RU
GOC
G< al use.
1.5F
termiu.m.
a+OF
Dry larallms mfr. open
Platy• SD
90C
e. vee
Thamonlutic
T
BAC
14
No. H w 1/0 1-1-1-
umnucacnrN conJucwra.
140F
DN wok No, 1110
2.W0,W9 C.V.
Ihy krat.vs "1" Orn
NeItE<rm�f
i14F
General use and wet
Rnis.nt
Tw'
W.
.1. 1+ 1. +/0 Inciu<irr.
Th<rmaplank
vinh<arby<1pnid
tvai<a tui avnable !or
,all
0-
�: 111.
uw5ma racd:Gma.
The ruLLrr imnLlmm w:i::Jr tbn,e made from natural and
ar'IM :N• LLrr, awr,,PDrr..e
.000
2.Th
k
TA
<::Tmya1 nmY.rawrn brow
M ,:wJ is na rutaitatis car
Swi.bbard wiring only.
Nbn
19901
CONDUCTORS fly
Vaniabcd
V
PSC
Ihy Igimnr ...1 smaller
Gmtrie
isSF
than No. 0 by gpnid ary
mw,en
Asbenos a,:d
Vgmi,hN
AVA
1I0C
Dry luafwm telt.
Cambric
330F
Ad<rtn and
AVL
zmF
tun 1--d...
cam �yN
Aden. gvd
VansuhN
AVO
lautiunr ode.
Camb,4
FDrY
thyIxai,un+a.I,. Not fn
Aib,s
A
2..0
a...it .- In ru<wa1,s.
JIM
i,o, lar ludo 10
cap .]a Limit to! G V
Jho I«aticnr Cnlr. Ops.
A".
AA
2.0
392F
:loco Nal loo [ I uM
Io nnw�ra eNy_tur_lud<
nn Irodcm cul>. Na for
Aabab At 2])P �ri.aicr I�adr stn ac.iilln
•WualuF L, W la 1. V
AIA 1250 ort Iwadcm nub. Onv
A"- AIA
In � �' Na t<+ba IerdluMla
PaO�
atC
id
F"M ud �'a ue by s< ch
1.5F
termiu.m.
Dry larallms mfr. open
Platy• SD
90C
wtioetemo<nw.e� wrti •up
Dutiful
XF
les rlheu rrea,.n1<d label
umnucacnrN conJucwra.
SRW
WC
Ihy krat.vs "1" Orn
NeItE<rm�f
i14F
rme only.
^hev cal*
w`ab.rpnof WP
'
W.
I20F
vinh<arby<1pnid
tvai<a tui avnable !or
uw5ma racd:Gma.
The ruLLrr imnLlmm w:i::Jr tbn,e made from natural and
ar'IM :N• LLrr, awr,,PDrr..e
aid vibrr < :at:gal:. maler,aia
.51 lir inaulanm
, I�JC gfHFs gnJ race
Amb i<mnruurea.
mc)
gM.utJ
<::Tmya1 nmY.rawrn brow
M ,:wJ is na rutaitatis car
5145
,-I
-0
L�
.2,X0
W ARTICLE 310
Fm cze of mndadm, r,tnani,A Isua�iercn v 0J10j.aladna
omerintz. and [err wmtruc'w. dcwb,
a. Temperature LimimHoro. No conductor shall
be used under such conditions that its temperature,
even when carrying current, will exceed the tempera-
ture specified in the table for the type of insulation
Involved.
4 Wet Loadona Inaolakd conductors used un-
derground, in concrete slabs or other masonry in
direct contact with earth, to wet Iocatians, or `h..
condensation or accumulation of cunisture within the
raceway Is likely to occur, shall be moisture -resistant,
rubber -covered (type RW); moiriure-resistant, ther-
moplastic covered (type TW); lead -covered; or of a
type approved for the purpose.
unless
hof a t1Pr aptMc,4,.Us�,,,.v.dmfariruit, bow'. she earth
a Corrosive CondlHotu Conductors eaposed to
oils, greases, vapors, gases,- fumes, liquids or other
substances' having a deleterious effect upon the con-
ductor or insulation shall be of a type approved for
the purpose.
3103.Minimum Sire of Conduclora. Conductors,
whether solid or stranded, shall not be smaller than
No. "'except for prinung press control circuits; as
provided for flexible cords 'n section 4006; for fixture
F- in section 4142; for fractions' horsepower motors
in section 4312; for cranes and hoists in section 6112;
for elevator control and signal circuits fnsection 6205;
for machine tools in section 6721; and forremote-
control , low-energy power and signal circuits in sec-
tion 7263.
3104. Stranded Conductors. Except when used as
bus -bars, conductors No. 6 and larger, . installed in
raceways, shall be stranded.
3105. Conductor In Multiple. Conductors in sizes
1/0 to 500,000 c.m., inclusive, may be run in multiple
provided they are of the same length and have the
same circular -mil area and type of insulation. Not
more than three No. 1/0, four No. 2/0 or five Nos.
3/0 to 500,000 c— conductors, inclusive, may be run
in multiple. Except as herein provided, conductors
shall be run in multiple only by special permission or
as permitted in section 6205. Where conductors are
run in multiple, they shall be arranged soil terminate
OPLV WORK
at both end, in such a manner as to Insure equal divi-
sion of the total current between all conductors that
areinvolved.
3106, Current.Carrying Capacity. The maximum,
continuous, current -caging apac'tice of copper con -
.,,o are given fn Tables 1, 2 and 3 of Chapter l0-
Tbe currenl<arrying capacities of aluminum dfo
tors shall be taken as 84 per cent of those givenr
the same sizes of copper conductors with the came
kind of inmlaHon.
ARTICLE 320—OPEN WIRING ON
INSULATORS
3201• Scope. Open wiring on Insulators shall eom•
ply with the 9rovis,.. of sections 3001 to 3020 in•
elusive and shall also comply with the Provisions of
thefollowing sections 3202 to 3215 inclu. l
320E Use. Open wiring on insulators shall not ba
used (q is commercial gara8es, (2) fn theaters, (3)
I,
motion-picture studio,, (4, in haistway', and (3
I. hazard... locations, except fn storage compart-
ment3 of Clas, 111 locations as provided in pangnp)t
b of section 507J.
ffi07.. Types of Cendmon, The type of cnidae
tore shall tonI.rm to Article 310.
3201, Support. Condul-3 shall be supported Its
accordance with the (allowing:
a. Open conductors ahall he rigid]y suDDort<d on
•son<ov:bmpLlq non-absorptive insulating material,
ucept a. provided in aIciia. 3"
Z
Rigid supporting requires undo ordinary civ^
cumnan'... it wmpg over Sat s."._a' a.pPa. at
least every 4y feet. thin lnterva( Wit shortened It
the <ondunen are Isble to be disturheL Coododura
'hall be supported by tune, et a knob er deal within
6 inch,' of a tap. In bmldinga of mill construcli0n,
main' rut smaller than NO. 8, whtre not liable to be
diaturted, may be s<parue,l a:.iut 6 inches orad rvn
direct tram Omb<r to Kmlur, being avYG.rted from
catIs timber only Ifwhore cirevhe . !Ja, 8 or larger are
ran acnes open not haLle to is dia-
turbetb<y may btaro e auDoortct al
1 dialan<ta not grater
thea IS feet ff aspazii d eanaon:y. _t nonwbwrP
tiro (n'.latnrg kpualcra providyg ant Len than 2)f
ARTICLE 3:0
inch separation between conductors are installed at
ntervals of not over 4% feet.
I*
\Vhen nails are used to mount knobs they ahaU
not be smaller than 10 penny. When screws are used
to mount knobs,or when nails or screws are used
to mount cleats, they shall be of a length sufficient
to penetrate the Wood to a depth equal to at least
one•balthe height of the knob and fully the thick-
ness of tl;r cleat. Cushion washers shall be used
with .3119.
3205. Spacing. Open conductors in dry places and
forv.],agr+ not exceeding 300 volts shall be sepa-
rated a incl',' from each other and y inch from
the surface
wired oter; and, except as provided I.
pangnph b of section 3201, for voltages from J01 to
600 volts .lull be acpanted 4 fiches from each other
and 1 inch from the surface wired over. In damp
or wet locations a separation m
of at least 1 inch fro
the surface wired over dill be maintained for all
voltages.
3206. Plegible Tubing. In dry locations, where
not exposed to severe mechanical injury, conductors
may be separately encased in flexible tubing. Tubing
shall be fn continuous length not exceeding 15 feet,
and secured to the surface wired over by straps spaced
not exceeding 4% feet apart.
3207. Dead Enda. Open conductors shall not be
dcad•ended at a rosette, lampholder or receptacle
unless the last support is within 12 Inches of the
same.
3208, Tie Wim, No. 8 or larger conductors sup.
ported on solid knobs shall be securely tied thereto.
If conductors are used for tying, they aball have an
insulation of the same type as that of the conductors
which they ctmfinc.
3209. Paging Through Walla and Floors. Open
conductors shall be separated from contact with wall;
floors, timber or partitions through which they pass
by tubes or bushings of non-combusuble, nonabsorp.
live insulating material. If the bushing is *better
than the hole, a waterproof aleeve of son -Inductive
material shall be insetted in the hole and an insulating
bushing slipped into the sleeve at either end in such
OPEN WORK
a manner as to keep the conducts absolutely out of
contact with the sleeve, Each orconductor must be
earned through a separate porcelain tube or sleeve.
3210. Separation from Metal Work OD<n con-
ductors shall be separated at least 2 inches bon' me-
tallic conduit, piping, or other conducting material,
or from any exposed lighting, power or signal con-
ductor, unless a<Parat<d therefrom by a continuous
and firmly fixed non-conductor additional to the insu-
lation of the conductor. 1f any insulating lube is used,
it shall be secured at the ends. Deviation from this
requirement may, if necessary, be allowed by the au-
thority enforcing this code.
3211. Separation from Piping In Damp LeaHena.
Open conductors located .lase to water Pip" or tanks,
or in other damp Loli .is, *lull be so. placed Ihatytn
air apacewill be perganently maintained between
them and pipes which they cross. Where Praeuable,
eondu .....lull be run over, rather than under. Pipes
upon which moisture is likely to gather or which may
leak.
3212, prottxHan from M<cisnlal Wary. Where
open conductors crow ceding joiab and wall studs,
and are eaposed tomeclua:al injury, they shall be
protected by ane of the fnaowing metlwds. Conduce
Iota within 7 feet from the floor shall be considered
exposed to mechanical injury,
a.
By
guard •rips not les, than 3 inch to thick•
o<u and at least as high o.3 the inanlming supPuna,
placed on each side of and dose to the wiring.
b. By a substantial running board at least )i inch
thick bark of the conductors with side protections.
Running boards shall extend at I ... I 1 inch outside
the conductors, but not more than 2 inches and the
protecting sides shall be at least 2 inches high and
at lean h inch thick.
a By boxing made as above and furnished with
cover kept at lean 1 inch away from the tonducors
withim Where protecting verbal conductors on aide
walls the boning shall be Il.srd at tI,- top and she
holes through whith the conductor Pau shall be
bushed.
341,
a. s
91 ARTICI.F. 334
d. By conduit, in which case the rules for conduit
shall be followed, or by metal piping in which use
the conductors shall be encased in continuous lengths
of approved flexible tubing, The conductors passing
through conduit or piping shall be so grouped that
current in both directions is approximately equal.
3213. In Accessible Attica. Conductors in unfin.
ished accessible attics or roof spaces shall be installed
in accordance with the requirements of section 3247.
3214. In Concealed Spaces. Conductors shall not
be in contact with any object other than their insu-
lating supports. If run in concealed spaces they
shall he installed as required for concealed knob -any
tube work in accordance with the provisions Of Sec-
tions 3241 to 3248, inclusive.
3215. Entering S ces Subject to Dampness, Wet-
ness or Corrosive Vapors. Conductors entering or
leaving locations subject to dampness. Laciness or eor-
resive aapors shall have drip loops formed on them
and shall ! r. am, upward and inward from the opt.
afde of buildings, or from the damp, wet, or corrosive
location, through non-combustible, non-absorptive in-
sulating lubes.
ARTICLE 324—CONCEALED KNOB -AND -
TUBE WORK
3241. Scope. Concealed knob -and -tube work shall
eomPly with the provisions of 9celiens 3001 to 3020.
inclusive, and shall also comply with the provisions
of the following sections 3242 to 3248, inclusive.
3242. Use. Concealed knob -and -tube work may be
used in the hollow spaces of walla and ceilings. It
shall not be used (1) in commercial gauges, (2) in
theaters except as provided in section 5211, (3) in
motion -picture studios, nor (4) in hazardous locations
3243. Type of Conductor. The type or conductors
shall conform to Article 310. Only single conductors
ah.11 be used.
3244- Supports Condualors shall be supported at
intervals not exceeding 4% feet by knobs and tubes.
There shall be a knob within 6 inches from each tap.
Tic wires !hall comply with section 3208. If such
Support is impracticable and the conductors are in a
E.\On AND TIME 9j
If
ry location, they may be fished if separately encloaed
in flexible tubing extending in continuous lengths from
one support to the next or to an outlet box, or from
one outlet box to another. Otherwise, conduit, arm-
ored cable, electrical metallic tubing or non-metallic
sheathed cable shall be used.
324S. Conductor Separation. Conductors shall be
separated at least 3 inches and maintained at least 1
inch from the surface wired over. At distributing
centers, meters, outlets, switches or other places
where apace is limited and the 3 -inch separation can-
not be maintained, each conductor shall be caused
I. a eawti.... a length of flexible tubing. Where prac-
ticable, conductor shall be no singly on separate
timbers or studding.
3246. Separation from Other Objects and Protea
tion Conductors shall be separated from other con-
ductors and objects as follows:
s The provisions as to rigid supporting and clear-
ance from foreign wires and other objects. as specified
for open wiring in sections 3209, 3210, JZI1, and 3215
,hall be complied with.
b. Conductors passing through cross timbers In
plastered partitions shall be protected by as additional
tube extending at least 3 inches abort the timber.
3247. In Unfinished Attics and Roof Spaces. Con -
in urhn-had atfica or .Of apace, shall com-
ply with the following;
"Conductors in unfinished .life, and roof spaces
shall be run through -1 en the aide, of joists, studs
and raftera, except in attics and roof apace, having
V_4 room at all point of less van 3 feet in buildings
completed before the wiring is fnstlied.
b- II conductor' in aceaiLle unfinished attics or
racI apace- r<adsed by -'--'way or permanent ladder
are run through bored be:,, in 8gcr joists or through
bared hula in ands or rafters within 7 feet of rho
n,", or floor jeisn. such eandurtcra 'hall he pro-
tected by I.bvan+,al runcairg bard, encoding at
Inst 1 inch on each rale al the canducnaa sad u -
rarely fss!ereJ istp!u
e If eanied atcng the sides a( rate,,, clads or
nor joi,ts, n<:rher running buazda caw goad grips
wiz be req.ired.
ft
94 ARTICLE 328
3248. Boxea of Insulating Material. Nan -metallic
outlet boxes may be used as provided In section 3703.
ARTICLE 328—BARE-CONDUCTOR FEEDERS
3281. Use. By special permission, bare conductors
installed in accordance with the provisions of sections
3001 to J020 inclusive and in accordance with the pro.
visions of the following sections 3282 to 3287 inclu-
sive may be used for feeders only. Such bare eon.
ductors may be installed only in a chase, channel or
shaft of non-combustible material in a building of
fire -resistive construction; and only if the voltage be-
tween conductors doe. not exceed 600 volts Bare
conductors shall not be used in damp or .vet locations,
nor fn any hazardous location, nor where subject to
'oas'i's vapor, exccPt in storage -battery roams as
provided in section 4807.
3282. Size and Capacity of Conductors The maxi•
mum permissible current shall be 1000 amperes per
square inch of crass-metianal area of conductor in
unventilated enclosures, and 1200 amperes per square
inch in ventilated enclosures.
3283. Bunch Taps. Branch taps from bare -con-
duct- feeders may be installed as specified in section
2434; provided that the mechanical protection speei•
fled by sub -paragraphs a or d of section 2434 shall
.at be required for that portion of the conductor
located in the chase, channel or shaft.
3284. Accessibility. The conductors shall at be ac•
eessible to other than qualified persons
3285. Support.. Conductors shall be supported as
J2415.
a. Conductors shall be supported on noir-combus.
tible non-absorptive insulating supports of adequate
mechanical strength. .
b. Conductors shall be so supported that a saps.
ration between conductors, and between conductors
and ground, of not less than that specified in section
93847 will be maintained under all conditions of caper.
.that.
3286. Firs Cut -Offs If floors are pierced, suitable
tut -offs against vertical travel of fire shall be pro-
Tided.
ARMORED CAm-F.
3287. Special Safeguards In addition to the pro-
visions of the preceding sections, the authority en-
forcing this code may require other safeguards in
view of special conditions that may be met in a par•
ocular installation.
ARTICLE 334—ARMORED CABLE
3341. Scope. Installations of armored cable shall
comply with the provisions of sections 3001 to 3020
incluse, and in aJJition shall comply with the pro-
viaiona of the following sections 3342 to 3348 inclusive.
3342. Use. Armond cable (type AC or ACT)
may be used for both exposed work and concealed
work in dry locations; for underplaster extensions as
provided in Article 344; and embedded an plaster
finish on brick or other masonry, except in damp or
wet locations. Armored cable (type ACV) in size,
No. 4 and larger may be used for exposed work fn
dry locations in builJmws occupied for industrial par.
poses. Armored cable shall contain lead -covered can.
ducton (type ACL), if used where exposed to the
weather or to continuous mainure, for underground
run, and embedded in masonry, concrete or fill in
buildings in course of ronnructwn. or xhere ex.
posed la oil, carinii,or other conditions having a de-
teriorating %a'ct on the insulation. Annaral cable
shall not be used (1) in thrae,s. except a, pruvidel
in tion 5211; (2) m motion-piuure alud,os; (3)
in anYsecl.!Ild,lus Lrcari.m s; (4) •dnere exposed to
corrosive lumes or vapors; (5) in storage-banery
rooms; (6) on cnnea or hoists, except ae pro,(ded in
sub -paragraph 6113-c; nnr (7) in hofnways or on
elevators, except as Provided in section 622
3343. Supporta. Armored cable shall be secured
by approved staples, straps, or enndar 11W res. so de-
signed said installed as not to i.i.re Iht table. Cable
,hall he secured at intervals cant tx,crdirg 45f feet
and within 12 imhea from ever, outrrt bra or fining,
rxcePt where cable is fueled and except lengthl of not
over 24 inches at terminals where deaibibly i- neces-
nry.
3344. B.pwed Work. Exposed runs of cable shall
closely fallow the surface of the building finish or of
,canning board,, exeepC
,?47
96 ARTICLF 334
4 Lengths of not more than 24 inches at terminals
where flexibility is necessary. '
b. in accessible attics and roof spaces, for which
see section 3346.
c On the underside Of floor joists in 1 ,=emcnts
wheresupported at each joist and so local,I as not
to be subject to mechanical in)ur3'.
3345. Through Studs, joists and Rafter. Sec sec-
tion 3010.
3346. In Accessible Attics. Cable in a, -sible
attics or roof spaces 36.11 be installed as follows:
a, It run across the top of floor joists, or within
7 feet of floor or floor joist across the face of rafter,
or studding, the cable shall be protected by su: ran.
tial guard strips tvlsicb are At least e,3 high as the
cable. If the attic is not accessible by permanent
•t.ir or ladders, protection will only be repaired
within 6 fat of the nearest edge of scuttle hale or
attic entrance.
Is. If carried along the sides of rafters, studs or
floor joists, neither guard strips, nor running bar4
shall be required.
3347. Protection at Cable Ends, At 311 taint,
where the armor terraill.l., a fitting shall be pro-
sided to protect wires from abrasion, unless the de-
sign of the outlet boxes or fittings is suds as to afford
equivalent protection, and in addition, an approved
insulating bushing or its equivalent approved protec-
tion shall be provided between the conductors and the
armor. The connector or clamp by which tic armored
cable is fastened to boxes or cabinets shall he of such
design that the insulating bushing or its equivalent
will be visible for inspection. This bushing will not
be required with lead -covered cables which shall be
so installed that the lead sheath will be visible for
inspection.
3348. Bends. All bends shAil be so made that the
armor of the cable will not be injured, and the radius
of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall be
not less than 5 times the diameter of the cable.
NON-METALLIC SHEATHED CABLE 97
ARTICLE 336-NON-blETALLIC SHEATHED
CABLE
3361. Scope. Installations of non-metallic sheathed
cable shall comply with the provisions ar sections 3001
to 3020 inclusive, and shall also comply with the pro.
visions of the iollowing sections 3362 to 3370 inclusive
3362 Use. Non-metallic sIi,.Ih,d cable may be
used for both exposed and concealed work. NO.-
metallie sheathed cable shall not be used as sersice-
em-ce cable: nor shall it be embedded in vi-etry,
concrete, fill or plaster, nor run in a shallow ch- in
masonry or concrete walls and covered with plaster
OF similar finish. Non-metallic sheathed cat It na. be
run or fh.hed in the air voids of o neetr nu- Fry
Nock or it, wall, where such wall, are no, ext sed
or subject to excessive moiaure or dangnns. '-on-
meuliie sheathed cable shall not be install -4 ( in
eommeceal gar.Res. (2) lin theaters easel. Ms ro-
ihded ,n section 5211, (3) in motion-pictru. sw -os,
4) in 'toraRt battery rooms, (5) in hoe,. ay,, ib)
in any hazardous Inralion, (7) in breve ries, n• pl.-o,.
cold at..at warehouses, and similar wet local. as
where subjce to mildly corrosive funnel slid rap •e.
or where exposed to the weather, but not fn•lud-g
dairy Larns, chicken houses and similar locations.
3363. Supporta Non•meuilie sheathed cable sbl I
be secured by approved stapes, straps. or similar sI-
tieg,, sn daag-I and installed A, not to injure t,,
cab.e, Ca7.1e shall be -'cured in place at interval,
no ucerd,nR 4%z feet And withic 13 inche. fro-,
every cullet has or fintin& except that in conrealr3
work in fmiiln•C boiiding, where such suppoNng w
impracticable, tM cable may be f 4F.ed from outlet a.
4atfcr.
3364. E.posed Werk- lemnal, In exposed work.
ex:rpt as p:o,vJed i ,e<rhr•m 3J66 and 3367, the e,b!.
.Fall Le instilled as fci:ewu
a, The eahle -hall rloxly follow the surface of
Ilse LuilJ:ng Lr.:.b a n( running (wards,
b.It ala!! be protected from mechanirsl injury
calls. neussarY. LY condos• p:,,.guard grip.
For... d
ether e... !f pasting "'r-gh a fioor the eabit
9g ARTICLE 336
shall be enclosed in rigid conduit or pipe extending
al least 6 inches above the 00-1-
3365. Through Studs, joists and Rafters. See see-
liun 3010.
3366. In Unfinished Basements. If the cable is run
at angles with joists in unfiniMnld basements, as.em-
blies not smaller than two No. 6 or three No. 8 con-
ductors may be secured directly to the lower edges
of tit joists; smaller assemblies shall either be run
through bored holes in the joists or on running
boards. Where run parallel to joists, cable of any
size shall be secured to the sides or face of the joists.
3357. In Accessible Attica. Cable in accessible
allies or roof spaces shall be installed as follows:
a. If run across tiro lop of floor joists, or within
7 feet of floor or floor joists, across the face of miters
or studding, the cable shall be protected by substan.
tial gu.rd strips at least .s high As it,. cable.
II the
Mule is not accessible by permanent stairs or ladders.
protection will only be required within 6 feet of the
nearest edge of seat tie hole or attic entrance.
b. If carried along she sides of rafters, studs .r
floor joists, neither guard strips, nor running boards
sha11 be required.
3368. Bend.. Bends in cabit shall be so made, and
other handling sha11 be such, that the protective cov-
erings of the cable will not beinjured, and no bend
shall have a radius less than 5 times the diameter of
the cable,
3369. Device. of Insulating Material Switch, out-
let and tap devices of insulating material nnay be used
without boxes in exposed cable wiring. Openings in
such devices shall form a close fit around dee outer
covering of the cable and the device shall fully en-
close that part of the cable from which any part of
it,, covering has been rcra-rd. If connections to
conductors are by hinding-screw terminals, there shall
be available as manv screws as conductors. unless
cables are clamped within the structure, or unless ter-
minalis are of a type approved for the purpose.
3370. Boxes of Insulating M.teriaL Non-tret.11ie
outlet boxes approved for the purpose may be used
as provided in section 3703.
SERVICE -ENTRANCE CABLE of
ARTICLE 338 -SERVICE -ENTRANCE CABLE
3381. Scope. Service -entrance cable used as A -
vice -entrance conductors shall comply with the pro-
visions of Arlice 230. Service -entrance cable used for
interior wiring shall comply with the provisions of
,ections 3001 to 3020 incluvve. Cable with metal hi.
terlocking armor (type ASE) shall be installed in ac-
cordance with tine pravixiom of sectious 3742 to 37.16
and section 3348. narmored cable (lylie SE) shall
be installed in accordance with the provnsiuus of sec.
tions 3302 to 3370. Service -entrance cable .loll also
comply with the provisions of sections 3382 and JJ83.
3382 Use. Approved sr -k -entrance cables (types
SE and ASE) nay be u -I in interior wiring systems
if all the conductors of the cable are of the rubber -
covered or thernnoplastic type; but if without individ.
tial insulation on the grounded conduelor may he used
only for range and ron't-c waterdieater circuits. or
as faders from a .,aster servile cahnwt to supply
olLa buildings, ee as service -entrance conductors for
such other buildings, ii the following conditions are
met.
a. The cable has a final nun -metallic outer cov-
ering.
Ill The supply is alternating current not exceeding
150 volts to ground.
e, No domestic water -heals is supplied through
a conductor without indwideal immlatlun.
3383. Through Studs, joists and Rafter.. See A -
tion J010.
ARTICLE 340 -NON-METALLIC WATER-
PROOF WIRING
3401, Scope. Installations of ran.metallic -ter.
proof wiring shall comply with the requirement. of
e,
se. -1 3001 to 6120, and in addition the following
sailors J402 to 3409 indusire.
3402 Use. Subject to the approval of the authority
enforcg this code, non-inmetaliie asattrpruaJ wiring
may Le used for exPuseJ work in breweries, ice plant..
cold storage aarehousea or urn:,lar as et locations
where subject to mildly corrosive fumes and vapor,,
if the vmhage docs nal exceed 300 rolls between con-
ductor. or 150 vohs to Arouud.
��i
Ll
15
,ro ARTICLE. 343
3403, Condaeton, Rubber- sheathed multiplocon-
ductor cable approved for the purpose shall be used.
The individual conductors of the cable shall not be
smaller than No. 12, except that the cable may Con-
tain an approved size of conductor, with or without
Individual insulation, to be used for equipment ground.
ing purposes only. See paragraph a of section 2557.
3404, Supporta, The cable shall be supported an
insulators approved for lire purpose and spaced at in-
tervals not oxecoding J feet.
3405. Attachment to Fittings. The cable shall be
securely fastened to all outlet boxes, fittings and cab-
inets. A moisture -proof seal shall be provided be.
tween the cable and all outlet boxes, fittings and cab-
inets.
3406. Passing Through Walls. The cable shall be
enclosed in rigid conduit, electrical metallic tubing,
or appreved insulating tubing, where passing through
ovalis,and where so enclosed, the enclosure shall be
sealed with a suitable fitting.
3407. Protection. Where exposed to mechanical
injury the cable shall be protected.
3408. Boxes and Fittings. Boxes and fittings shall
conform to the following:
a. Outlet boxes, fittings and cabinets shall be con-
structed of cast metal, insulating material or other
material approved for the purpose.
b. Switch plates, futures, and similar parts shall
be of insulating material when mounted on boxes, fit-
ting., and cabinets of insulating material.
3409. Grounding, Metal boxes, fittings, or cabinets
if used shall be grounded in accordance with Article
250.
ARTICLE 342—NON-METALLIC SURFACE
EXTENSIONS
3421. Scope. Installations of non-metallic surface
extensions shall comply with the provisions of s-
1,— 3001 to 3020 inclusive, and in addition shall com-
ply with the provisions of the following Sections 3422
to 3429 inclusive.
SURFACE. FXTENSIONS 101
3422. Use. Non-metallic surface extensions may
be used only If
all of the following conditions are met:
a. The extensions are from existing outlets on
branch circuits.
b. The extensions are run exposed in dry locations.
c The building is occupied for residential or office
PmTr I—
r. The extensions are not in unfitshhed basements,
altiu, or roof spaces.
a The voltage does not exceed 150 volts between
.ado"" '
L The extensions are not subject to corrosive
vapOt&
3423. Outlets Per Circuit. The total number of
oat lets supplied by one branch circuit, including those
riously imtallcd and thou of the extension, shall
n conformity with the requirements of Article 210.
3424. Net to Ran Outside Roomext
. An enslon
shsB not be ran through a floor or partition, nor out-
side the room in which it Origin t,,
3425. Locatkn ba Roots One or more ext ... ions
may be run in any direction from an existing outlet,
but .at on the it... or within 2 inches from the floor.
An extension shall be attached only to woodwork or
plaster finish, and .hall at be in contact with any
metal work ar other conducive material except the
metal prates on receptacles,
3426. Supports. Non-metallic mita,, extensions
.11.11 be secured in place by appreved means at imer-
,als net ..reeding 8 inches, except that where con-
cecticn to tl:e supplying outlet is made by mea. of
mattachment plug the first (..tering may be placed
12 inches or kit frc'r tF,e p:ng. There shall be at
but are listening tetwceo each two adjacent outlets
aupplird.
342(. SpOen and Tsp& R.tenzfnn, shall consist
of a vnemveus urbraL!n length of the s.mbi ,
h.t asiir<a, and without eryas<d eaM'etm. be.
tavern f.t ingt. Tap. +nay t2 made it filings cons.
p:etely rims. J& rhe up ccrnen :n. Ire used.
3428. Head& A tend in an sw!mbly which to
Cun. If:. aorxaal syncing hetween the coMucrn
I., ARTICLE 344
shall be covered with a cap to protect the assembly
from mechanical injury.
3429. Fitting.. Each run of an assembly shall
terminate in Is fitting .[rich covera the end of the as-
sembly. All fittings and device. shall be of a type
approved for the purpose.
ARTICLE 344—UNDERPLASTER
EXTENSIONS
3441, Use. Underplaster extensions, installed as
pernritied by sections 3441 to J444 inclusive, may be
used only for rxtel6ious of existing branch circum
if laid on the face of masonry or other material and
buried in the plaster finish of ceiling, or wall., fn
buildings of fire -resistive construction
3442. Materials. Such extensions shall be run in
rigid or flexible conduit, armored cable, electrical
metallic tubing or metal raceways approved for the
Purpose. Standard sizes of conduit, cable, tubing and
raceways shall be used except that for single conduc-
tors only, conduit or tubing having not less than 5/16
inch inside diameter or single -conductor armored
cable may be used.
3443. Limit of Ran. No such extension shall ex-
tend beyond the floor on which it originates unless
standard sizes of rigid conduit, electrical metallic tub-
ing or armorod cable are employed.
3444. Methods of Installation. The methods of in-
stallation for such extensions shall be as specified
elsewhere in this code for the particular type of ma-
terial used, except that when alternating current is
to be employed, all of the conductors of a circuit
need not be contained in a single raceway or cable.
ARTICLE 346—RIGID METAL CONDUIT
3461. Scope. Installations of rigid metal conduit
shall comply with the provisions of sections 3001 to
3020 inclusive and in addition shall comply with the
provisions of the following sections 3462 to 3471 in.
clu,iv.
3462. Use. Rigid metal conduit may be used under
all atmospheric conditions and occupancie& except
UNOERWASTER EXTENSIONS Int
that ferrous raceways and fittings protected (earn car-
ro—ri solely by enamel may be used only indoor, and
in occupancies not subjrcl to severe corrosive infln-
cnees. Conduit, and fittings exposed to severe corro.
sive influences shall be of corrosion -resistant material
suitable for the conditions. If practicable, the use of
dissimilar metals throughout the syslem shall be
avoided to eliminate the possibility of gala is action.
11utp.cm., Planer, t.nnerier, Fide cdlarr,h
.ulna roses,
I, arca, (<n:liur Iona(,.., roti race, wme cemical or.& meld
naW�yrin.f call, rear irii enri)I., -ear vn, and honer, e
.er<r. <orrorire and,rivvr un. I�kil> ra t4e p ew.L uyanrirr rear
3463. Cinder Fill. Conduit, unless of cormsia'•
rcsuant material suitable for the purpose, shall not
be used in or under cinder fill where subject to pen
.anent moisture index, protected on all sides by a
layer of non -cinder concrete at lease 2 inches thick at
unless the conduit is at least 18 inches under the fill.
3464, Wet Locations. In partials, of dairies, lawn.
dries, ramerin, and o ife, wet laralinni, and in lora•
tion, where wails are, regn—ily washedI the entire
Conduit sYarni, includng all boxes and mtinga used
ew
ther111r, shall he nude watrrtighl, and the conduit
,hail he mounted so that there is It kart one-half inch
air spare betwren the conduit and the wall or other
supporting surface.
346L Minimum Size. o conduit smaller!
than :
inch, electrical trade \
e size, .hu-1.all be ud, except as pro-
vidcd for under -plaster extension, in Ankle 344, and
for enrlosmg the leads of muton as permitted in
paragraph b of section 4479.
3466. Number of Conductor. fn Racswq- Ons
conduit shall not contain more conductors of a given
six than are specified in Table, 4 to I I of Chapter IQ
3467. Reaming, ,VI ends of conduit shall be reamed
to remove rough edge&
3468. Hushing& Where a conduit enter, a box or
other fitting, a bushing shall be Provided to protect
Ih, who frons abrasion unless the derign at the box
or fitting is such .3 to ari_d equiva!ent protection.
See paragraph b of section J736 far the protection of
conducoro at bushing&
2469. Cpling& Threadles, cwplinga and eos-c-
lou uuJ wouhh "'Jail siva he male Baht. They shall
3.49
.0 a
Ire ARTICLE Sea
be of the watertight type if buried in masonry, con•
Crete o , fill or it installed m wet places. Running
threads shall not be used on conduit for connection
at couplings. -
3470. Benda -How Made. Benda of rigid mnduft
shall be so made that the conduit will not be injured,
and that the internal diameter of the Conduit will not
be effectively reduced. The radius of the curve 'If the
inner edge of any field bend shall not be less than
shown in the following table:
Radius of Conduit Benda
3471. Benda -Number in One Run. A run of con-
duit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fit•
ting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain
more than the equivalent of 4 quarter bonds, includ-
ing those bends located immediately at the outlet or
fitting.
ARTICLE 348 --ELECTRICAL METALLIC
TUBING
3481. Installations of electrical mttallie tubing shall
comply with the Provisions of section. 3001 to 3020
inclusive and in addition shay comply with the pro-
visions of the following sections 3482 to 3490 inclu-
alre.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING101
3482. Use. Electrical metallic tubing may be used
for both exposed and concealed work Electrical
metallic tubing protected from corrosion solely by
enamel shall not be used. Electrical metallic tubing
shall nm
ot be used (1) where during installation or
afterwaI. a, it will he a. Act to severe echanical
injury; (2)in of or concrete or fill where subject to
PC ...nt moisture unless prutKted on all sides by
a layer of non -cinder concrete at Irat 2 inches thick
or ural<aa the tubing is at Ieaat 18 inches under the
fill; (3) in any hazardous location except a. other-
wise provid<d in Article 500; (4) where <ap03cd to
corrosive vapor except as permuted in section 3483.
9483. Corrode, F®N, If tubing h exposed to
mrroaive fume. or vaDon such a" may exist in on
packing planta, tanneries, hide cellar., calling roam..
Slue houses, fertiliser roma, salt etorage, same chem•
Ica, works, metal refineries. Dulp mill sugar mills,
round house', Dome stables, and similar�ocahomiIu6•
ing and finings of eoaoafon•reaiatanl
material suitable
for the conditiana shall be used. If Dracli<able. (ha
use of di..'ro ar metal. throughout the q. Cut .hall
be avoided to eliminate the Possibility of galvanic
aetiOM1'
]464. Wet Locadoo.. Io portions of dahlea, lauu-
drf<a, canneries, and other wet location; and iv lona•
tions where walla are frequently wished the entire
tubing system, including all boats av4 fitting. used
therewith, shall be made watertighq and the taping
shall be mounted ao that there is at least one-half Inch
air spare helween the tubing and the way or other
Supporting surface.
3465. Midmtam and 14asdmom Sloes No tubing
smaller Ill.. A Inch, electrical tradeinti be
ns<d e:nDt a prorided for mderplaa"er eatemlonD
ae,!CiI JN and for encleaing the leads of motor-
...,reas permitted in pargraph b of section 44J9. The
_ we I tubing sluts be the 2•;ach dxainl
trade sire.
34x6. Nmalur of Conductor ti liacaway. 011e
Iab:ng shall n0l contain mere cendurton of a aiwa
sire than are specified in Tab1oD 4 to 11 of Chapter 10.
7N7. Threads 7u:inA shall a0t be coupled to-
gphn nor cennrC.ed 10 brass", fif ti ng., or cabinetby
mass of d,sada in the wall u( th. seting. e.capl ba
IOD ARTICLE 330
fi Itin8s approved for the purpose. Threads shell not
be of the standard pipe Thread dimensions.
3}88. Couplings and Connectors Threadless wop-
lings and connectors used with tubing shay M made
up tight, and shall be of the watertight type If burled
In masonry, concrete or (ill or if installed in wet
places g
,hal be a0en aA Hit, Ecadtct'st Bgenvill not lbs injured
and Mat the internal diameter of the tubing will not
be effectively redurcd, The radius of the cure of the
inner edge of any field bend shall not be leas than
shown in the table in section 3470.
tr cal me a"ic p 4 ng bchic �nouUetLa Aroulleun t,cbe-
hveen fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fisting,
shall not contain more than the equivalent of four
quarter bends, including those bends located immedi.
r ately at the outlet or fitting.
ARTICLE 350 -FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
3501. Seopc. Installations i. flexible metal conduit
shall comply with the provisions of section J001 to
J020, sections 3343, 3344, 3348, and of sections 3465
to fill
the pr6o8visionssof the followings setlition ons13502 anld 3-1111 50J.
used (I) inlwet locations, on,_ condunore're of be
lead.covered type or of other type specially approved
for the eonditio"6, (2) in hoislways, except as pro•
ittd
(4) 1 in section 6206: (3) in storage -battery roams;
iecCmna SOS f1and 507Jp nor (5) whcrearubb<rt-covered
cogquctors are exposed to ail, ggaasoline, or other
mdferl.ls having a deteriorating effect on rubber.
3503. Minimum Size. No flexible metal conduit
less than one-half incl[ elalrical Inde size shall be
used except (I) as ppermitted far underfpplaster be
P nerPhebtof a ctcn(4439; pond s(3)d forr on,
station
not over 48 inches in length, or longer on approved
aasembliea, to equipment where tcri use of one-half
inch c larger alae flexible metal conduit is not Pnc-
licabk, in which qa. flexible metal conduit of three -
eighth Inch eI,cIrjgI trade sista may he used.
SURFACE METAL RACE\\'AY I.,
ARTICLE 352 --SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
3521. Scope. Installations of surface metal race-
way' shall comply with the provisions of sections
3001 to 3020 inclusive and in addition ,hall comply
with the provisions of the following sectiom 3522 and
3527 inclusive.
3522. Uta Surface metal raceway may be used
in dry locations. !t shall not be used (I) where cora•
coaled, except that the back and aides o multi -outlet
assembly may be the
by the building finish:
and metas raceways approved for. the purpose may be
used for under -plaster eatensiona; (2) where subyect
to Deva. mechanical injury unless approved for the
purpose, (3) where the vohaRe is 309 volts or more
between conductors unless the metal his . thickness
of not leas than .040 inches; (4) where a", "t to
corrosive vapor; (5) in hoiatwaya; (6) in mnrage-
battery roams; nor (7) In any hazardous location.
3523. Sue of Conductor. No conductor larger
than No. 6 shall be installed in surface maul raceway.
3120 Number of Conductors In Raceway, The
number of conductors insu!Ied in any raensvy shall
not be greater than the number for which the 1. C,
way I. approved, and in no case shall more than 10
conductors be installed in a single raceway C..Part•
meet
3325. Extendon Through Walls and Floor. Ea.
apt i^muhi-outlet assentaliea, nreway3 may be -
forded throuRh dry cast's, dry partitions ..it dry
Door, if in unbroken lengths w1mre passing through.
3536. Combination Raceways it combination meed
raceways arc used both for signal and for lighting
and power circuits. the different system, A.11 be ron
In "C"an"e eompam
nlml. identified by alurply on-
tneting color' o! the ivterior finish, and the rise
n lti position of rompartmema shall be malouined
ehreughout the Premise..
3327. Mutd-Outlet Arembb. ldulti•outtet .rem•
bly, and ,I fittings . im m�nectian with the
bly. shall be approved tar the purpose,
,350
Coad..-
Conduelan
V., of
Caadatt
Witham
4r Shwth
Wits.
Lead S=
54 in.
3.7 in.
6.2 in.
g in.
4.9 in.
8.3 in
I in.
6.3 in.
10.5i%
14, in.
8.3 in.
13.8 in.
1.55 in.
9.6 in.
.16.1 in.
2 in.
12.4 in.
10.6 in.
2-); in.
14.8 in.
24.6 fa.
3 in.
18.4 in.
30.6in.
3-y in.
21.3 in.
35.5 in.
4 in.
24.1 in.
40.2 in.
4 -SS in.
27.0 in.
45.0 in.
5 in.
30.3 1'
50.4 fn.
6 in.
36.4 in.
60.6 in.
3471. Benda -Number in One Run. A run of con-
duit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fit•
ting, or between outlet and fitting shall not contain
more than the equivalent of 4 quarter bonds, includ-
ing those bends located immediately at the outlet or
fitting.
ARTICLE 348 --ELECTRICAL METALLIC
TUBING
3481. Installations of electrical mttallie tubing shall
comply with the Provisions of section. 3001 to 3020
inclusive and in addition shay comply with the pro-
visions of the following sections 3482 to 3490 inclu-
alre.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING101
3482. Use. Electrical metallic tubing may be used
for both exposed and concealed work Electrical
metallic tubing protected from corrosion solely by
enamel shall not be used. Electrical metallic tubing
shall nm
ot be used (1) where during installation or
afterwaI. a, it will he a. Act to severe echanical
injury; (2)in of or concrete or fill where subject to
PC ...nt moisture unless prutKted on all sides by
a layer of non -cinder concrete at Irat 2 inches thick
or ural<aa the tubing is at Ieaat 18 inches under the
fill; (3) in any hazardous location except a. other-
wise provid<d in Article 500; (4) where <ap03cd to
corrosive vapor except as permuted in section 3483.
9483. Corrode, F®N, If tubing h exposed to
mrroaive fume. or vaDon such a" may exist in on
packing planta, tanneries, hide cellar., calling roam..
Slue houses, fertiliser roma, salt etorage, same chem•
Ica, works, metal refineries. Dulp mill sugar mills,
round house', Dome stables, and similar�ocahomiIu6•
ing and finings of eoaoafon•reaiatanl
material suitable
for the conditiana shall be used. If Dracli<able. (ha
use of di..'ro ar metal. throughout the q. Cut .hall
be avoided to eliminate the Possibility of galvanic
aetiOM1'
]464. Wet Locadoo.. Io portions of dahlea, lauu-
drf<a, canneries, and other wet location; and iv lona•
tions where walla are frequently wished the entire
tubing system, including all boats av4 fitting. used
therewith, shall be made watertighq and the taping
shall be mounted ao that there is at least one-half Inch
air spare helween the tubing and the way or other
Supporting surface.
3465. Midmtam and 14asdmom Sloes No tubing
smaller Ill.. A Inch, electrical tradeinti be
ns<d e:nDt a prorided for mderplaa"er eatemlonD
ae,!CiI JN and for encleaing the leads of motor-
...,reas permitted in pargraph b of section 44J9. The
_ we I tubing sluts be the 2•;ach dxainl
trade sire.
34x6. Nmalur of Conductor ti liacaway. 011e
Iab:ng shall n0l contain mere cendurton of a aiwa
sire than are specified in Tab1oD 4 to 11 of Chapter 10.
7N7. Threads 7u:inA shall a0t be coupled to-
gphn nor cennrC.ed 10 brass", fif ti ng., or cabinetby
mass of d,sada in the wall u( th. seting. e.capl ba
IOD ARTICLE 330
fi Itin8s approved for the purpose. Threads shell not
be of the standard pipe Thread dimensions.
3}88. Couplings and Connectors Threadless wop-
lings and connectors used with tubing shay M made
up tight, and shall be of the watertight type If burled
In masonry, concrete or (ill or if installed in wet
places g
,hal be a0en aA Hit, Ecadtct'st Bgenvill not lbs injured
and Mat the internal diameter of the tubing will not
be effectively redurcd, The radius of the cure of the
inner edge of any field bend shall not be leas than
shown in the table in section 3470.
tr cal me a"ic p 4 ng bchic �nouUetLa Aroulleun t,cbe-
hveen fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fisting,
shall not contain more than the equivalent of four
quarter bends, including those bends located immedi.
r ately at the outlet or fitting.
ARTICLE 350 -FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
3501. Seopc. Installations i. flexible metal conduit
shall comply with the provisions of section J001 to
J020, sections 3343, 3344, 3348, and of sections 3465
to fill
the pr6o8visionssof the followings setlition ons13502 anld 3-1111 50J.
used (I) inlwet locations, on,_ condunore're of be
lead.covered type or of other type specially approved
for the eonditio"6, (2) in hoislways, except as pro•
ittd
(4) 1 in section 6206: (3) in storage -battery roams;
iecCmna SOS f1and 507Jp nor (5) whcrearubb<rt-covered
cogquctors are exposed to ail, ggaasoline, or other
mdferl.ls having a deteriorating effect on rubber.
3503. Minimum Size. No flexible metal conduit
less than one-half incl[ elalrical Inde size shall be
used except (I) as ppermitted far underfpplaster be
P nerPhebtof a ctcn(4439; pond s(3)d forr on,
station
not over 48 inches in length, or longer on approved
aasembliea, to equipment where tcri use of one-half
inch c larger alae flexible metal conduit is not Pnc-
licabk, in which qa. flexible metal conduit of three -
eighth Inch eI,cIrjgI trade sista may he used.
SURFACE METAL RACE\\'AY I.,
ARTICLE 352 --SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
3521. Scope. Installations of surface metal race-
way' shall comply with the provisions of sections
3001 to 3020 inclusive and in addition ,hall comply
with the provisions of the following sectiom 3522 and
3527 inclusive.
3522. Uta Surface metal raceway may be used
in dry locations. !t shall not be used (I) where cora•
coaled, except that the back and aides o multi -outlet
assembly may be the
by the building finish:
and metas raceways approved for. the purpose may be
used for under -plaster eatensiona; (2) where subyect
to Deva. mechanical injury unless approved for the
purpose, (3) where the vohaRe is 309 volts or more
between conductors unless the metal his . thickness
of not leas than .040 inches; (4) where a", "t to
corrosive vapor; (5) in hoiatwaya; (6) in mnrage-
battery roams; nor (7) In any hazardous location.
3523. Sue of Conductor. No conductor larger
than No. 6 shall be installed in surface maul raceway.
3120 Number of Conductors In Raceway, The
number of conductors insu!Ied in any raensvy shall
not be greater than the number for which the 1. C,
way I. approved, and in no case shall more than 10
conductors be installed in a single raceway C..Part•
meet
3325. Extendon Through Walls and Floor. Ea.
apt i^muhi-outlet assentaliea, nreway3 may be -
forded throuRh dry cast's, dry partitions ..it dry
Door, if in unbroken lengths w1mre passing through.
3536. Combination Raceways it combination meed
raceways arc used both for signal and for lighting
and power circuits. the different system, A.11 be ron
In "C"an"e eompam
nlml. identified by alurply on-
tneting color' o! the ivterior finish, and the rise
n lti position of rompartmema shall be malouined
ehreughout the Premise..
3327. Mutd-Outlet Arembb. ldulti•outtet .rem•
bly, and ,I fittings . im m�nectian with the
bly. shall be approved tar the purpose,
,350
103 ARTICLE ]aa
ARTICLE 354—UNDERFLOOR RACEWAY
3541. Scope. installations of underfloor raceways
allot, comply ,with the provisions of sections 3001 to
3020 inclusive and in addition shall comply with the
provisions of the following sections 3542 to 3556 in-
cinv<.
3542. Use. Underfloor raceways may be used when
installed beneath the surface of concrete or other fioot-
ing material, or, for signal and control circuits in
office occupancies, when laid flush with the concrete
floor and covered with linoleum or equivalent floor
covering. OPrn-bottom type of raceways may be used
in concrete fill between the rough and the finished
floor only. Underfloor raceways shall not be used (1)
if subject to corrosive vapors; (2) in any hazardous
location; (3) in commercial garages; nor (4) in stor.
age -battery rooms.
3343. Covering. Raceway covering. shall conform
to the following;
a. Raceway. Not Over 4 Inches Wide. Raceways
Of half -round or flat -top sections not over 4 inches m
width s11211 have not less than N inches of concrete
or wood above the raceway.
b. Raceways Over 4 Inches in Width or With
Less Than % Inch Separation. Flat -top raceways
over 4 inches in width or placed less than % inch
apart, shall be covered with concrete to a depth of
not leas th.n Il[ inches.
a Rseewaya Flush With Concrete. Metal flat -top
raceways in -011e occupancies and not over 4 inches
in width used for signal and communication systems
and metal flat -top raceways not over 2 inches in width
used for Power and lighting circuits, may be laid flush
with the concrete if covered with substantial linoleum
not less than Sfi inch in thickness or with equivalent
floor covering. Where both of these raceways are to
be installed contiguous to each other the raceways
should be Spot welded together so as to form a=
raceway.
3544. Size of Conductors. No conductor larger
than No. 4 shall be installed in underfloor raceways.
3545. Number of Conductors in Raceway. The
combined cross-sectional area of all conductors shall
UNDERFLOOR RACEWAY tee
not exceed 40 per cent of the interior area of the
raceway; except that if the raceway contains only
armored cable or non-metallic sheathed cable, these
requirements shall not apply.
3546. Splices and Taps. Splices or taps shall be
made only in junction boxes.
3547. Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet is dis-
continued, the conductors supplying the outlet .hail
be removed from the raceway.
3148. Open -Bottom Raceway—How Laid. Open.
bottom raceway shall be laid ona smooth pad of can.
crete extending at least 1 inch on each side of the
raceway and At least 1 inch thick, except that this
thickneaa may be reduced to y, inch where the race-
way crosses a run of conduit, and except that in lieu
of a concrete pad• fitti-R. which will protect the con-
ductor. from contact wills piping, aWctural steel and
.,her obstructions may be used. Raceways shall be
tuechanimlly secured to the concrete pad.
3549. Laid In Straight Linea, Underfloor raceways
.hall be laid se Ihat A straight line from the center
of one ju.ction box to the center of Use next junction
be. will coincide with the center line of the raceway
system. Raceways -hall be made
to Dme<haniplly secure
en
tion. revt disturbing this alignment during eontrac.
3550. Marken st Enda. At every end of line of
raceway a filling shall he instaPed extending through
The floc, to mark the line cf the dA, Where a duct
line is
inurrutned by soother due( line, but continues
i. a .Might line beyond, and has lunclion boxes or
oullels -n evU.cr rde of the ara.a;nR brae, eo marker
are uecasary a 'Le ........prong pubC
5551. Dead Ends. Dad erda
'1-1 of rauwaya shall be
M72. Law Pc;n[a C. Fere pta•lirahre raceways
and (heir f.uirga shall be -a arnnacd as m avoid
low P,-,. that —Y fust Uaps for water.
35,3, aptecial Fi,han-rah her
Angles. We raceways
ar
,half be prorwed, if in the jvd lies' ,peels( ,,6,y
d'se�'t of the avlhority
mlprr;ng Chia cull", Thee are recear,ry,
Ho ARTICLE 356
3554. Junction Boxes. Junction bnxes shall he lev-
eled led
to the floor Reade and lcaled against the entrance
wale". Junction boxes used will[ metal raceways
sh1If be metal and shall be electrically continuous
with the raceways.
3555. Inserts. inscrls shall be Icteled to the floor
Rmde and scaled against the entrance of water. In-
serts used With metal raceways shall be metal and
shall be electrically continuous with the raceway, in.
serls set in or on fiber raceways before the floor is
laid shall be mechanically secured to The raceway,
Inserts set in fiber raceways after the floor is W4
shall be screwed tato theraceway, In cutting through
the raceway wall and setting inscrls, chips and other
dirt shall not be Allowed to tall into the raceway, and
Innis shall be used which are so designed as to pre-
.venl the tool from entering the raceway and injuring
conductors that may be in place.
3556. Connections to Cabinets and Wait Outlets,
Connections between raceways and distribution cen-
ters and wall outlets shall be made by means of rigid
or flexible metal conduit or by means of fittin93 3pe-
ciafly approved for The purpose.
ARTICLE 356—CELLULAR METAL
FLOOR RACEWAYS
3561. Scope. Installations of cellular metal floor
raceways shall comply w;[b the provisions o! sec-
tions 3001 to 3020 inclusive, and in addition shall com-
ply with the provisions of the fall-wI,IR sections 3562
1. 3570. For the Purposes of this article a "cellular
metal floor raceway" shall be defined as the hollow
spaces of cellular metal floors, together with suitable
fittings, which may be approved as enclosures far
eie<tnwl eonduaorr A "cell" shall be defined as a
singly, enclosed tubular IDA," in A cellular metal floor
memher, the axis of the cell being parallel to tit,ax
is
of the metal floor memher• . "header' shall be defined
as a transverse raceway (or electrical en I......pro-
viding access to predclermined cells of a cellular metal
Door, Thereby per The installaliun of electrical
conductors from a distnbutlon center to The cells.
3562. Use, Conductors shall not be installed I.
cellular metal floor raceways (1) where subject to
CELLULAR METAL FLOOR RACEWAYS
corrosive vapor; (2) in any hazardous location; (J)
I. commercial gar -R11, except for supplying ceiling
outlets or exlens,ons to the area below the Moor but
not above; nor (4) in storage battery rooms. No elect
tris conductors shall be inL,lled in any jell or header
which contains A Pipe for steam, water, air, gas, drain-
age, or other service than electrical.
3563. Size of Conductors. No conductor larger
tM1an No. 0 shall be installed, except by special per,
mission.
3564. Number of Conductors In Raeaway. The
combined cross-sectional arw of all conductors shall
out
exceed 40 Per cent of tlu interior arca of the
header feeding the individual cells; except that if the
raceway contain only armored cable or non.allic
alitmhed cable, thmmet
ese rcqu,rem<nls shall not apply.
3565. Splice. and Tap.. SNi<es and taps shall be
made only in loader .cess uuus or juncuo t boxes.
3566. Discontinued Outlets. When an outlet la
discontinued, the conductors supplying the outlet .hall
be removed from the raceway.
3567. Markers. A suitable number of markers shall
be installed -trading thronkh it,, (Ines" fee it,, future
locating of cells and f -r system idennfieAtian.
3566. Junction Boxes. Junction boxes shall be
levelled to the 11--r grade and sr3led agaiml the en-
trance of water. Junction boxes used with these race.
ways shall be of mrtal and shall be electrically con.
tinuom with the raceway.
3569. Insert.. Inerts 11,311 be levelled to the floor
grade and scaled agau,et the entrance of water. In.
serts chat[ be of metal and slull be eiectrially eon
timtous with Phe raceway. In cutting through the cell
will and setting inserts, chips and otlser dirt shall nsn
be allowed to fall into the raceway, sad tads shall be
used which are designal to prevent ta tool from
enuring lot cell and injuring the eonduchtars.
3570. Connection to Cabinet. and Sztenloas From
Cell.. Ccmurction b, cAh;nets and earnnsian, from
cells W uuncts shall be made by mea.. of rigid or
flexible conduit or by .,an. of fittings approved for
Ill. purpose.
All
lir ARTICLE 362
ARTICLE 367 WIREWAYS
3621. Scope. Installations of wirctvays shall com-
ply with the Provisions Of sections 3UU1 to 3020 inclu-
sive and in addition shall comply with the provisions
of the following sections 3612 to J630 m4lusiva
3622. Use. Wirew•a3•s may be used only for u -
posed work in dry locations in industrial occupancies,
g.rage, and theaters, including motion -picture houses.
Wirew'ays shall not be used (1) where subject to
severe mechanical injury or corrosive vapor; (2) in,
hoistways; (3) in any hazardous location; nor (4) in
storage -battery rooms.
3623. Size of Conductors, No conductor larger
titan 500,000 ,ni. shall be installed in any wireway.
3524. Number of Conductors in Raceeray. Wire..
ways shall not contain more than 30 conductors at
any cross section, unless the conductors are for sig-
naling circuits or are control conductors between a
motor and its starter and used only for starling duty.
The sum of the crass -sectional arca, of all contained
conductors at any cross section of a wireway shall
not exceed 20 per cent of the interior e(W,-SeeliOnal
area of the wireway.
3625. Splices and Tap. Splices or laps, made and
insulated by approved methods, may be located within
the wireway if they are accessible by means of hinged
covers. The conductors, including splices and taps,
shall not fill the wireway to more than 75 per cent
of its area.
3626. Supporta. Wiseways shall be securely sup-
ported at intervals net exceeding 5 feel, unless aDe-
cially approved for supports at greater intervals, but
in no use shall the distance between supports exceed
10 feet.
3627. Extension Through Walla. Wireway, may
extend transversely through dry walls if in unbroken
lengths Inhere pawing through.
3628. Dead -Eads. Dead -ends of wireways shall be
closed.
3629. Extensions From Wirewaye. Extensions from
wireway, shall be made with rigid or flexible metal
WIREwAY5 113
conduit, electrical metallic tubing, surface metal race.
way or armored able.
3630. Marking. Wireways shall be marked so that
their manufacturer'. name or trade ..,it will be via-
ible after legalistic.
ARTICLE 361 -BUSWAYS
3641. Scope. Installations of busways shall com-
ply with the provisions of sections 3001 to 3020 inclu-
sive and in addition 'hall comply with the provisions
of the following sections 3642 to 3653 inclusive.
36[2. Use. Busways may be used for exposed
work Busways shall not be -led (1) where subject
to severe mechanical iniur or corrosive vapors; 2
I.
hoistwaya; J in an n ( )
f) Y (5) outdoors
location; (4) in
storage -battery rooms; pec (5) outdoor or t wet or
damp locstiovs unless specially approved for the poo-
poen
BvanaT aur be wed far amlcneeVaea cand_a Ste
,raiw ]331.
3645. Support 13-Y. shall be s.corcly support-
ed at intervals not exceeding 5 feel, uoless specially
approved for support, 't greater intervals, but in no
case shall the di,Unce between supports exceed 10
feet. if a busway i, installed in a vertical position,
the ppo,U for the boa -bar. shall be desk. nes for
vertSekal installation, g
3644. Extension ThroughBusways may
blend tnnavtr.ely through dryV�y if is unbroken
length, where Paving Ihrouglc Busways may extend
,,,dolly thm.Rh dry goer if totally -closed (un-
vmrilaud) where Paling Ihmugh and for a minimum
quate proleM.- frc one Ian gnnr to provide ade-
m me<hanual injury.
7641. Dead -Enda. Dead-end, of busways shall be
c:w<d.
3646 Branches from Bwways. Branches from
bmwar. atlas be ma.1[ a:nh Cwuvp nr with rigid or
6biY.e mutat lv:y electrical m- tubing. sur-
a7� ianr<4 wqL ruYab:e cord a. able or, fur parable
hard usage. ,<r1ILliea spprnve4 for
111 ARTICLE 364
3647. Overcurvent Protection. Overcurrent protea
tion shall be provided in accordance with Sections
3648 to 3652 inclusive.
3548. Rating of Overeurrent Protection-FeMen
and Sub -Feeders. If the allowable current rating of
the busway docs not correspond to a standard rating
of the overcurrent device, the next higher rating may
be used, but not exceeding 150 per cent of the allow,
able current rating of the busway.
3649. Reduction in Size of Busaray. Overcurrent
protection may be omitted at points where busways
are reduced in size. Provided that the smaller busway
does not extend more titan 50 feet and has a current
rating at least equal to one-third the rating or setting
of the overcurrent device next back on the line, and
Provided further thatsuch busway is free from con-
tact with combustible material.
3650. Branch Circuits. Where a busway is used
as a feeder, devices or Plug-in connections for tapping
off branch circuits from the busway shall contain the
overcurrent devices required for the Protection of the
branch circuits, u pt as permitted in section 2430.
Where the overcurrent device is not readily accessible
it shall be enclosed or guarded until Is. e
is a ccescceswil,
disconnected from the busway.
3651. Rating of Overcrurent Protection -Branch
Circuits. A busway mapp be used as a branch circuit
of any one of the types rlescrihed in Article 210. When
so used, the rating or setting of the overcurrent de-
vice protecting the busway shall determine the ampere
rating of the branch circuit and the circuit shall in all
respects conform .rids Are requirement, of Article 210
applying to branch circuits of that rating.
36SZ Length of Busways Used as Branch CireuitL
Busways which are used as branch circuits and which
are so designed that loads can be connected at any
point shall be limited to such lengths as will prwide
that in normal use the circuits will not be overloaded.
In general• the length of such run in feet should not
exceed three times the ampere rating of the branch
circuit.
3653. Marking. Busways shall be marked with the
voltage and current rating for which they are de-
signed, and with the manula,ii-'s name or trade-
mark in such manner as to be visible after installation.
BUSWAYS 115
71 b Ord. rnd,d toot � o trnvd.rr arrhema .n onerous
vnxreuvded, a <.m...... an areund Irl.., anA rcetntialiaer nlur
de6a led mrrn[ial utider<,vni.�,ween the b -b- anolrlha aucJ[J
sauna f the 4uawa Ih Tl,i.. 11 Rne le drain o1 am .tails oe
ether charas from the enure -h r arse- ,Rlvd;na iu em.
,wired a(gaealua, aw•PIY anJ Lranch rirm:t <onJuctori
ARTICLE 370 -OUTLET, SWITCH AND
]UNCTION BOXES, AND FITTINGS
3701. Scope. The provisions of this article shall
aPplY to the Installation of outlet. switch andjunction
box-, and fittings as required by section 3007. In.
stallations in h -ding. 'cations Shall conform to
Article 500,
3702. Us. of Round Outlet Boxes. Round outlet
boxes shall not be used where conduits or connectors
requiring tie use al lockouts or bushings are to be
connected to the side of the boa
3703. Non-MMIlic Outlet Boxes, Non-nrehillic
outlet boxes nay be used ..,,Iy pdt open wiring on
insulators, cnneWcd knob -and -tube work, ran -metal-
lic Sheathed cable, and with non-metallic waterproof
wiring.
9700 Metallic Outlet Boxes• When used with
knob.and-lube work or nou.,uehallie sluMhed cable,
and mounted on metal or metal I.,11. oiling, or ,tall,.
such Loxes shall be insulated from lhru, supports and
from the metal or metal lath, or shall be gtuunded.
3705. Damp or Wet Location. In damp or wet
locations, boxes and fitting, shall be w PT -rd or
equipPcd as to prevent moisture or water Irons enter.
ingand-cruufalintai Win the box or fining. )luxes
and fittimg
ng. installed in wet kaaalierrs shall be weather.
proof. For boxes in floors, see sestina 416?
h b wrommendrd ,hat t-. of non <cndmdre --ha W
arJ �irh nnnmetan:e rt1-14 I.A!, ween rwh eaela 1s. u.ad ,
IP' I,WI Wl:ere Ihile Is. hath tJ hn ortu:.Tal OmRWe n(errOl
..,t u in yin 1wc�
3706. Depth of Boxes for C m,.ald Work. Our.
let boxes for concealed work shall have an internal
depth of at [cast ISS inches, except that where the
Installation Of such a box will result in injury to the
building gruclure or is impracticable, a box not less
than Sr. Inch internal depth may be instal:ed.
352
A9
116 _ ARTICLE 370
3707. Supports—General Boxes, fittings and cab.
ineU .,trail be securely taslened in place. Boxes and
fittings, not over 100 cubic inches in size, which are
attachedto firmly secured "Posed raceway by thread-
ing or other connection designed for the purpose, are
considered as so fastened.
a. Concealed Work. In concealed work, except as
prescribed in paragraph b of this section, outlet boxes
and fittings, unless securely hell in place by concrete,
masonry or other building material in sv!neh they are
embedded, shall be secured to a stud, joist or similar
fixed structural unit, or to a metal or wooden support
which is secured to such a structunl unit. Wooden
supports shall be not less than 75 inch in thickness,
Lath ➢f wood, metal or composition shall not be can.
sidered a structural unit. See sections 4131 and 4132
for support of fixtures.
Is. Exposed Work. Incxposed work, and in con-
cealed work in existing but ing. where conductors or
cables are fished and outlet boxes cannot be secured
as
provided in paragraph a of this section u•Uhoo dis-
turbing the building finish, the boxes may be mounted
directly upon the plaster surface if securely fastened
in place.
3708. Pull and Junction Boxes. Pull and junction
boxes shall coniorns to the following:
a. Minimtun Size. For raceways of I% inch trade
size and larger, containing conductors of No. 6 or
larger, the minimum dimensions of u Pull box or a
junction box installed in a raceway s islI conform to
the following:
1. Straight Pulls, In straight pulls the length of
the box simll be not less than 8 limes the trade diam.
ttcrof lie largest raceway.
2, Angie or U Pulls. Where angle or U pulls are
made, ""distance between cacti racecvat entry inside
the box and the opposite wall of the box shall not
be less tl,.n fa times the trade diameter of rite nccw•ay,
This distance shall be increased for additional entries
by the umount of the sum of the diameter of all other
raceway entries on the tame wall of the box. The
distance between raceway entries enclosing the same
conductor shall not be less than 6 times the trade
diameter of the larger raceway,
BOXES AND FITTINGS 117
3. Exceptions. The limitations of sub -paragraphs
1
..d2
of this section are not intended to apply to
terminal housings supplied with motors, nor to types
of boxes or fittings without knockouts and having
hubs ar recessed ports for terminal bushings and
locknur.
Is. Conducton in Pon or Junction Boxes !n pull
boxes or junction boxes having any dimension over
6 feet, all conductor, slull be cabled or racked up in
an approved manner.
See sada 3736 for im larian ar ry jJa ae bvahinas
3709. Ntmtbcr of Condun ctoin a Box. Boxes
shall b< of sufficient size to Provide free space for all
conductor enclosed in the box.
a. Tle maximum number of conductors, not count.
ing fixture wires, permitted in outlet and junction
bees" shall be as in the following tables with the
aceptios noted:
118 ARTICLE 370
conductor, and each conductor terminating in the
box is also counted as are conductor, If single flush
boxes arc ganged, and each section is occupied by a
flush device or combination of flush device., on the
same strap, the limitations will apply to each section
individually,
b. For combinations not shown in above tables the
following table shall apply:
Sieeo( Free Spere tYithin Das
C<ndunor
Is r Gash COnduetar
No. 14 2, cubic inches
No. 12 2.25 cubic inches
Nor10 ...... .. ....... .... .. 2,5 cubic inches
No. 8 ......................... J. cubieinche3
G The limitations in paragraph, a and b of this
section shall not apply to terminal housings supplied
with moms,, nee In typpes of boxes or fittings without
knockout and having hubs or recessed parts for ter.
rout bushings and lockouts.
pi fngranba a and b eaiaidH radon JiM da not tannin, to ennductars
Charter IQ, --Y. nrxeware as refrrad w to Table i l of
3710. Conducton Entering Boxes or Fittings.
Conducts, entering box.s or fillings shall be pro-
tected from abrasion, and shall conform to the fol.
lowing:
a. Openings to be Closed. Openings through
ivRieh conductors enter shall be adequately closed,
b. Metal Bases and Fittings. If metal outlet boxes
or fittings are used with open wiring or concealed
knoband-lube work, condneora shall color through
insulating bushings or, in dry plus.,, through flexible
tubingextending from the last inn Uti% support and
firmly secured to, 11,c box or fitting. Uhere, raceway
or cable is used with metal outlet Loxes or fittings,
the mcevay or cable shall be secured to such boxes
and fittings.
a Nan -Metallic Boxes. If non-metallic boxes are
used with open wiring or concealed knob -and -tube
work, the conductors shall enter through individual
holes. Where O'.ible robing is used'to encase icer
conductor, the tubing shall extend from the last in- .
sulating support and may be run intothe box or
terminate at the wall of the box. If non-metallic
sheathed able is Osed, the cable assembly shall enter
➢ORFS AND FITTINGS 116
the box through a knockout opening. Clamping of
individual conductor or cables to the box is not re-
quired if supported within 8 inches of the I—
3711. Coven and Canopies. In completed installa-
tions each outlet box shall beprovided with a cover
unless a fixture canopy is used.
a. Non-metallic covers and plates shall be used
with non-metallic outlet Loxes. ,
b. If a fixture canopy or pan is used, any combus.
tible scall or ceiling ftmih he uposed between the edge
of the nnopy or Pan amt toutlet Lox shall be eov-
ered with non-em"Lusti c materia(.
e. Covers of outlet loxes having holes through
M&I, flexible cord pendants pass, shall be provided
with Lu3hings d......d for the Purpome or shall have
smooth, well-rounded surfaces on wdtidt the cords
may Lear• So-called hatd-rubber or composition bush.
ings shall not I used.
3712, Unused OPenings. Unused openings in boxes
and finings .,lull be e8ectisely closed to allonl Pro-
section suLslantia llY equivalent to Blas of the wall of
the Lox tar "rung. Metal Plugs or Plates shall not be
used with non-metallic L.xcs ar fittings unless re-
eesscd at least :S inch (rant she• inter surface.
3713, Boxes Enclosing Flush Devitt.. Peres used
to enclose flush devices shall be of such design that
the Jeeices will be completely ..dosed en Lack and
Bides anJ that substantial support for the devices will
be provided Screws for suPl"`ring the box shall nos
be used in attachment of the device contained Mersin.
3714. Fastened to Gas Pipes. Outlet boxes used
Jeol gas outlets are present shall be so fastened to
the gas Pipes as to be mechanically secure,
3713. Po.ision In W.H. In walls or reilimis of
Miners, file or other nan-combu vible material, boxes
and Mmsit shall be so installed that the front edge
of the Lox or fitting .,sill ns set hark of the finished
surface morn Ilan !i inch. In lis and ceilings ton-
Rructed of svao,l or oiler emnbnstib'< mineral, Outlet
boxes and fittings shall be hush wdb the finished
,urfat< or project titcrdrom.
3716. Repairing Plaster. Fxcept an walls or ,il-
in.r of ro l etc, rile s ether nom<ortbusbble mala
-L a Pl:aa surface wh,ch is broken ar incampl<Ia
353
par ➢axes
Q a .. Stxntar
Trane Sur
lfuimum Number tar Ca 4d ...
Na. 14
ISi x3Si octagonal ..
Na, IJ No, 10 Na.8
$ 5
Ice x 4 octagonal ...
4 0
8 7 6 5
11 9 7 5
(!$x411/16 -quare
... 16 12 10 a
2!y x411/I6 o!uar<..,
25 16 a
14 IU
2 x1Ya x24:
,- 5 y
Ili x l451 2si
.., 6 6 5
J x1;i x2;f .....,,
7 i 6
Swau taw Poser or I- t!;• D.....
Ru•Iraen,iv�ue
MT...
-.:m_m Nuxtxr of CnnA�u,era
3:f .... ... ........
4 4 J
4 .... ........
8 G 6
The abme ubk- a-plv wl:ue no C:nhgs
ruck as f Rin• e.
or devices
111 ¢ . ss.r rl:rs
or res, r%:,a,!,-, .
f+m;rr",
"I m tie: h'I:c:c ane
w n:.rt
amuined m r'.• ,.
_
! �' . � r l ,ace
be W lest 11 ,•1
.. �� :'1/,li fih..'1
dcduc!mn ci
cone
aoumed n
118 ARTICLE 370
conductor, and each conductor terminating in the
box is also counted as are conductor, If single flush
boxes arc ganged, and each section is occupied by a
flush device or combination of flush device., on the
same strap, the limitations will apply to each section
individually,
b. For combinations not shown in above tables the
following table shall apply:
Sieeo( Free Spere tYithin Das
C<ndunor
Is r Gash COnduetar
No. 14 2, cubic inches
No. 12 2.25 cubic inches
Nor10 ...... .. ....... .... .. 2,5 cubic inches
No. 8 ......................... J. cubieinche3
G The limitations in paragraph, a and b of this
section shall not apply to terminal housings supplied
with moms,, nee In typpes of boxes or fittings without
knockout and having hubs or recessed parts for ter.
rout bushings and lockouts.
pi fngranba a and b eaiaidH radon JiM da not tannin, to ennductars
Charter IQ, --Y. nrxeware as refrrad w to Table i l of
3710. Conducton Entering Boxes or Fittings.
Conducts, entering box.s or fillings shall be pro-
tected from abrasion, and shall conform to the fol.
lowing:
a. Openings to be Closed. Openings through
ivRieh conductors enter shall be adequately closed,
b. Metal Bases and Fittings. If metal outlet boxes
or fittings are used with open wiring or concealed
knoband-lube work, condneora shall color through
insulating bushings or, in dry plus.,, through flexible
tubingextending from the last inn Uti% support and
firmly secured to, 11,c box or fitting. Uhere, raceway
or cable is used with metal outlet Loxes or fittings,
the mcevay or cable shall be secured to such boxes
and fittings.
a Nan -Metallic Boxes. If non-metallic boxes are
used with open wiring or concealed knob -and -tube
work, the conductors shall enter through individual
holes. Where O'.ible robing is used'to encase icer
conductor, the tubing shall extend from the last in- .
sulating support and may be run intothe box or
terminate at the wall of the box. If non-metallic
sheathed able is Osed, the cable assembly shall enter
➢ORFS AND FITTINGS 116
the box through a knockout opening. Clamping of
individual conductor or cables to the box is not re-
quired if supported within 8 inches of the I—
3711. Coven and Canopies. In completed installa-
tions each outlet box shall beprovided with a cover
unless a fixture canopy is used.
a. Non-metallic covers and plates shall be used
with non-metallic outlet Loxes. ,
b. If a fixture canopy or pan is used, any combus.
tible scall or ceiling ftmih he uposed between the edge
of the nnopy or Pan amt toutlet Lox shall be eov-
ered with non-em"Lusti c materia(.
e. Covers of outlet loxes having holes through
M&I, flexible cord pendants pass, shall be provided
with Lu3hings d......d for the Purpome or shall have
smooth, well-rounded surfaces on wdtidt the cords
may Lear• So-called hatd-rubber or composition bush.
ings shall not I used.
3712, Unused OPenings. Unused openings in boxes
and finings .,lull be e8ectisely closed to allonl Pro-
section suLslantia llY equivalent to Blas of the wall of
the Lox tar "rung. Metal Plugs or Plates shall not be
used with non-metallic L.xcs ar fittings unless re-
eesscd at least :S inch (rant she• inter surface.
3713, Boxes Enclosing Flush Devitt.. Peres used
to enclose flush devices shall be of such design that
the Jeeices will be completely ..dosed en Lack and
Bides anJ that substantial support for the devices will
be provided Screws for suPl"`ring the box shall nos
be used in attachment of the device contained Mersin.
3714. Fastened to Gas Pipes. Outlet boxes used
Jeol gas outlets are present shall be so fastened to
the gas Pipes as to be mechanically secure,
3713. Po.ision In W.H. In walls or reilimis of
Miners, file or other nan-combu vible material, boxes
and Mmsit shall be so installed that the front edge
of the Lox or fitting .,sill ns set hark of the finished
surface morn Ilan !i inch. In lis and ceilings ton-
Rructed of svao,l or oiler emnbnstib'< mineral, Outlet
boxes and fittings shall be hush wdb the finished
,urfat< or project titcrdrom.
3716. Repairing Plaster. Fxcept an walls or ,il-
in.r of ro l etc, rile s ether nom<ortbusbble mala
-L a Pl:aa surface wh,ch is broken ar incampl<Ia
353
V- 3 a
loo ARTICLE 371
shall be repaired so that there will be no gaps or
open spaces at the edge of the box or fitting.
3717. Junction Boxes to Be Accessible. Junction
Ell
shall be so installed that the mooring contained
I
n them may be rendered accessible without remov.
Ing any part of the building.
3718. Exposed Extensions. In making an exposed
extension from an existing outlet of concealed wir.
Big, a box, extension ring or blank cover shall be
mounted ser the original box and electrically and
mechanically secured to it. The extension shall then
be connected to this box In the manner prescribed
for the method of wiring employed in making the
extension.
3719. Boxes at Future Outlets. Boxes used at
outlets for fixtures shall be designed for the purpose.
At ox•cry outlet used exd-lively for lighting, the box
shall be so designed or installed that a fixture may be
attached.
ARTICLE 373 -CABINETS AND
CUTOUT BOXES
3731. Scope, The provisions of this article shall
apply to the installation of cabinets and cutout boxes.
Installations in hazardous locations shall conform to
the provisions of Article 500.
3732.Damp or Wet Location.. In damp or wet
locations, cabinets and cutout boxes of the surface
type shall be so placed or cquippcd as to prevent
moisture or water from entering and .-ru l.1ing
within the cabinet or cutout box, and shall be mounted
so there is at least one-half inch air space between
the enclosure and the wall or other supporting sur-
face. Cabinets or cutout boxes installed to wet loca-
tions shall be weatherproof.
it b 1 --fol that heaa f ran.....!.Itrm
a aterial b<
Ieed with non meta.ie theatM1e.l eaele .1- tech e is a,ed N
atism whore lb i4 hildy w be Debt- Pe ,
3733. Position In Wall.
In walls of concrete, tile,
car other non-combustilale material, abincts shall be
so installed that the front edge of it,, cabinet will not
set hack of the finished surface mare than Y,inch.
In walls constructed of wood or other combustible
material, cabinets shall he flush with the finished sur.
face or project therefrom.
CABINETS AND CUTOUT BOXES 111
3734. Unused Openings. Unused openings in cabi-
nets or cutout boxes shall be effectively closed to
afford protection substantially equivalent to that of
he all of the cabinet or cutout box. If metal plugs
or Plates are used with non-metallic cabinets or cut.
out Loxes, they shall be recessed at last %inch from
the outer aorta'.
3735. Conductors Entering Cabinets or Cutout
Boxm. Conductors entering cabinets or cutout boxes
shall be Protected from abrasion and shall conform
to the following:
a. Openings to Be Clo.ed. Openings through
which conductors enter shall be adequately closed.
Ill . Metal Cabinets and Cutout Boxes. If metal
eabmcIs or cutout boxes are used with open wiring or
concealed knob -and -tube work, conductors shall enter
through insulating li-hings car, in dry places, through
flexible wiring extending from the last insulating sup.
port and firmly secured to the eaLnsa or cutout box.
3736. Deflection of Coulk,".rs. Conductors enter-
ing or having rAli-rtl or cutout bones and the like
shall conform to the follolving:
a. Width of Gutters. Vertical conductors No. I
or larger shall not be deflected ewe,, they enter or
lea.. a cabinet unless a Puller hams• a width in ae-
-4ance with the following ta.Ic is provided:
Cva.rtcr Sias Y:,rimum width d
.unrr m leeee4
No. I .................... ....... 3
`o. 0 m 200,(40 e.m........... ...... 4
:1 I,GA to
4. a1, u0 m AO,fAn1 c.m... ....... 8
r
1 •ra,rdA to IArIq,Ofeq cm ... .. .. ......10
A
I'S'. 6W l0 2.G moo .m ... ..... ......12
b. Itsn4t"" at Bushing. Where ungrounded can
ducts cl .`7o ser 1-91 are d<fl«ted more than
30 degeo .1:<re i:ntrnes a raceway m a cabinet. Pull
bo janrtian box, cr an,. lacy gml<r, the conducinra
shall be
.1
IF
by a ari,oaal lal Lushmg Providmg
a arrmthlIF ro 11 rs•da,inR -E.", .mess the con-
ducicn are aeparau II..— enc noway filing by s.b.
stamial inmluing r..atv..I sernrrly fasten«1 in Place
11 conduit Imshin4. are ,,.oa!,ocled wh"Vy of insulat-
ing mat.l.t, a kaskaut shall Le PI-ded both uil lde
132 ARTICLE 374
and outside the enclosure to which the conduit Is
attached.
3737. Space fn Enclosures. Cabinets and cutout
boxes shall conform to the following:
a To Accommodate Conductors, Cabinets and cut.
out boxes shall be selected which Ihzvo suficicnt space
to accommodate all conductors installed in them with-
out crowding.
Is. Used as junction Boxes. Switch enclosures shall
not be used as junclion boxes, troughs or raceways
(or cond...... fecdinu lbrough or tapping off to other
switches, unless special designs are employed to pro-
vide adequate space for this purpose.
3738. Side or Back Wiring Spaces or Gutters,
Cabinets and cutout boxes shall be provider) with back
Nking Spa-, gutters, or wiring compartments ab Ib
quirod by paragraphs a and it of section 93732.
ARTICLE 374 -AUXILIARY GUTTERS
3741. Purpose. Auxiliary gutters, used to supple-
ment wiring spaces at meter « .ten, distribution cen-
Iers, switchboards and similar points of interior wir-
ing systems, may enclose conductors or bus -bars, but
"tall not be used to enclose switches, overcurrent do-
rices or other appliances or apparatus.
3742 Extension Beyond Equipment. An auxiliary
gutter shall nal '-lend a greater dist ... c than 3o
feet beyond limo equipment which it supplements ex.
cePt in elevator work Any extension beyond this
distance shall comply with the Provisions for wire.
ways in Article 362 or with the provisions for busways
I n Article 364.
3743. Supports, Culter9 "shalt be supported through-
out their entire length at intervals oat exceeding 5
feel.
3744. Covera, Covers shall be securely fastened to
the gutter.
3745. Number of Conductors in Raceway- Auxil-
nary gutters shall oat contain more than 30 conductors
at any cross section unless the conductors are for
signalling circuits or are control conductors between
a motor and its starter and used only for startfug
AUXILIARY CUTTERS I:r
duty. The sum of the cross sectional areas of all con.
tained conductors at any cross section of an auxiliary
gutter shall not exceed 20 per cent of the interior
cross sectional area of the gutter.
17- devatcn .ae ,reason 6211.
3746. Carrying Capacity of Copper Ban. The cur.
rent carried continuously nt bare conductors in auxil.
iary gullets shall not exceed 1000 amperes per square
inch of cross-section of tie canduclor.
3747. Clearance of Ban Live Parts. Bare conduc-
tors shall be securely and rigidly supported so that
the minimum clearance between bare current -carrying
metal parts of opposite Polarities ounted on the
same surface shall be not less than 3minches, nor less
than I fruit for parts that are held free in the air.
A spacing not less than 1 inch shall be secured be.
Iween bare current -carrying metal parts and any
metal surface Adequate provision shall be .lade far
expansion and couiracuon of copper Lara.
3148. Splices and Taps. Splices and taps shall
conform to the following:
u Splices or laps, made and insulated by approved
methods, may be iucatcd within gutters if they are
accessible by means of removable covencar doors.
The conductor,, including splices anti taps, shall out
fill the gutter to more than 75 per ,at of its arca.
Is, Taps from bare conductors shall leave the gut.
ter opposite their terminal connections and conductors
shall not be brought in contact with umnsulat<d cur.
rent -carrying parts of opposite po;arity.
e. All taps shall be slsil.bly identified at the gutter
as to the circuit or equipment welch they supply.
d. Tap connections from conductors in auxiliary
gutters shall be Providrd with overcurrent protection
in conformity with the provisions of section 2434.
3749. Conatructi.n. Auxiliary Dunn shall be can.
stncted in lecordaxce with the fal!awing:
a Cullers shall be so eonstrurrd and installed
that adequate circle k.I and mechanical commu.1y of
the completp raceway system will be ..cued,
b.Gun- shall be of substantial construction and
.hall provide a tomplela eadaaure far the coataioed
354
31
IN ARTICLE 3"
conductors. All surfaces, both interior and exterior,
shall be suitably protected from corrosion. Corner
joint& shall be made tight and where the assembly is
held together by rfcem or bops, these shall be spaced
not more than, 12 inches apart
a Suitable bushings, shields or fittings having
smooth rounded edges shall be provided where con-
ductors pass between gutters, through Partitions,
around bends, between gutters and cabinets or jime-
lion boxes and at other locations where necessary to
Prevent abrasion of the insulation of the conductors.
d. Gutters shall be constructed of sheet metal of
thicknesses not less titan in the following table;
Stamm.. Widtb oftura CUSS 56«t
ie Wided Tbieknaa
Surface of Gut51
t)p to and including 6 inches...... No. 16....0598inch
Over 6 in. and not over 18 in...... No. 14.. ,.0747 inch
Over IS in, and not over 30 im.... No. 12....1046ineh
O... 30 inches .................. No. 10...:1345 inch
e. Where insulated conductors are deflected within
the auxiliary gutter, either at the ends or where con-
duits. fittings or other racewa7•s enter or leave the
Rutter, or where the direction of the gutter is deflected
greater
ill
30 degrees, dimensions corresponding to
section 3736 shall apply.
ARTICLE 380—SWITCHES
3801. Grounded Conductors. No switch or circuit -
breaker shall disconnect the grounded conductor of a
circuit unless the switch or circuit -breaker simuita-
ncously disconnects the ungrounded conductor or con-
ductors, or unless the switch or circuit -breaker is so
arranged that the grounded conductor cannot be dis-
connected until the ungrounded conductor or conduc-
tors have fust been disconnected.
3802. Three -Way and Four -Way Switche& Three•
aya)• and four-way Switches shall be so wired that all
ewdcbfng is done only in the ungrounded circuit con-
ductor. Wiring between swdtchts and outlets shall,
if in metal enclosures, be run with both polarities in
the same enclosure.
3803. Enclosar<& Switches and circuit -breakers,
except pendent and surface type snap switches and
SWITCHES 125
knife switches mounted an an open face switchboard
ar p. n lboard, shall be of the raurnslly operable type
enclosed in metal boxes or cabinet&
3804. Wet Location& If a switch or circuit -breaker
is in a wet bastion ur outside of a building, it shall
be arclosrdneatberproof endasurc or cabinetins Wiled to conform to section 3732.
3805. Time Switches, Flashers and Similar Device.
Time switches, Ildshers and similar d<vic<,. unless
mounted on switcbboarJa or control panels, if not in
approved hil,widual housing, shall be enclosed in
mem, boxes nr cabinets but need not be of the ex•
terna.ly-operable type.
3806. Position of Falls Switches, S,ngle•throw
knife switches shall be so placed that gravity will not
tend to dose them. Double -throne knife switches may
be mcumcef so that the throw will be either vertical
or horizontal as preferred, but if the throw be vertical
a locking devi.e shall be provided which will insure
the blades remaining in lira open position wbell so sea.
3807. Conneedon of Knife Switches. Knife
aw tches, unless of the doable -throw type, shall be so
connected 113t the blades arc dead when the switch
is in the upon posidom
3808, AccesubiN and Gomping Switches and
cirrus-In<ak<rs, --ofar as pract.cabk, shall b< readily
atccss:ble Coand slut! L< grouped.
3809, ven of Pluth Slnp Switches Flush snap
au nth<& if r..oamed m urground<d metal boxes and
iraa«d willun teach of eenduuing floors or other
cor:fucting surfaces, shall he pras:ded with covers of
r:.,n-condo<tinK., Le "Ot host Ste material Face platen.
d rf metal, a..a!1 Le nut fess than G.I)4 inch in thick•
ren, and P,atrs of non aonducnn,r, non•comFsusuble
material &hail be not less Chau 410 in;;t in Witkncss.
3810. Masasdng of Surface -Type Snap Svritches.
Snap &witch& uacd with cien wising rn iuw!aton
sha11 W moum,d on sub -bases cf :.misting ms«r:ai
wi..cb w:,1 s<;,.eat< the co.Iiiew s at kaat Y'+ inch
fr,.-n I, a'�flaar NVed vier,
3a1L Ctrw:!-Breakers 4 8w1rc1he& A ei«sit-
hrea'ter e5rti.:e d rvrt;y by ypl%,dig it.. hand to a
1e.v a 1::n1:o may nerve as s ens -h prowled it has
in. eum:<r of P0:es rMuirnl h., such anirh.
1.16 ARTICLE J60
3812,Grounding of Enclosure& Enclosures for
switches or circuit -breakers on circuits of over 150
volts to ground shall be grounded fit the manner specie
ficdin Article 250, except where accessible to quali•
reed operators only,
3813. Knife Switches. Knife switches rated for
more than 12110 amperes at 250 volts or less, and for
.ore than 61N1 augwres at 251 to 600 volts, shall be
used only as isolating switches and slmll not be open-
ed under load. To interrupt currents J:rcater than
1200 amperes at 250 volts or less, or b00 amperes et
251 to 600 volts, a circuit -breaker or a switch of apse
col design approved for such purpose shall be used.
Knife switches of lower rating may be used as general-
use snitches and may be opened under load. Motor-
circuit Switches (see definition) may be of the knife.
switch type.
3814. Rating of Snap Switebea. Snap switches
shall be rated as follows:
A. Non -inductive Load& For non -inductive loads
Other than tungsten -filament lamps, switches shill
have an ampere rating not less than the ampere rat-
ing or the load.
b. Tungsten Filament Load& For tungsten•fila-
ment lamp loads, and for combined tungsten -filament
and non -inductive loads, switches shall be "T" rated,
except where lite three following qualifications are
satisfied:
1. if switches are used in branch circuit wiring
systems in privntc homes: in rooms in multiple -Deco•
panty dwelling& used only as living quarters by ten-
ants; in private h -pit. or hotel rooms; or in similar
locations but not in public rooms or places of assem-
bIY; and
2. Only when such a snitch controls permanently
cognected fixtures -or lighting outlets in one room
only, or in one continuous hallway where the lighting
fixtures may be located at different levels, or on
porches or in attics or basements not used for assem-
bly purposes; and
3. When the switch is rated at not less than 10A,
125V; SA, 250V; or for the 4.way, types, SA, 125V;
2r\, 250V.
SWITCHES Iii,
Inductive Loads. Switches controlling induclive
loads shall hive an ampere rating twice the ampere
rating of tlto load unless they are of a type .Pproved
as part ui an aventbly or for the I—I V_ 'uploy'«I.
I'•r vinhn w aignn and <udin< tiahlma, a.< arnicv 600J,
Pm a ache. mmrdl'rs mean, a<r &crag -n dJeJ,
ARTICLE 384—SWITCHBOARDS AND
PANELBOARDS
3841. Slope. 'Ih< rcquircmmna of Illi, article &hall
apply to all swiic I oat, s, panelboards, and distribu.
lint hoards gad for the control of light and polver
c.cuila, except s4wilcbbwrd, in utility company ups—
at<+1 ...trill stations and/or substations, which di.
rectly r'..Ituol energy derived from generator& or
lionsf 11—c"I us"]s, andi"ly swontroa signal
par•
lions tlmrrut used exclusively la control signal this
.uiu npeaal by baUcries. The reyuiremutla of this
snide sh:dl m bor .Y.cbarg,nR Pdneln if cur-
« rat is ukrn i::!:1.Y,;gh1 or p0xr nrcuit.
3812. APPlicotion of Other Articles. Switdlts, cir-
cuit-baaktrs and ,rcrrcurrea devices used on s tch•
bwrJs. 1'anCln oral: and d�srtihnlian b:nnls, rhe b...4,
and til«r enchosu«•. sh.di conform to the require•
menta u( ,\rli; lrs '4u, 3: G, 310 amt a,thrr artitlt,
which apply: `nil ilcLhv:uds anJ pandbcanh in hu-
ardeoaI,—Ii.ns shill c: fo,aa to tilt requ.rtu:luta el
Article 500.
3813. Support of Bus -ban and Cooductara. Co..
,.cors and bis-4,-rs ,•n :, swig hh.as�i• pmep,aard or
«mtrol hood, shall he w L�cacd as to b< free tram
nwdunid injury ;,.d shall b< hrld in such a manner
m to ht rigid.
Switchboards
3851. Location of Switchboards, cwhthtoarde
MITI: II II.:\P .114 +\',', �.frl 1,\'! Ild(Ir njlall lir e. .,et
_ul,t u<r dy clic 1o: atom ;rad U+tn Doll where unJer
«.mb<trnt sopa vl.ian and access:hie only to qualified
prr.nu!
7832. Wet f.o<atfana. If a switchb.vnl is in a wit
lu:dtrm w' �ula de of a building. it shall be oclosrd
355
3 2-
1-5 ARTICLE 391
in a wmlherprrusf enclosure or cabinet installed to
amfunn to section 3:32.
3853. Location Relative to Easily Ignitible Mate-
riaL Suioehhanrds shall be ss flared as to rcducc la
a minimum tlm probability of conunuilicming fire to
ad)went easily ignitible material.
3854. Clearance from Ceiling. Switchboards shall
not be built up to a non-lirrpruai cri7ing, a space of
Ihrrc in3 Leine telt bclwatn the c. ilei::uRI flu, brrard,
unless• au adcgnatc li,epr—i Alh4d r, provided be-
tu'een the board and the tied in:;.
3855. Clearance Back of Switchboard. If the equip-
ment or
wiring ran Ibe bark u1 the -.ilehhoard is
acees:ible only from tl:e space behind the board, There
slw it be a clear space of at ]cast 18 Indus between
sucIt e, u ln-ut or miring and the u:dl Its a single
panel an'ildJ+„arc not exceeding 42 inches in width,
and at least 24 invhes when the board cmmisls of
a uA,, panel er more Than rale 1,; -1: If the space
Ldiind the L: n. rd i+ accessible only ollc end,
Il:osr q'ares r!rdl he fns c—A by ;d least 6 incites.
The .lore Lark of the board shall be kept dear of
foreign mater.:d and shall not be used for storage
put
Re lvcGcn e! cl v—,, s far h.rt W—A, hr bonding column.
t. ed ll+e aw.lcl+l.,arJ, a L1 <•;u:1`ntnv c a:nale land m the
ivtl+S•,aN, errmmml Irat+JrA vie char be.i arc ret re•
dv¢d b*f t base 1 dish- bra vu.,le paid be.
S•me of the "love dimtnctn• are «crpdans to vatlon 111:.
38M Conductor Covering, Insulated conduclors
"litre closely grouped, as on the rear of switchboards,
stall each haves game-rclardmu muter covering• The
conductor covering shall be stripped baek'a sufficient
df,mnce from the terminals so as not to make contact
with them. Insulated conductors used for instrument
and control wiring on the back of switchboards shall
be fl,nu-retanlan4 either inherently or by means of
an outer rovrrinR, and Lc nnc of the follo"ving types,
R, RTI, V, ,\VA. AVR, T. or TA.
3857, Protection of Instrument Circuits. Instru-
mrnu, Dhru light., potential trensfonners, and other
'u'ilrhhoard dea'ices with potenial coils, except "viers
the operation of the overcurrent device might tri ere
duce a hazard in the operation of devices, shall be
supplied by a circuit that is protected by standard
Sw'll".11nOARUS ,”,\L 1'ATELUOARUS 119
overcurrent devices of a rating not greater than 15
amperes. except that for ratings of 2 amperes or less
special types of enclosed fuses may be used.
3858. Grounding Switchboard Frames. Switchboard
(mm� old structures suppuiting switching equip-
ment shall be grounded, except that frames of direct-
current .+nine -polarity switchboards need not be
grounded if effectively insulated.
3859. Grounding of Instruments, Relays, Meters
and Instrument Transformer. on Switchboard& In-
strumcnts, relays, meters and instrument transform-
ers Wretcd on switchboards shall be grounded as
specified in sections 2(i11 to 2625.
Panelboards
788E Numbtr of Ove—Trent Device. on Do.
Panelbosrd, Not more than 43 overcurrent devices of
a li.bling and appliance branch circuit panrlboard
,hall be installed in any one cabinet or cutout box,
3882. Ov<rctment Proteeton. Except as installed
for services as in paragraph a-3 of section 2171, a
panelboard supplied by conductors Lavin. overcurrent
pr.Wtvon greater than 200 amperes shill o protected
on to aupply srle by overcurrent devices having a
coling not Rreal<r than bat of the panelboard. Snap
,witches rated at 30 amperes or Ina and employe
in l—Ib—d, shall have overcurrent prosection not
m otitis. of 1W amperes.
3887. PsnelboI'd' in Damp or Wet Locations.
Pmea.oards in damp mr wet locations shall bE in-
Ids
in cc L—ky I. norm 3732.
34184, Enca.est. P.
nclb—As tall be mounted in
cabmen or coram boxes.
7887. Relative Arungement of Switch.. and Fp.e&
Pona.boaros having anacF.es tin ni+e InaA side of any
,Yvc of Jose 'lull net be instal:ed
."pt
a" fat use as
service equ.e"^mens is prcvi :eA in section 2375.
ARTICLE 390—PREPABRICATED BUILDINGS
7901. Stop- The intent std Pnrpcse of the fol-
Icu:nR seat ons is to rl,] a!i ,, d ;,,n,. a for
nh.e svuir.T of P 4fee rI... ...c is e. ....i Pane L,
or ua.0 des.4ned ter later tuuiun m ueemldy u
rJ
Iso ARTICLE asp
integral parts of huildinps whether aired in the pra-
tes. ,i manuiarmrc or at the site of erection or as.
aembly.
3902. Wiring Methods. Only wiring methods
rccognizrI in Ibis rode .trail be axed.
3903. Code Provisions to Apply, The provisions
Of
this cade'IJI apply ter the type of "tiring method
used and the type of emhstrudion employed.
FLEXIDLE, CORDS III
CHAPTER 4. EQUIPMENT FOR
GENERAL USE
ARTICLE 400—FLEXIBLE CORDS
4001, Ge .... L Flexible eords shall be suitable for
the conditions of use and location.
400L Type& Cord, of the several types shall cram.
form to the descriptions .(Table 31 of Chapter 10.
Types of flexible cords other than those listed in
Table 31, and other uses far types IisteJ in the table,
$hall be the subject of special Invetigat]pm and shall
not be used before being approved.
4003,FIex31e card may be used only for (1)
p<ndanu• (2) wiring of fixtures; (S) connection of
portable lamps or appliances' (4) elcvatmr *bl, ..(I
wiring of cranes and hoist,; (6) for the emnneclus of
stationary equipment to facilitate their interchange;
or (7) to prevent the Iramm�issian of noise or vibr,-
timn. Plexrble cord shall not be used (a) as a sub-
$tilute for the (ueA wirinr� of a structure; (b) where
run Through holo in wa la, ttilin.s, or it Sc)
where run Brough doorway,, windows, or similar
openings: GU where alta<hed to building sur(acea; or
(e) where concealed behind building wall,, ceiling;
or floor&
ON. Splice& Flexible cord shall be used only In
continuous lengths without splice or tap.
4007, Sit—
,or,-Window. and SMw-Caaea. Fkxible
wed show•winAows sad showcases shall be
of type 5, SO, SJ, Sf O, ST, SJ'f or APs, except
for the wgfmg of dram fixture, and for aysl'plying
current to portable lamps and other merchandise for
exhibition purpose&
400& Minimum Slav, Flexible cords shall not be
smaller than No.I8, except that ti mel cords, or cord,
having equivalent characterislir of '..tire site may
be approved for use with specific appli--
4007. Insulation—Over 300 Volt& If the voltage
between any two conductors exceeds 300, but does
not exceed 600, Ocxihle cord of No. 10 and smaller
.lull have cubist oe Ih<rmoplatie insulat,on on the
Individual emndncton at least 3/64 inch in thickness.
unless Type S, 50 or ST cord is ac -L
-4.
J3
13: ARTICLE 410
400& Overcurrent Protection. Flexible cards not
smaller than No. 18, and tinsel fords, or cords having
equivalent <hamcteristi<s, of smallet. sae approved for
ase with spc<ifta applian<rs, shall be considered as
protected against overcurrent by C. overeulI"be de-
vices JewrihcJ in section 240J. Cords shall be no[
small,, than required by Table J, Chapter 10, for the
rated current of the appliance.
4009. Pull at Joints and Terrainala. Flexible cords
Ad! be so connected to Jevicr and to fittings that
tension will not be transmitted to joints or terminal
sr""
This shall be accomplished by a knot in the
cord, winding with tape, by a special fitting designed
for that purpose, or by other equivalent means.
ARTICLE 410 -LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMP -
HOLDERS, LAMPS, RECEPTACLES AND
ROSETTES
General
4101. Scope. re
Lighting fixtus. lampholdtrs, pen.
dants, recepmcles, and rosettes• incandescent filament
lamps, arc lamps, electric discharge tamps, the will",
and equipment forming part of such Ianrps, fixtures
and lighting installations shall conform to sections
4102 to 4216 inclusive, except as otherwise provided
I. this code. ppli
4102. Acation to Other Articles. Equipment
for use in hazardous locations shall conform to
Article 500.
4103. Live Parte. Futures, lampholdcrs, lamps,
rosea,' and receptacles shall have no lice Parte nor-
mally exposed to contact. except in the case of cleat,
type lampholder', m"ptacla and rosettes which are
located at least 8 Net above the floor. Lampholden.
mceptatl,s and switches which have exposed noes.
sible terminals shall not be installed in metal fixture
,-Pies or in open bases of portable table or floor
lamps.
Provisions For Future Locations
4111. Fixtures in Damp, Wet or Corrosive Loca-
tion. Fixtures installed in damp or wet locations
shall be of vaportight or other types approved for
such locations and shall be so constructed or installed
FIX.VNI.S• L\31pIlOLDFRS. Nil•. 1JJ
that water Cannot at,, or a,CUT"" in wirewaYs,
ProIampholJers or other electrical parts, Fixtures tu-
ro ed in corrosive Ineatio.s shall be of a type up.
roved for such locations.
4112. Fixture near Combustible Material Pixtl,res
.hall be so constructed, or ins,alle.l. a equi ped with
shades or guard' that combustible material will nae
be subjected to temperatures in excess of 90C p74F).
4113. Fixtures over Combustible Material Lamp-
holders installed over specially combustible malenal
shall bo of the un'seit<Led type and unless individual
switches are provided, shall be located le Icast 8 scat
aLm•it the floor, or shall be otherwise so located or
guarded that the Ianrps cannot be readily. removed
or damaged.
4114. Ffxtures in Show -Windows. Na externally
vvircd fixlure other clan of the chain type shall he
used in a show•..indoor• For use of cords in A -
windows. see section 4005,
4113. Fixture in Clothes Closets Fixtures in
ebnhcs dottts shall he innalkd c.olhes .n the ceiling or on
d
she t all -b-the don,. Pendams "hall not be in.
smilem closets.
Provisions at Fixture Outlet Boxes, Canopies
and Pana
4121. SPa<e for Conductors. Canaries and outlet
boxes lakrn tr•Arlher stns t'rm'i'k adegnat< space so
that fixture Co,.I. ,tors ani{ tlr conn,,tin devices
may 'c r."'l rly irstalled. g
4322. Temperature Limit of Canduaon in Outlet
Boxes P�ater,s shall h, .:+, such cr.n.rruction or so
insa8<.1 tial the rmJw4,rs ire corset boxes v: ill not
he s"hlrcic,l to tempaaurcs ,,rater U:an tlut Sof
which the ianduuon are approve•t.
4123. Oude[ Boxes to be Covered, in a cam
Peel LLniin.rf3<Cb9nrCr, let box a!- be provided colics
1 by mcanx r,! a (:coir canopy.
;ar.,pl:o!deg rec<Platde. to"", , e( sinvlar device.
4124. Covering of Comhozn ll M>teru] Outtet
Boxes. Ar•y cam Lust.. ,Ie wail C,, 6at n 9, ex.
p+>srl h<s,'cen ll:e Hae of a L<t"r< ranrr,,y or pia
ud res -.1t box S. -I Le covered with nor.-tombus•
eateral.
134 .ARTICLE 410
4123. Connection of, Fixtures. In generale fluor.
'sent fixtures when supported independently of the
outlet box shall be connttted through metal ncewayya
or armored conductors. Phis requirement may be
waived when mrd.,glppped fixmra•s are suspended
directly below the outlet box and the exp,aed cord
is not subject to strain or mechanical injury.
Fixture Supports
4131. Supporn-General. Fixtu,cs, lamphoiders,
rosettes and receptacles shall be securely supported.
A fixture which weighs more than 6 lbs. or exceeds
16 inches in any dimension shall not be supported by
the screw shell of a lampholder.
4132. Means of Support. Where there is an outlet
box, a gas pipe, or a fittingwhich will provide ade.
quate support, a fixture shall be allached thereto;
otherwise a fixture shall be supPorled as required by
,section J707. A fixture which weighs more than s0
lbs. shall be supported independently of the outict
boz
Wiring of Fixturca
4141. Fixture Widng-General. Wiring on or
within fixtures shall h< neatlyarranged and not ex-
posed to mechanical iniury. Excess wiring shall bo
avoided. Conductors shall be so arranged that they
will not be subjected to tcmpentums above those for
which they are approved.
4142. Conductor Size. Fixture conductors shall
not be smaller than No. 18.
4143. Conductor Insulatloa Fixture. shall be
wired with conductors havinR insulation suitable for
the ,anent v.huge. and tempperature to which the
conductors will be subjected. \Vh<re fixtures are in-
stalled in damp, web or corrosive locations, eondue-
Wrs shall be of a type approved for such locations.
Por current carrying capacity of fixture calg temp.if, see
Table J, Chapter 10. For maximum operatin
eratpm and voltage limitation of fixture wires, see
section 3102.
4144, Conductors for Special Conditians Fixtures
provided with mogul base screw -shell lampholders
and operating at not more than 300 volts between
conductors shall be wired with Type AF fixture wire.
Fixtures provided with other than mogul base acm..
shell lampholdtrs and operating at not more than 300
ment
FIXTURES, LAMPIJOLDERS. ETC, las
.doctors shall be wired with
or Type AFG AFPO. or
F-6i4and FF -J2 fixture wire may be used
use n fixtures of decorative type on whi,h
not over 60 watt rating 3(t Uaed In eOnnK•
I
mitation candle&
;ondueton for Movable Pana Stranded
I shall be used on chain fixtures and other
arts. Conductors shall be so arranged that
I ofthe fixture or movable part, will out
,ion on the conductor&
are
for intermediate- or candelabra -base lampholder& It
tie pendent randuetors are longer than J feet, they
911-11 be twilled together.
4142. Prote<tlon of Conductors Conductor shall
be secured in a manner shat will not tend to cut of
abrade th,i.. .tion. Conductor bull be protected
[ions abranon where they pax' through metal Ex-
posed flexible mrd or fixture 'vire shall not be used
to supply permanently installed fixture' itishow cases
or wall coxes.
4141 Conductor Protection at Lamppholders. Where
a metal IampLoldcr is atmched to a flexible cord, the
inlet shall b< equipped with an insulating build.q
which, if threaded, stall not be smaller than nominal
ff inch pipe sire. Th< edgm at the buahinA :hall be
rounded and all inside fins removed in order to pro-
vide t m
smooth bearing rfam for the conduct.,'
anY..,. h.vint 6a4. 9111 tui h to Jl.m,r.r .mY9L Ins
.�iY ,nnlv.ad r1rn1 geld .i ha:n IJIsI In,6 u li.aw
351�
4
.�d
lab ARTICLE 410
4149. Connections, Splices soil Taps. Fixtures shall
be so installed that the canncctions between the fix-
lure conductors and the circuit conductors may be
fnVrcted without requiring the dis<onneclian of any
part of the wiring, mdess the fixture is connected by
means of a plug and receptacle. Splices and taps shall
not be located sl•ithin fixture arms or stems. No un•
necessary splices or taps shall be made within or on
a fixture. For approved means of making connections,
see section 1118.
4150. Fixture Raceways. Fixtures shall not be
used as a racmvay for arcurt conductors unless the
fixtures elect the requirements of aPp...rd raceways,
except that the ennduct.rs .f'
single bench circuit
may be carried Ifuni ch an installation of fixtures ap-
proved for end to end assembly to form a continuous
raceway.
4151. Polarization of Futures. Fixtures shall be
so wired that the screw -shells of Limpholders will be
eonnecmd to the same fixture or circuit conductor or
terminal For pnWity identification of conductors to
screw -shells of lampholders, sec section 2004.
Lampholden
4156. lampholders, Screw -Shell Type. Lamphold•
ers of the screw• -shell type shall be installed for use
as lampholders only.
4157. DoublaPole Swftthed Lampholden. Where
used on unidentified 2 -wire circuits topped from the
ungrounded conductors of multi -wire circuits• the
switching dafce of Iamph.o.11 s of the switched type
shall simultaneously disconn'ct both conductors of
the circuit See section 2007.
4158. Lampholden in Damp ar Wet Locations.
lampholders installed in damp or wet locations shall
be of the weatherproof type.
Receptacles
4161. Rating and Type. Receptacles installed for
the attachment of portable cords shall be rated at not
teas than 15 sniper's, I2$ volts, or 10 snipper.., 250
,,,,,.,ban
shall be of a type not suitable or use as
lampholders.
4162. Rees We. in Floors. Receptacles located
in Hoon shall be enclosed in floor boxes especially
approved for the purpose, except where such mcep-
FIXTURES• LAMPIIOLDERS. ETC. Isl
tact's are localed in elevated floors of show -windows
or other locations n•herc the authority enforcing this
code In Rca them to be free (tom m<chaninl injury,
moisture and dirt, he standard apprm•cd type of flush
.'.epode box may be used.
4163. Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations.
ReC<PI-clew install<d in damp -r suet locations shall
be of the weatherproof type.
Rosettes
41imull< 65. Approved Type.. Fusible ....Iles shall not
be SepanLle which make possible
a change in Polarity shall not be used. For eons Iia:
tion specifications, see s.ction 94104,
4166. Rosette. in Damp or Wet Locations. It -
site' installed ;n damp
the weatherproof typo or wet locations shall be of
Comtructioa
4171. C-11mitible Shade. and Enelo.ans. Ade-
quae air space sh.11 be Provided between Limps and
shades or other enclosures of comb.,uble material.
4172. Portable Iiandlamp.. liandlamps of the Dat-
tabie type supplied through flexible cords shall be of
the molded comp-sni-n or other type approeed for
the pure'•'. Brassshtll paper-liped IampholJera shall
-1 be asst. Ifandlamps 'hall be equipped with a
handle. 1Vl:ere subject to mechanical damage or
where lamps may come rn contact with combust3le
material, haodlamPs shall be equipped with a sub•
its I'd guard ranched to the Umpholder or the
fandli
Fu bsn.sc we _'_ 1151
4173. Marking. All fixtures rcquirinR balLisb or
Manaiormlrs 'hail Le pUivly markM with their elee-
In[al res onq aye'] the marasaaurer'a namq trademark
or ctF.ev suaahl< mune .( tdent;fytina. The eleclri-
n1 rnmg she:. indmle It., vWta9e and (r<gven[ry', and
'ha raring -f he un.1 mduding
the La:1"t. va"slermer tr amo-h+rater¢'.,
Special Provlai.ra for Flush and Receaud Fistulas
1176. Aper -red Type, Fixtures which tee 'installed
reces+ed nv �ies m vela cr cec"a, dale he of an
apyaived tyre and shall contains to tenon. 4177 is
4160 nl['usrvI.
tis ARTIO.E 410
4177. Temperature. Fixtures shall be ao constructed
or insmllcd that adjacrm combustible material will
not be subjected to temperatures in excess of 90C
(194F). Where a fixture is recessed in fire-resistant
material in a building of fire-resistant construction, is
temperature higher than 90C (194F), but not higher
than 1500 (302F) is acceptable if the fixture is plainly
marked that it is approved for that service.
41713. Clearance. Recessed portfnns of endosura,
other than at points of support, shall be speed at
least % inch from combustible mattri.L
4179. Wiring. Conductors having insulation suit-
able for the tcmpera,ure encountered shall he used.
Where conductor temperatures arein excess of 60C
(1407), conductors shall be brought through at I -it
4 feet of metal mceway from the fixture to an outlet
box at ]cast one footfrom the fixture. Such conduc-
tors, unless approved for the purpose, shall not ex-
tend a distance of more tlmn 6 feet from the fixture
as measured along the raceway.
4180. Conatractiun. For the construction of flush
and recessed futures, see section 94105.
Special Provisions for Electric Discharge
Lighting Systems of 1,000 Volta or Leas
4181. GeaeraL Equipment for use with electric
discharge lighting ''ens and designed for an open -
circuit voltage of 1,000 vola or less shall be of . txpe
approved roc such service. In addition to complying
with the general requirements for lighting fixtures,
such equipment shall conform to sections 4182 to 4187
inclusive. Transformers of the oil -filled type shall hot
be used. The terminals of an electric discharge lamp
shall be considered as alive if any lamp terminal is
connected to a potential of more than 300 volts.
41112. Dirctt•C.,-nt Equipment Fixtures shall be
installed on alternating -current arcuits only, unless
the fixtures are equipped with auxiliary equipment
and resistors especially designed and approved for
direct-current operation and the futures are so
marked
4185. Voingee-Dwelling _=, Is Eq'ipmen{
having an .pen•circuft voltage of more than 1000 volts
shall not be installed in dwelling occupancies. Equip-
meat having an open•circuit voltage of more than 3W
FIXTURES, LAMPDOLDERS, ETC. IM
voles shall not be installed ]n dwelling oceupancin
'"less such equipment is so designed that there 'hall
be no expo d live Paris when lamps are being in-
serl<d, are in place, or are being removed,
4184. Fixture Maanting. Fixtures having exposed
ballasas cr transformer shall be so installed that such
ballasts or transformers shall not 6e in contact with
combustible material.
4185. A'xilf i7 Equipment Nat Integral with FIx-
fore. Auxiliary equ;pmcnt, including reulors, wpacf•
torn, resistors, and similar equipment, where- not in-
s1a1kA as part tet a lighting xlure assemblyy shall be
enclosed m ace<ssiLlr, permanentlyinstalled metal
ghiuets. Such separate equipment should be installed
close to the lamp' to keep the conductor' between
lamps and auxiliaries as short as pws;hle. 1V here
display cases .re not permanently installed, no Por,
tion of a secondary circuit may be included to more
than a single case.
4180. Auto-Trandormers. An auto-lran'farra'.
wbi<h is used as part of a ballast (or sappiging light -
Mg suits and svlu i raises the 1-11-91 Lo more than
3W vola s'.If be supplied only by a 910undtd system.
4187. Switch'., Snap avrilche, shall conform to
section 3814.
Special Provisions for Electric Discharge
Lighting Systema of More Than 1,000 V'In
4191. G"ne" Edisch.quipment for tete wish <I<arie
circuit rvvOlt2get of more han^1,000ssells aha11 he of a
type approved for such service. In addition to eom-
p17v^g with eh< general requirements far lighting fix-
tures, such equipment shall eenfmm t- s«eons 1191
to section 42u3 inclusive. Th< laminal of an ei<etrit
discharge Ismp shalt be eunsidaed as .1rce when any
Loop lamterminal is connected to a potential .1 tome
than 300 volts.
Por a'lcs and wgine Iiahtin4. uv Ml[4 x00,
41.. C-nlml. Fixtures or lamp imtailation, shall
be <onlrollal either singly .r in Fr-u•+s by an ext<o-
"ally-ferable switch or eircurob... k,r which will
open a 1 un9111nded rimary conductors. The witch
or curuit.b cafe<r shall be Located within 9h1 -( the
fix
'"" ter lsightanapa, or it may be locaed elsewhere if
358
w_,40
9,5 -
it
S'
14a ARTICLE 41v
it is prm•idt'd crid, means for locking in the open
position.
4193. Switches Snap alritches shall conform to
section 3814.
4194. Transformer Rating& Transformers and bal-
Usts stall Iwa< a secondary open -circuit voltage ui
not m,•re than 15.a( volts with an allowance on test
of 1; iW .ole .dditional. The secondary current ral-
ing •hilt' !:, ,c more Ilan 240 milliamr<rrc, 1Vhen
the ••P• t c' ,it ruitage is more than 7,500 colts, 16e
see •n! rY :ra nl rating shall not be more than 120
m,.
4191. T: insformcr Typo Transformers shall be of
_7
In,,
1)'P%. ,,.,, olm- of other
than the .skarcl insulated or dry type shall not be
u-,
430- Transformer Secondary Connections. The
!, i;''.• Transformer
a+n:d,o- ai Uansformers alall not Le
'n vacs 1-1 in Parallel, excret that for two
!r.rl, lr.,ring one end of its hist-volmgc
J c,autedcd tq threndgsurr, the
1. ;s map Ue «mnern•d in serf`- to
f of a mkt -point ground cd Irans-
t :::� i b• vdcd rods shall he conn,ctal by an
is uiard mmivaWr not smaller than No. 14.
4192. LOeatfnn of Transformers. Tondm'mrn
s` dl
he
acccsiLlr after inatalhu n. The tmndormera
al .uld be installed as near to the lamps as pra<ticalde
n: keg , the secondary conductors as dwrt as possible.
Tcm,�orrnrr, si,all b, so localcd that aJjacrnt cqm-
bucti!r!e malrrials vein not Le suLj,cicd to temPera-
tures in esccss of 90E.
4198. Wiring Method, Secondary Conductors. Ap-
proved gas-nlhe sign ^able nit:dile for Ih, voltage of
the circuit shall be used. For installation of condo,-
tors see section 6031.
4199. Tmmformer Loading. The famPs connected
to any Iran -tonne, shall be of sndl length and char-
ad,rialf: s as not to cause a condition of continuous
m•er-soltagc on the transformer.
4200. Lamp Surs-5.. Lamp, shall be adequately
supporl<J as required in section 603J.
4201. Mechanical Injury, L -Ps shall not be lo -
ca ted where normally expose I to ntrclanical injury,
FIXT'U'RES, LAMPHOLOERS. ETC. 141
4202. Lamp Terminals and Lamphoidcr& Parts
which must be ormovcd for lamp rrplattment shall
be binned or fastened Ly an approved meant. Lamps
or Iampho tiers or boll, shall be co deigned that there
shall be no exposed lire parts when lamps arc being
inserted or are being removed; this ccquiremcnt stall
be in force one year irom the ,Retrive date of this
code, a vaous to that time section 6011 of this code
shall Lc appUad.
4203. Marking, Each fixture or each seccol.
circuit of tubing havmR an open.circuit voltage of
more than I,bliO volts shall have a clearly 1<NiUle
marking in Iceren not less than q inch high reading
Caullnn........vghs." T ., voltage indicated shall
be the rated. open -circuit voltag,-
Arc Lamps
4205. General. Arc UPs ua<d in theatres shall
eonfmm ,mesion 5234, and arc lamps used in so-
hin
l)otion mac,, shall egnfmm to section 54.31. Are
lamps used en c•,noan _trent systems shall con-
form to section
Gic, uTding
" 114211. roundsGenerasProvi- and lighting aufpm<nt
Wlu,m grounded as Provided in w<tion, d21? to 4216
inrinvoc.
4212. McWllie VJirinewiSt yasa.nt Acetal Salutes ins
or, gt vnd,d armored able
snnCr is v-n<d metal raaay
2rcs cw
42U. Nom Metairie Wiring $Tr,rounded.
ema Afetal fixtures
or in>I on , ,:nil„++ w'u.d u.tl, .n.,b•, nl-orb cork,
a1 154 vnf vstye Ica�s stn <d cable. , cif. .its mprrating
ground, V -,
,rpt as iulis a: •! he rroond<d ez-
1. Fixturr< mnunt<d on metal .r uncal Lath `ed-
am fry,:n a!!, ;iay <inola huhted fr up
n ti=n sporta
o:ms cr (.are sec wnr Y the we ,s in •ulaLns
j t K and uroPr ins4lahrcs.
drinvn 44:1-. see
2. Fixmrel net en -W-4 nn anal c,• m•1aLlsth
grouml<d''See aaeuinn e4215< nri:her in.vinrd oar
.n.'+j i.,<sr •.r �:•a
1 ••.a. w a,Ca ir.N
p+aw�i r .crew s4rrDi:1 e4nr e% baro+e� u1 4sc4ilce� r
14) ARTIME 413
4214. Equipment of More Than 150 Volta to
Ground, 11cr.J future., trn!storin- and Iris -former
enclo.nr-on circuits nPcnlmR at more than 15U cults
to Rroun,l shall he grounded. Other ex(uned n,rlal
Parts stall begr,nmdcd unless thl'y are is
nwhavd Tram
ground and alter «ntJurtfng xuriv'c•s and err in:m-
cecsiLle Io unquali8vd persons, ,xnq,t that lamb tie
n'mcs, --1116114,nos, circ and &-cootie', Lan, c ml
glass lanqu sp;,ced n•,t les d;an I;i inches from lamp
terminals need nor Le Reminded.
4215. Fizluns, LampholJers and Receptacle Plates
N<ur Grounded Surfaces. lingrquadal metal lighting
6atuns, hnwh.hh- amt fare plates stall not he in
n!
within 8 f cl va ti; :Jlp or 5 feet ImrizontaIly
of laundry UJ,;, ha;h tube. slmwrr baths, plumbing
fixtures, si,au: plpcc nr r.q,cr grounded meal work
or grtnnnl,d vu Cv, =. 1fr.:J Pou chains -A at these
location.. •]al! L.; prtc :d`d oath insulating links.
4216. Methods of Grounding. Fgairyncnl shall Lc
eom- rad a. ;:. und: d v.ln n ,.,crli.r,:ir:Jly connccled
in a p• nn:man .,,d c,i, : rc n::nmer to naval rare'n'a I' the arm.,r ui ancom.l a.•I,.<, lh< grounding roe-
duaor in n,nruai.,lkc ;hcni,<d nLle. a seParale
Rr.nunllry•;«nnlunur um su:aHcr Than No. 14, or to
gas piping, Provided Ih•d tLc m«•uaY arrtwR NronnJ-
uy onvhtdor, or y., pipe is grumuicJ in a manner
sp,cfncd in Arurlc _c0.
ARTICLE 422 -APPLIANCES
4221. Scope. This article shall apply to electric
appliances -d in any occupaa,y,
4222. Branch Circuit Requi«•m<nl& Every aPPli•
once .hall Lv anp;,livd Ly n Lr.,:.•i, cirsuit of one of
tLc tylms >prau,'d in Article Aforor-operated
ai'Pli:u,c,c shit also confun,t W 1hr rcquircmvnta of
Ar In lc 430.
Rye Ta6!, Sl nr rlayter is I,, ,Le an.lcner.+ cl a hounheld
rams br-rch dreui,.
Installation of Appliances
4231. Insulation ofCords, FI<xil,le cords used to
connect heating appliances shell comply with the fol -
1 -rig:
a, APPliasees Requiring Heater Cord.. Flt•xible
cord; uwd to canunct emrnnhin,, nuns, or to connect
Portable clectri-IIY•Iteared appliances rated at more
APPLIANCES 141
than 50 cults and which Produ<c icmperalum in ex-
c'ess of 121C (250F) on sttrfaccs wlth whish the cord
fs liable m b, in emtacl. shall Le nor of :h< fyp<c of
aPProvad beater cords li>ted in '!'able JL ch,lncr !0.
b. Other Heating Appliance& All other portable
electricallyIwatcd eppinmres shall be connected by
one of the approved lypcs of -rdlisted in Table 31,
Chapter 10, selected in accordance o'idt the usage
.Pccined in that table.
4232. Insulation of Appliance& Portable -,,phones
A.11 be provided with an adeyuate .lidectr:c Inter.
L<Uvicen current-grr'ing parts and those rxlr
nal sm (aces whidt persons can touchr-
, ;arc c fur
toasters, Frills or otter healing appliances in which
the cur ---carrying girls al high ten,peralure are
na......y ex(assed. n locations where the dielecni<
is cxpn.<d W ntc.luniral injury, ft s,;a!I be suits Ie
proucicd.
4233. POIWIJ- Immersion Fleaten. Ekdrit heat.
en of the 1"' ""' inmwrsfun lypc atoll Uc so con•
structcd mtJ i, c,i!<d that t'urrenl•carr)'ing parrs are
.ub,lir,ly ins, and from electrical 11""c'xfth the
su6sanc< in n ,ch immersed. The -04.6,ycac -
ins this «,I, r iY '•,oke c -Prion of special applies.
tions of array. as where sudabk precautionary meas.
urea arc follo•cd.
4234. P -coon of 11b lbsMat,ruL Esch
electrically -'.-ted y,plim:ce tial is obvi„•a,!y inicn•1-
edby ai:e, .1911 and s`m'ite to be located m a fixed
P. ,lis si,il be so placed as to provide ample pro-
nctign be vee•, the appliance and adjacent combua•
tible male• al,
4235. Sta for Portable Appbame- Each
amowhmom
v fr, i and other portable eleaucall➢•haled
appliance s'h h fs intended to be spl,!icd to cmmbux-
lible martial shall be <quippcd wnh an approred
aWnd. u9 �h a:O' Le a cc of equipment or
may he : pa , of the appliance.
4236. Signals for Ideated Appliance& Fn Mher than
nafd<nrr o, ,ilnncies. cad, ,!<circally-Fasted ar"i•
ante, m gr •up of deetricailY•Lcand appfan,ea, in.
tended le be apP:icd to c-bustibls material, shall La
359
4b
36
to a ARTICLE 432
installed in connection with a signal unl,.a the appli.
ance is provided with an integral temperature -limiting
device.
4237. Infra -Red Lamp Industrial Heating Appll.
nines, Inira-red hearing lamps rated at 300 hart, or
leas may be used with lampholdcrs of the medium -
base unssntcheJ porcelain type. or other types ap-
proved for the Purpose. Screw I- lampholdcrs shall
not be used with infra•rcd lamps over 30U watts rating
urates; the lampholdcrs are
especially approved for the
purposes These lampholde," may be connected to any
*1111, branch circuits of Article 210 and, in industrial
occupancies, may be operated in series on circuits of
more than 150 volts to ground provided the voltage
rating of the lampholdcrs is not less than the circuit
voltage.
Ea.h att0en, "net or .trim e+rtr!ne a number o[ snlrared
LmtDvIJ<rr (inrlud�ns the inrimd .rainsS v( ruck renlon, ryntl
mn.drreJ i rpptian.e. the [ermines. tonne.[:..
hbrt .f euh sash aaxms,1, is .cooed a. tnJ,vidual *rine..
4238, Grounding, )fetal frames of portable and
stationary eicelcical,yheated appliances, operating on
eircuits above 150 volts to ground, shall be grounded
in the manner specified in Article 250; provided, how-
ever, that where this is impracticable, grounding may
.be omitted by special permission, in which case the
frames shall be permanently and effectively insulated
from the ground,
11 it re.o inolld l [has tee Iramu be srou"d,d in ail esser. For
fedtW of amundina Inma .( rife be , e,osa, sin section 2537
and 2540.
Control and Protection of Appliances
4241. DLconnecting Means. Each appliance shall
be provided with a means for disconnection from all ,
ungrounded conductors as follows:
s. Portable Appliances, For portable appliances
(including household ranges) a separable connector
or an attachmentplug and receptacle may serve as
the dii colitc.,rE means. The rating of a receptacle
or of a separable connector shall not be I— than the
rating of any appliance connected thereto, except that
demand [attars authorized elsewhere in this code may
be applied. Attachment Plug cape and on
shall
conform to the following:
AMu.xcas NS
1. Live Patty They shall be so comvuded and
installed as to guard against hindvert<nt contact with
live pans
2- Intertnptin9 GPadty, They shall be capable
of interrupting their rated torrent without hazard to
the operator, ,
3.InterehangeablUty. They shall be so designed
that they will not fit into receptacles of lesser rating.
F,,, h`uxhad chemic ee atl--i hlaa ..d rwmurle oonnnllon
rt At `a,< of • rav rr<e.ihlt ft.m the Iran. Dl
1-1.1o/ drawer, is am,dwN u mea,va We Inane o! Wit
rut.
L Ststlaury ADDllances. For stationary appli-
pow rated at sot over SfA volt amperes car Si hone•
power, the bnnch•<ir<uit overcurreut device may
serve as the disconnecting means. For stationary
ap-o/ greater .stint[ the branch -circuit switch
or <arcuit-breaker may, lj readily accessible to the
means.
.ser of the aDDlfance, .erre ae the disconnecting
"U
Swleehes. Switches which ue s part oI
an apphan« shall not b< considered as taking ilia
place of the single disconnecting means required by
this section unless there are other mens for discoa-
nectto. as follow.:
t. Muld-Fanu1y Dwe,lisM In multifamily (tome
than two) dwell""". Ore disconnecting m<,m shall be
wiahin the ayanmene, or on the same floor as the
apartment m which [Ise appliance is installed and
may control tamps and other appliances.
2. Two-PcimO HtDwellinga. In two•family dw,0•
:rags, . mans may be outside of the
apart m,.^.t in which I;, appliance is Installed. This
wiz permit so indfvldaal .witch far the aDartmeut m
be us,d•
3. Single•Psasill7 DwelOngs, In ainple•faml9 dw.0-
ft."", ILe as wee dcunne<tmg .corse r..aY L< used.
brant other OceuPande. In other may 1, i<a, the
eircuio-hreake6 if readJy ae-
eusd;le to ti:< mer e[ the applimce, ma be used (m
Zhu tar:.,se. Y
d Switch m Ckcalt•Breakvr To lis Iadlcatfog•
Swi[eko or rof the ind Il used as dieron*eo4ng
meats shall be of the i.dfcuia9 type
146 ARTICLE 130
. a Motor -Driven Appliances. A switch or circuit-
bicaker uhirh s.m•ec as the lWomz,c1in4 names for
a italimu ry mntar•d:ivrn I..... ncC ui nor, ub:m !A
barxp 1"" :ball he looatcd within siuln of the I, for
cool-11,r„r shall be capable of being locked in the
open po,ai,�n,
4242, Overcurrent Protection. Appliances, other
Ilan such 11 zu "I a I,d appliance, as arc required
b)• :Article 430 to have additional overcurrent protca-
tion,
m shall be considered as protected acanast overcur-
ren•h<n supplied by one of the circuits of Article
210 and in acn,nbmce with the rapdrenlents therein
specified. A range, hot ()[all, or sinular appliance lvith
aur a.. healing elements, and having a raring of are
Ihan 70 ampere,. +Tali lave two or more subdivided
circuits, ,arh provided with overeurrent protection
not ,acceding c0 amperes- infra -red lamp heating
appliance: shall have ovcrcurrcnt protection not a:-
eecding 5Uamperes.ortwtie
4243, AutFlatirons. Tt is recommended that
ehcarically-holed smurrtbhag irons be equipped with
an apProv.d lemperalurc-limiting device.
Marking of Appliances
4261. Name-pl.te, Each electric apPlinnce 'r!: bs
provided with a ".mo-
Plate, giving clic makers name
and til, normal rating in volts and amperes, or in
volts and watts.
4262. Marking of Heating Elements. Individual
hurling elements which are a part of an electric ap-
pliance containinR more than one heating element
shall each be legibly narked with normal rating is
_it. and amperes, or in volts and watts.
ARTICLE 430—MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS
General
4301. General It is intended that the following
general provisions shall cover all provisions for
motors and controllers which do not properly fall
into the other divisions of this article.
4302. Application mf Other Articles.
the following: Motors and
cent'llikes shall also comply with s o
the provisions
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS t+r
Auto -transformers ....................Section 1003
GPaeitors .........................Section 4W8
Cranca and Hoist ......................Article 610
Elevators .......Article 620
Oarag<s .. ................:.........Section 5103
HauI, . Locations .....................Article 500
Machine Tools .... .................... ..A'title 670
Motion -picture Proj<ctara.........Seelians ,
Molion•Picture Stud, P,
53105411, 5416
$311
Ore..... .. 6503
.......................Section
Resistors and Reactor. ..................Article 470
Theaters ..............................Section 5246
4303. Ovmrheadng From Dean Aecumufatfana in
locations where dust or flying material will collect
on or in motor. fn such quanmia as to seriously in.
terfere with the ventilation or cooling of motors, and
thereby cause dangerous m
s teperatures, suitable type.
of enclosed motors which will not overheat under the
prevailing conditioner shall be used. Especially severe
conditions may require the use of enclosed pipe ""I -
hated .*fora, or enclosure io separate dart -tight
,,some, Properly ventilated from a source of clean air,
4304. Identification of Motors A motor shall be
provided will a name -plate whish shall Rive the mak•
er'a ",rale, the nti"R in robs and amperes, including
those of the secondary if a wound•rotor type of motor,
I,
normal full,,*,,
spec,, and rile interval during
which it tan operate at full load starling cold, before
reaching it. rated ecmperat” " The rime interval
shall be 5, 15 J0, or 60 minul<., or <ontinuou., Far
a motor nrodthars<power or larger the hone•
Pil rating shill be narked. except that the mato,"
of are welders may be marked in am Pere., A mob,
provided wnh a proaeetive device integral with the
motor (see e<etion 4!w), "hail have a marking which
will so indicate. Far an alternatinC rue rent motor
rated at Y. horsepmrer or larger, earept a pa!yphaae
wound•rolor m*ror, the nameplate shall he marked
with a code 1<uer to shave its input I. kd.,vatt-
ampere with locked rat:., selected from thin tall.
given in accti*n 94lOd, Chapter 9.
The mJ< Inter Iwlkaina oras. inrn[ wtW IeckM Mm mol
ti, a rWr toter it la W uxJ far J•ina.r:vo b,a.ra <i.rua rnr
�ie�dmaprnr«,ivy bf rele,ena ru T.Q. 26, eha.nr Id, rr car.
360
37
Ira ARTICLE 430
4305. Identification of Controllers. A controller
shall be market with the maker's name or identifica-
tion symbol, the voltage, the current or horsepower
rating, and such other data as may be needed to prop-
erly indicate the motors for which it is suitable.
.,Wb- a eommller is built 'n v an 'ntepral part f a ores
wllyf aarkecd r...r III .r<asaryndaullmwt De snub. olio r
III
—
4306. at
of Terminale. Terminals of
motors and controllers shall be suitably identified, as
by marking or color, where necessary to indicate the
Proper connections.
4307. Wiring Space in Enclosures. Enclosures for
controllers aoJ discmi ctiug means for motors shall
not be used ., junction boner, troughs, or raceways
for conductors feeding through or tapping off to other
apparatus unless designs are employed whith provide
adequate apace for this purpose.
4308. Enclosmea. Suitable guards or enclosures
shall be provided to protect exposed current -carrying
parts of motors and the insulation of motor Icads
where installed directly under equipment or in other
locations where tripping or sprsY[nR oil, water, or
other injurious liquid may occur, unless the motor is
designed for the existing conditions.
4309. Current -Carrying Capacities, Whenever the
current rasing of a motor is used to determine the
current -carrying capacity of conductors, switches,
an
brch-circuit overcurrent devices, etc., the values
given in Tables 21 to 24 of Chapter 10, including foot-
notes, shall be used in lieu of actual current rating
marked on the molormamcplatc. Motor running over.
current Protection shall b< based on the motor name-
plate current rating. If a motor is marked in amperes,
but not horsepower, the horsepower rating shall be
assumed to be that corresponding to the value given
in Tables 21 to 24, prorated if necessary.
4310. Location ofMelon. Motors shall be located
se. that maintenance such as lubrication of bearings
U
replacing of brushes can be readily accomplished.
Open motors having commutators or collector rings
,ban be located er prolecled so that spark, cannot
reach adjacent combustible material. This does not
prohibit the installation of these motor, on wooden
floors or supports.
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS I.,
Size of Conductors for Motor Circuits
4311. General It is the intent of the following
provisions to specify sizesof conductors capable of
carrying the motor current without overheating under
the conditions specified.
4312. Individual Motor. Ennch•circuit conductors
,upplYing an individual motor shall Have a carrying
capacity not less than 125 per coot of the motor full!
'I'd current rating; provided, that conductors for
motors used for short -time, intermittent, periodic, or
varying duty, may have a carrying capacity not less
than the Percentage of the motor name -plate current
rating as shown in the following table, unless the
authority enforcing the code grants special permission
for conductors of smaller size.
Prr<eniaaer v/Nam<I•IaI<Cnnm[P,ri,
Cturi,,miae of S,finuta MIIs.
is rains innaua
Olt' kmaf Rau, Raw.. pwna
5T.- ne,r
nuns atMn, mins
I'd 11a Ise
mi,ie.rnr33ull . .
InP nabl d w•nvnr civ
-
o,le••rrr•r:.r c oafs,.
lar m il arldi, <¢ _
is
B rY im
Pededua PUiM .stand.
vn>,nr `avw .-___ ___ /la ;:a es no
emacs n __-
The
ihel nf+lal cn�0
The conductors between ststiocsry motors, rated
or Iesa, and "I separate t<rmiml e.closuro
ee.mlued In paragraph 4439-b, nay b< emalkr than
; o. H but not -.soler than No. 18, rcvided they
have stirs<nt-carrying capagty as 4peciiPed abme.
consort. ^�as oy<rmi arty `°s�nw< hI,S .cn'Ir a m re.•
eller h.,e ca. • 4i Nr <er.I d+V
r>da ni cs•
AVJ •^ • h r,mk,+Mt`b 1n ries:.:w em> von Ila
cm<.�~rrn. 6:c�a.r:,:> .0 W!•,w' <,a itv re. _w
Tu .r eftends.. u:<va,w a re. r •e; e.,l.c.:n of „�
arT,s's `.� (1e.»n i0.• `� wre�v4„of 131'.er �en
� yw t:af sura., n our 4tv4r i� � °ice b u,eif nnw•e,
c:.r 4:wp raffia ev, ciao,. is 'n t4+an sae ue ...soma
170 ARTICLE 430
See saamrle
N. 6, Chad. 10, and IN— No. J0, Chap
err 10.
4313. Wound -Rotor Secondary. The conductors
connecting the secondary of a wound -rotor A.C.
motor to its controller shall have .carrying capacity
which is not less than 125 per CcnI of the full-IOad
secondary current of the motor if for continuous duty.
For other than continuous duty, these conductors
shall have a carryinH caPactty, in per trot Of full
load secondary current, not Iesa than flat specified in
the table in section 4312.Where he
secondary re-
sistor is separate from the controller. the. carrying
capacity of the conductors between controller and re.
slater ahsll be not less than that given in the follow.
fill table:
Carrrine` Gpulry of NIn Io
Redalor Dvi ClaraifiauIn P,r d, of Full•Lwd
J S,mr n Currrot
II<ar Interminrm civ >..•.""" rs
Coo[i0uew doer
....0.......•••" e.7
............... Its
4314. CondncteP Supplying Scvenl Motors, Con•
ductora supplying two or more motors shall M1ave n
current•nrrying capacity of not Ic.. than 125 per
cent of the full -load curtent sting of the highest rated
motor in the group plus the sum of the full -load cur.
rent ratings of the remainder of the motors in the
group.
See Ea—rJ. No, 6, Chaperr 10.
4315. Combination Load Conductors supplying a
motor load, and in addition a lighting or appliance
load as computed from -
220 and other apPi-
eable tectioos, shall have a current•carryinR capaciely
sufficient for 1111 IiRhting or appliance load plus the
required capacity or
the motor load determined in
accordance with section 431 J, or. for a single motor,
in accordance with section 4312.
4316. DemTnd-Factor- \Vhere a reduced heating
of the conductors results from to
operating on
duty -cycle• intermittently, or It,, a,i motor, not
operating at one time, the ,.,her," enforrinR this
code may grant permission for feeder conduclora to
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS ISI
be of a capacity leas Ikon specified in the acetic. 43,4
and 4315, provided the eonductor is of auRcient carry -
ma
fng eapaaty for the ...in load d<ar.in.d by
the siren and nun[ber of moron supplied and the
character of their loads and JutI..
Motor Ove ,'t Fronctipn
4321. General. The following provisions specify
overcurrent devices intended to protect the motors,
the motot•mntrol apparatus, and the branch -circuit
conductors against excessive heating due to motor
overloads.
4322. CiRitia" Dar. Motors. Each continuous
duty motor shall be prorated against running over -
current is
s follows:
A. Mon Than Ona Horsepower, For a motor rated
ruse than one horsepowror. Ihia protection shall be
secured by the use of one of the following means:
L A a<paote everco—tit device which is re.pon.
sive to motor current. This device shall be rated or
set at not more than R5 per tent of 1ht motor full•
load current rating for an open type motor to
to have a temperature rise not over 40C, and at net
more than 115 per
cent for all .,her types of motors.
This value may be nmdified as permitted by section
4324.
2. A protecYve device integral wfth the motor
which is responsive 1. motor eurrenl or to both motor
current and trntperaturI. This device muse b< ap-
proved for me with the motor winch it protests on
the basis that it will interrupt current to the motor
when the motor a operated in an ambient tempera-
ture of 40C and with ....torrent of the Percentage
values given in paragraph 1 of th14 section. This
value may be to as permnte,l by sect.. 4324.
If the motor current interrvptintr device is separate
from the mol., amt its eom-1 encu, iv ofnrated by
s proactive device integral with the .mor, n moat
he so arranKwt that the opening of the control circuit
will result In mterrupt;on .,I current ,,the motor.
b. Ona Hersepotv,r ser Lao, Manually Stand,
Any moles of one horsepose<r nr less whrh is .an-
ally lou, s and whish is w,tlrn sight from the surfer
Caution, shall he amsidrrrJ a pl-leaerd against
overcurrent by the ove,urlrnl dev .e pr.tlCtipj the
361
f
153 ARTICLE 430
conductors of the branch circuit. This branch circuit
overcurrent device shall not be larger than that spe-
cified in Table 2U, Chapter 10. except that any such
motor may be used at 125 volts or Icss on a branch
circuit protected at 20 amperes. Any such motor
which is out If sight from the starter location shall
be Protected as specified in paragraph c for automatic-
ally started motors.
A di.Ynw of mors dun So red h eaadd_d eyui,.1wt ro
brias aur ca aiehn
e One Honepoh or Les. Aataoatically Started
Any motor o! one horseponer or less which is started
automatically shall be protected against overcurrent
by the use of one of the following means:
1. A separate overcurrent device which is respan-
afve to motor current. This device shall be rated or
set '"a'
more than 125 per cent of the motor full.
load
current rating for an open type motor marked
to have a temperature rise not over 40C, and at not
more than 115 per cent for all other types of motors.
This value may be modified as Permuted by section
4324.
which is protective
responsive loom motor cvice ont orwith
to both
motor
current and temperature This device must he ap-
proved for use with the motor which it protects on
the basis that it will Prevent dangerous overheating
Of the motor due to occrltd ar failure to sunt. if
the motor current interrupting device u separate from
III mator and its control circuit is operated by a
Protective device integral with the motor, it must be
so arranged that the opening of the control circuit
will result in interruption of current to the motor.
3. If pare of an "Proved assembly which does not
normally subject the motor to oterloads and which
is also equipped with other safely controls (such as
the safety combustion controls of a domestic oil
,a ,er) which protect the motor against damage due
to stalled rotor current. 1Vhere such protective equip.
acral is used it shall be indicated on the name-Diate
of the assembly where it will be visible atter instal-
lation.
4. If the impedance ofttbe motor windings is asfS-
dent to prevent averheatiog due to failure to star.
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS IJ]
the motor may be protected as specified in Paragraph
b for manually started motors.
sfany durnati......mt moron of 1<u As" 130 hanepa.er,
ac<h as dock meant, crier motarr, etc., a d -�a anme lar¢<r
m.a ru', ter�ae mora, came ritM1in thin etataifi<It
daaa<e mt , IuEe aP ,tGhar<.maor- htrivt aulomaua twiuhei.h. - b
dirmenect the tunica rivdmp.
d waned -Roto: Secondaries The setendary cin
euits of wound rotor alternating -current molars in•
eluding conductors, controllers, resistors, eta, shall be
considered as protected against overcurrent by the
motor -running overcurrent devices
4323. Intermittent and Similar Duty, A motoc used
for a condition of service which is inherently abort
time, intermittent, penodic. orvarying duly (as illus-
trated by the table in section 4312) a considered u
Protected against overcurrent by the branch -circuit
ov<rcarr<nt device, yrovided the overcurrent pioleo-
tion dts not exceed that specified in Tables 26 and
27, Chapter 10.
Ann
"'1%-
-la c< VII to 4 (or am,iavaaa duty volar tb
opa.uur hic6 h drint is ruch that the name
oprat oavuamwly rnh had cad.;Z
am rovdniaa of vas
x.4324. U"tlon r Settin of Prole=,. Devics
Where the valuta eD.ctfied �r motor -running over.
current .11.9ion do not cort<apond to the standard
sues or attires is fuses non-adluriable circuit-br<aiV•
<n, thermal cutou4, thetela a, the heating ole•
menta of thermal trip motor svritc�ea, or possible set.
lines al adjunable atretut•hreaku. adequate to carry
the toad, the Ldat higher six rating or selling ro-
be mrd but not eaceMing 14� Per cent of the motor
!ul:loa� current rating. I[ oat shunted during iho
starting period of the marcor (are acction 4725), the
.......e desire -hall have sufficient time delay m
permit the mcwr to start and ....]crate its load
4321 Sb%rirs Dar(ng $ttrdng period. If the
motor is manua.lY atoned, the running overcurrent
prolc<ticn may be chum, r tut out rat circus during
the starunR p.nod Gt {be motor. pronded tY.e device
by which the ovaeurrmt pretee son is shunted t
Int rut canna be left is the atart..ng prn'ition. sad the
mu: or aha3i be eonr.:fered as protected tsinal over -
""at during the Itarting penrA it Ins" Oe lime•
de;aY tircaabrcaken rated ar see at not aver 400 per
rent of the W;1•.vad turret 01 the rromr, an so
located is tea circuit a. to be opuauva during Wes
154 ARTICLE 430
starting period 11
the "rotor. he motor-runnmg
t•crcurrcnt protection slmll not be Tshunted or cut out
during the starting period if the motor is automatic-
ally started.
4326. Fuses, In Which Conductor. If In are
used for motor -running Protection, a fuse shalt be in.
sorted in each ungrounded conductor.
4327. Devices Other Than Fuses—In Which Con-
ductor. If devices other than (usw arc used far a ti or
running protection, the following WGIe
the shall govern
minimum allowable number and location of over -
current units such as trip calla, relays,
cutouts or thermal
4328. Number oI Conductors Disconnected by
Overcurrent Device. Af,.zdUcunning pratcaire de-
vice$, other than fuses or thermal euIS la, shall c d..
taneously disconnect a sufficient number of uallsi nd-
ed conductors to interrupt current mow to the motor,
If 7�c< rerema4 vdaN `hrortm R vnaroundN e<oducian ba spay
D erirh,na nils ora t "a
310TORS AND CONTROLLERS Is]
4329. Motor Controller as Running Protection. A
motor controller may also serve as the runningover-
current device if the number of overcurrent unite
complies with the foregoing section 4327; and if these
overcurrent units are operative in both the starting
and running position rt the case of a d -e motor,
and in the running position in the case of an a -e
motor.
4330. Thermal Cutouts and R.I.". Thermal cut-
out; thermal relays, and other devices for motor-
runninq protection which are not capable of opening
short-nrcuits shall be protected by fuse or cin<uit-
breakers wish rating. or settings of not over 4 times
the rating of the motor for which they are designed,
unless approved (or group Installation, and marked to
Indicate the maximum site of fuse by which they,
must be protected.
4331. Rating of Protective Device. Motor -running
overcurrent devices other than (uses shall have a rat -
Ing of at least 115 per cent of the full -toad current
rating of the motor.
4, W.T Lamps r Receptacles Overcurtent
protection for moron used o,I branch cirwila which
also suppl lame. or rereptadea, as permitted in
Article 210, shall be provided as fottuws:
s One or more motors without individual overcur-
rent protection may be <unneaM to he branch cir-
cuits described in Article 210 only when the Gaiting
condition specified for tach of two or rare moron
In paragraph a of section 434J are complied with, ,
b. hfolora of larger ratings than specified in para
a of section 4347 may be connected to the
brunch circuits described in Article 210 only if pro-
vided with individual running overcurrent ly if pf
.M,vd to protect the motor H aP<ciit<d m section
OZL Both the controller and the motor•rvnning over.
device .hall be apProved for group instama-
tion with the protective device of the branch circuit
to 1C. Is the motor is connected
e ]f a motor Is connected to a branch circuit by
mean. of •plug and receptacle, and individual over-
eurtrnt Protection i. .muted sa Provided in pparagrapM1
a, the rating of the Plug and rec<Dtade aha11 out ea
Beed IS amp« n at 125 volts or to ampere at 250
rafts. II individual u!""'ient Protech.. is regtdr<d
369
Numh<r and luaus"
or m -«current cans,
Iva a� riaimaia'Pin
Rind at Muter
SItPaI- N
Lphate AG ar
U,G
A.C..arta
].w;ro. 1•Phau Aor
1 in ci,ha mndec
1-P�Ce A.C.
U.G. rourWN tar
C., ane conductor
armndN
v[raunJN
mnduaar
1•phaw AC or
U.G
]-wire. 1-11h- A.C.
llv ei@erunrraunJ-
]•DA.C.U.C.,
htte
HrovndNne
]wire, A.C.utd
NcunJu<,er
]•phew AG
'n de
aneroun.le
leirc ].rhea A.C..
], one in each
Pp+ry
]qYa AC
one
anduaar I. A.C.
4 -wire, I.
2 ^[roundel
o e coat
,G.
arourdN or va¢roand•r<r
7, Dhaae m
nnoanJN
19hrte AC
3•rl e• ]'Dh°re
eon•
o, corer
[!__ carol ar
Dharr in
a uneraunJrd
u A.C.
]ghabc
varovnded
]-rn ].hueph
AC..
; r 're
!
Yphare AC
vneiauP
]-r;re l DraC'w A.C.
nam 7 mndvo-
]-phos A.C.
ane
un« ¢rou
mndnded
Jlre,
]rte ^hounded
condvaan
•w ]. A.C.
¢ravnJN
] in avl ] eondu<•
]..kae AC.
s.wire, J DhauUl
< A C.,rata
]ion; nr ]p{ro
emvndr,lveutrai ar
merauvdN
ee�
ventral «
4328. Number oI Conductors Disconnected by
Overcurrent Device. Af,.zdUcunning pratcaire de-
vice$, other than fuses or thermal euIS la, shall c d..
taneously disconnect a sufficient number of uallsi nd-
ed conductors to interrupt current mow to the motor,
If 7�c< rerema4 vdaN `hrortm R vnaroundN e<oducian ba spay
D erirh,na nils ora t "a
310TORS AND CONTROLLERS Is]
4329. Motor Controller as Running Protection. A
motor controller may also serve as the runningover-
current device if the number of overcurrent unite
complies with the foregoing section 4327; and if these
overcurrent units are operative in both the starting
and running position rt the case of a d -e motor,
and in the running position in the case of an a -e
motor.
4330. Thermal Cutouts and R.I.". Thermal cut-
out; thermal relays, and other devices for motor-
runninq protection which are not capable of opening
short-nrcuits shall be protected by fuse or cin<uit-
breakers wish rating. or settings of not over 4 times
the rating of the motor for which they are designed,
unless approved (or group Installation, and marked to
Indicate the maximum site of fuse by which they,
must be protected.
4331. Rating of Protective Device. Motor -running
overcurrent devices other than (uses shall have a rat -
Ing of at least 115 per cent of the full -toad current
rating of the motor.
4, W.T Lamps r Receptacles Overcurtent
protection for moron used o,I branch cirwila which
also suppl lame. or rereptadea, as permitted in
Article 210, shall be provided as fottuws:
s One or more motors without individual overcur-
rent protection may be <unneaM to he branch cir-
cuits described in Article 210 only when the Gaiting
condition specified for tach of two or rare moron
In paragraph a of section 434J are complied with, ,
b. hfolora of larger ratings than specified in para
a of section 4347 may be connected to the
brunch circuits described in Article 210 only if pro-
vided with individual running overcurrent ly if pf
.M,vd to protect the motor H aP<ciit<d m section
OZL Both the controller and the motor•rvnning over.
device .hall be apProved for group instama-
tion with the protective device of the branch circuit
to 1C. Is the motor is connected
e ]f a motor Is connected to a branch circuit by
mean. of •plug and receptacle, and individual over-
eurtrnt Protection i. .muted sa Provided in pparagrapM1
a, the rating of the Plug and rec<Dtade aha11 out ea
Beed IS amp« n at 125 volts or to ampere at 250
rafts. II individual u!""'ient Protech.. is regtdr<d
369
37
114 ARTICLE 430
as prmided in paracraPh b tar a motor or motor
'04P ..It appliance Provided with an attachment plug
for attaching to the branch eireatl through a .seep-
tzcle, the running overcurrent device shall be an in-
tegral Part of tilt motor or of the apPiianca The
rating of the Plug and receplade shall be assumed to
determine the rating of the circuit to which the motor
may be connected, as provided iv Article 210.
d. The overcurrent device protecting a branch dr-
cuit to which a motor or mcit.,op".gi appliance i,
connected shall have sufficient time delay to per
the motor to start and its load.
4333, Automatic Restarting. Amotor•running pro•
tectivc device which can restart a motor sin at,,. ly
atter overcurrent tripping shall not Ue installed unless
aPProved for use acith the motor " l it protec a. A
motor which can restart automatically after at IIn
stmtl
not be installed so that its automatic restarting
can result in injury to persona ,
Motor-Branch•Circuit Overcurrent Protection
4341. General The following provisions Specify
overcurrent devices intended to protect the motor,
branch -circuit conductors, the motor control apps.
.acus, and thmorons oron against *...current due to
short-circuits or grounds They are in addition to or
amendatory of the provisions of Article 240.
4342. Rating or Setting for Individual Motor. The
motor-branchovercurrent device shall be mp.
able of carrying the starting current of the motor.
Overcurrent protection .hall be considered as being
obtained when this overcurrent device ha. a sting
orsetting not exceeding the values given in Tables 26
or 27, Chapter 10; provided that where the overcur-
rent protection specified in thetable is not sufficientfor the starting current of the moor, it mbe in-
creased, but shall in no case exceetd 400 Peray tent of
the motor full -load current.
Fun Minas nlrulmrd on this inns are rhea inellemvs 7.
A 9 and to of TIM, 2q Chapttr t4
to S,, Elionpl. Na. 6, Cbapter 1% and IN.—. Rd 20, M,
4343. Several Moron on One Branch Circuit. Two
ar more motors may be connected to the a... branch
circuit under the following conditions;
ROTORS AND CONTROLLERS IIs
s Two or more motors each not exceeding I
horsepower in rating and each having a full -load rated
current ex
not ceeding 6 a- Peres, may be used on a
branch circuit protected at not more than 20 amperes
at 125 "'
or less, or 15 amperes at 600 volt, or Iess.
Individual or overcurrent protection is unneces-
sary for such moron unless required by the provisions
of section 4322.
b. Two at, more motor o[ any ratings, each M1av
ing indiviJual running overcurrent prosection, may be
connected to one branch circuit provided all of the
following conditions are complied with;
1. Each molor-runninlz overcurrent device must be
approved for group installation.
L Each motor controller must be approved for
group installation.
3. The branch tirmit must be pprotected by fuses
having a rating equal to "hat sPecifmd in section 4342
for the largest motor connecled to the branch circuit
plus an .moan[ equal to the sum of the full bad cur-
rent ratings of all other motors connected to the etre
cu7L
4. The branch circuit fuses must not be larger than
allowed by section 41.70 for the thermal cutout or
relay protecting she smallest motor of the group.
5.
The conductors of any tae so
PPlYing a single
mem. need nos have individual branch circuit pprole.
tion, ((rovideJ they comely with either of the follow-
ing; (l) no conductor to the motor shall have a cur-
rent tarrying capacity 1".than thatunof the branch
cirecit cnnducbon. Or III no condor to the motor
Ghali have a lu,"lnI< ,ryioR Capacity less than one-
third list of Sit branch <ucui[ <en•lue[ors, wish a
minimum in accardarce with xcEcn 4312, the con-
ductors to the ol,tcr rn
uning prom4ive device being
not more than 25 fret Irng and being protected from
mechanical injery.
4144. Cor.,bined O.srvq'mt Protection, Motor•
braochm71cai1 overcurrent P......bm and motor-
ran—.in, overcurmnt prcetttien m:y Le een4ned in is
single mersnrrert device if the rating er setting of
the deice P-5'. the rocsiag oarcurteot pro"'
I.. spaifed is section 472E
4
138 ARTICLE 430
434S. Overcurrent Devices, in Which Conductor.
Overcurrenl devices shall comply with the provisions
of lection 2405.
4346. Capacity oC Fweholder. FF ivies are used
for motor-Lnnth-circuit oecreurrcnt protection, the
fusclic s shall not be of a smaller sac than re-
quired to accommodate the fuses specified by Table
20• except that where the authority enforcing this
code is satisfied that the conditions of maintenance
and supervision provide that appropriate fuses for the
starting characteristics of the motor will be continue
ally arailable, fuschoiders of smaller size than epecf-
led by Table 20 may be used.
son -
for llhav
3motarR-Lranch•cirtuit protect lin -sha. e is cbreakon-
tinuous current rating of not less than 115 per cent
of the full-'.oad current ratings of the motors
4111, Fder Taps in Inaccessible Location. If
the locationelof a tap to the feeder conductors is
not. accessible, the motor-branch-circuft overcmrcnt
devce may be placed where it will be accessible, pro-
vided the conductor between the tap and the over.
current device have the acme current -carrying capac•
ily as the feeder; or provided they have a current-
wrrying capacity of et least % that of she feeder and
are not more than 25 feet long and are protected from
mechanical injury,
4349. Selection or Setting of Prolective Devine. If
the values sou br.ndu circuit protective devices give*
7r. Table 26 or Table 27 Jo not correspond to the
standard aiz. or ratings of fuse., non-ad)usl.ble sir -
mit -breaker, or thermal devices or possible setting
le adjustable circuit -breakers u�equ. , to carry the
load, the neat higher size, rating or setting may be
used
Motor -Feeder Overemrent Protection
4361. General. The following provision, specify
overcurrent device, intended to Drelect feeder coa.
doctors supplying motors against overeurrcnt3 due to
shore•cucuits or grounds
436L Rating or Setting—Motor Load A feeder
which supplies motors shall be Provided with over -
current protection which shall not be grrster than the
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 159
largest rating or setting of the branch -circuit protea
five device, for any motor of the group (based on
Table. 26 and 27, Chapter 10), plus the sum of the
full -load currents of the other motors of the group.
rIf ne or mom moron / e0val horaapo�er miy v 11,
L Far in
the arou0. at, Wr.e moms abadd b mv.idawl
as fila laraut (« Wo bore calculrJooa
II t� at, ore
be macro of t o vV mvat be nartai Imuln-
..It .scour. a .call tarter feeder cenducnn
an4
1. <orrn«nnair Waer raripp or Mlmp of /coder carr.
<utat Dr«Min
Sra d
gtaaaylc N"6'
Ch.""14
4363. Rating or Settleg—Power and Light Loads
if
a feeder supplies a motor load, and in addition a
lighting or a lighting and appliance load, the feeder
overcurrent Prolective device may have a nlin8 or
amine suRicient to cony the lighting or the lighting
anA appliance Io' as determined in a«*.dotes with
Article. 210 and 220, slut, for a single otos*., the rat•
Ing permitted by s<etwn 4312; and, for two oq more
motor., the rating permitted by section 436E
Remora -Control Circuits
4371. OeneraL The following deviations from the
ge.... I r'quilcin in, in this code ora Intended to
provide for the peculiar condition, governing remota
control 'I ... im
437Z Overcmreat Protection. Conductors of con-
trol circuits of remote-control)ed equipment Ghali be
protectedagainst overcurrent in accordance with sec.
don 2403, Paragraph g, except that such tood.,t_
shall be considered a. being properly protected by the
branch -circuit overcurrent devices wader soy one of
the follo)s•ing conditions:
a. If the rating or setting o! Cha bench -circuit
overcurrent device is not more
Than $00 per cent of
the carrying capacity of the coc t-1,4rcuit conductor.,
Is. If the controlled device and the point of control
(sort and sap button,, pre,snre swish, thermoesatie
switch, ere.) are both located on. the Gams machine
slid the control circuit doe. not .:tend beyond the
machine.
C. If the Opening of the control circuit would create
a haaard; as for .sample, the <ocar.1 circuit of lira•
pump motor,, and the blie,
363
Vo
140 ANTICLE 430
4373. Mechanical Protection of Conductor. Where
damage to s renmte-cuntral circuit would constitute
a hazard, all conductors of such rem0te•conirol
cuit hall he ilntall<d in a raceway or be othcrn-isc
suiwbly pndcaeJ from mechanical injury outside the
control device itself.
1t is ra"mmeniled (hal Central eircehs be eco arran3ed that m
aee,drnw .'.orad u:R rut curt tae odor.
4374. Switching. Control circuits shall be so ar-
ranged that they will be disconnected from all source
of mpply' when the disconnecting means specified in
section 4i06 is in the open position, except when a "P-
arate asritell is used for the control circuit, if a trans-
former or outer device is used to obtain a reduced
voltage far control circuits, such transformer or other
device shall be connected to the load aide of the dis.
connecting means.
Motor Controllers
Par the puribw of this ankle, Ill.Iran "conlHII," bill -ill. -Y alrimh w d,vi,e aermatly mod 1. start and racy the maws.
4381. General The following provisions are in.
tended to require suitable controllers for all motors.
S. M—in No. 20, Charter 1o,
4382. Suitability. Each controller shall be capable
of starting and slopping the motor which it controls,
and for an alternating -current motor shall be capable
of interrupting the stalled -rotor current of the motor.
4383. Rating. The controller shall have a horse-
power rating, which shall not be lower than the horse.
power rating of the motor, except as follows:
a.Stationary Motor of 9 Horsepower or Lea,.
For a stationary motor rated at A horsepower or less,
that is normally left running and is so constructed
that it cannot be damaged by overload or failure to
start, such as clock motors and the like, the branch.
circuit oyercurren( device may serve as the controller.
b. Stationary Motor of 2 Horsepower or Les,. For
a stationary motor rated at 2 horsepower or less, and
300 volts or less, the controller may be a general -use
switch having an amPerc rating at least twice the full.
load current rating of the motor.
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 161
c. Portable Motor of V4 Horsepower or Leas. For
a portable minor rated at % horsepower or less, the
controller may be an attachment plug and receptacle.
d Cireui!-Beeaker as CoW1,.I n. A branch -circuit
circuit -breaker, rated in amperes only, may be used
as a controller. %V lhu circwt)breaker is also
used for overcurrm protection, it shall conform to
the aPPropriate provisions of this article governing
overcurr<nt protection. .
4384. Nrveed Not Open All Conductors. Except
when it sees also as a disconnecting means (see
section 4407), the controller need not open all con-
ductars to the motor.
U85. In Grounded Conductor, One V.I. of the
cUntralle. may be Placed in a permanently grounded
conductor provided the rontroller is so designed that
the pot, in the grounded conductor cannot be opened
without dmullaneously opening all conductors of the
circuiL
43(16. In Sight from the Controller Location. A
motor and ice driven machinery sluil be within sight
from the controller leration ua
ing conditions is c 114,ed with:leas one of the follow•
a. The controller or its disconnecting means is cap-
aLle of being lacked to the open position.
Is. A manualiy.opemble Switch, which will prevent
the ranmg of the mc,.,, is plarerl within sight hum,
the motor luonaa 7h a ewrtch may be placed in
she remora-c0ntral circuit o(a remote-comrol type
of ewflch.
�A dVai e.le sghL.:rt cissa A tea b wandered muialeat to
t
Special permission is given by the authority to-
fca:ng this cads Y
d. As otherwise Specified in Article Soo of this
code.
4387. Hssmber of Masora Served by Each Can-
Fach u:at.;r s1:.;1 L< Ynard w'sh an indi-
riim! ro*troller, except hal fa1 -`111.a( Wil viii
.I.: sans nae ole f the lfupe:ay serve a grasp of motors. s
Y .to" d ecndu•ons:
II a number cf mewrs drive a.vrral arta of a
smd:macbias u Firm W aYY+ratna such a metal
-i
163 ARTICLE 430
and wood -working machines, cranes, hoists, and sim.
ilar apparatus.
Is. I( a group of motors is under the protection of
one overcurreat device as permitted m paragraph a
of section 43.13.
a Ifa group of motors is located in a single room
within sight from the controller location.
A dining of more than 50 fat 1, —sidewd evuivalmt is
4ina out of siaht.
4388. Adjustable -Speed Motors. Adjustable -speed
motors, if controlled by means of field regulation,
shall be so equipped and connected )hat they cannot
be started under weakened field, unless the motor is
designed for such starting.
4389. Speed Limitation. Machines of the following
types shall be provided with speed limiting devices,
unless the inherent characteristics of the machine,,
the system. or the load and the mechanical connection
thereto, are such as to safely limit the speed, or unless
Abu machine is always under the manual control of a
yuzI1 led operator.
a Separately -excited direct-current motors.
b. Series motors.
"Motor -generators and converters which can be
driven at excessive speed from the direct-current end,
a, by a reversal of current or decrease in load.
4390. Poseholder, Rating. The rating of a combi-
nation fuseholder and switch used as a motor -con•
troller shall be such that the fuseholder will accom-
modate the size of fuse specified in Table 20, Chapter
10, for motor -running protection.
Disconnecting Meati -
4401. General. The following provisions are In-
tended to ralmre disconnecting means for mclues
and controllers capable of disconnecting them from
the circuit
S. Di -sr -in N. 'Xi. CUP- 10.
4402.Type. The disconnecting means shall be a
motor -circuit switch, rated in horsepaxer, or a cir-
cuit -breaker, except as permitted in the following
ParagraPhs 3, b, c, it d. EVCry snitch in the motor.
branch orcin within sight from the controller loca-
tion shall -comply with these requirements,
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 161
A dlvanre 7'
f marc than So fat b mnddrred muivalmt to
b,in[ out It vybt.
o. Horsepower cur Lea$. For stationary motors
of 51 horsepower or less the branch•cilcuil overeur•
sentdevice may serve as the disconnecting means.
Is. Two Horsepower or Lea, For stationary mot•
are rated at 2 horsepower or less and J00 volts or
I..?. the disconnecting means may be a general -use
.wileh having an ampere rating at least twice the
full -load current rating 0f the motor.
,Exceeding 50 Horsepower. Far atatianary mot-
or. rated at more than 50 hon<power, the disconnect•
ing means may be a moor -circuit switch also rated in
amperes, a general -nae twitch, or an isolating switch
71 is raommmded that Irdalns vimbn for curs exeNiea
,u
b .., .. vet u1:aL!e of i IrrrWni rtakriaalar <mnnet,
b plaialr oiled "W raw nam ode, Ica ^
d. Portable Mature. Far portable motors im at.
tachment plug and receplacle may serve as the dill.
e0nn lug means.
4403. Carrying Capacity, The disconnecting meant
shall have a carrying capacity of at least 115 per cent
of the name -plate current rating of the motor.
4404. Grounded Conductor, One pole of the dis-
connecting means may be placed to a pernunently
grounded conductor if the disconnecting means is an
designed that the pole in the grounded conductor can-
not be opened without the disconnecting
all conductors of the circuit
4403. To Be Indlesting. The disconnecting meant
shall plainly indicate whether it is in the open o,
dosed position.
4406. To Diseoanect Bath Motor and Contimain,
The diuonnccting means shall disconnect both the
motor and the controller from all ungrounded auPVly
conductors. The fisconnccling means may be in the
same enclosure with the controller.
4407. Switch or Circuit -Breaker at Both Controller
and Disconnecting Meant A switch or cir<u8•breaker
.I've a, tis rise provisions of aeaan 438.E may
ane as bath controller and disconnecting means if
it oDrna all ungrounJeJ <onduaon to the motor, h
Pint ecled by an overcurrant device is ho,ch may ba the
364
40
W/
164 ARTICLE 00
branch circuit fuses) which opens all ungrounded
candilda to the switch or circus -breaker, and is of
one of the fallowing types:
A. An air -break switch, operable directly by apply-
ing the hand to a lever or handle.
b. A circuit -breaker operable directly by applying
the (rand to a lever or handle.
c An oil switch used on a circuit ,host rating
does not exceed 600 volts or 100 amperes. or on a
circuit exceeding this capacity if under expert super-
vis;on and by special permission.
The OR twitch or circuh.b...k,, srwi6ed aIe may be beth
P carr a,'l manually. wp atle. It voa<rore W,. rrovhion rheuld
Oe ode to Iuek it in the teen ttoo's,
The evercurrrnt'µl<l�e rroteteng the eootroll" may be pert
o/ the comwller n smL1Y er may k mparrte
A eampenumr cape of ....roti, b nae i.ncluded .ban sod
will require a a<paraw d.sccrnquv. meats..
4408. Service Switch as Disconnecting Mesas. If an
installation consists of a single motor, the service
switchmay serve as the disconnecting means, provided
I conforms to the requirements of this article, and is
within sight front the controller location.
A distance or ..it thou 50 ft' is onridered -il i'seat to
bona out of sigh,
4409. 'In Sight from Controller Location. The dis-
connecting means shall be located in sight from the
controller location or be arranged to be locked to the
open position.
A dir..c or more Thad 50 feet l, eenridered eyulvaleat to
bring 0 , or aignc
4410. Motors Served by a Single Disconnecting
Meant Each motor shall be provided with individual
disconnecting means, except that for motors of 600
'oils or less a single disconnecting means may serve
a group of motors under any one of tilt following
conditions, The disconnecting means serving a group
of motors shall have a rating not less than is required
by section 4402 for a single motor whose rating equals
the sum of the horsepowers or currents of all the
motors of the group.
a. If a number of motors drive several parfa of a
single machine or piece of appantus such as metal
and woodworking machines, cranes, and hoists.
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS t65
Is. if a group of motors is under the protection of
one act of overcurrent devices as permitted by para-
graph a of section 4343.
"If a group of motors is in a single room within
eight from the location of the disconnecting means,
bsmf di: --.c, -I more thou 50 req u eavaidwwl e0uivatmt to
4411. Readily Accessible. The disconnecting means
shall be readily accessible
Requirement. for Over 600 Volta
4421. General The following provisions recognize
the additional hazard due to the use of high voltage
They are in addition to or amendatory of the other
provisions Ot thio article. Other requirements for cir-
cuits and equipment operating at more than 600 volts
are in Arlfde 710.
4422. More Than 7560 Volts• Motors operating at
more than 7500 volts between conductors .half be In-
stalled in ftre-resistant motor rooms.
4423. Motor Overcorrent ProtadotL Running
overcurrent protection for a motor of over 600 volts
311311 consist either of a circuit -breaker, or of over-
current units Integral with the controller which shad
sir..uttzaWsly open all ungrounded conductors to the
motor. The overcurrent device shall have a setting
Ss specified elsewheee in this article for motor -running
Qr4t<Ct�ab
4424. Circuit Overetarant Protection. Each motor
branch rirruil and fet•ler of more than 600 volts shall
be Profaned aRam,t aver current 6y one of the folios`
fn&
L A ruruft-breaker of suitable titin
g M .ranged
Its.
it ran be &uvud witl:va haearA.
b. Fuses of the til.&peri cr other callable t7pe-
Pusea .bili be used with --Malde diacanntcfing means
or'hty .ha0 U< of a ty<< wkirh ran alta serve as the
d;ercrnec_g mum. lrhey 3haa At ..I' the.!
they ranewt lie r<•fused car repla<td while rlwy are
enerrprtd. TL•e rarr..a n( Iv.n ahai! hi hmited w
It..e 'alts,. permitted by .ecnua 7UH,
442L Disco.—Hag Marna The efrruit.}rteaker or
the Poses sPe r.,4 in sen.an M-4 n(hr rcmnmfe IIs
d:Konreet-9 .:ram tf 4
they rnt to the -1
sG:cuU:e n;mrrxeau 4f thI- .'We.
166 ARTICLE. 4J0
Protection of Live Porta—AB Voltage.
4431. General. The following provisions specify
that live parts .lull be protected in a manner judged
adequate to the hazard involved.
4432. Where Required. Eap... d live parts of mot-
ors and controllers operating at 50 volts or more be-
tween terminals, except for stationary motors having
commutators, collectors and brush rigging Iocated in-
side of motor end brackets and not conductively con-
nected to supply circuits epenti.g at more than 150
'Oita to ground, shall be guarded against accidental
contact by enclosure. or by location as follows:
L By installation in a room or enclosure which is
accessible only to qualified persons;
b. By installation an,a suitable balcony, gallery br
platform, so elevated aft1- arranged as to exclude un-
qulified persons; .
Q By elevation 8 feet or more above the floor;
d. So that it will be protected by a guard rail when
the motor operates at 600 volts or ICSL
4433. Guard. for Attendant.. If the live parts of
motors orcontrollers Operating at more than 150 volts
to ground are guarded against accidental contact only
by location as specified in section 4432, and ff adjust-
ment or other attendance may be necessary during
the operation of the apparatus, suitable insulating orals
or platforms shall be provided so that the attendant
cannot readily touch live part, unless standing on the
mats or platforms. Whero necessary, steps and hand-
rails should be installed on or about large machines
to affordsafe access to parts which must be exam-.
ined or adjusted during operation.
Grounding
4435. General. The following provisions specify
the grounding of motor and controller frames to pre-
vent a potential above ground in the event of acci-
dental contact between live parts and frame. Insu-
lation, isolation, or guarding are suitable alternative,
for motors under certain conditions.
443& Stationary Motors. The frames of stationary
motor shall be grounded if any of the following
conditions exist:
MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 167
a. If supplied by means of inetal•elad ,king.
b. if located in a wet place and not isolated or
guarded.
c If in a hazardous location (See Article 500.)
d. If the motor operates with any terminal at more
than 150 vol" to ground.
Grounding of the motor frame is preferable, but if
the frame of the motor is not $rounded, it &hall be
permanently and effectively insulated from the
ground.
4437. Portable Motor The frames of porubte
motors which operate at more than 150 volts to
ground shall be guarded or ground. See paragraph
c of section 2545 de
on groundmR of portable appliance.
in other than residential occupancies. .
.It 1� Ito..4,,1
IJO d dt&to t oaed y� of ..— bits opsau
rnmb .t 150 . &mmdd 1% tbi4 . M
Sm
"-h b of reNoa 2559 for eolw of sroaudlvf toe.
dustar.
4438, Cantroders. Controller cases, except those
attached to ungrounded portable egwpment and -
cent the lined Covera of Snap switches, shall be
grounded regard),., of '.Mage.
4439. Method of Grounding. Grounding where
required shall be done in the manner specified in Ar-
tide 250.
s. Grounding Through Terealeul Hou inri If the
wiring to fixed motors is in armored cable or metal
ncewaya, junction box,. to house motor terminal,
sball be provided. These housings shall be of ample
size to properly make co ; nnectionthey aban be of
subs"ntul metal construction, and the armor of the
cable or the metal raceway, Ghali be Connected to
them in the manner specified in Article 250.
b, Sapsradon of Junction Be. from Mao,. The
junction box required by paragraph a may be se a.
rated from the motor not more than 6 feet provided
the leads to the molar are armored cable or armored
Cord or are stranded I< h <nclmrd in draible or rigid
Conduit ore eitrical metallic tubi,& not smaller than
If inrh electrical Made alae, the Intal Or ncewa�
being connected beth to the nmic,l and to he box,
stranded lead. are used. protected as sptlifi,d above.
345
A
40
In. ARTICLE 44S
theyshall not be larger than Na 10, and shall comply
with other requirements of the code for conductors
to be used in raceways.
ARTICLE 445—GENERATORS
44S1. Location. Generators shallbe located in dry
places, and also so a, to meet the requirements for
..lots in section 4310. Generators installed in haz-
ardous locations as described in Article 500. or in
other locations as described in Articles 510, 520, and
530, shall also comply with the provisions Of thos,4
articles.
Ir is re ...,ed ths, waterproof onn. be prvcided far ass
in _,4 .
4452. Identification Each generator shall be pro-
vided ,,fill As name -plate giving the makers name, the
rating in kilowatts or kilo -volt-amperes, the normal
volts and amperes corresponding to the rating, and
the revolutions per minute.
4453. Drip Pans. Generators sball be Provided
With suitable drip pans if required by the authority
enforcing this cod&
4454. Overcurrrnt Protection. Constant -potential
generators, except alternating -current generators and
their exciters, shall be protected from excessive Cur—
real by circuit -breakers or fuses.
a. Two-Wiro Generators. Two -wire, direct -cur.
rent generators may have overcurrent protection in
one conductor only if the overcurrent device u actu-
ated by the entire current generated, except that in
the shunt field. The overcurrent device shall not
open the shunt field.
b. 65 Volts or Leas. Generators operating at 65
volts or less and driven by individual motors shall be
considered as protected by the overcurrent device p
letting the motor if these devices will operate when
the generators are delivering not more than 150 per
cent of their full -load rated mrrtnL
"Balancer Seta.Two-wire, direct-current gener-
ator' used in conjunction with balancer seta to obtain
neutrals for 3 -wire systems shall be equipped with
overesevent devices which will disconnect the 3 -wive
GENERATORS las
system in the nae of excessive unbalancing at volt•
ogee or currents.
d. 3 -Wire, Dirett-Corrent Generators. Three -wire,
direct-current Re ... store. whether Compound or shunt,
wound, shall be equipped with overcurrent devices
one in Back armature lead, and Ad Connected as to by
zctaated by the entire Current from the armature
Such overcurrent devices shall Consist either of a
double -pole, double -coil circuft•breaker, or of a 4 -pole
circuit.breaker connected in the mein and equalizer
leads and tripped by two overcurrent devices, one In
each armature lead. Such protective devices shall be
ro interlocked that no one pole an be opened with.
out simultaneously disconnecting both leads of the
armature from the symern.
HSS. Shia of Conduomn. The conductor, from the
generator tereninseln to -uplifted equiymenl shall have
a carrying capacity not Ia, than 115 per Cent l I the
name plate carrtnt rating. Neutral Per
shall
be the nA.. size As the conductors of the outside legs.
4456. Protection of Live Porta, Live parts of Ren-
- W c of more Iha. ISO voila to ground shall not be
exposed to accid<.tal Contact it aeauible to ungtug-
h<d Derat3ns.
4/37. Ooards for Attendants. Where necuury for
the safety of sttendanh the protdsioae of section 4733
ehsll be compiled with
4458. Oromddinp If s general., operates at a ter•
.lint voltage m coca of ISO vc14 to
ground, the
Inure
25a UIf
the ltame grounded fn the manner specified in
Artidc 250. is ort grWaded• it shall be
pumaneatiy a.d eirlcl sly inauAted from the ground.
ARTICLE 454—TRANSPORMER4 AND TRANS-
FORMER VAULTS (Inc:vdir� Ifecendaty Ties)
4501. Appilestle- Thio artiAe >0'v;iea In the I.-
miuuo. cl all wanAmmea esuyr (If current tone•
f.m•.eo: (Z) dry -type tnnainrmne which connituq
a umxren! part Of ether aapanlua and wh.rh tan•
farm in the r.qa m!ma Ice sash apyaraw; (3)
t,nadcrmn f+r tare wisS Xray and high-irequeaq:
(4) vaedcrcoa used wish Cures 3 rem ata..e.ud.
170 ARTICLE 450
low energy power and signal circuits which shall con-
form to Article 725; (5) transtormcrs for sign and
outline lightingg which shall Conform to Article 6011;and (6) trams .1rdets for electric discharge lighting
which shall conform to AtliCIt 410,
Thf, article applies to the installation of transform-
ers '"hazardous locations except .s modified by
Article 500.
See atm Aetid< 7I0. CIwWu and Pquiprnrnt Operadna at
Mare than 600 Volta Nrtwee. fondvrivrr. and Crrrice Innalla
ewoa Orer 600 4'du as red
to i. Article 230.
GCneral Provisions
4511. Location. They shall be located and arranged
to minimize possible life and fire hazards. The Idea-
tion of transformer vaults m affected by ventilating
rtquirements is covered elsewhere in this article.
4512 Overedirent Protection Oaercurrenl pro-
tection shall conform to the following. As used in
I
section, the Word "transformer' means a trans-
former or a bank of transform,,, operating as a unit.
a. Primary Sid& Each transformer shall be pro-
tected by an overcurrent device in theprimary con-
nection, rated or act at not mart than 250 per cent
of the rated primary current of the transformer, ex-
cept that an individual overcurrent device is not re-
quired if the primary circuit overcurrent device pro-
vides the protection specified in this paragraph, and
except as provided in paragraph b of this sectroa.
Is Primary and Secondary Side. A transformer
having an overcurrent device in the secondary con-
nection, rated or set at not more than 250 per cent
of the rated secondary current of the transformer, or
a transformer equipped with a coordinated thermal
overload protection by the manufacturer• i, not re-
quired to have an individual overcurrent device in the
primary Connection provided the primary feeder over -
current device is rated or set to open at a Current
value not more than six times the rated current of
the transformer for transformers having not more
than six per cent impedance, and not more than four
times rated current of the transformer for tnnsform-
en having more than six but not more ban ten per
cent impedance.
e. Potential (Voltage) Trandoreten, Potential
transformers should have primary fuses. The fine
TRANSFORMERS Irl
1 not exceed 10 amperes for circuits of
less, and 3 amperes amperes
of more
Its. A resislor should be connected fn
igh tension fuses if necessary to limit the
rt -circuit current to a value within the
capacfly of the fuse.
sndary Ties. Aaused fn this section the
armor" .tans . transformer or a bank
,s operating as a unit A secondary tie
operating at 600 volt, or fess between
connect, two power source, or power
i, such as the accondana of two trans -
C tie may Consist of one or more e.n-
duadr, per phase.
a. Tia Circuits. Tic circuits shall be prodded at
each end with overcurrent protection as required in
Article 240 of this code, except under the conditions
described in sub-paraRraphs 1 and 2 of this section,
in which Cases, Ilse overcurrent praeclfon may be in
accordance with Cob -paragraph of of this section.
1. Loads at Transformer Supply Points Only. If
Ril leads are connected at the transformer supply
polnu at each end of the it and overcurrent pprotec-
tion is not provided in accordance with Arlide 270,
the rated currrntsarrying Capacity of the tie shall be
not less than G7 per cent of the rated secondary cur-
rent of flu largest transformer connected to the see-
ondary it, system
2. Loads Connected Between Transformer Stip.
ply Points. if load is connected to the tie at any point
between Iramlormer supply points and -recurrent
ppromclion is not provided in accordance with Article
Z70, the rale. Current -carrying capacig o.1 the tia
shall be not Ins Than IW per Cent ai the rased sec-
ondary enrrent of the largest transformer con.eded
to the secondary tie system except a, otherwise pro-
vided in sub -paragraph 4.
J. Tia Circuit Protecdom Under the condillewa
de,erihed in sub -paragraphs I and 2 of this xecli0q
Uoth ends of each it eamtucter shall be equipped
whit a prolrctive device wldch wf1l .pen at I under
a p a.
determined «mnl
penrt of the lie rondo
dint,, rir ;t tondidfms. This Tell fen shall consist
of the folluwhsg: (q > tmihle link c+ble manort0r,
1e111,mt at, I.K. commonly known at, a limiter. -h
36G
46
Ila ARTICLE 450
king of a size corresponding with that of the con-
ductor and of approved construction and character.
istics according to the operating voltage and the type
of insulation on the tie conductors, or (21 automatic
circuit -breakers actuated by devices having compar-
able current -time characteristics.
A I=,.,<ction o[ Pbasa Conductor Hatween
Transformer Supply Pante. If the tie consists of
more than one conductor per phase. the conductors
Of each phase shall be interconnected to order to es-
tablish a load supply point, and the protection speci-
fied in sub -paragraph 3 shall be provided in each tie
conductor at this point, except As follows:
Loads may be connected to the individual conduc-
tors of a multiple -conductor lie without interconnect-
ing the conduelon of each phase and without tM1e
protection specified in sub -paragraph 3 at load con-
nection point, provided: the lie eonJuctors of each
phase Dave a combined
capacity
not less than
135 per
cent oI the rated secondary current of the largest
transformer connected to the secondary tie system;
the total load of such taps does not exceed the rated
sewndary current of the largest transformer, the
loads are equally divided on each phase and 'on the
individual conductors of each phase as far as prac-
ticable.
S. Tie Cheat Control 11 the operating voltage
"'T"150 volts to ground, secondary Ilea provided
with limiters shall have a switch at each end which
when open will de -energize the associated tic conduc-
torsand limiter. The current rating of the switch
hall be not leas than the rated current of the con.
ductors connected to the a.ilch. It shall be capable
of opening its rated current, and it shall be con-
structed eco that it will not
it. under the magnetic
forces resulting from short-circuit current.
Is.
Ovenmsent Protection for Secondary Connee.
does. When secondary ties are used an overcurrent
device rated or set at not more than 250 per cent of
Ike rated secondary current of the transformer shall
be provided in the secondary connections of each
rnnaformeq and in addition an automatic circuit -
breaker actuated by a rev<ne•cunent relay set to
open the circuit at not more than the rated secondary
current of the transformer shall be provided in the
aaondary connection of each transformer.
TRANSIORMERs cls
4514. Parallel Operation. Transformers may be,
operated in parallel and protected as a unit if their
electrical characteristic, are such that they will divide
the load in proportion to their rating.
4515. Guarding. Transformers shall be guarded as
follows:
a HIeehaacal ProtecHoa ADDro nate
shall be made to minimize the D provisions
to—raformera from exterml Poaaibility of damage
formers are located where they a ..... if the Iran.-
anical injury. posed to mech-
b. Hs:posed Lva P
it,na the pThe transformer installa•
tion shall conform wh
a rovisions for guarding live Parts in section IIID.
e Vc1Wge Warning. The operating voltage of
nn,id live Darla of transformer installations ,hall
b< inJicated by signs or visible marking, on the equip-
ment or ......urea
4116. Orotmdlnq, Exposed non-
meWl Pana of Iramform<r torrent earrYlnB
installations including
!cote, shall be grounded under the conditions and in
the mannv procrib<d for electrical egoipmegt anJ
other esyosed mewl Dart, in Article 25(1.
4517. Nana-p4ta Each tnnaformer, shall be Dro•
dd<d with ,name -plate giving the name he the ran•
and .secondary .led'"Oft-91:lvlt-amperes, frequency. Primary
qY. it the Iran formcrud kin ext
fn,ulahe am-
sindt li au' ian
seeds 2> kva. 11 Clava H inauarien as defined in
American Standard for Tr ndvmen C 57.1 is used
In she ccnatravtirn rf dry type tnnsloC 57. of more
thio 100 kn, the name -plate shall so fndipla
Specific Proeidcna Applfcakla to
Types of T,...( his Different •
4121. Dry-Typ, Tnnafoemen Irrtaged indoors.
Tnn,lcrmera reed Iriri Ova or Ira shoal ri I a cep•
.anon e( at lean 12 inch,. fr,;m a;nibast0;le matafal
n.eu separated tl:ere(rn:n
mn!at(ng harrier, lar el ley "sa r ,;,.a nuns
ice v'.
op<ningano d. <cmpl<tely erc'r a,d except .for x'. di,g
Traasfc," d .core Iha� 100
insnL',d in rma Inndnaw:o r f ruing he.,, be
atzvctfcn un!na they ars ta^m rtefilra-resh Class<i
174 ARTICLE 450
insulation, as defined in American Standard for Trans-
formers C 57 1, and are separated from combustible
material not less Ilton 6 feet Imrizontally and 12 feet
vcrtitally or are scpamled therefrom by a firc-resis-
tan l hcal•insulaliug Wrricr.
Transformers rated more than 15,000 volts shall be
installed in a vault.
4522, Askareldnsulated Transformers Installed In-
doors Askarcl-insulated transformers rated in excess
of 25 kva shall be furniehtd with a pressurc•rdic(
vent, If installed in a poorly ventilated place they
shall be furni,hcd with a means (or absorbing any
V-11 generated by arcing insiJe the rase, or the pres-
sure relief vent shall be connected to a chimney or
Rue .which wdl carry such gases outside the buildi.R.
Askarel-insulated transformers rated more than 15,OOj1
volts shall be installed in a vault.
4523. Oil -Insulated Transformers Installed In-
deora Oil-imaul.ted transformers shall be in,talled in
a vaulows:t constructed as specified in this article except
a, (oli
s Not Over 100 trkva Total Capacity. The provi.
cions for ansformer vaults specified in this article
,DPIy except That the vault nay he constructed of
reinforced concrete not less than 4 inches thick.
b. Not Over 600 Volts. A vault is not required
provided suitable arrangements are made where nec-
essary to prevent a transformer oil lire igniting other
materials, and the total transformer capacity in one
location does not exceed to kva in a section of the
building classified as combustible, or 75 ktia where the
surrounding structure is classified as fire-resistant
construction.
"Furnace Transformers. Electric furnace trans. .
formers of a total rating not excecdmg 75 kva may
be inslalled without a vault in a building or room of
fire-resistant construction if arrangements necessary
to prevent a transformer oil fire spreading to other
combustible material are provided
d. Detached Buildings Transformers may be in-
stalled in a building which does not conform with the
provisions specified in this code for transformer vault.
provided neiiher the building nor its Contents presents
a fire hazard to any other building of property, and
TRANSPORVERS Us
provided the building is used only in supplying else
laic service and is accessible only to qualified persona.
4524. Og-Irnulated Tranafotmen In., d puF
doors. Condruatible builJings, combWtible part of
buildings, fire exap<a, door and window openinRa of
buildings, and other eombuatfbl< material shall be
aa(eguarded from fires originating in oil -insulated
tnna(ormva installed on, attached to, or ,djacent to
a building or other properly by providinK eReaive
apace separation or an eRective fire-resistant barrier,
and Dy providin means of re Wining or Safely dl,po,.
lig o the oil from a ruptured transformer tank in
cases where the I, ... former installation would present
a fire hazard without such pfecautiomary measure&
Providom for Transformer Vacate
4541. Lacridos. Vaults shall be located whero
they tan be ventilated 1. the o.Wde air wirhout us•
Ing Ru,a or ducts wherever such an arrangement is
pr 'Jeable.
4142. Walla Roof, and Floor. The walla .rad root
of v.ulls shall consist of reinforced concrete not Ina
than 6 indiea in thickness or of brick not Imo than
8 (lades In thickness, or of foul-bearinK hollow life
not less than 12 inch,. in thicknaa. the inside surface
Of the wall being coated with cement Plaster. The
V,
shall have a concrete flwr at least 4 trachea thick.
The floor or walla of .lie building may be used for
one or more Darts of the vault if they are approved
la being equivalent to the foregoing specifications.
4143. Daortvaya Any doorway leading from the
vault into the building shall be protected as follows:
a. Type of Door. Each donrvay shalt be provided
With a u8ht-fittintl door of a tyy, a aPpraved for open-
Inga in Class A atmtione as 'I'll
in the 1937 edi.
tion of the standard of the Natioml Board of Fire
S7nderwrilen for Protection of DP<Oi"Is in walls
and Partition. Against Fire. The authority enforcingg
IN code may require ouch a dna, on each side of
the wall it conditioW warrant.
b. Sig. A door sill or curb of mgdenl height to
confine within Ibc vault the al from the largnt tram-
Innner shxll be provided and in no case shall the
height be Ina than 4 trachea
e Locke. Entrance doors shall be equipped with
Ix4r, and door shall be kept lacked, acme being
3U7
176 ARTICLZ 410
allowed only to qualified persons. Locks and latches
shall be so arranged that the door may be readily
and quickly opened tram the inside.
1544. Ventilation. The ventilation steal( be adequate
I
o prevent a transformer temperature in caccss of
the values prexrbed in American Standar) for Tran,
form<n Publitalic. C 57.1.
4545. Vention Openfnge. Openings for ventila-
tion shall he'll, provided us aceorJance with the follow-
ing:
a Location. Ventilation oDeninRs shall be located
as far away as passible from door,, windows, fire
escapes, and combustible material.
b. Arrangement. Vaults ventilated by natural cir-
culation of air may have roughly halt of the total
area of openings required for ventilation in one or
more openings near the floor and the remainder fn
one or more openings in the roof or in the sidewalls
near the root; or all of the area required for ventila-
tion may be provided fo one or mare opcniliga in or
near the roof.
"Sizes In the case of vaults ventilated to an out-
door area without using ducts or flues the combined
net area of allventilatin7 openings after deducting
the ares occupied by screens, gratings, or louvers,
shall be not less than 3 square incites per kva of
transformer capacity in service exttpt that the net
arca shill be not less than 1 square Joot for any cap -
.city under 50 kva.
d, Covering. Ventilation openings shall be covered
with durable gralinga, xreens, or louvers, according
to the treatment required in order to avoid unsafe
conditions. .
I Dampen, If automatic dampen are used in the
ventilation openings of vaults containing oil -insulated
transformers, the actuating device should be made to
function at a "oull—tune resulting from fire and not
at a tempenlure which might prevail as a result of
an overheated transformer or bank of transformers.
Care should be taken to avoid unintentional closing
of automat!: dampers.
I. Ducts. Ventilating ducts shall be constructed of
fire-reaimire, material.
TILMSTORlrgRs 177
43•!6• Dnituge. ]f Practicable, vault, containing
more than IW kva transformer cap"itpp shall be pro•
vided with t drain which will tarry og any aeeumu.
lotion of oil ll water that may collect in the vault.
The floor shall be ruched to the drain opening.
4547. Water Pipes and Aeteaeoriee. Any pi a or
duct systema foragn to the el<clrical installation
should not enter or pass through a transformer vauU.
iI the presence of such foreign system1 cannot be
avoided, appurtenances als hal which require main.
the vats L regular intervals ,hail not be located inside
the vault Arrangements shall be made if necessary
to avoid passible trouble from condenaatitn, leaks
and br"ks m each foreign gatem,, Piping or other
facilities Drovided for fire protection or for watco-
cooled tran,fermera are not deemed to be foreign to
We electrical installation.
4348. Stonga In Vaclte. Materials shall not be
stored In
Ir
stored
ARTICLE 460 --CAPACITORS
4661. AppScathm of other Is. This article
,ball not f h to capaci bra constituting a compos•
est part of other aODargba and con(ormmg with the
requir<m<nts lot ouch apparatus,
in hazardous location, shag tom�Cap ....... .mulled
except as moT with the pmvF
siona of this article ed by Article $00.
4602 Locations Capacitors aha, be endwed to
Waits c:mplym8 with the pravi,:' of Article 150
unless they are askarel insulated or unless each unit
cont—, not mare than 7 gaSuna cl a combustible o it
4607. Mechanical Praleeeloa ADDr r'
d mage to o�ac era fro m°I. the pouibil Y of
acitcn are Iccated wh<rm external :maga if the eap-
a they ue "Po"d to me
anirsl injury•
41A1. Tnrtafcrnun Gay with GDeciton. Tran,
loaners asr•1 cons capacitors afalt be inus0ed in ae-
not In. cosh Article 4 t The Fva ratmir sha`.I be
not Ie se. than 175 per cent N Iha capacitor kva "ling
•
4665. Dnina s, o! Stared CfyRn• Capacitors shall
b< Pruv,do wuh a ..ane. ( dr4:nmg thn abred
caugn
<a aci•c�r�iof Dihiurs. h be d toh SOrc°dual voltage of a
rd . or less wnhm
176 ARTICLE. 160
one minute after the capacitor is d;s rr,ct,d from
the source of supply in the case of capacitors rated
600 volts or less and in five minutes in the case of
capacitors rated marc Ihan 600 volts.
b. Meana ofDischarge. The discharge circuit shall
be either PcrutancnJ, mnnaled to the terminals of
the capacitor or rapaalor bank, or provided with
automatic means of connecting it to the terminals of
the capacitor bank on remmal of voltage from the
line. hfantoI means of z\vilching or co nnccting the
discharge circuit shall not Uc used The windngs of
motors, of transformers. Or of other equipment
directly connected to capacitors wilhcut a switch or
overcurrent device interposed, constitutes a suitable
discharge mein'.
1606. Capacitor � Rating. The rating of capacitors
which are connected art the load aide of a motor over.
current device shall not exrecd the value required to
slag the no•load power -(actor of the motor to unity.
Capacitors of this maximum rating \gill
usually result
I'
a lull load power -foetus of 95,
5 to 7N per cent. The
maximum eapaeftar ratings permitted for uzc with
open -type, three•plos'. sixty-cyc'.e induction motors
are given in Table 30, Chapter 10.
4607. Capacitor Cimuite. Capacitor circuits shall
conform to the following:
aConductor Rating. The stincapacitor cin
it
conductors shall he not Tess thag n of 135 per cent of
the rated current of the capacitor. The sting of con-
ductors which connect a capacitor to the terminals
mile, motor or to motor circuit con,luctors shall be
not leaf t
han one-third the rating of the motor rir-
cuit conductors or the rating shall be dclennineA as
uplatned above if this method gives a greater value.
b. OverwrteProteerion. An overcurrent device
shall b< providedd in each unRrosmdcd <nnduttar, ex-
cept that an overcurrent device is not required for a
Capacitorconnected on the load side of a motor over -
current device. The rating or setting of the overcur-
rent device shall be as low ss practirable without
causing unnecessary ry opening of the circuit. A rating
or setting of 165 to 250 per cent of the rated current
of the capacitor will be suitable under average con-
ditions although the selling or rating may have to
eueed 250 per cent in some cases
CAPACITORS In.
a Dlaconnecdng Meana. A dimonnat(ng device
shall be provided m cath unRroundcti conductor ex-
cept that a di—itn,4ung device is not required for
a capacitor connected on the load side of a motor
discon--ling device. The disronneelmg device need
not open all ungrounded conductors simultmeabely.
The disconnecting device stay be coed for discnnnett•
ing the capacitor from the line as a regular operating
procedures The continuous current carrying capacity
of the dixnnn<ctin. device shall be not Its, than 175
per cent of the rated current of the capacaor.
4608, Rating or Setting of the Motor Overwreent
Device. If a motor insoiutian include, a capacitor
connected on the load si4e of the motor orereurrcne
device, and the overcurrent device used can be ad -
Jutted as e.Pl.i.,d below, the rating or seumR of the
motor overcurrent device shall be determined as pro-
vided in section 4722 except that (naread of using the
corre
full•Iwd rate) current of the motor as pruvg 11 m
that a<aion a lower value ,ponding with the im-
proved ppower•fartor of the motor circuit shall be
used. The redanion fn the full•loa 1 current ItquireJ
is'jollied in pahie ]0, Clupter 10, for open -frame,
three-pbax, sixty -cycle in Nei.. muton. Section
4712 applies with respect to the sting of the motor
circuit conductors,
4609. Grounding. Capacitor ,axe shalt be ground•
ed in accarJance with Article 250.
4610. Guarding. All live puts of nPaciton which
are connected to circuits of more than 600 valla be-
tween conducbn and are accessible to unqualified
peraena, shall be enclosed ar isolated For (solation
y elevation, see tectien 7162,
4611. N.—Plate. Esih capacitor ,half b, provided
wish a name•Plale giving the auker'a mote, rated
101--1 frequency, kva or amperca, number of phase.
and it liquidfilled, the amount cf l:grad in Ralluns,
together with a statement that the liquid will or will
not burn, as the Otero may be. The name-pplate shall
I,4,cale whether nr t a capacitor unci has a di,
dorge device inside the rasa
ARTICLE 470_.RESISTORS AND REACTORS
F. Ptw.,Uu as ua:am 4111, WI 0.W 911".
4701. l.ae01on. Resisters and reagents shall not
be placed where exposed " ur.haai:+t injury. 11 is
368
µ Il
too ARTICLE aro
the Immediate vicinity of easily ignitible material they
shall be of the oil4mmersed type or shall be enclosed
in metal boxes or cabinets. See Article 500 for Hoa
ardous Locations.
4702. Space Separation. Unless attached to a
switchboard or other non-combustible material, or no-
ses mounted as provided in section 4703, resistors
and reactors shall be separated from combustible ma-
terial by a distance of not less than I foot.
4703. On or In Proximity to Combustible Material
li placed within a distance of I foot from combustible
material, resistors and reactors shall be installed as
follows:
a. Slab or Panel They slsall be attached to a stab
orpanel of non-combustible, non-absorptive material
such as slate, soapstone, or marble,
b.Silo of Slab. The slab shall extend beyond the
edges of the device and shall have a thickness Pro-
portioned
roportioned to the size and weigld of the device but
shall not be less than y inch thick
e. Supports. The slab shall be secured in position
by supports independent of those fastening the device
to the slab. Bolts which support the device shall be
countersunk at least % inch below the rear surface
of the slab and shall be covered with insulating ma-
teriaL
4704. Mounting. Casings when mounted on plain
surfaces shall make contact with such surfaces only
at the point of support, an air space of at least Sg
inch being maintained between the casings and sur-
faces.
4705. Conductor Insulatlon. If insulated eonduo
tors are used for connection between resistance ele-
menn and controllers, the conductors shall be suit.
able for an operating temperature of not less than
90C (194F), except that for motor -starling service
other conductor insulations may be used. For eleva.
tor motor starting service, ase paragraph Is of sec-
tion 6204.
4706. Incandescent Lamps as Realators. Incandes-
ear lamps may be used as protective resistors for
automatic controllers, or may by special permission
R131STORS AND REACr0N5 Itis
be used 39 resistors in aeries with other devices and
shall conform to the following:
a. Mounting. They shall be mounted in porcelain
receptacles on non-combustible supports.
b. Voltage. They shall be so arranged that they
cannot have impressed upon them a voltage greater
than that for which they are rated.
e Name -Pham They shall be provided with a
name -plate, permanently attached, giving the wattage
and voltage of the lamp to be used in each receptacle.
U
Not Carry Main Carom They shalt not carry
or antro! the main current nor consttule the reau.
bating resistance of the device.
ARTICLE 48"TORAOE BATTERIES
4801. Scope. The provisions of Ih;a article shall
apply to all atatiomry in-11mioa, of storage list.lodes using acid or alkali as the electroln•
rising of a num hi
of oil:,connected .l series will and coth
& ......I voltage to excess of 16 volts
4802. Definition el Nomhul Voltage. The nomi-
nal battery voltage shall he calculated on the basin of
20 ruin Per Bell fur the ;sad -acid type• and 1.2 rolls
Per
cel for the anuli type.
4805. Wiring and Apwnm. Supplied From Bat-
pews Wrrtng, appieeeey and aDparama supplied
menUso(rth s cute&rs jha11 be subject 1. the require•
pp yiag to wiring. appliance., and
apparatus operating at ac
the me vol L-91, except
8
Aet:cte 86!1.pas
atbencrsnvided f,r eammurtan aYigstems in
:4104. Inadati m of Batted" of Not Over 2S0 V-11.
Tl:e privoa uo , of tl;r ."';_ shall apply to storage
tagrnrs having thio eel's sit cenrecte.l ar to .;crate
at a tool:: +:al Wn<ry voltage out euetd:og 250 roh.
a. Lead.Aefd B.tt.,I_ Cella;n lead !fined wood
nrkr, where toe ru.-6rr cl re!'& in aeries dnu not
tsar<:1rmY:ab�asuy crud irdlviduat;y on glass or
g: re 1( tF.e munber cl the
coils d seen exceeds 25, s. eI4 shat! III sapposled
iodiridw'3y w cit icsa!atara
In ARTICLE sea
b. Alkali -Type Batteries. Cells of the alkali type
in jars made of conducting material shall be installed
in trays of non -conducting material, with not over 20
cells in a series circmt in any one such tray or the
cells may be supe-tcd singly or in groups on porce.
lain or other suitable insulators.
a Unsealed Jars. Cells in unsealed jars made of
non-conductive material shall be assembled in trays
of glass or supported on glass or glared porcelain in-
sulstors: or, if installed on a rack, shall be supported
singly or in groups on glass or other suitable insu-
lators.
d Scaled Rubber Jars. Cells in scaled rubber or
composition containers shall require no additional in-
snlating support if the total nominal voltage of all
ells in series does not exceed 150 volts. If the total
voltage exceeds 150 volts, batteries shall be section-
aliied into groups of 150 volts or less and cash group
shall have the individual tells installed in trays or on
racks. If trays or racks are required for this type of
cell, such trays or racks shall be supporlyd on glass
or glared porcelain insulators or oil -type insulators.
a Sealed Class Jan. Celia in sealed glass jars,
with or without wood trays, require no additional
insulation.
4805. Insulation of Batteries of Over 250 Volts.
The provisions of section 4804 shall apply to storage
batteries having the cells so connected as to operate
at a nominal voltage exceeding 250 volts and• in .4di.
tion, the provisions of this section shall also apply
to such batteries.
"Cells shall be installed in groups having a total
nominal voltage of not over 250 volts, in trays or on
racks supported on til insulators; except that if each
individual cell, or sub -group in the tray or rack, is
supported on oil insulators, no additional insulation
for the group need be provided; and except that cells
of not over 10 ampere -hour capacity in sealed 91233
jars may be grouped in trays, the total nominal volt.
age of all cells in such a group not to exceed 250
volts, and each such tray to be supported on glass or
glazed porcelain insulators, the trays being mounted
STORAGE D.ITTERIES Is,
on racks supported on oil insulators with a total nom.
incl voltage of not over 500 volts for all ells in aeries
on each such insulated rack.
b(uimum Orcrretion h —e b,—i... hid.. hiab,.11 a
haneriu ;mo «D (toss, is -oo I ... .ash cher.
4806. Rack. and Trays. Racks and trays shall con.
I. rm to the fcllmving:
.. Racka. Racks, as required in this article, refer
to frames designed to support cells or trays. They
shall be substantial, and made of:
1. %%'sed, an treated as to be resistant to deterimat.
ing action by the electrolyte; or
2. Metal, so treated as to be resistant to deterimat.
ing action by the electrolyte, and providedwith non.
tonducsing members directly supporting the ells or
with suitable insulating euterial 0-1 conducting mem•
beer, or
J. Other similar suitable construction.
b. Trays. Trays refer to frames such as erste, or
.hallow bones usually of wood or other non-candur4
jag material, so constructed or treated as to be resist•
sat to JetcnonOng action by the ettctrolyte.
4807. Battery Rooms. Battery room& shall con•
form to the following:
s- U.e. Separate battery rooms or endoaures shall
be required only fee batteries in unsealed jars .rad
tanks %•here the aggregate capacity at the 8 -hour d;a-
charge rate exceeds 5 kiloaatt hours,
b. Wiring Method In
conductors, open wiring9tonRe battems, bare
. or conductor, battery rooms,
cane
duit or electrical jr,,sq;c tubing shall be in userid as Ina
wiring method.
e. Vandabed.Cambri, Condierlora Varnished.
eambric-cuvmed condunon. Type V, shall not be
used.
d Han Cmtduetora. Bare eendaceoa shall not be
Is
cRseews7, Rigid metal c0n.!uit. or elerldcd me.
Iattic luIs it used, -,hall be of co"o,ien-o-count
material or shalt be suitably pro it,J fmm toren
a. .
7
a°< . ARTICLE. ,W
L Terminals. If metal raauaypr other metallic
attery ro
covering is used in the bom, at least 12 inches
of the conductor at the end connected to a cell termi.
nal shall be free from the newsy or ntc•talllc cover.
ing and shall be bushed by a substantial glazed msu.
)sting bushing. Tlm end of [Ile raceway shall be
scaI'd tightly to resist the entrance of electrolyte by
spray or by creep.Re. Sealing compound, rubber in-
sulating taP, or other suitable material shall be used
for this Purpose.
g. Ventilation. Provision shall be made for suR-
cient diffusion and ventilation of the gases from the
battery to Prevent the accumulation of an exp!osive
mixture in the battery room.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS Iia
CHAPTER S. SPECIAL OCCUPANCIPS
-ARTICLE so0—HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
pnaur al d:0 mracea in ehancse•Init• of hua.dom vtmer
r �vl+. de,ien rJ canatruc,ion of eampm:m Icy a ,n a
Lf.< nuard.ur Iwanan up LYe i to •mouvt the 6aramui. v�
of sbe :tmo+PMre. Fa<�hbea bare b<m made eaila4le fat ten•
,ryr eacipmrnt toe zea[ in ab< feaa.ins umwphmra:
Chau I, Grcuy A, dsmmphme• wnuininr acrtrkra;
Char I. (.roup D, Asmwphwr•
tac[nrl eenutninr;.u h - or da..da..a rapers of <nunil<ee hararJ rush • o e5
Chia 1, Grace C, Atmo•.herr t Uz.jnx ethyl cdiv valor,
upth•t alwh<1 ,vu 1<reMla neer• <Irmi rna vaaalineyenrokam.
a, •o and mril ar;
Clan IL Greve E, Asmo•nhem Z.'as vuW duce;
or
Itt. G—P F. Atmc+pb— avlieiuy tblrk, w•1
Char It. Cuaav G, Asmoph_. tevt•Inina seal° drib
5001. Scope. The provisions of this article apply
to locations in which the authority enforcinll this code
aud.e. the aPDDaratus and .1i%g to be aublrct to the
<onditiom inAfcaied by the following classification..
It is intended that each room, section or arca I..-
elndipa motor and a'n.nr....____ __
'red muavmuavy m Oe)erminfne fta tlavffirauon.
Ea reDI a. mpol <d by this anicle, all other applicable
rule. contained in shia code ahaU a 1 PO
PPy to eleelri<ni
apparalu. and wiring final!ed in bazar Diss locations.
I•u garaRea, see Article 510. For definition of nap•
proved'
ad wed in Chir nude roe Arude 100.
The term exPlosfnn-prop! as used fn thla said
shall mean, <ncinaed m a ase wh!ch is tapable of
wilh.tand+)nR an,exi•[pt a�n ei a aP¢i5ed Ra, or vapor
lRni Gan t tht rG'eifxI in it, and of Drevent(nR the
gar tar vapor mrrounding the
mdcsure LY sparks, ga she. ee exp'wr.iegr of Lhe gas
tie npor within.
Tb•••:th the e•<riu er 4t...;:iw In tb hr<m of tl•e<dri
' Lyr.. . 1.•r .r<.:u, Ir,v..cM i, i, irr
I ..t. mxa r ,5[ e• a.P,n1-a k MHrd:.., acrin ran6t.+a �
M+ w.:^+d blr't Y •rr:+gM a'aievr < rwe4a t4
m<.4 .1 •-.a h.rf�rr.;l+ie w:i�.•' :' o�,°-`.K ri. s.,'.a�.:
rr^.• al tM N,�..w,• weer),-.ar<:ca xn6,'.,�.ta .x\I b d
rr r war dumauw t/ vuw utr .<\ rraw w ia•u,
led ARTICLE dm
Far raomm<ndmiom for pprat-i— axainn mdc 1«td<I,
6aanda. refer so she abndvdt of the N"m.1 Poe Rm<tJtaa
dnoc!ation ov thi. au6lett.
SOOT Special Precaudon. The intent of this article
is to rcqumc a .Prem
construction of equipment, and
of installation that will insure safe performantt under
conditions of proper use and mainte"Me. It, there.
lore, is assumed that inspection authoritica and intra
will exercise more than orJina,y care with regard to
installation and maintenance.
5003. Pit'"" LaeQuen End F[nishea. The provi.
,ions of tlife section shall apply to locatipm which
arc or may be ha:uJous because of readily ignitable
deposits or residues from paints, varnishes, lacquers
or other types of finishes.
In ,encyst, eeadgj fanhahie_depoaib aeur In the InhrMr of
na InanlHnq voiatil< 4mm•64 salvmt• or thimm�
t<ciwn afAi,
a;,P!'1- Etrical Equipment. No el<etrieal equipment
or shall be installed or used in any location
where readily fgnftable residues may be deposited,
except that wine, in rigid conduit or in boxes or
fittings, containing no taps, splices or terminal con-
nectiona may be installed in such locations.
b. Lighting Through Olasa Panels. Illumination
of h.—dous areas throuah Dane), of vla- mr -h—
or is so protected that breakage will be unlikely, and
if lh< arrangement is such that normal accumulation.
of hazardous residue on the exposed a.,face of thl
8anel w 11 not be raised to a datageroua temperature
y radiation or conduction from the wwe
o! illum-
nation.
5004. Cie. I Locations, Cie.. I location. are
Wo.. fa which flammable gases Or,spurs are or my
HAZARDOUS LOCATION'S Isr
be present in the air fn quantities sufficient to produce
explosive or ignitable mixtures. Class 1 localiona shall
include the following:
,Class I, Dfaialon I, Locations (1) in which hax-
ardon, concentrations of flammable gases or vapors
exist continuously, inlermittently. or Periodically U.
der normal operating eonditiona, (2) in which haz-
ardous concentration, of such it.... or vapor, may
exist frequently bttause of repam or nainlenance opp.
etationa or because of leakage, or (3) In which break-
down or faulty operation of equipment of Processes
which might release hazordous conc<ntraliona o[
flammable gases or vapors, might also cause incuX
tancous failure of electrical equipment.
TM. claniandon wnutd uamlb WNde 4[niona wh— gam•
m•ble rcl,nle I;amd• or b^uu[fiN 4mm,64 eau• •r< trn+f.... d
from we anum<r to • thrr; mlf rnrar hcotaa uJ
tin be rrc1—i"of •cn'w Y j I ry• ens —Ii—
I.
.Fera
volatile 4mma64 tahenn • rN; a[•I,an+ cnl,ni•,a 4 n
unYa ar r•cf rdaule aamm<il.la bavidr: JVin1y scam• tam.
nanm<nn for the er poraiiw of a,mmably ral•rntr lallien•
Lim••vv�x ht and oil nnmsov •nwnen a+int rafnde nam.
6b.....,i. nu; Pornun• 1 aeaninx rnl J^eiry ^tans .hen
a„Mout IpoWr arfuv11; war a•nn•Lr r m v I Ther Iwr•
Iwn, of pr m nuanurinr stmt• .Fire u0ammat�k r
evy+: .unm a to da•n �L an (er costate t�imm�p4
lidmdu 1 •I1 ,tier In•nw• .Ye.e A�r•rdout ea•KenLn4m
4inm;ble�e zees w nwr •rt tidy w onur a tat tavrr
F rt protw!Iw taivrt the WnrM o/ s•mm,e!< •nenhn4t
ar<J b h +t,ll ewrv.nr room+ reler b she ranJud• al tM
Nnianil I—irolctwn Arwwiao co the rWaeet
Is , Claw I, Divl+ion R, Location, Sq In which
flammable volatile liquids or flammrb a gats ars
handled, processed or used, hu1 in which the haaard-
our ligm a, vapor. or gates wit] normally be confined
within closed c ntafnera pr closed s➢stems I"-
, whish
they can escape oly in case of arodemal rupture or
breakdown of such containers or systema• or in case
of abnormal operation of equipment, which
harardon, concentrations of gases or npor. are not-
maliy Pr<venitd by posit(,, methamcal verullli-
but which might become hazardous through Iai n
or abnormal operation of the venula,,., equipmeet,
os 13) which are atgacenl to CI... 1, Uivfsion 1 lova•
tions, and to whirl, hazed- roneentriti-9 of Casa
or vapor. might occasionally be—rritmieated.
Thb daze;&,IWn .wall amAh Include Ix•li:ra vr\me 4n,.
m,l.ir
.14t, W blt [a:•Ia,mm,t'e • rayrr - e0. pi
W luy,aaiJr mnor l al sG soil mlanba •urLv,V. p
370
4
W ARTICLE 500
I—-,become h .... d....nlj I. tam of an at 1je or .f cone an.
Ika.murine mrWitwn. The .uanlhy of ha,.tNout nat"M
t might errata in tae of ... M n Ill. ad,,f of ve also
qq Maq,mm[, the tn,J Orta rne'olt'rJ, anJ the rtto.f the
inJ.vrY r Lwmua xnh rc•: n1 to tapnv.+nm or (urea ate I
fatt..r+ na[ ahoulJ w<rirr e,n.nlm.ni.n dewrmininq the <lao
intatiao a.J ul<nr of cath hazarJoua area.
PiQinq eilb.ut alvei, ebo,ks. Hera and dmiLar detigs amulA
ane Ima<rIY D< dcerr+N , intra,u.1 a h+zarJ.us tnndnwn cern
Aouah mN fm hua.Jom li._riAr or arae L„, ... urN fur
rhe u.nne cf hvad.aa Ii.unb or orf G. vehN or id 4frN
P+au rn a1sJ a nhawtra ul" nor nornra�ly be t. a],, bar•
arta.. uNaa u4Jat w ocher bararda.. mrrdniom shoo
5005. Class II Locations. Class 11 locationsarc
those which are hazardous because of lire presence
of combustible dust. Class II locations shall include
the following:
a. Clan II, Division 1. Locations (1) fn which
combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the
air continuously, internsittenlly, or periodically under
normal operating conditions, in quantities su0icfent
to Produco explosive or ignitable mixtures, (2) svhero
Ilie normal or abnormal operation or the failure of
equipment or apparatus mig�lt Cause such mixtures to
be Produced in or in tire vicinity of electrical equip.
meat or apparatus, or (3) in which dusts of an elee-
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS las
b. Clara II, Division 2. m(.orations in which com-
bustible dust will not norally be in suspension in
the air, or will not be likely to he thrown into so,•
pension by the normal or Abnormsl operation or the
failure of equipment or apparatus, in quantities suffi•
curt toPY04ucc explosive or ignitable mixtures, bill
(1) where deposits or accumulations of such dust may
be sufficient to inleriere with the safe dissipation I
heal from dgctrial equipment or apparatus or (2)
where such dppn hs or accumulations of dust on, in
or in the vwinity of elcclrical equipmrnl might be
ignited by arcs, sparks or burning material from such
equipment.
w +GJAat.�nal<b_rt dan¢mva eancentntkns ./ au•Pm dN Jaat
Lnr M1<re. deet attumabnnne M harm
en, in or n r��e vi luau cl eletrir+ral e.wPment, w 'aLF mrimle
arlovd Wes or h"rK a,n.rrmac�+`Ir anJ Ve.,rn:C and tonus>,.0
aPP,t obk mules d duet w 14 a Mui mul rum+ whnM1
PPr aonN .rdfruam; room. oe acus ; f" .urr a der abarmar
«rGN wuraaa • of lhir rec,icn Ji+c
i-.
bwhnb eeVlar:ar
aiM,r[A efielyf 'rdee'n n� mal aM,a,+,[ tanAni..n.:iahl 4ec; mmu.
tar,.Vol Aon i P�e.rnre5 `hy `tM1e Ite+mLle c r<.,mrulicn�`.1
tanrrd M+nVmere� arthsc,n ane ` +�'an do edn<ive Asch
p, dowse •r^„ • a ;, j-_. <r Wb
dui YPon raaaer' Juet
taenm; and aha orals, c cam
5006. Class I11. Location, Class III loation' are
those wh!Ch are haaardaua bcause of the tion,presall
Of easily limitable w"',f or flying', but in which such
fit
rea or flying+ are trot Moil W be in suspension in
tar in lvantiue. saff�tienl. to produce ignitable mia-
turea. Clav IfI laationa shJ11 include ll:e (olluwing:
S. CI•as III, Diviafon 1. Loatfana in which easily
iggnilablt fibos or mat";Sla prahxiog combustible
flying• are half lcd, olsnul"Iml.l ler used.
ocher hen Atia+a awoula k�1M.: wmeH rtr rf rar,n. c•.runn and
m. P 4aLeirc n�la.:t>'�e P'.m acct ..ie. �u nV,<tua.:J
iNN!.�hwraL a+f , .., n. ,. Ni sAv.,: k:ri .bra: a•
taaau at r'.n?.,.vea.r •. a'+,:tr huard:ia rum
b. Clan Ill. Division 2, Lorkg„+a in wldrh easily
cental of maratttare)tnrel w Fradled (ettept in pro-
Pa:Y ir'at le rJtrr aN Oa'nay w3 l.::.1.
Ytkre+�vK��.'i. Pr=.?. i:: o+:N oek stn a xa,br.krL fl �at•E.:k..-
ataa,M rmu,. u<rsu w a' �.
tl ex+.ar ue,wa,
Ise ,ARTICLE 500
Clan I—Imnallation
5011. General. The general rules of this code shall
apply to file installation of electrical wiring and equip.
ment in locations classified as Claw I under section
SONthis article except as modified by auctions
5012 to SD26 inclusive.
.Wanhar i+ allot la be adJiticnal renuiremenu r t fnwh in
arta ar y+•+J f:r ixahi•+n+ where rerdril i.niraLle d<Id fi r
rW irdn wings, varvisdea, iaryrsn, or cehtr q'I.ts of nirh
mnayY C. lvrvletJ.
5012. Transformers and Capacitors. The installa-
'ion of tr nsiormcrs and capacitors shall conform to
the following:
a. Gass I, Division 1. In Class I, Division I lop.
tions, Ifaulfornlers and capacitors shall conform to
the folloxingp
L Containing a Liquid that Will Bum- Tran -
formers and capacitors con Laming a liquid that will
burn shall be installed only to approved «aulls, which
shall conform to sections 4541 to 4548 inclusive, and
in aJJIM., (1) tiler. shall be no time or other eom-
Inuniating opening between the vault and the hxz-
ardcus area, (2) ample ventilation shall be provided
for the continuous removal of hazardous gases or
vapor, (3) vent openings or ducts shall lead to a aafe
o
lalfun outside of buildings, and (4) vent ducts and
openings shall be of sufficient area to relieve explo.
sion pressures within the vault, and all portion of
vent dusts tvitllin the buildings shall be of reinforced
Concrete construction.
2. Not Containing a Liquid that Will•Bum. Trans.
formers and capacitors which do not contain a liquid
that will burn shall (1) be installed in vaults conform.
ing to file requirements of sub -paragraph a-1 of this
section, or (2) be of explosion -proof type approved
for Class I locations.
b. Claes 1, Division 2. In Gass I• Div6km 2 loca-
tions, transformers and capacitors Shall conform to
sections 4521 to 4524 faclusiva
5013. Meters, Instruments and Relays• The instal.
lotion of mete,,, instruments and relays shall con.
form to the following:
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONg nr
a. Chau I, Divitf m L In Class 1, Diviaian 1 loca-
tions, me ten, i0rdrumentl nd relays, including kilo•
watt•bour meters, instrumeant trana(ormcn and re-
siswra, rcctifiaa and tlm..... a tubes, shall be pro -
Tided wdh a Plo'ion-proof a I...... approved for
Class I location'.
II is r=—d,wthat .... Mui_t be bated oat” of
na 6aaarJ.ua aro here r.snbre.
b. Clara I, Diviaian 2. In a... I. Division 2 lcea-
tiona, meet, instrument., Sod relays shall conform
to cite following:
1. With Make or Break Contacts. Meters, inatru•
menta, and relay. in which are incorporated Contacts
for making or breaking current ahall conform to para
graph a of thia section unless general purpose m:
closurea are Provided and such coniacta are (1) im.
mewed in oil, or (2) enclosed within a chamber ber-
metiauy waled against the entautt of ganef or
,.per..
2 Redaton and 8lydlar "'I'd enL Rofeton,
reaf.unce devices, thermionic tubes, anJ le',.
h'
are used I. or in connection with meter, in-
struments and relays, shall conform to paragraph a
of This section, except That enclomrea or rn'ph
which operate normally at aPProximalely room taop-
erature may be of general purpose type.
1 Without Make or Break Contacts, Transformer
windings. hopedance coils, roieooida, and other wind -
Ings which do not incorporate sl,' i, or make or
break contacts shall be Drorfded with enclosures
which may be of general purpose type if aeon ade-
quate to Permit prompt eaape of Sly gores or vapor
are provided.
$014. Wiring Meehtida Wiring methods than con-
form to the following;
i Class I, Division 1. In Cha., I• Division I foes.
tions, rigid metal conduit with threaded exnlliaion-
proof joint, and exploswit-proof boxes and firings,
shall be she coifing medwd employed. Aif threaded
joints ahali be made up xith at Ira, five full threads
engaged \V here neee... y to employ flexible tom
nmti..u, a at motor terminals, Neuble Ruin's of
ea Plo.inn•pro type apPr4 id Ior she locat;.. ahu
Lr ...J.
37/
J?
192 .altTll LR Seo
b. Class I, Division 2. In Class 1, liciS*on 2 loca-
tions, rigid uu•u, conduit or ekes*cal nhelahit tubing
Shall Le the wiring mrthad enlpfoyeJ. WLcre neecs•
Bary' da cmh���y IlvxiLlc connecuans, as at nwlor ter.
utivals IIcx:L:e srctal conduit shall be used.
5015. Sealing. Seal, are provided to prevent the
passage of Rous, vapors or flanks from one Portion
of the el-li-I in-lallation to :mother through the
conduit and slydl « i(ornl to the iollowing:
a. Class I. Division 1. in Class 1. Division 1 low•
lions, scab al.3 be located as follows:
1. In e,rh conduit run enuring an enclosure !or
,witclhr5, circuit-Lnvkcrs, ruses, rdaYs, rcsislars or
other appanttis u -NO, may producearcs, sparks or
high tahn,eralwres. Seals shall Le placed as docs as
p...;*.:dde and in no case more Ill.. 18 inches from
still, cndosure5.
2. In rich conduit run of 2fall, size or lager
entering an enrlo•nre (including terminal and junc-
tion boxes), and within 18 inches of such enclosure.
3. In each conduit run having the Class I, Div* -
siva 1 hazardous arta. Ther,• shall be na Lox, coup-
li.g or titling in the conduit between the seal and
,lac pufn, at which the conduit leaves the hazardous
area.
b.Class I, Division 2. In Class f, Division 2 loca-
tions, seals slsall be located as follows:
1. 1n each conduit on entering eco enclosure which
is required to be explos*on•proof. Seals shall be placed
as close as practicable and in no case more than 18
inches front such enclosure. All portions of such can-
duil run between the seal and the explosion -proof
enclamre shall conform to paragraph a, section 501.1.
2. In each conduit run leaving the hazardous area.
There shall be no box, coupling or fitting in the can.
dui,between the seal and the point at which the con-
duitleaves tial hazardous arca.
c. Class 1, Divisions 1 and 2. Where Seals are
required, they shall conform to the following:
1. Fittings. Enclosures for connections or for
equipment shall he provided with approved means for
scaling, or sealing fittings apphoved for Class I loca-
tiom shall Le used.
IL%ZARI)0US LOCATIONS 193
2. Compound. Sealing compound shall be approved
far ale purpose, 511"11 not be affected by the 5urrounJ-
ing atmtasphvre or liquids, and 511"11 not have a melt•
ing point of Icss than WC. (20UFJ.
3. Thick ..a of Compound. In Ilse completed seal,
the minimum thirknrss .( the Sealink <mnpound shall
be not Icss tl1"n the Inde sae of the conduit. and in
no case less than JJ inch.
'.SV
.. and Taps. al Splices and taps shall not be
made in fill . inlcndonly far sealing with earn.pound, nor shall other f.ti..R, in which splice or
UPS are made be filled will, compound.
S. Dmirnge, Where there is a possibility that water
or other mndens<d vapor may be irappeJ at any
ppont *n tLe nc<,- system, 'Pprm•<d means shall
Le Provided m fervent aceumuhtian, or to Permit
periodic draining of such water at condensed vapor.
5016. Switches, Circuit -Breaker, Motor central.len and Fuses. Switdms, tirtuil•b«akers. molar call -
trailers and faxs shall c..(orm to the following:
is Chu I, Didsion h In Class f, Division 1 Iota•
t*ons, swrtdu•s. anon -breakers, motor conlrollcn and
fuses, imludmg Push I,u„nns, «lave and similar d<-
vices, shall be Provided with explosion d si enclos-
ures, and the enclosure In each ease laxether with the
enc:os<d apParaws shall be approved as a complete
is
sembly for use in Class I locations.
b. ClassDfvlaton 2. Switches, circuit-breakerss,,
motor t•.nvo0e+s =d lusts in Cuss c Division
2
location" aha11 cunfrrm la the following:
y Type Required Cirmit-breaker, motor ton•
the no mat txncha *,tended to hntrrrupl current in
the normal peied 11, ce of the funchm for which
they are inset*cd nh.dl fie P+.vidcd with <rp:os.an•
tt n:ol <nrlrsures ap0.,rcv<d ler flaaa 1 laealiuna, on•
k1" xenrral puryaae errmc«s are lrcv:ded sod (17
rhe in:<rrnpnnn a( torrent rxeurs w'itlhin a ehamU<r
herr..eun0yr'<a hd aga',rot the entrance of gases and
9afGra. ct ) 1 e d -r. intrrru-J:nR "'Mac'. are
e*1-meters. and hhe nerve is spp_4 for locations
of eh:a class sad dnriaicn.
Ts3e .i:f irt!ade ae be atl 41244 err.lt v user end 14•
:::...; s.,•l.Y:.'a:J r•, a�< <:Is.';a w.�li,.: J:'i::: �.:': �.a
ant n<r rt h<rairr( lm W . t N La`.f,ca •' 1 s 1.
ami swc,rm. U.1lamwrd crrw.pubn sad aaavd'+n •u/
40
191 ARTICLE SPO
ordinary F,<nernl ua< 1Y9e n,a o n 1 tontine euml�l(a^r n,e arc
rroJuc<J ,n the in1<rrurei„n f heart m'er4,u,1 y a..
anr,vv+l for keatiana vl thu da•. anJ Jivinwt iss lb -f -see•
eaara.
2. Isolating Switches. Enclosures for disconnect.
ing and isolating ewit6c; without fuses and which
are not intended to interrupt current may be of gen•
enl purpose type.
3. Fuses, For the protection of motors, appliances
and portable lamps, (I) snndard plug or nrtridRe
fuses may be used prmulyd they are Place.l within
explosion roof enclosures approved for the purpose
and for the location, or (2) fuses of a type in which
the operating clement is inuncrs it in oil mr other
approved liquid, or is encl,ucd vetd:in a chamber her-
metically sealed against the entrance of gases and
vapors may be used provided IheY are approved for
the purpose and are placed wftnn general purpose
enclosures.
4. Fuses or Circuit -Breakers for Overeurrent Pro.
teetion. When not more than 10 setsof approved en-
aloscd fuses, or not more than 10 circuit -breakers
which are not intended to be used as switches for the
interruption of current. are
installed far branch or
feeder circuit Pmtenfan fn any one local*ml of this
class and division, the enclosures far such fuses or
circuit -breakersmay be of general purpose type, Pro-
vidcd the fuses ar eircuio-brcakere are !ar the pro-
tection of circuits or feeders supplying incandescent
lamps in fixed positions only.
A 4t of foam shall be conrvu<d a mean a Sir.-
... ..
n un c<nuinine
o . cirsui�re Fury <��amyle. ei<em o of ] �I m:(moleu.
ins a --i a tilt, nnJ i axle lu.e Prwetl-
c the i r." -JN -1-r idrnhi,inl (wo wa< rinx:e•
slow(esti,.. xoul,l u h Im _.."M .,_ as a wN .. fuse+. 1'444
on(m,iux b 1•amerayh 4S i+. a«n... red nm ssmd A in< .w
in rwnunx the 1V ecu of foa P<rm<in x<neril purPoae
endmure(.
5017. Control Transformer and Resistors. Trans•
formers, impedance coils and resistors used as or in
conjunction wide control equipment far motors, gcn•
entgrs and appliances shall conform to the following:
R. Class 1, Division 1, in Class I, DiA,ki. 1 I...
clang transformers, impedance coils and resistor, to-
gether with say sw•itcLing mechanism aasacialed with
tlhenb shall be provided with explosion -proof enclos-
ures approved for Class I feell'i_
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS I's
Is. Cl... I, Malaga. 2, In Class I, DM,*on 2 toes•
tions control transformers and resistors shall conform
to the follmcing:
1. Switching Meehanianu. Switching mechanisms
used in conjunction wish translorner, impedance coil,
and resistors shall conform to section 5016, para.
graph b.
2. Enclosures. Enclosures for the windings of
transformers or impedance ca*l5 may he of general
purlins, type. huh shall be Provided with vents ads•
quote to permit Prompt escape of Rase, or vapors that
may ..... the enclosure.
3. Rea*ston. R,,ktnrs shall he provided with ex-
Clasion•Pron( end i -c., approved as complete ass<m-
lies with the resistors for Class I locations,
301& Molon and Generato s,Motor and genera.
Sort 311211 camfonn to the iollowing:
a. Cl... 1, Division 1.In Class 1. Divialon 1 Iota-
r*on,,,molar, genome and a11Hr �otallnR d<Clrical
machinery s:,all he of enclosed explosion proof type
approved I. Cls. I locations.
b. Class 1, Division 2. In Class 1, Division 2 lot.•
t*ons, molar, g+-neraton and other rutalm, electrical
machinery m v'h*ch are employ<J sliJinR contacts,
eenlrffugal ar nlh,r type, of asvnehim, mechanism
(*nd.,c,i mot« m
t<r while'ercurrmt Jcvices), or inlrgrl re-
sislane< Jes res, e*tstarting cr while running.
shall be of <c1cned rxplosinmp-M type approved for
Chas, I leic"Ols' un "I such sliding contacts, "itch-
ing mechanism ce resistance devices are provided with
explo31an•prmf rndosure approved for Class 1 lova•
,*ons,
5019. Lighting Fbetmes. Lamps shall be installed
in fixtures which shall conform to the followi.g:
s. Class 1, Dieidma 1. in Class f. Division 1 lop-
tiom, lighting fixtures shall mn(orm to the following:
1. APPloved Figures. Each fixture ,ball be ap•
proved as a complete "..mbly for locations of this
els,,, and 111111 be clearly marked to indicate the
maximum wa0age of *amps far which it is app,o,rd.
2, Mechanical Injury, Each fixture shill he pit'.
torted ... :oSt m Illalwal in{my by a suitable guard
or by location.
372
373
f a
116 ARTICLE SCD 199 ARTICLF. SM
3, Pendent Fixtures. Pendent fixtures shall be
suspended by and supplied Ihnmgh tlweadeit rigid
conduit stems. For stems longer than 12 inches, flex;-
bihCy in the form of a fitting or tlrxible connector
approved for the puha and fur the local;". shall
be pno•Ided nut mora than IL inches front the point
of a«acluncnt to 1n, supporting Lox or lilting.
4. Supports Boxes, box assemblies or fittings used
f.r the airppon of LRlning fistnrrs shall Le approved
for Uw purpose and for Class I locations.
b. Class I, Division 2. In Class 1, Division 2 lora-
tions lighting hxmrvs AlAl conform to the follon•ing:
1. Portable Lamps, Portable laws shall be of the
explosion-prooi type appruvcd for use in Class 1loca-
lions.
2. FixedLighting. fighting fixtures for fixed light-
ishaf br prmcctnl from mechanical injury by
sm::ddr guards or by location.
3. Pendent Fixtures. Pendent fixtures shall be
su.;:cr.d,,l by threaded rigid conduit stems or by other
apprucul minus.. For rigid stems longer than 12
in:hes, flexibility in the f.nn of a fning or flexible
connector approved for the Purpose shall be provided
not more than 12 inches from the point of attachment
to the supporting box or fitting.
4. Supports. Boxes, box assemblies, or fittings
used for the mpporl of lighting fixtures shall be ap-
provcd for the purpose.
5. Switches. Switches which are part of an as•
5emhled fixture or of an individual lampholder shall
conform to the requirements of sub -paragraph b-1,
section 5016.
6. Starting Equipment. Starling and control equip.
cent for mercury-vapor and fluorescent lamps shall
conform to the requirements of paragraph b, section
5017.
5020. Appliances, Fisted and Portable. Appliances,
fixed and portable, shall conform to the following:
"CI... Ir Division 1. In Class T. Division 1 loca-
tions, appliances, including reeirically-bested and
tumor -driven appliances, shall be approved for Class
I locations.
IIAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 197
b. Class f, Division 2. In Class f, Division 2 loca-
tion;, appliances, fixed and portable, shall conform
to the following:
L Heaters. Electrically -heated appliances shall be
approved fur Class I locations.
2. Moron. Motors of motor.driven appliances, if
of a type incorpontinR sliding cunuds, centrifugal
or other switching mechanisms (including owlet -
current devices), or resistance devilf I.
s, shall be ' ex-
pWwE ripe approved for Class I locations.
3. Switches, Clrcu -1,111ken, and Fuses. Switch".
circuit -breakers and fuses shall inform to Daragraph
b of section 5016.
5021. Flexible Cordo, Clava I, Divisions 1 and 2.
Fhxdele weds shall (I) be of a q!pe approved Ear
hard usage. (1) contain, in addition Io the eonduswrs
of the nw -,,ductor conforming to
section 9400J, (3) be mm�ecled las terminals or to
supply conduanrs in an approved m:mncr, (4) be sup -
paned by canqu orb oUwr suiabiI means in such
a manner thal•Ihere +1i11 be no tension on the ter-
minal irn<ctions. and (5) suiuble seals shall be
provided w4:erc rhe Ocsple cord enwn Loxo, fittings
or cndwsurcI of rxpluaiao-proof type.
1 KTwue IGn. di{R, err �ycvd (, Rqu:da havins„nan
50012, Receptacles and Attachment Plug, Class f.
Division I and 2. Re<cplaclri and auaQnnen1 plugs
s1:A1 he "I p_',"d "I previ:Lng ler connection to
tL' gmurdmg cnndmror cf ICt flr 51, cord,
shall be af•Prcvrd far Cls' L locations.
5023. Ccndactor Iwsulatlon Class !,Lid 1
V
2. \\'erre .und<n v:J vap.;ra or I:yuiJs having a
de!rtrr ma chert on rnh.sar may Wl,,t nn or come
in amtaA •.J:+h the in.:Ilation en rer.,lu•-w... such m-
auWi.. lb -!l h. of a tyle ai+;roved (,:r ma under such
eo- 6`L�=: ur IL+e i,:+u'ar;cm ni:all br prurraed by a
sheath of !rad "1 by Lllter a}Pt„red wtans.
5024. Signal, Alarnr. Rs+nate-<en+rol and Cammu•
pfcati.n Systewr. S,z :a7, a:;•n+. rcvwuraiarol sad
c. -:,.cat ai.':: +Yatr:na s1yJ «,.turn; to ti.. U.11u.v-
fzQ
a.
CU. 1, Division 1. In ClassI• Division 1 lora•
;fans, .!I ap `a ' 4csa:�meat of ugmllmQ,
alarm, remote -control and communication systems,
irrnpertive of volta);e, shall be approved for Class I
hrcalfons, and all aeirinst shall codon to Paragraph
a, section 5014, and paragraphs a and c, section 5015.
Is. Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Divisian 2 loca-
tions, signal, alarm, rrmoie-nmol and communica-
tion systems shall conform to the following;
1. Contacts. Switches and circuit•breakers, and
make and break contacts of Push buttons, relays. and
alarm hells or horns, shall have caplosinn-pr.w en-
el.sures =at or Claes I locations, unless general
Purpose are provided and current fnterripl•
lost Co."<I9 are (Il inuncnrd in oil• or (2) enclosed
within . !amber Ihermetically sealed against the en-
lnnce of R.'s or yaPOr9.
2. Red"'"" and Similar Equipment. Resistors,
resistance devices, thermionic lutes and rettifi". shall
conform to paragraph a of this section Iselin it..,
enfor r<sfslor whiclt operate normally at
approximately twin lempe.lure may be of general
Purpose type.
3. Proteeton. Enclosures which may be of gen.
... I purpose type Miall be provided for Iighming pro-
tective devices and for fuses.
S02s. Live Parts, Class f, Divisions I and 2. There
shall be no exposed live parts.
5(im. Grounding, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. Wit-
in8 and equipment shall be grounded in cenf.rmity
with the following:
a. Exposed Parts. The exposed non-current<ar-
ryiuR metal Parts of equipment such as the frames or
metal exteriors of motors, fixed or P.ortalde lamps or
applianec5, IdRhting futures, cabinet_, casts, and con-
Juit, shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 of
this code.
b. Bonding. The locknul-hushing and double-
locknut types of canaclx strati not M1e depended upon
for handing purposes, but bonding jumpera with
pproper fittings or other approved means sha1lI be used.
If flexible conduit is used as permitted in sub -para-
graph b of section 5014, bonding jumper with proper
fittings shall be Provided around such conduit.
e. Lightning Protection. Each ungrounded service
conductor of a wiring system in a Class I location,
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 199
when supplied from an ungrounded overhead cleclrl.
cal suPPly system in an arca where lightning disturb-
ances are Prevalam, shall hr: protecl<,l by a lightning
Pnueclire device of Proper Ivp" I.a AmaR Protee-
live dreices )ball be connecied to the service con-
dutinrs eat the )apply site of the service Jisinnact-
ing means. and shall he hondcd la 1L< raceway sys-
tem at the sc kc entrance.
d. Grounded Service Conductor Bonded to Race-
way. \\'icing in a Class 1 location, when supplied
from a grounded ahvrnaling current supply vsivm
in which a grounded inductor is a part of the ser-
vice, shall have Qin xrounJc! sen ire il,kw1or
hooded to JIe raceway sysmm and to !l" gnemdfn-
randuclnr L.r Ilw ramway sy+lan. q'h< Lording I be
nrrle to the g,IY side
sr•the service
lnr )lull be
nide on the supply site of the service disconnecting
nhcam.
e. Transformer Ground Bonded to Raceway. Wir-
ing in a Class I Iotalimy when sufl•lird from a
grnandcd alicenalinir current suprly system in which
no grmmlr.l omdu<hrrt is a Part of the s<n•ic<, shall
be Provided with a metallic emit; rii.n between the
supply syian groan! and the r- y system at the
servdc< emmnee, The n+rb!lio ;ranee tion shill have
a current -carrying eapaciiy not Icss than 115 that of
the service <nnducmrs, and shalt in no case be smaller
than N. IO if of soft copper, or No, 12 if of medium
or lard -drawn nglirr.
f. uhip. Grounds. Whe'e, in the application of
seaion 1521, itis n wary In at...%!nn .., or more
grounding svu....10 s to aruhl ebjecu'mable Passage
of'.'rem over the mo.ndln, imlu,e.rs, the Rraund.
ing i inccl!on rrquirc! in paragraph d and a of Ihia
scall," shill not be a1 a 44,ned .loth any other,
gmmnding c"nnecUon rrn.ins <onreileJ to the sop -
ply system.
Class II-]ntalWica
SOSI. General. The genrul ret,, .f this code shall
apply to the installation of rrctri: al wir:"g and app.-
tat+us in locations doss;{ir.l as Class 11 and« K:men
SOuSof Ih., arlid, except as mcdifial by sauum
5652 1. SQcO incluaiv<.
I
700 ARTICLE 500
5052. Transformers and Capacitors. The installa.
tion of transio.....s and capacitors shall conform to
the following;
a. Class II, Division 1. In Class If, Division I
locations, transformers and capacitors shall conform
to the following:
1. Containing a Ligvid that Wili Hum Trans-
fonners anJ e;nVacitors emnaining a liquid that will
burn .ball be mstaile<I only m approved vaults con-
forming to sections 4571 to 4548 bl brlivo and in
addition (1) door or other openings mnnnunicaling
with the huzanlous area shall have self-closing fire
doors on . sides of the wall, and the doors sl .1 b<
carefully filled and ^ravided !,fill suitable seals (sur%
as wmthe' svlPpingI to minimize the colon.. o0
dust into the vault (2) vent openings and dots shall
somnnmicatc only w•ilh the outside air, and (3) mrt-
able pressurr•rrlief openings eommunieatinc with dee
outside air shall be provided.
2. Not Cdnta(nfog a Liquid that IN I Furn. Trans.
formers and capacitors which do nm emdain a liquid
'fiat will burn shalt (1) be installed n vaults con-
forming to ...•tions 4541 to 4548 indasive, or (2) be
of approve) Jusuight eomlrudion w.th dusltight ter-
minal CPCIatUrlS
3. Metal Dusts. No transform -r or capacitor shall
be installed in it location where dost from the Produ,
tion of magnesium, aluminum or aluminum bronze
powders may be present.
It. Class II, Division 2. In Class IT, Division 2
locations transformers and :apacitors shall conform
to the following:
1. Containing a Liquid tlut Will Bum. Trans-
formers and capacitors containing a liquid that will
burn shall be installed in vaults conforming to sec-
tions 4541 to 4548 inclusive
2. Containing Aslmrel. Transformers containing
askarel and rated in excess of 25 "' shall (I), be
provided s'i'lt Prassurc-rdfcf vents, (2) be provndcd
w•fih means for absorbi.R any gases generated by are,
ing inside the case, or the pressure -relief vents shall
be connec'ed to a chimney or flue which will carry
such gases outside the building and (3) have an air
space of not less than 6 inches between the trans-
former cases and any adjacent combustible material
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 701
3. Dry Type Tranaforrnent. Dry type trans-
formers shall be installed in vaults or shall (1) have
their windings and rermfnai connections enclosed in
light metal housings without ventilating or other
openings, and (2) operate at voltages not exceeding
6UU volts.
5053. Surge ProteHion. Class II, Divisions I and
2. in geographical locations where lightning disturb-
antes arc prevalent, wiring systems in Class II loca-
tion' shall, if "I 'ill' from overhead supply systems,
b< suitably protected against high" ."Re surges. This
prof<crf0n shall include suitable lightning Protective
devina, intcrcannenion of all grounds, and surgc-
prolective capacitors.
Sit[
All Gahm;,. pmuuive deliru AW, 'ndml< primary de
a J Iw i ogre deviate n evr,hcaJ ra.n,ury hoer
reed 5. Icer in 1<esrh er It .<ran•larr it rouvded.
ufntrrconnrs+:wu(311 greuudi '%"I ineludv .rounds for ort•
If a
_.__..........
$014. tongMethod..Wirng mcthadi shall con•
form to the loauw m,:
s Cl... 11, Divisign 1. to Class 11, Division I
larmi0na, wiringshall be in rigid metal conduit with
lhr<adal boxes and fitnnga
1. Fitunes aM Boxes Finings and boxes used
in Incatr:ns where duets arc .( an <I<ctriWiy-con-
duchn8 nature sl:.11 he rlu NtighL
2. FTexftle Connntions Where nesessary to em-
pIOY De<i'de mon«Loos, R<a{h!r metal mndun nr
ypr y Ile<ivle rm.l with hush,d frrlrugsshl be
wl ar
I— er _N rxn4e cnnreninm are sulijrrtr,l to
ee carni:Lans. rho randanara of
rhe dr a:Y, cord shall be al a r)IK ayp•ovat lite rhe
ccn:l iusrs. An add.unnal <omjurbr far Rrcor.AinB
shall!r< Ur.,vided m ehe 0,, %I,
eerd union he,
means of granndme are Geavidnl.
It. Clan It. Division 2, In Ciat. il, Division 2
l0caicrs. wmaq sh>II be in "A. wets{ wndun or
declncal maalLc Iob;nR,
2e4 ARTICLE SOD
1. Filtings and Boxes. Fittings '"'b ... fn w•bich
taps, joints or lcrinitial eonnwuona arc made shall
b, provided vs•ith telescoping or close filling
covers, mr other <Qedie. means to Prevem the escape
of sparks or burmng material, and (2) shall have no
openmRs (such as holes for attachment screws)
through which, after installation, sparks or burning
material might cic`Pe, or through which adjacent
combust 1,
material might be ignited
2. Flexible Connections. Where flexible conn.-
tions are necessary the provisions of sub -paragraph
a-2 of section 5054 shall apply.
5055. Sealing, Class II, Divisions 1 and 2. Where
a raceway provides COmntulniration between a non-
dusttight fitting or enclosure and one which is re-
quired to be dusttight, suitable means shall be pro•
'tiled to prevent the entrance of dust into the dust-
tight cnelosnrc through d c ntta•ay. This means may
be (q a permanent and el7ec'ivc seal, (2) a horizon-
tal s«tion not less than ]0 feel TORR in the raceway
or (3) a vertical section of raceway not less than i
feet long and extending downward from the dusltight
ericlosure.
5056. Switches Cireuit-breakers, Molar Control-
ler, and Fuses. Switches, circuit -breakers, motor con-
trollers and fuses shall comornn to the following:
s Class II, Division 1. In Class 11, Division 1
locations switches• circuit -breakers, motor controllers
and fuses shall conform to the following;
1. Type Required. Switches, circuit -breakers, mo-
tor <onlrollen and fuses, including Push bultdns, rt-
lays and similar devices, which are intended to in.
terrupt current in ehe rtmntai prrfnrmance of the
function for whieb they arc mtrallcJ, or which at.
installed where dusts of an elevlrically-conducting
mature may be present• shall be provided with dust.
tight enclosures approved for Class 11 locations.
ThirL01 McWs renis. and ll a lh t evil force, rriwl,ra and
elreunreaarra, moor <enriullera imd,:lmc mush I,urrnnr, I•dat
avii<her, retaYr, and muter earrlwl proucrire devicrr), and
amuhn I. 1, mi drone hrraaaa for rhe eomrol soil prpua
lien al lishima and apphs euo,iu.
2. Isolating Switches Disconnecting and isolating
switches containing no fuses and not intended to in-
terrupt current, and which arc not installed where
dusts may be of an electrically conducting nature, shall
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 701
be provided with light metal enclosures which shall
(1) be equipped with telescoping ar close fitting
covers, or with other .fleet'. means to prerent the
escape of sparks or burning mmen.l, and (2) have
no openings (such as holes for attachment screws)
ihrouRh which, after installation, sparks or burning
material might escape, or through which exterior
accunmla'ioo of dust or adjacent combustible material
might be ignited.
3, Metal DUSIL In locations where dust from this
Graductrun of magnesium, aluminum or .Wtuim l
ronse powders may be Praeno, lose., stitches, motor
eontroIf rs and circuit-Lreakcn shall love dusltight
enclwur<. specifically approved for such locations.
b. Clan iI, Division 1 Ln Class 11, Division 2
locations, endosarcs for fuses, switches, circuit -break.
era and minor controllers including Push butlons,
relay's and similar &n11, shall conform to the re-
quirements of subparagraph a-2 of this section.
5057. Control Transformers and R<dstors. Trans-
formers, impedance cal, and re.iswis used as or in
conlunc l fent wh tom col equipment for motors, gen•
colors and app! ian cs thall conform to lhx following:
s. Class II, Dividan I. In Cf- 11. Division 1
locations, control traosforn:a". iuq,,ll c coils and
resistors, and any uvercurrent devices or switching
mechanisms associat<d with them shall have dust•
tight enclosures approved for Clain 11 1-11w- No
comm, ra- fo mer, impedance toil or resistor shall
be installed in a luratiou where dust Irons the pro-
duction of magnesium, aluminum or almninum I——
powdus may be Present unless prodded will: a dust-
light
enclosure ,P<ubcally am'e
pprd for tush 10-
ht .
b. Class II, Division 2, In Class If. Division 2
locations, transformers and resistors shall canfona to
the following:
1. switching Mechanisms. Switching m<duni"ms
including overcurrent devices aaso ,,,, with centro
lramfonnc, impedc cols and roismrs "full ba
providedn
wirb ano
endo...... conform,., iso tub -para•
graph a ' of section 5054
2. Enclosures Control tr>nslormen and impedance
cols shall be Provided with 4;hr ..Whausinea with-
'sling
ith•vsling opening..
374
201 ARTICLE $00
3. Resistors. Resistors and resistance devices ex-
cept heating elements of orcrcu...a dcvrccs, shall
have dusttight enclosures approved for Class 11 lo-
cations.
SOSS. Motors and Generston, Ilotors and gen-
eralors shall conform to the following: ,
a. Claes II, Division 1. In Class 1I, Division I
locations, motors, generators and other rotating elec-
trical machinery shall be [olally`cndoscJ not vers•
tlaled, totally -enclosed nice vcntilaled, or tolally-
endosed fan -cooled, and shall be approved for Class
II locations. Motors, generators or other rotating
electrical machinery shall not be installed in.lorations
where dust from the production of magnesium, alumi-
num or aluminum bronze powders may he present
unless such machines are totally -enclosed or tolaily-
encieseJ fan cooled, and specifically approved for such
locations.
Is. Class II, Division 2, In Class II, Division 2
locations, motors, generators and office rotating CleS-
trical machinery shall be lot.11y-endosed not ventil-
ated, lolall)•-endoscd pipe rentflaled, or totally -en -
dosed fan -cooled, except that fn locations where, in
the judgment of the code enforcing authority, only
moderate accumulations of non•eonductim;non•aliras-
ive dust are likel • to occur, and where the equipment
is readily accessiple for routine cleaning and mahnte-
nance, self-cleaning textile motors of the cage type. type, standard open type machines without slid-
ing contacts, centrifugal or other types of switching
mechanism (including motor overcarrent devices), or
integral resistance devicca, or standard open type
machines hiring such contacb, switching mechanism.
or resistance devices enclosed within tight metal hous-
ings without etnlilating or other openings, may be
installed. hfmists. generators or other rotating cles-
trical machinery of p,.I,ct d or splasisproof type shall
rat be insmllcd in Class 1l locations.
SOS9. Ventilating Piping. Vent pipes for motors.
Reneralors or other rotating electrical machinery, or
for enclosures for electrical apparatus or equipment
shall be of metal not lighter than \a 24 USS gauge.
and shall (1) lead directly to a source of clean air
outside of buildings, (2) be screened at the outer ends
to prevent the entrance of small animals or birds, (3)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 203
be of metal or of equally substantial non-combustible
material, and (e) be protected against mechat
damage and against rustnising or other corrosive influ-
ences. in addition, vent pipes shall conform to the
following:
a. Clan II, Division 1. In Class 17, Division I
locations, vent pipes, including their connections to
minors or to the dusWRht enclosures for other equi(s•
mcnt or apparatus, shall be dusttight llrrouRlmut them
length. For mesal y;pes, scams and joints shall be
(1) riveted (or balled) and soldered, (2)- wddcJ, or
(3) rendered dusttight by some other equally 'free -
rive mwns.
Is., 11, Divlsion 2, In CT... 11, Division 2
localians, vent DiPe] and their connections shall be
ciab:c qua light to ,I im.1 the entrance of apprt-
oren quantities of dust iib the a escaled equipment
or enclosure, and to prevent the escape of sparks.
flame orla burning mnenal which might ignite dust
accumuhliona or cembu9tible material in the vicinity
For metal pipes, lock seams and riveted or welded
))Dinh may a used, and tight.,fitting slip joints may
6e used where some flesiblity s necessary as at Co..
mations to motors.
5960. ADplances, Fixed said Portable. Appliances.
fixed and l"a— c, -hall contcrm to the following:
i Claw II, Division 1. In Class 11, Division 1
meter drivrnp apleunc",fi,l, da'trically-heated and
11 lacauana. I{+acd cr hall Ee approved for Class
a 'Pplanecs shall not
Le intalled ni mn1 in In, aynr..• svl+vc duet !row mag-
besPne�rat unless ha^icor-' br•nre pan+lees may
+nplu,rrs err dusttight and
are s""fi<ally afp,"veilw1, die
b, Cliw Ii. DivieWe }, in (•lav 11, Division 2
for re 1. he f.:1 ,w. ray 6zs 1 soil porabiq shall con-
i. Hasten. F'r; tr;csn,-heard a(.;,lianua shall be
aPProvtd fur Class 11 lo, atics4•
2. M0t0n. Ifrat.r. nr mote
aka. viof:-rm to Garaanph b r•drivrn appi'anrn
of argtan :Lie.
!, g.ritshes. Cinrlt-t+.ken and Fuses, F.m1ac-
mrs Lr sort -Lr., c.rcu.t .reaav s, a,:d hag Ghali
conform to sa`rvaragaph s.! n( yrclnn 54:v.
200 ARTICLE. 3t9
4. Transformers, impedance Coils and Resistors.
Transformers, impedance coils and ...islors shall
form to to paragraph b of section 5057.
will" 61re is a pvssihsm, ,hat a rortaLle a},011antt mar M
sue u, b.nl, n,+oim 1 ar pu',+i. n _ Y<mon, of [his lass, such
af•ptian<e sh-M < I ... [v [he rtqun<mrnu Ice Uivoioa 1
locasnaa
SO61, Lighting Fixtures, Lamps shall be installed
in fixtures which shall conform to the following:
a. Class II Division 1. In Class If, Division 1
locations, lighting fixtures for fixed and portable light-
ing shall conform to the following:
1. Approved Fixtures. Each fixture shall be ap-
prored far Class 11 lulations, and shall be clearly
marked to indicate it.. maxinmm wattage of the lamp
for which n is approved. In location+ .1-1 Just
I'.. magnesium, alnmmun, or alwninu i bronze Pow•
den may he present, fixnnres for fixed or Portable
lighting, and all auxiliary equipment, shall be dust•
light. and shall be speciacally approved for such To -
cations.
2. Mechanical Injury. Each fixture shall be Pro-
tected against mechanical. injury by a suitable guard
or by location.
3. Pendent Fixtures. Pendent fixtures shall be sm-
periled by tiveaded rigid conduit stems or chains with
approved Oui,g,, or by other approgl means. For
rigid stems hanger Than ]_ inches, gexihilily in the
form of a filling or a flexible connector approved for
the purpose and for the lo—ion shall be Provided not
more Atm 1_r inches from the point of attachment to
the supporting box or fitting.
4. Cord Pendants, Where, wiring between an out-
let box or fitting and a pendent fixture is not enclosed
in conduit• flexible cord approved for hard usage shall
be used. and suitable als shall be provided sphere
the cord culers the fuseture and the outlet box or
fitting.
S. Supports. Box", box assemblies or fittings
used for the support of lighting fixtures shall be ap-
proved for the purpose and for Class 11 locations.
Is. Class II, Division 2. In,Class 11, Division 2
locations, lighting fixtures shall conform to the fol-
lowing;
If.1Z.ARDOVS LOCATIONS 207
I. Portable Lamps. Portable lamps shall be dust-
lighl, shaamllt shall be i
aPPrneed car Claate v 011Iel locauons.
Tl:ey be dearly markal to ndicmaximum
wattage of lamps for sch,,, they are approved.
2. Fixed Lighting. E.iglninR fixtures for fixed
lighting 91,x11 provide cnd.nmrs far tangs and lamP-
holdcrs. Enduwres sluff Le Jesigncd to minimus
the deposit of dust on lamps and to prevent the ea;
tape of sparks, burning material or hat metal.
3. Mechanical Injury. LigMinR fixture. for fixed
lighting shall Le Pma•ctnd tram nuerhanisl injury by
wimblc guards or by localiun.
4. Pendent Fixtures. Pendent fixtures shall be
,u,Pr led by threaded rigid 'on•luit Stems or chain,
with appr-ed fitongs, or by usher approved v"es.
For rigid sums lung', than 12 inches, flexibility in
for if,, Purposellslialing l Ire P -iii not,
emme tlhanctor v ll'
inches hum the point of attachment to the support•
ing box or fitting.
S. Cord Pendant,. %Vhcnwiring between an out•
ning
let box or (ii, and - Pendent fixtis not enclosed
cunadL mflexible cord approved forure lord usage shall
used.
6 Supporta. Aoxes. boa assemblies and fittings
used for the s�r�art of lighting hxlures shall be ap-
proved for Class 11 loraiien3.
7. Electric Discharge Lamps. Starting and control
rquipm-t for mercury vapor and flet-ra,cm lamp,
.,all conform to Me requme11 n15 of paragrapih h of
sceliun 5057.
5061. Flexible Cord,, Claw I1, DM,ions 1 and 2.
}:rxhblr cords .,ed
in class II lucaui0ns shall (q be
r, a ry'pe approved for hard usage (1—h a9 'ryi-v S).
fill eon sm• in a:Wuion Io the « mduc "s of the tir-
<urt, a grounding rnrduaar «informing to section
91103, (3) be connected to terminals or to supply
conductors in an approved mannrt
er, (4) be su;•poed
by dames or by artier suitable means in such a roan•
nrr that the c will be no n,nscn on tb terminal—
and (5) be pra,idcd wish suila4!e seal, to
prevent the entrance of dust where t!,e flexible rend
enter, boxes or sitting, which ate rcqu,,,.l to be dust•
tight,
375
40
4
208 ARTICLE 500
5063. Receptacles and Attachment Plugs.
a. Class Ii, Division 1, In Class II, Division I
locations, iceepladcs and atlacluncnt plugs shall be
of pal:uiaed t>'pe p""I'lim^. for eonnccnnn to the
gronnJing conductor of the flexible cord, and shall be
appras'cd iur Clens II locations.
b.Class II, Diviai-n 2. In Class II, Division 2
locations, receptatles and mLschment plugs shall be
of polarized I 'pe providing for connection to the
grounding con,�uclor of the flexible cord, and shall be
so designed Ihat connection Io the supply circuit
cannot be made or broken while live parts ora exposed,
5064. Sigtul, Alarnh Remote -Control, and Local
Loud -Speaker Inter -Communication Systems. Signal,
alarm, rcmolc•control and local loud•speakcr inter-
commumcation systems shall conform to the follow -
Ing:
Refer to Article P00 Is, rates is, sing the iatlaUnko <f
Commuvirari,m tlrcmn m ddcad is N, _I.
IW.
a. Class II, Division 1. In Class It. Division 1
locations signal, alarm, remote-contral and local loud-
speaker intenconununication systems shall conform
Iotint fol!otving:
I. Wiring Method. Where accidental damage or
brmkdasus of insulation might cause arcs, sparks or
high tcmpuamrcs d molal conduit or dcdriwi
metallic IULmg
shall be the wiring ntedtod ensplay'vd,
and the number of conductors fn a raceway shall he
Iimfted only by the regpiremcnt that the cross•see-
tkm aro' of all candu<tars shall not exceed 40 per
cent of the arca of the raceway.
2. Contacts. Switches, circuit -breakers, relays, con-
Wctars and fuses t'I may interrupt other than
voice currents, and 'I interrupt
wooers for bells,
barns, howlers, sirens and other devices in which
sparks or arcs may be praJnced, shall be provided
with dusltight enclosure approved lar the lacahon,
unless current -breaking contacts are immersed in oil,
or utile<v the interruption of current occurs within a
ehatuber smicd against the entranm of dust, in which
case en 1—ures may be of general purpose type.
3. Resistors and Similar Equipment Resistors,
transformers and choke cods v0dell may carry other
than voice currents, and rectifiers, thermionic tubes,
and other heat genentiug eggipmcnt or apparatus
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 209
shall be provided with dusltight enclosures approved
for Class II
locatioa'.
4. Rotating Machinery, }foto., generators and
other rawting electrical machinery shall conform to
paragraph a of section 5058.
5, Electrical Conducting Dusts. Where dusts are
of an eleclrimlly-conducting nature, all wiring and
equipment shall be dusltight.
6. Metal Duets. "r"dust from magnesium,
aluminum or aluminum hr -nae powders may be prey
a t.all apparatus and equipment shall be dusttilt
and shall Le specifically approved for such locmiana.
b. Clan II, Divfater 2, is Class 11, Division 2
lomdons, signal, alarm, remote_Control and local loud-
speaker inlercammunication systems shall conform to
the following:
1. COntactL Enclosures shall conform to sub -pan -
graph a-2 of this ,colon cr shaft be in tight meal
erdosures bavmg telesc.pinX or tlxht fitting covers,
and having no-prnmga {hrough which, after instal-
lation, sparks or bugung n'atcrial might escape.
2. Trandortnen and Similar Equipment. The
wind:ngr and terminal wnncUiom o! uamiormers
amt <Lake coils s!ull be provided with tight meal
coal -sures wuhoul ventdaanq opcnfne'x
]. Reeiston and SiLI Equipment Resistors.
resistance devices, thcrmtnmc tubi,., and rectifs<n shall
Oorlorns ua stat d:aragrayh a-3 'his section except
that endoaures (car rcvstcrs which operate at approxi-
matdy roam temperature may be of general purpose
type.
]065. Live Pana, C1aae I] Divisions 1 and 2.
Tl:ere shit br no expcse+l live
5066. Grounding. Chau If, D!Wsipane.ons 1 and 2. Wir-
ing and rgary':rm shat! be X'aC"d io w.lormity
wish tF.t tol:ox�nq:
a. Es d Partes The en-
ing r..eul�,�ns tat e;oiyn;rni acrd n-nturtent•arry•
mt'ai <vr<con o1 mo...r.. 5a. vU+ as the lranvs -r
d or prrtab!e lamps of
asp; !:a n-rqLL<ghlfYtoenA,rng p..mda, 250 of
r•r. raL!net s, Casa, amt crn-
d :h aye;«:ed in Artxle
this
Wit caste.
Is. Boodir;. Tke larknut-hyclinq a,1 donLle-oak•
out typal ei o:aUa shat: oat Ue shye-des upon Ise
210 ARTICLE 500
bonding Pnrpase,s, butbonding j1lmPeea with proper
listings or rather arnroved means stall be used. If
ficxible eeslduit fs used as permitted in section 5057,
bonding junipers with proper fittings shall be provided
around such conduit,
e. Lightning Proteclmo Each unRraundeJ ,service
coni; of a wiring system us a Class II location,
when supplied from an ungroundcJ merhrad electri-
cal supply scslrm in an arm where IIFhlafng disturb-
ances arc rrevalcnt..lalf be protected Ly a lightning
protrctve device of proper Vill. Lfglumng protective
devices altail be connected to the service conductors
onthe supply side of the service disconnecting means.
and shall be bonded to the raceway system at the
service entrance.
d. Grounded Service Conductor Bonded to upRace-
way. \\'icing in a Class lI locuion, cote. splied
from a grounded alternating_Currcnt supply SYstentin
w9tidt a grounded eondutmr is a part of Jce service,
shall lure elle RrounJ<d service eonducter bonded to
the raceway system and to the grounding conductor
for the raceway system. The bonding connection to
ilio grounded service conductor shall be made on file
supply side of the service disconnecting locant,
a Transformer Ground Handed to Raceway Wir-
ing in a Class II location, when supplied from a
grounded alternating -cumene supply system in which
no grounded and or is a part of the servieq shall
be Provided %%-fill a metallic connection between Ilse
supply system ground and the nccaay 5)'stem at thR
service entrance. The metallic connection shall have
a current -carrying capa<dy not Its, than 115 that of
the service conductors, and shall in no case be smaller
than NO. 10 if of soft copper, or NO, 12 if of medium
or hard -drawn copper,
I. Multiple Grounds. Where, in the application of
section 2521, it i, necessary to abandon one or mare
grounding eonnedians to avoid objeetfonable passage
of Current over the Rrounding conductors, the ground -
fog connection reguired in paragraph d or a of this
section shall not be abandoned while any -tiler
grounding connection remains connected to the Sup-
ply system
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS 211
Class III—Installation
5071. General. The general rules of this code shall
apply to the installation of dcctrical winoR and ap-
parl i in locations classified as Class 111 mulcr sec-
tton $006 of thio article except as mal:ficJ by lens..
SUi, to 5087 inclusive.
5072. Transform<n and Capatitoro, Claes I(I, Div
inions I and 2, q'nnsi.rtulrrr and capacitors shall
conform to pan graph b of section 50:2.
5073. Wiring Methods. Wiring method, shall con-
form to tl¢ m
foltowg:
a. Class III, Diviafon 1. in Class III, Division I
1 -rations, rirel metal conduit shall be the tuning
ntelhud employed
1. Boxes and.Fittings. Finings and boxes in wI,i,h
taps, jtunts or terminal c„nnrclions are made shall
(1) be provided with le est -Wo. or dole titling rov-
ers, or other rlfective nwm, "prevent the escape of
,parks or horning material, and (2) .+hall have no
openings (such as holes i••r anachmen, were.,)
through alnch, after installation, sparks or burning
material might escape, or tLmugh which adjacent
combustible material alight be ignited.
2, Flexible Connections. Where flexible tonnes-
tions ,are necewary the 1'•rovbions of sub•psugraph
a.2 of section 5054 shall apply.
b. ClaIII, Division 2. In Class ill, Division 2
locations,n the wiring metho,l shall Conform to para-
graph sof
this see
exrrpl that in CO cam-
putments ar areas usnl xo:ery for s!orahv and con -
no machinery, open wrong on msu.aton mayy
he employ<J if installed to conform ro .Artirle 3.U,
but only an condition that protection as required by
section 321.' be provided where conductors are not
run in roof spaces, and well on of reach of sources
of mechanical injury,
5074. Switches, Circub-Breakers, Motor Contra&.
Imo and Fuses, Class III, Divisions 1 and 2. Ssviiclwa,
cir A -breakers, motor cOntrol!rrs au.l rate. 'ball eon.
lorm Io paragraph a of 'alfa. Sii6.
1075. Control Tmnaformsn and Resistors, Clan
111, Diviaiona 1 and 2. Transiatc:as• tmf•nlanre <aib
sad re,iamrs .-I as of to canlunctiasn with control
316
712 ARTICLE Sea
equipment for motors, generators an,[ appliances, shall
conform to pacagraph a of section 5057.
5076. Motors and Generators. 51atals and genera.
torsshall conform to tit. following:
a. Class III, Division I.
In Class III, Division I
locad+ar•, minors, generators, and other rotating .lea
trical machinery shall b< totally -enclosed not ven
ated, tolaliy.enclosal ptPc ventilated, or totally-en-
cleiscJ ian•caded. except that in loalions wlwrc, in
the judement , de arJe enforcing amhonl)•, only
modemtc• acan,:ulatmns of lint and flyings will be
likely to ,lb, .u; m, tar in the vicinity of a rotating
eleciri; a nm! se, and where snch machine is readily
sere aildr far cosine 1,a Ig :unl maintenance;,.=e1[
rlcanmg t.xtilr npdnre of the squired
-rageStan.
dard open r'pe machines wilLnut Aiding eonta[l<, cen-
trifugal or eth-r types ofsscitAdng mcdnnism (in-
cluding motor overload dcvire.l; or standarA open
type machineshaving such coin nate, switching mech-
anisms or resPannee davicrc enclosed within tight
metal housimts., without vcuidming or other OPcninga,
may be installa.L
Is. Class Iii, Division 2. 1. Class III', Division 2
locations, movers, genemrors, and other rotatin„ ele.-
trial machinery shall b^ total y -enclosed not v.:nti-
lated. (wally -enclosed Pipe a•eniilatcd, or totally -en-
closed fon-cooled.
c. Protected Type, Class Ill', Divisions 1 and 2.
Motors, generators or other ranting electrical ma-
chinery of the Protected or splash -proof type shall
not be installed in Class III locations.
5077. Ventilating Piping, Class II1. Divisions 1
and 2. Vent pipes for motors• generators or other
rotating electrical machinery, or for enclosures for
electrical apparatus or equipment, slall be of metal
not lighter than No. 24 USS gauge, and shall (I) lead
directly to a source of clean air outside of buildings,
(2) be screened at the outer ends to prevent the en-
trance of small animals or bird. (3) be of metal or
of equally sohsnnial non•combmtildc material. (4)
be protected agamst mechanical damage and against
rusting or other corrosive influences. and (5) vent
pipes and their connections shall he sufficiently tight
to prevent the entrance of appreciable quantities of
liAZARDOL•S LOCATIO\S 211
fibres or flyings into the ventilated equipment or en-
closure, and to prevent the escape of sparks, flame
or burning material which might ignite accumulations
of fibers or flyfnms or combustible material in the
vicinity., For metal pipes. lock scams and riveted or
welded joints may be used, and light fitting slip joints
may be used where some flexibility is necessary as at
connections to motors.
5078. Appliances, Fund and Portable, Class 11I,
Divisions 1 and 2. Appliances shall conform to the
following:
a. Heaters. Elearic2HY•heated appliances shall be
Provided with dusttight enclosures, and shall be ap-
proved for Class III locations.
Is, Motors. 'forces of motor -driven a pliances
shall conform to paragraph b o[ secants 5076. Apph-
anus which may be readily moved from ore locauon
to ire shoulJ conform to regmrementit [or the
more hazardous location.
e. Svdttb". Circuit -breakers, Motor Centralism
and Fuse.. Switches, circuit-brtakers, motor control-
lers and (uses shall conform to paragraph a of section
5056
5079. Lighting Fixtures, C6n III, Diviaiona 1 and
2. lamps shall be installed m fixtures which shall
conform to the fallowing:
a. C"Toirvctlon. Foch fixture shall be of dnsttight
Type eo de ogned than m the trt of burnout al lamp
ar la ml+holder, no 'Park ar Mt" mesal can escape Irons
the (rxture, and sorb buure rhall be clearly marked
to igd--e the max!nmm wattage of lamp for which
it it Jn+Hnrd.
b. Mechanlut Injury. A fixture whish may be coo,
pass; to mrrhamcs .-Jury aha'1 L< p,ctwcd by a
au UM,guard.
C. pendent Fiatmes. Pendent 11-Iarer shall be sua-
p<r.d: d [.Y at<uu d t!:rtadaf said r .,bot or tyreaded
mesal m'+:r.R of egonal<nt 1h!a ss. Fur stems longer
,ban 12 inrhe� dex.'.tdttY in he f man et a finM4 or is
fl<,:!lr. u•ncec t-: .:Iroved far she Pmprne shall Ge
qru+ided nos .-vire •Wit 11 irrhrt (rum the f+oms of
iteathmert b. d:e au;gn:riir.g lens pr fis ring.
d, gtrPParts. A.xes, tr:..r assemLlin os fuinga
used [cr t`e sv'vert of 1:;(!•.t;ag f:vtarra shall be of
s type ap;rcacd fu the pa arse,
214 .ARTICLE 100
e. Portable Lampa: Portable -lamps shall be dust -
tight, and shall be protected with substantial qua',..
Lampholders shall be of unswitelied type with no ex-
posed metal parts, and eacthh portable lamp shall be
clearly marked to indicate e maximum wattage of
lamp for which it is designed.
5080. Flexible Cords, Class III, Divisions I and 2.
Flexible cord; shall conform to section 5062.
5081, Receptacles and Attachment Plugs, Class
III, Divisions 1 and 2, Receptacles and attachment
Plugs shall conform to paragraph b of section 5063.
5082, Signal, Alarm, Remote-Contmi and Local
Loud -Speaker Inter Communication late.., Class
III, Diviaiona I and 2. Signal, alarm. remote -control
and local land -speaker nt
ier-communication systems
shall conform to paragraph a of section 5064.
5083. Electric Cones, Clan III, Divisan. 1 and 2.
L•lectric cranes may be iastailcd under the following
tondilions: Elctaric cranes operating over combustible
fibers shall not be operated on a systcm with a
ground conductor, Feeders for eleetr`. rates shall
furnished svilh a re<ardil,R ground ;6ro.cmr, and
protected by a relay whid, swill autontaucally open
the feeder eirruit-breaker in the event of tits insula-
tion of the systcm falling below 1000 ohms, flare
conductors for cranes necrosing in rooms used for the
storage of combustible fibres shall be protected by
barriers so arranged as to Prevent any escape of
sparks or hot particles, and the moving current col-
lectors sl!aIl 'so designed as to minimize sparking
at sliding contacts.
It is reecmmrnded last :Erre be di+more of tracer rvmlu,
current to the rr < IR snl'4h.' I Ih,aUMh I'LL
flrx,Ur fOodeG•
ton ""rind wish aaVr<rrJ type of rat or takauP device.
5084. Electric Trucka. Electric trucks shall con-
form to the following:
a. Class III, Division L Electric trucks shall not
be used in Class III, Division 1 locations.
b, Class III, Division 2, 1. Class flh Division 2
locations, electric trucks shall have wheels equipped
with rubber tires or made of non -conducting material.
Electric trucks shall have their lwterir. charged only
[n rooms meeting the requirements of or
5085.
5085. Storage -Battery Charging Equipment, Class
III, Divisions 1 and 2. Storage -battery charging
GARAGES 215
equipment shall be located in seParate rooms built or
lined with substantial non-combustible materials so
constructed as to adequately exclude flyings or lint,
and shall be well ventilated.
5086. Live Parts. Class III, Divisions 1 and 2.
There shall be net exposed live Parts except as pro-
vided in --- 508J.
5087. Grcundfng, Class III, Divfdoto 1 and 2.
wiring and equipment shall be grounded in conform-
ity with section 5066.
ARTICLE 5J."ARAGES AND SIMILAR
OCCUPANCIES
General
5101.Scope. The provision. of this article shall
apply to madame lungara, _gauges, commercial F -
ages, gasoline srrvice .,.nuns, and otter locahona
%here gasoline or other highly volatile motor In
is
.torcd in vehicles, dispensed, or where service and
repair operations arc tart led on with this type of
equipment. where service or repair operation, in•
volving more barardo , condtlions are carried on, he
provisions of other applicable articles of this code shall
apply. The Provisions of this article shall not apply
to any
portion of . building w'hi<h is suitably cut off
from the garage and not used for the above purpose.
5102. General. This article Provides additional re-
quired precautions in installation of electric equipment
where -,de or flammable ligmds are handled or
used as fuel or power in self-propelled vehicle,.
5101. Type. c[ Equipment Equipment which
tends to ProJu<e am or sparks, such as cutouts,
.witches, receptacles. IamPholdt•rs, charging panel,,
generator, motors, or ether equipment J_mg make
or break or shJing wnmcts, v,hen 1 -led w:thm 4
feet of the floor. shall be of a type a 'rm•ed for use
In Cl.1. Division 2 locaians as d<fincA N Art* It
500 of this code. Equipment which may prcduce
tentperaturea which may cause ignnien of such fuel
or in, when located within 4 feet of the floor, shall
be of a type 'X7,.d for use ,n Class 1, e. Where
(•,anions as denn<d in Arlid< 50(1 C1 this code. 1VM1rt<
su,h <yaimnrnl is l,,c l d xLove the 4•la�I ler'rt, it
shall be aI tLe 1wa11Y.-Iteaed type or shall have all
216 ARTICLE SIO
oPcnings guarded or screened so as to prevent the
falling tai hm metal panicles in case an art occurs.
a. Show Rooms and Switchboard Rooma. Equip.
mens Imatml in a alae, rVon1 separated by a Partition
from lilt Range preper, or in a room or Criticismprovided for flu purpose, need not conform to the
requircmulis of this section.
5104. Polarization of Pendants and Portables. It
the %lying system is identified as provided in Article
200, flexible C -4s shall be idCnlificd and the idcnli•
fed comi.o r shall be connected to the sell" shell
of all fmnpholders on portables or pendants. Recep.
tach=. anadmunl plugs. twremis, and similar dc-
vice • Mall be of the polarized type.
S105. Conneetoo. Cords used for the connection
of p.,rable appliances shall carry the male end of a
Pol; ri t, -type Inn -plug connector, or equivalent• the
feast,, ,ml long of such design or so hung that the
celml, for will break apart readily at any Position of
rhe cable. The connector shall be kept at least 4 feet
above the floor.
5 106.
Cord for Pendants. For pendants, reinforced
cord suinble for the type of service such As types S,
Sj. AFS, and AFS], shall be used.
5107. Cord for Portables. For the connection of
portable lamps, motors, or other appliances, flexible
cord shall be of lite type S. SO, or ST, as specified
in Tabic 31 of Chapter 10.
5108. Lampbolder. and Guards for Portables.
Portable lamps shall be equipped with handle, lamp -
holder, an insulated hook and insulated substantial
lamp uuard attached to (lie Ianlpholder or handle.
Lampholdcrs shall be of the uns,titched type and
shall not provide means for phis in of attachment
Cord caps. Limphoiders shall be of the molded Co..
or otlttr type approved for the purposes
hlcui-shell, lined Lampholders, either of the switched
or unswitdtcd type• shall not be used.
5109. Portable Lampholders Used in Pini. Wl"'.
pnriabk (amps xrr useJ in pits or other places in
witirh gasolint fumes arc liable to settle• they shall
be ai a ).PC approved for use in Class L. Division 2,
lec.u.ns as dcfined in Article 500 of this code.
5110.Lampholders. Where practicable, I"Phold•
els shall have non -conducting outer casings.
GARAGES 217
5111. Live Part.. Live parts of equipment shall
be guarded to present accidental contact.
5112. Grounding. All metallic rottttotter enclos-
ures and the exposed metal parts of ftxrd equipment.
except pendent or Portable lamps operating on
Nrounded systems of not store tlun 150 volts to
frround, shall be grounded in Ile manner prescribed
m Article 250.
Residential Storage Garage,
5 121.
Residential Stooge Garages -Six Car. or
Loa. All wiring located 4 feat or more .1..,c the
floor may, br of any type covered by the provisions
of Arlide 3W of this code.
Cemmereial Garages and Airplane Hanga,
5131. Commercial Garage, and Airplane L[angars.
Only metallic raceway or armored cable systems nay
be used. C, ...r metal 111- nccways nay be used
only it
suprlyhmr rifling outlets or calcnsimt. to til•
are. belo,s the fl- but not above. No electric ren•
cutter shall br untaped in any cell or header wh,eit
contains a P:pe cur strant. water, aiq gas, d,lel. 1- or
other servile than elrrrical. All wiring whish a uses
m connection with C7uipertnl In'. cd bylaw die 4
foal Iran shall 1:<rinalal:c;l to rnnfarm to A.titie SW.
CUs, 1, Division of this cn•1c.
513L Battery-Cha19ing Equipment. T'ar.cry charge
en and contr,l rqugmtrnJ shall LC L•rcd al (cast
4 feet above the I.a '. Tables, rack', it, and ,vmnN
mc(hnds .Qali to adI ninn Conform to ,he provisions
of ArG;le 4E0.
5133, Et Mk Vehicle Charging. Fgalpmem for
electric vehidr ch2rcmg shah r.-.nl, rte to the follnw•-
fag:
g, Type of Cord. Type g 50 nr 5T cord shall
be used for charging
b. Carirect., Rating, Ccrom-, s,,n be at least
so an.. 211.1 rspa,:ly
e Connectors. ' sn drsi9n<d
and an rmragrd C -u ,Lep _1 p„yak .,net rorotily at
any p--- r.f lira cL it rn4 7e. 1 �•:r (•arts shall
be a- 'dad G'>ra ace Jen'+1 :nor art. WF.rm plugs for
direct roars. t.%-` vel: :'s arc .y.�.e.^ar1 Irum rr•r•
bud. the cord ossa fe arr:na.d so that Ila lowest
point of sag I. st least 6 is<!:.a lrrm rt:e Durr. Where
219 ARTICLE SIO
the vehicle is equipped with an approved plug which
will readily pull apart and is arranged to am.1-tic.fy
pull both Cord and Plug nut of tilt tray co as not to
e subject to mechanical injury, no additional connect•
for need be placed in the cable or at the outlet.
Gasoline Dispensing and Service Stations
5141. Gasoline Dispenaing and btotor-Vehicle Ser-
vice Station. Equipment fur gasniine dispensing and
motor -vehicle service stations shall conform to sec-
tions 51.11, 5142 and $143.
t- Lubritorium Service and Repair Rooms. All
wiring below 4 feet of the main level slall comply
will, the Provisions of Class I, Division 2, of Article
SOO of this coda All other wiring shall conform to
the provisions of section 5131.
b. Other Locations. Office, sal -tom, compres-
sor rooms, and other similar areas which are suiubly,
cut off from the lubrf(orium, service and repair rooms,
shalt be wired to comply with the Provisuns of Article
300.
S14Z Dispensing Island. The wiring in a dispense
Ing island shall conlovm to the following:
a Rigid conduit shall be used as the wiring
method.
b. All wiring and equipment within 5 feet of the
ggrarade shall conform to the provisions of Class 1,
Dfvfsfon 2, of Article 500 of this code,
c. All conduits shall be scaled as they- enter dis-
pensing pumps or other equipment on the island,
it. Conductors in conduits entering or Icavfng dis-
pensing pumps, tvhen covered with a rubber com.
ppound or other compound upon s,hich the dispensed
liymd will have a deleterious effect, must be sheathed
with a suitable nulerial such a, Icad.
e. All circuits supplying dispensing pumps stall
be controlled by a switch having a disconnecting pole
in etch conductor.
5143. Pole Standards. All wiring and equipment
within 5 feet of the grade. unless located at least 20
feet front a dispensing island or pump, tank -fill pipe
or lank -vent pipet shall conform to cite provisions of
Article 500 of this code, All conduits shall have an
approved seal within we foot of the ground level.
GARACES _le
Bulk -Stooge Planta
5151. BulkStorage Planta. EquiPment for bulk-
a(onge plants handling gasoline or ether volmfle
liquids w,dt atmilar Innnls, shill conform to seetios,
5158 to 5157 inclusive.
5152. Equipment. Until", controllers, wiring, and
gwpment used as part of the bulk plant stall comply
will, the pr ion of Class 1, Divu;on 2, of Article
500 of (Itis code.
S/53. Underground Wiring. Wiring I„cated in not
less Than - fret of earn( stay hr• in ' 9Wd conduit, or
an approved lead- covered elle assembly. provided
Thal ng,l aoad"a fs ...ed I C thea nblrs Ic..0 the
nrth earndrnq f ." a Poon of lox eq buried cable
level to Ile r'1nipnwnt sn 'rived. All wiring above
the able Irrnrlt level doll conform to the provisions
of Class 1, Division 2, of Aside 500 of Ibis code.
5154. Pole Standards. All wiring Ieot..1 15 feel
or less above flu ground Irvel shall mniorm m the
provisions of Class 1, Division 2, of Article 500 of
the code.
SI53. Platforms. All wiring Ionted on filling plat-
form shxll caniply well the pro. o,ons of Chia 1,
Division 2, of Artele SW of that colt.
5156. Storage and Repak Garages for Tank
Trueka All "'ring hall ar Bunn to the provisions
of Class I, Division 2, of Art+1< 5W of this rade.
5157. Office Buildings. 1, oP.,re buildings, bafler
rooms• and other ba 10,4 ,nits isolated by location
and in "hitt' na gasnl'ne r conwncn arc -1 or
stored, the wirimr shall cn•'Ply wnh the pmvfsion. of
Article 300 of his ea1r.
ARTICLE Seo -THEATERS, INCLUDING
NOTION PICTURE HOUSES
5201. &.P• Tae requtremrnu of this article shall
apply to Al ' nl,J r91, or part 01 a building. designed,
iwe &', or n.•.I far Jnmatir, we mfe, .as-pic.
lure .r "thee 'lona a.
3N2. Emergency Lighting. An ems ill";Y 1'ghting
sY arm shall be ["'& I while the attune opacity
of the ouch„riant exc•eda IW Per 1- When eI,,-
3?8
220 ARTICLE S20
tricky is used for emergency lighting. this system
shall conform to the requirements of Article i00.
5203. Motion -Picture Projectors. Motion -picture
projectors shall comply with Article 540.
5204, Sound Reproduction. Sound -reproducing
equipment shall comply with Article 610.
Installation
5211. Wiring Method. Tie wiring method shall
be metal raceways, except (1) as provided in Articles
670 and 800; (2) when the auditorium has a seating
taparity of 100 persons or less, ar ui d cable as pro-
vided in Article 334 may be used, or for concealed
work, concealed knob -and -tube work or nnnnnclallic
aheatlled cable as pprovided in Articles 324 and 336
may also be used. Portable cables may be used only
where fixed wiring methods are impracticable.
5212. Number of Conductors in Raceway. The
number of conductors permitted m any metal con-
duit or electrical metallic tubing for border or stage
pocket circuits or for remote -control conductors shall
notexceed that shown in Table 9 of Chapter 10. The
number of conductors for border or stage pocket cfr-
Fuits or for remote -control conductors in auxiliary
gotten or metal wireways shall have a.total cross sec-
tional -area not exceeding 20 per cent of the cross
sectional area of the gutter or wireway.
5213. Conductor Insulation, Foot, border, pro-
seenfum, or portable strip light fixtures shall be w•ircd
with conductors having insulation suitable for the
empentures at which the condnclors will be oper-
ated and net less than 125C (257F). Scc the table in
section 3102.
Stage Switchboard
5221. Dead Front. Stage switchboards shall be of
IIJc dead -front type.
5222 Guarding, Stage switchboards having ex-
posed live parts on the back of such boards shall be
enclosed by the building walls, wire mesh grills, or
by other approved methods. The colones to this
enclosure shall be by means of a self-closing door.
5223. Control and Oveurrent Protection of Re-
c<rc
ptar3a Circuit, Means shall be provided at the
THEATERS, ETC. 221
stage switchboard for the control and individual over -
current protection of branch circuits to stage and gal-
lery receptacles used for portable stage equipment.
5224. Metal Hood, Stage switchboard shall be
provided with a metal hood extending the full length
of the board to Protect all equipment on the board
from falling objects, unless the switchboard is re-
cessed in the building construction or is of lire com-
pletely enclosed, dead -front and dead -rear type.
5225. Dimmers. Dimmers shall conform to lite
following:
& Disconnection from Supply. If dimmers are in-
statted in ungrounded conductors, each dimmer shall
haveovercurrent protection not greater than 125 per
cent of the dimmer rating, and shall be disconnected
from all ungrounded conductors when the master or
individual switch or circuit -breaker supplying such
dimmer fs ,n clic open position,
b. Resistance or Reactor Type Dimmers. Resist-
ance or series reactor type J:mmtts nay be Plated in
caber le, of the circuu. li designed W open etcher
the .upp Y circuit to the dimmer or the circuit con-
ir,lled by it the dimmer shall then comply will, sec-
ti.,n 3801.
It h mcr..�.ndM tat raiavere <r inner a dim,ven b.
�:nejacrxt care -uta uimtal
-o- cf taenirrun L....Jrd
c, Auto-Transfarmer Type Dimmers. An auto-
tranalarmcr ,J Ye of A:mmcr ataIse <nerRixed by a
eiloid operating a, not mere ,h:n 150 volts between
aa:ductrn std the tr_tldrd ranductor shall b< tam -
m.. to both the input And the cntput of the auto -
transformer.
Sage Egtdp,__Piud
SM2. Circuit Loads. F-141111. border lights, and
prnx<nium aide light "All be s, arranged that no
branch bKan supplying such egv:Ymert wJl Carry s
Irad exr<ed..g 15 amperes; pr6K,•d that where
f.eavy-du,Y lamp:.nkders only are cs<d. such ccs
c.ay trmf..rm to t1 -e Frcviss;,cs al Ani: le 210 fir <ir-
pies a Peola bcavy11'heA"Y lan:phokders.
5241. Fcothghl& If the r,<;at ir,,,Rh tnnatruai,n
speeif,cd in leets. sial it rot used. traakighu shall
waist of fe:iy.da4 ..Ceti web i`.ders, wired
225 ARTICLE 320
with rigid or flexible metal conduit. The circuit con-
ductors shall be soldered to the lampholder terminals.
Di.appcaring footliglns shall be so arranged That lite
current sul•I,ly Aball be automatically dhsconnocted
ts•ben the f mtliglns are replaced in the recess de-
signed tbercior.
5243. Cables for Border Lights, Cables for border
lights %lull be '1)�pes K. S, So. or SI' licxible cord.
Sec Table ,JI ,f Claptcr 10. The cables shall be suit-
ably supported. Such cables shall be employed only
Where flexible conductors are necessary.
5244. Receptacle& Receptacles intended for the
connection of arc lamps shall love not less than JS
amperes capacity and shall be supplied by conductors
not smaller than No. 6. Receptacles intended for the
eomteclion of incandescent lamps shall have not less
than 15 amperes capacity and shall be supplied by
conductors not smaller thin No. 12. Plugs for arc
and incandescent receptacles shall nos be interchange-
able.
5245. Lamps in Scene Dock& Lamps installed in
scene docks shall be so located and guarded as to be
free front mechanical injury and provide an air space
of not less than 2 inches between such lamps and any
combustible material.
5246. Curtain Motors, Curtain motors having
brushes or sliding contacts shall comply will, section
5310.
5247. Flue -Damper Control. If stage flue dampers
arc released by an electrical device, the efr<uft oper-
ating the latter shall be normally closed and shall be
eoutrollcd by at least two exterially-operable
switches, one switch being placed at the electrician's
station and the other where designated by the inspec-
tion authority. The device shall be designed for the
full rnlage of the circuit to which it fs connected, no
resistance being inserted. It shali'be located in the
loft -above the scenery and shall be enclosed in a
suitable iron box having . tight, self-closing door.
Stage Equipment -Portable
S251. Arc Lamps. Arc -lamp fomes and standards
&hall be so insalicd and guarded As 1. Pleven, their
becoming grounded
T1IEATERS, ETC. 22J
5252. Light. on Scenery. Bracket. on -,-y y shall
be wired internally and lie fixture stent shall Int car•
lied through to the back of the scenery where a bush•
ing shall he placed on the end of the stem, except
that externally wired brackets or other fixtures may
be used when wired wfth Type 1' or other cords de-
signed for hard uage which shall extend thrmtgh
scenery and ilout joie or splice in canopy of fix-
ture hack and terminate in an approved type stage
.... _r lo: aced within In ioll s of the fixture, For -
lures shall be securely fa.encd in place.
5253. Festoons, joints in festoon wiring shall be
.,angered where practicable. Lamps enclosed in I...
erns or $1131, at devices of combustible material shall
he cqu:ppcd with appr... d guards.
5254. Special Effects. Electrical devices used for
sin ul.,ing l:ghm,ng, ua:erfalls, and the like. shall he
so .&eructed and Io zed that flames, sparks, or hot
particles, cannot come in contact with combustible
material.
5255. Connectors for Flexible Conduct... Con-
otetors f, flcxdde conductors shall be so constructed
,hal tensi:m on the cord or cable will not be trans-
miucd to the <onmeeions. Th female half of the
confuter shall be attached to the live end of the .,it
or c.blc,
5255. Conductors for Portable& Flexible conduc-
tors used to supply pAbke stage equipment shall
be 'types R, $ SO or ST, exrcpt that reinforced
curd ni:ty be used m supply atom lamp s if the cord
is not liable W severe mmAunical iniury and is pm-
tectel by a ovrrcurrett protect:., rated at not over
IS amperes.
DI -Wing Rooms
5261. Pendant. and Receptacle& Neither lamp
Paidaaa or re:.Palet shAl be insta!k1 in dressing
monis.
k...... r User
�'yn':e n:ar„al, rhea �l ,.: � 4r:{t��iiieJ arc r��erwca".,n
.05262. Lamp Guards. All incandescent lamps in
dr<xsnig monis, if Iris than It fret Froin the hoar,
stall be cquip,rea with open end guard, rfacad ,o the
v. -I I box curer ur ytl:erwse waled or locked to pave.
319
46
ift
224 ARTICLF. 5,'0
Grounding
5271. Grounding. All metal raceways shall be
grounded. The metal frames and enclosures of equip-
ment including border lights shall be grounded, except
rhe frames and enclosures of portable equipment on
grounded circuits operating at not over 150 volts to
ground. Grounding, if employed, shall be done in the
manner specified in Article 250.
Construction
$281. Footlights, If metal trough construction is
<mPloyed for footlights, the trough containing the
circuit conductors shall be made of sheet metal not
lighter than No. 20 USS gauge (.0359 inch in thick-
ness) treated to prevent oxidation, Lampholdcr ten
.finals shall be kept at [cast y inch from file metal
of the trough. The circuit conductors shall be
soldered to life lampholder terminals.
5282, Horden and Proscenium Sidelights. Borders
and Proscenium sidelights shall be constructed as pre-
scribed in section 5281, shall be silitibly stayed and
supported, and shall be so designed that the flanges
of the reflectors Or other adequate guards will pro.
feet
trite lamps from mechanical injury and from acci.
dental contact with scenery or other combustible ma-
terial.
5283. Pockets• Receptacles intended for the con-
nection of portable stage lighting equipment shall be
mounted in suitable pockets or enclosures. and shall
comply with the requirements of section 5444.
S284. Arc Lamp, Arc lamps shall comply with
the following:
a. General. Portab)c are lamps shall be substan-
tially constructed entirely of metal not less than No.
20 USS gauge (.0359 inch), except where approved
insulating material is necessary- The design shall be
auch as to provide proper ventilation while retaining
sparks, and to prevent carbons or other live Parts of
lamp from making contact with metal of hood.
b. Hoods. Hoods for other than tell, lamps shall
have the front opening equipped widt a self-closing
hinged door frame carrying either wire gauze or glas,
Hoods for lens lamps may have a stationary front,
and n solid door on either back or sid,
THEATERS• ETC. 2+5
of, Insulation, Mica shall be used for the insulation
of the lamp fume.
d, Switch. The switch on the standard shall be
of auch design that accidental contatt with any live
part will he impossible.
Rheostats. Rheostat, shall be enclosed in a sub -
]'
Properly v<ntilat<d meal wse aflurding a
clearance of at least I inch Le{ween case and resial•
once clement. If the rheostat is mounted rl the stand-
ard, a clearance of 3 inches above the Oon, shall be
maimained. Asbestos.covered type a conductors
shall be used between the rheostat and the lamp.
L Terminals. !1 stranded conductors are used, they
shall be connected to lamp,'
amp, rheostat and switch I—minals Ly menta of uppsoved lugs or e .... ctonl
provided that approve pressure connectors shall be
used at are lamp tcrmivala
5285. Parable Stripa portable strip, shall be inn-
Rrutted in accordance with the requiremenb for bur•
der lights and Proscenium ride 1!.hta in ,-,Clio. 528P.
The supply cable shall be protected by bushings where
it Dares Ihr-uph metal and shall L< so arranged that
tension on the cable will not be transmitted to the
connections.
5286.
Lhall Potable Pluggi
to theng (Hoxea Portable plugging
oses smniurm c!losring;
Enclosure. The cerjtI Itinn shall be such that
no eurrcmcarrying Dart w+l! Le <:pused.
b. R<centacin artd O'rercunent Protection. Each
r:rf•L1de sl:a!1 line, a conte fir.
ons less than an -0 tsl:al�:e pPaeity of
overcurrent levans sit alrl ' protected by
fire <VwPFtd wiR1 sell-ciosin �n an aPprovld en<les-
e. Benham and Termmnsla
,erten l-nrrying capaply equal BI -the sum afhall vthe
..:Acre ranngc of all the Rreptade,. /_figs shall be
Provided lot she cunr-rctic. of tf:< name oble.
Pcrtab!< Swi,chLnaada on Stag.
SKI. Sa, ply. Pcr,au!e swq,hyoard< ,hail be sup-
purpr,a rd,Such eu'.,ea ee,lily provided 1-r It-;-
<• shall
oprnL;, erased taxed ,x' a"n,nt of externally
rt<hea ter circuis-br<akerl
22, ARTICLE -520
mounted on the stage wall or at the awitcl,b..,d in
locatiuns readily accessible front tie stage floor.
S292. Overcurrent Protection Circuits front port-
able ,sa•itdfbeards directly' supplying equipment con.
taining incandescent lamps of file medium has, or
smaller types shall he protected by overcurrent de•
Vices having a rating or setting of not more than 15
amperes. Circuits for heavy-duty Iamphuld<ra may
Le used if overcurrent protection conforms to the'pro-
visions of Article 210. Other circuits shall be provided
with overcurrent devices with a rating or setting not
higher than the current required for the connected
load.
5293. Construction. Portable switchboards for use
on stages shall comply with file following:
a. Enclosure. Portable switchboards shall be
Placed within an enclosure of substantial construction
which may be so arranged that the enclosure is open
during operation. Enclosures of wood shall be com-
pletely lined with sheet metal of not less than N. 24
USS gaup, (.0239 inch), and if not of corrosion•
resistant type shalt be well gahaniaed, ejamelled, or
otherwise properly coated to prevent corrosion.
b. Live Parts. Except as provided for dimmer face
Plates to Paragraph e, there shall be no -,.Posed live
parts within the cndo,ure.
e. Switches and Circuit -Breaker, All switches
and circuit-hreakers shall be of cite externally -oper-
able, enclosed type.
d. Circuit Protection. ,Overcurre it devices shall
be provided in each ungrounded conductor of every
circuit supplied through the aw•itchboard. Enclosures
3112[1 be provided for all overcurrent devices in addi-
tion to the switchboard enclosure.
, Dimmer. The terminal, of dimmers shall be
provided with enclosures, and dimmer face plates
shall be so arranged that accidental contact cannot
be readily made with the face -plate contacts.
L Interior Conductorial. All conductors within the
switchboard enclosure shall be stranded and, except
for cable. fretting to or from the switchboard, shall
be asbestos -covered type AA or other t pea approved
for a maximum operating temperature of 200C (392F).
THEATERS, ETC. 2.17
Each conductor shall have a <urrnbcarrying capacity
at least equal to the rating of file circuit -breaker,
switch or cutout which it supplies, except for conduc.
tors for incandescent lamp circuits having overcur-
r<n! Protection not exceeding IS amperes. Conductors
ahold be endoseJ in metal voughs or securely fastened
in position and shall be bushed where they pass
through mesal.
g. Pilot Light. A Pilot light shall be provided
within the encl-sure and shall be so connected to the
circuit suppi)'ing the ,card that the opening of the
maser ,witch willnot cut -0 the supply to the lamp.
This lamp shall be on aft in 1,,Cudent to having
Overcnrrcut protection of a rating or setting of not
than I
more S ampere,.
h Supply Connection.. The supply to a portable
.wit shall bo by means of Ilexfbie cord (types
K or S) terminating nnhin the switchboard enclosure
or in an externally -operable fused master awiteh or
eircuii-breaker. "rite supply cable shall have sufficient
eurtrntaarq'ing capacity to carry the total load un
the switchboard and ,hail be protected by overcurrent
devices.
L Cable Arrangement. Cables shall be protected
by bushings where they pass through Incl -+urea and
,hall be so __Red that lesion in the cable will
not be transmitted to the connections.
j. Terminals. Terminals to which stage cable, are
connected shall be so located as to permit convenient
access to the ternamah. Ar terminals not provided
with approved pressure connectors the following con.
at
ru<ton shall be employed:
1. For conductors of Ne, 10 or larger, solder lugs
ah1ll be used.
2. For conductor, smaller than No. 10, the .[rands
shall be s.,d"Cd together when c, nnected s. clamps
binding screws not specifically app roved as P"'.sure tonncnor,
ARTICLE 530—MOTION-PICTURE STUDIOS
AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
5301. ScoP<, The r,q.je. e , of this article ,h,ll
apply to a .olio. -picture ....!io• eaA:anBr, factory or
'980
7
223 ARTICLE 530
laboratory uilding. or a Portion of the building in
which motiobn-picture films are manufactured, exposed,
developed, printed, rewound, repaired or stored. Thio
article shall not apply where only approved slow -burn -
.1; (cellulose acetate or equivalent) film is used
5302, Sound Recording. Installations for sound
recording shall conform to the provisions of Article
640.
5303. Wiring Methods, The wiring method shall
be metal raceways except as provided in Articles 640
and 800. Portable cables or flexible cord may be used
on studio staRea and at other locations where fixed
wiring methods are impracticable.
5304, Side -Wall Lamps, Lampholders on fixtures
if less than 8 feet from the floor shall be equipped
with vaportigitt globes or shall be provided with open.
end guards riveted to the outlet box cover or other.
wise sealed or locked in place,
5305. Pendent Lampe. Pendent lamps shall not
Lc installed in permanunt dressing rooms.
5306. Lampe at Patching Tables. At patching
tables, composition or metal -sheathed porcelain key
leas lampholders shall be employed and shall be
equipped with guards to protect the lamps from me-
chaai<aI injury.
5307. Lamps In Film Vaults. In film -storage vaults
Is
shall be installed on rigid fixtures and enclosed
in v,p,,,ight globes. Lamps shall be controlled by
a double -pole switch located oubide the vault Thia
double -pole switch shall disconnect from the source
of supply all conductors terminating in any outlet box
to the vault, and no conductors other than those con.
(railed by the double -pole switch shall terminate or
Pass through any outlet box in the vault. Electric
motors or portable lamps shall not be placed in the
vault
5308. PtnYable Lamps. For portable lamps, com-
pnsitimt ! meta 1calhed por«lain unswilehed Iamp-
holders shall be used. The cord shall carry the male
end of a pin -plug connector or equivalent, the female
end being of such design ar so hung that the eonnec.
for will readily break apart at any position of the
card. The connector shall be kept at least 1 foot
b1OT1ON PICTI•RR STUDIOS 759
from the floor. The Im..Phclder shall be provided
with a guard, hook, and handle, The provisions of
this section shall not apply to portable lamps used
as Properties in a motion picture set of a studio
stage or similar location.
5309. Flexible Cords. Types S. SO, or ST cord
shall be used on portable lamps and equipment, <x-
«Pl that Portable lamps used as stage properties in
amotion-picture set on a studio stage or similar iota•
tion may be used with any approve) type of cord with
which they may be equipped. See Table 31 of Chap-
ter 10.
5310. Motor and Generator, If motors or gen•
they having hruahes or sliding contacts are used
they shall nisei one of the following conditions:
a. Ee of the 10"HY-enclosed, enclosed -fan -coaled,
or enclosed -pipe -ventilated types.
b, De enclosed in separate roams or housings built
of non-combustible materials to constructed as to ex•
elude flyinxs - !int, and properly ventilated from a
source of clean a ..
e. Have brush or slidirg•CCm .ct end of mato, en•
dosed by solid metal carers,
d. Have hrushes or sliding contacts cn<las<J in
substantial, tight, metal housings.
e Have the u'Per half of brush osliding•mntad
It
o
nd of Ole mor <ncloaed by a wirer
screen or per-
m0etalId .11.1 and the lower hse
],.If enclosed by solid
1. lfav< ... .tree... or laced
at she cnmmrut 'it er LPerforated metal p
rwh eras, dimension of
any oPemrx in ❑u .vire um.n No dimer perf... ted metal
mull exert ,b5 '<•b. rtgard:ea. of the shape of the
a
cpenmg J cf she matcrul used. D
531 I. Motor ami Generate, pct Studio Stages. The
Pr,asni0ns at..:ra,an ,.110 .I1a11 roc off ly to mom..
e!
such
mct re. dton atnd,o .m Res, but [hc Iwe .rte
r x<ncrah�ra shall I.e cthr wise
(s oeetiaa r5J171seJ in ten?nr+ndy w;M, Ort pwvtsfmu
S31Z Soritehe . SwittFe. ahsll E
."able y>a e of the <aternaily-
t
230 ARTICLE 5,10
5313. Live Puts, Live parts shall be enclosed to
Prevent accidental contact by persons or objects.
Rheostats shall be enclosed and externally operable.
5314. Grounding. All metal raceways, cable armor,
and the exposed metal frames of all equipment and
enclosures shall be grounded,except pendent and
Portable lamps operating at not more than 150 volts
to ground,
ARTICLE S40-AlOTION-PICTURE
PROJECTORS
S401. Professional -Type Projectors, The profes-
sional type of projector, such as is commonly used in
theaters and motion -picture houses, shall be located in
an approved enclosure. Such enclosure opsit not be
considered as a Hazardous Location as defined in
Article 500.
The poofenianal prpjr<ror empplora • ]5 millimet.r atm whi,b
b 1% e6 wide sad Wa au ewh edit. 5.e perfam:am r<r in<0.
5402. Non -Professional Type Projectors. Projec-
tor of the ci-professional or miniature type, if em-
ploying only approved slow -burning (cellulase ace -
Ute or equivalent) film, may be operated without a
booth.
' 5403. Sound Recording and Reproduction. Sound
recording and reproduction equipment shall comply
with Article 640.
Equipment and Projector of the Professional Type
5411. Motor -Driven Projectors. Motor -driven pro.
fedora shall be approved for the purpose as an assem-
bly or shall comply with all of the following condi.
tion!:
L An approved projector .ball be used.
Is. An approved projector lamp shall be used.
e. Motors shall be so designed or guarded as to
Prevent ignition of film by spark, or arcs.
d- Projectors shall be in charge of a qualified oper-
ator.
5412. Conductor Sue. Conductors supplying out;
for projectors of the ion.j type shall not
be smaller than No. 8 and shall be of sufficient size
for the projector employed.
)LOTION PICTURE PROJECTORS
5415. Conductor reumbntlon. Asbestos -covered can.
ductors type AA or other types Of insulated conduc-
tors having a maximum operating temperature of 200C
(392FI shall be used an all lamps or other equipment
when the ambient temoenmre at tLe eondu<tora as
installed will exceed 50C (122F),
S414. Flexible Cards. Cords approved for hard
service in Table 31 of CIuPt.r 10 stall be used on
portable equipatenL
5415. Lamp Guard& Incandescent lamps in pro -
lection cornu or booths shall be provided with an ap-
proved lamp guard unless otherwise protected by non.
combustible shades or Other enclosure..
5416. Location of Equipment. Molor•g<nerator
cels, Innsfonnen. recnticrs, rLcosuts, and similar
equrynlent, for the supply or conirol of current to
are lamps an projc,,.r, allall, if practicable, be located
in seParate rooms, If placed in 144 projector room,
they sLa!I Le so located or Ruarded ha, arc. ar
sparks cannot <omc in contact with film' and motor-
genrntor srts shall h.rc the rumnmtator end or end,
protected as Provided in se<sien 5310.
5417. Rewinding, Examination and Storage of
Exln Films. It is rrc.•uunandrd tlmt the authority
having jurndicii,., rcier to ti:e standards of the Na-
tional IL.ard of F:re Undenvfiter% Sro PuLLcatian
No. •10, \dtcmellulme !Motion Pic'of, Filnt.
3418.Equipment Pruhfbhed, No switches, over -
cur -I drxcs, or .uiwr tg0i1'mcnt not m.rmally co-
quircd or wed tar 1:mjc<Lrts, sound rrprodudien,
flood, be otter special such lamps M other equipment
shall
be iu•talled in such trn0dts or r«mu, except
remoto-wmr•:1 ss itchrs for the control of auditorium
I," di or a soit,h (m tIT motor o; oat..g the curtain
at the mOIi-Ticture screen.
5419. Con,tru<tion and Ventilation. it is re<om•
mrndal ti:a[ tits awh,rtuY Im.ng jurinJicG.vt avrr the
emlauuctuut and semilan•m of -rat, for prul<ea:oral
ryPe Vn•je• ton rein m du atandarls ad the National
IloaN Of Foe lindern dten. S« I'ubb.atmn No. 49,
Nllwcdluloae SWO- I'irture Faca,
a
-3i ARTICLE 510
Construction
3431. Equipment and Projeetora of tho Profes-
sional Type. Equipmto and Projector of the pro-
fessional type shall comply with the following:
a• Aroved Type. Projectors and enclosures far
are orppmcandcscent lamps, rectifiers, transformers,
rheostats, and similar equipment, shall be of an ap.
proved type.
b• Name Plate. Projector and other equipment
as set forth in paragraph a of this section, stall be
marked ,ith the nam, or tidemark of the linker
and with the voltage and current for which they are
designed.
e.
ProlcZorsPof 1Pa non -Prof o cO sip al Non ll3'Pt tah�atliftompy
with the following:
and carper c retro Ing ev cte oandl s milarcdevic.
ces
stall be approved 23 component parts of the pmjec-
lor equipment.
b. Name -Plate. Projectors shall be market with
rent
and voltaReafor which they areadesigntdh aoJ for rpro-
jetlors of this type using the standard 33 millimeter
film, with the wording "Por use with slow -burning
rrlms only:"
a Source of IllurNnation. The sourer of alumina.,ton shall Le a Tamp of a type approved for 3ttreop.
rico" use or for motion -picture projection.
d. Film to Be Marked. The slow -burning (cello•
lose acetale or equivalenQ film shall have a perms.
hent distinctive marker for its entire length identify
tog the manufacturer and the slow -burning character
of the film stock
SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIMITING 233
CHAPTER 6. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
ARTICLE —IGNS AND OUTLINE
LIGHTING
6001. Scope. The provisions of this article shall
apply so 1111 installation of conductors and equipment
for signs and outline fighting as defined in Arli<le IW.
6002 Switch Required, Each outline IightinR in-
stallation, and each sign of other than the portable
type. shall be controlled by an externally -operable
switch which will open all ungrounded conductors.
6003. In Sight of Sign, The switch required by
sexton UJd2 shall be wishin sight of lite sign or out-
lint hghtinR w•htrh it comrols or nhebe located
eta lure J capable of being locked to the open posh -
tion.
6004. Rating. Switches, flashers, and similar de-
vices canrral:+nR UsuaformRs shall p< either of a
type approreA for the purpose, or Cave a current ret.
tog nal less than twice the current rating of the trans.
formers.
6005. Grounding• Sign, troughs, t
born and other mesal lramts ,Cali he terminal
Iht manner specified in Artid< 7c be grounded in
They an insulated from e. 0 of dna code, unless
$r and and It— other con-
du.lmg surlac<s ar,J are +nacceniLIt to unauthorised
Psra.lns. The dopa net aOPiy so signs a( [he arsablt
ir.:arvinrrnl IahnP rYDe nor to partablr Ono csccnt-
lamp rvl.e where the op<n•ciruit units' < dors n t
raced 150 volts D1 grlund, holal< ; q
barrymg rr.ryl Paas e( .Sime Itgltting n,ay be 1 ,oiled
CY yn 11 r 5 duaan and groun4ed to accordance
alit Arl,dr 1..0.
6006. Load of Hench CirtdL Circuits shall be
w arrargrd that the number e( enCi tart and
Vansfor connected to II:en1.:lull in no papa place
mare titan IS amps,,, on a Crarrh eirntit
ma 7•s Mra••r� 4 f,.,, red 11 be marked with the
u crit -late➢ Signa .flit
tF.r nvm!:<r of lamphold<n, and (or eler'Irie diss
rhar e
Teansb ,men .bill henrg k j rata or volt•amper
It't the makee'a name.
234 ARTICLIf 61,1
and transformers for electric discharge signs shall be
marked with the input coring to amperes or vnll-
amperes, the input voltage anel the open -circuit Ligls-
« nsion volaRe. The marking of the sign shall ba
visible for inspection after installation.
6008. Enclosures. Enrinsnrea for signs and out-
line lighting shall conform to the following:
a. Conductors and Terminals. Sign bones, eabi.
nets, and outlintr
e oughs shall have mnduelors and
terminals, except the supply leads, enclosed.
b. Cutouts, Flasher, Etc. Cutouts, BasLers and
similar devices, if a part of the sign, shall be in Is
aeparate compartment. If not a part of the sign, they
shall be cndosed in anPmved metal box,: the doors
of which shall be arnngal so that they nu be opened
without removing obstructions or finished parts of
the enclosure
e Enclosure Exposed to the Weather. F.ntlasstrca
for Out' use shall Lc w,alherpronf ansl shall lave
an ample number of drain holes, tach not larger than
hall noX incht fie made through thellLaltoms of enclosures
exposed to the weather unless the enclosures are of
the taint
tght type.
d. Ma'I L Except for portable signs of c l in-
door type, signs and o0thne lighting shall ba con-
atmeted of meal or other non-combmtible matcriaL
Wood may be used for external decoration if placed
at least 2 inches from the nearest lamphoider or cur-
...t",ying Part.
n. Strength. Enclosures shall have ample slrenglh
and rigidity.
L Thickness of Metal Sheet copper shad be at
least 20 ounce (0.028 inch). Sheet steel may be of
No. 28 USS gauge (.0149 inch) except that for outline
lighting and for deetric discharg, signs slice. steel
shall be of No. 24 USS gauge (.0239 inch), unless
ebbed, corrugated or embossed over its entire sur-
face, when it may be of No. 26 our
gauge (.0179
inch).
g. Protection of Metal. All metallic parts of en.
closures slap be galvanized or otherwise protected
from corrosion.
SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIGIrrrSG Sys
Tube Terminale
boll. Tube Terminale. The I,rrninals shall be so
designed Thar the tubing can be replaced wnhoul the
ne""Ity of exPosing uninsulated live part,. If the
spring
comas type of recejtllc i, useJ, rt :lull be
ao designed tial, euro auh the'lube removed, site live
.Pring will be recessed a distasquat la :bice times
the diameter of lbs recepade opening. ,com-
mended that the primary circuit b, eantrolleJ by a
relay that will open the circuit Mien a lace in the
secondary shoals is broken or remm•,d. 1_ive pans
.hall be Pros,tted Ly Barrien .hid, require other Than
ordinary tools such s. plirr. and s<rnv-driven f
removal unieas access W the parts rrrrytrs the dis-
ur
Canne,liun of lite priurary --,t. Sec stctions 42U2
and 603-1.
Signa and Outline Lighting -600 Volta or Len
6071. InHalladon of Conductor. Conductors .lull
be inhaled as follows:
a. Wlrfng Meshed. Cnndaaors shall be installed
as aPcn m duaors un nsu7ator, or in rigid metal
cmtdlit, flexible mewl conduit, elecsrital metallic tub-
ing, armored cable, or metal lr mghm,
b. Insulation and Si.!. Conductor shall be of a
1-1pe approval ler 811 ns< and, excei•t in portable
arRm and fur slwrt "ads Peanatmolly xauhed Iu
Wilph-ld". or ballasts, :hail be nut smaller Ilan
No. 14.
a Fred to the Weather. Cnndunon fn rigid
conduit, electrical metallic tubing. Oex�ble metal tun•
dais, armored cable, or in metal Iroughmg exposed to
the x•<asher, salt Lc of she lead-cuv,rcd ISP, or oU,a
type sPctallY approved int the randiunn., eaePt
where rigid conduit, elennral mrtaliia Iubmn^ ar <n.
closures are mask rauuiRhl d arranged to Jnr.
d. Number of Canduttonanfn Racewa
Oashen Uhe numb,, of cor,Aunor y. F
Wror sign
frig ay be us xwrdance »•hh Table 9 o,'N,p` 10.
a. Open Conduaon. Open condadur nn imu•
lato�s shall cunlply with the Pani"" of Semon.
3W- w 3,211 in, I., "I. Anile 320, and. i( out d•: ,
Article ]!U, except that lite sepaoli•:n etwnn rmt-
duavra need be o11Y 3 inches; providtd, that opt"
3x2
16
ass ARTICLE 600
conductors mayI be supported by lampholders located
not more than toot apart.
L Conductors Soldered to Terminate. Where the
conductors are fastened to lampholdera other than
Of the pin type, they shall be soldered to tine termi-
nals and the exposed parts of conductors and termi-
nals shall be treated to prevent corrosion. Where the
conductors are fastened to pin -type lampholders which
Protect the terminals from the entrance of water, and
which have been found acceptable for sign use, the
conductors shall be of the stranded type but need not
be soldered to the terminals.
6022. Lampholders. Lampholders shalt be of the
unswitched type having bodies of suitable insulating
material and shall be eco constructed and installed as
to prevent turning. Miniature lampholders shall not
be employed for outdoor signs and outiine lighting.
Signa and Outline Lighting—Exceeding 600 Volts
6031. Installation of Conductor, Conductors shall
be installed as follows:
s Wiring Method. Conductors shall be installed
a. open worn, as concealed conductors on insulators,
in rigid or flexible metal conduit, or in electrical
metallic tubing. Conductors may be run from the ends
of tubing to the grounded midpoint of transformers
specifically designed for the purpose and provided with
terminals at the midpoint. \V here such connections
are made to the transformer grounded midpoint, the
connections b
etwcen the high-voltage terminals of the
transformer and the line ends of the tubing shall be
as short as possible,
It. Insulation and Sire. Conductors shall be of is
type approved for the purpose and for the voltage
of the circuit, and shall be not smaller than No, 14.
e Bends in Conductors Sharp bends in the con-
ductors shall be avoided.
d, Open Conductor—Indaor. Open conductors
indoors shall be mounted an non-combustible, non-
absorptive insulator& Insulators of porcelain shall be
glazed on all exposed surfaces. A separation of at
least 1% inches shall be maintained between conduc-
tors and between conductors and other objects Con -
SIGNS AND OUTLINE LIGHTING ISI
doctors shall not be located where subject to mechan-
sal injury.
e. Concealed Conductors on Insulators -Indoors
Concealed conductors on insulators shall be separated
from each other and from all objects other than the
insulators an which they are mounted by a spacing of
cwt less than I% inctim for volages above Io,0o0
volts, and not less tion 1 inch for voltages of 10,000
'tar less. They shall be installed in channels lined with
nen-combustible material and used for no other per-
gon. except that the Primary circuit conductors may
e in the same channel. The Insulators shall be of
non-combustible, nun•aLsorplire material.
f. Show -Windows and Similar Locations, If con-.
doctors hang freely in the air, away from
maombus-
lible material, and if not subject to me<haniesl injury,
as !n some show-w-indow displays, they need not be
otherwise therise protected.
g. Conductors in Rarsways, if the conductors are
covered vah lead or other meta sheathing, the cov-
ering shall emend beyond the end of the raceway,
and the surface of the table 'loll not be injured. where
the covering -...,n.. In dame or w•et ncariona.
the insulating nn all conductors shall extend beyond
the meal ern-rri.q or n[eway at bast 4 inches for
volagef os.• It•UUrI, 3 inchra far voltages m<r 5A00
but rat e:e r<drag IQfi00 and 2f '
for rohagea of
5.fa6rf or In+ la dry locations the iosufor shall ex-
Iend LeycR.i tae -.2-1119f
nd of the meal covering or ratt-
ways not tra a 2;i incl:& for voltages over 10,000.
2 mxhes t:r rol'aga uvv S,Op but ret exdinR
For vends Rn at It ours vola¢ea of000 cer
5,or leas.
pat
sia it trialred. Net Ina midP.,int Irnninals, no
from s 771'et Hamformer aLaU'I"t 0l f e of tat taco-
way where rpw<m:al Irrwven tht able and the
raceway i, Writs ll:an S,Orx3 v,ilts.
Is. Open Condactan—O.tdean,
emdrr shat be mz 1m 1 cn ren or'.
r' c.rd,inoo
abve,pliae a( V,rretan shall
be 0.11.1•+ns0 eap,y ul aurlaee<, A aefnratira of sl
Ica rt 2 int ties aLaB Le maiarrn<d L<tw<rn rnn•!ur-
eu'rlecrand
tosictrnecehaa, ju and atl•<r cids,j& %Vb..
jun'• or where within ruck
erns Yr .ad, ru..l. a w.ndaw, c. n, _
-- la;lcn mail L<
Its ARTICLE 600
enclosed in raceways or johab� guarded. If Ruarded,
a spacing of not It's than Ija inches shall be main-
tained betwcen conductors and the enclosure unless
the enclosure is nonconducting and non-combustible,
6032. Transformers. Transformers shall comply
with the following:
a, Voltage. The transformer secondary open-cir-
eult voltage shall not exceed 15,000 voles with an
allowance on test of 1000 volts additional. In end.
grounded tran,formers tilt secondary, open -circuit
voltage shall not exceed 7,500 volts with an allowance
on test of 500 volts additional.
b.
for the purPose a 1 .hall rs shall
l meof i <d in rat rating
maximum of 45tO wdt-ampues, open corcmnd-cod
type transformers shall he limited to 5,000 Qt with
an allowance on test of 500 volts, and to indoor wit
cations in small portable signs. Transformer for Out-
line lighting installations shall have secondary current
ratings not in caress of 30 milliampere, unless they
and all wiring connected to them arc installed !n ac-
cordance with the provisions of r\rti<le 410 for elect
IIIc discharge lightfng of it,, same voltage.
o Exposed to WWhen Transformers used out-
doors shall be of the weatherproof typo or .hall be
enclosed in the sign body or in a separate metal Lox,
d. Transformer Secondary Connections. The high-
voltage windings of transformers shall not be con-
nected in Parallel: and shall net be connected in anseries,
except that two transformers each having one end of
its high-voltage winding connected to tlm metal en-
closure may have their high-voltage windings con-
nected in series to form the equivalent of a midpoint
grounded transformer. The grounded ends shall be
connected by insulated conductors not smaller than
No. 14.
e AceeastbAtty, Transformers shall be accessible -
6033, Tubing. Electric discharge tubing sball,con-
form to the following:
a, Design. The tubing shall be of such length and
design as not to cause a continua.. over -voltage on
the transformer.
SIGNS AND OUPLiNF. LIGHTfVG 2s9
4 Support. Tubing shall be adequately swPorted
on non-combustible non-absorptive supports. Tubing
supports should, if Practicable, be adjustable.
c. Contact with Flammable Material and Other
Surfaces The tubing shall be Gee from contact with
flammable material and shall be located where not
normally exposed to mechanical injury- If operating
in excess of 7,500 volts, the tubing shall be supported
on n.n-comhustiblq non-absorptive, insulating sup-
ports which maintain a spacing of not Irss than Si
nth between the tubing and lite nearest suits
6034. Termiesals and Receptacles for Electdece. Ms.
charge Tubing. Prnniluth and ....ptaclrs fur electric
discharge tubing stall comply with the iollewing:
a. Terminals The (ermined' of the tubing shall be
Inaccessible to unqualified Persons and isolated from
combustible m-lerisl and grounded metal or shall be
enclosed. If enclosed they shall be -P -,.(,d from
from Rreundvd metal and comLushLle ttnmrial by
non-combnmlLle non-absorptive, insulating material
Ta�ppproved for the vurs lose or by I5: -bus of ai,.
rrminais shall Le 116-1d from stress by the indt-
Pcndcnl supPort of the rub: ng.
L Tube Connections Other Than With Raepta.
Cies 11 lubes do not terminate in recegtacies designed
for the purpose, all live parts of lube termiu-1, and
conduct,.'. shall be so supported as lo. maintain a seq-
araiion of at loaf ISi inches betwcen conductors or
between conductors and any grounded meal.
e Receptacles F.learode reeeDtardea for the tub.
In "a be of non-combustiblt, n -,n. bs pn,o heu-
la1mg material approved for the purpose.
d Bwbings. Where el«(rodeo enter the eneto•
sure of ..,d..r signs or of an indoor sign operating
al a voltage in excess of 750) sells, buvhmgs shall be
used unless recePtacles are pravidcd ur the sign is
wined with bare wire mnuu(ed on approsed support
which maintain the nt R In praPer P-altien. Bush-
ings -hall be of non -roc nbustibk, non-aLwrptivt Ina.
serial. Where bare wiring ICL used, the toa.luctnr'ball
ba not los than Nu. Ii s.1id A1Ppce shalt be sup-
ported so as so Prevent sagging and Idcening of the
spumg rcquhed elsewhere m this ane k, an,l th,
(rods unniral aeaenoLlie. shill be of an a, pruvtd ,,
MM
46
66
240 ARTICLE 600
and supported not more than 6 inches from the glee.
trode terminals.
e, Show -Windows. In the exposed type of show.
window signs, terminals shall be (t) enclosed by re-
eepLacics approved for the purpose or (2) %•here hang.
ing in air, free from grounded surfaces, enclosed in
alcoves of vulcanized fiber, phenolic composition, or
other suitable material which overlaps all live parts
by at ]cast A inch,
f. Receptacles and Hushing Seals. A flexible, non.
conducting scat may be used to close the opening
between the tubing and the receptacle or busbing
against the entrance of dust or moisture. This seal
shall not be in contact with grounded conductive ma.
feria, and shall not be depended upon for the insuta-
lion of the tubing.
C- Enclosures of Metal. Metal enclosures for elec-
trodes shall be of not less than No. 24 USS gauge
(.0237 inch) .Leri metal.
h. Enclosures of Insulating Material. Enclosures
of insulating material shall be non-combustible, non-
absorptive and approved for the voltage of the circuit.
6035. Switches an Doom. Doors or covers giving
access to uninsulaled parts of indoor signs or outline
lighting exceeding 600 volts and accessible to the
general public. shall either be provided with interlock
switches which on the opening of the doors or covers
disconnect the primary circuit, or shall be so fastened
that the use of other than ordinary toola will be neves.
Bary to open them
6036. Marking. All signs shall be marked with the
maker's name, and for incandescent -lamp signs with
the number of lampholders, and for electric discharge
sign, with input rating in amperes or volt-amperes.
Transformers shall be marked with the makes name,
and transformers for electric discharge signs shall be
marked %fill the input rating in amperes or volt -am.
Peres, the input voltage and the open -circuit high.
trillion voltage. The marking of the sign shall be
visible for inspection after installation.
6037. Enclosures. Enclosures for signs and outline
Ii
ghting shall conform to the following:
SIGNS AND OUTLIVE LIGHTING 2+1
s. Conductors and Terminals. Sign boxes, cabinets,
and outline troughs shall have conductors and fermi.
mill, except the supply leads, soclosed.
Is. Cutauta, Flashers, Etc Cutouts, flashers, and
similar devices shall be enclosed in metal boxes the
If...
of which -lull be arranged so that they can be
opened without removing obstructions or finished
parts of the enclosure:
a Enclosures Exposed to Weather. Enclosures for
outside use shall be weatherproof and shall have an
ample number of drain holes, each not larger than 95
I
nch or smaller than 34 filch
d. Materia]. Except for portable signs of the in.
door type, signs and outline lighting shall be con,
afrucl<d of metal or other non-comb®Uble material.
Wood may be used forexternal decoration if pit attd
rent-carcying part. e least 2 inches from the nearest lampholder or cur.
,Strength Enclosures shall have ample stm gth
and rigidity.
LThickness of Metal, Sheet copper shall be at
least 20 ounce (0.023 inch). Sheet steel may be of
No. 28 USS Range CON9 inch) except that for
eutlire 11Rlning and for -!carie dischargQe signs sheet
steel shall be of No. 24 USS gauge ( 02J9 inch), un-
1—ribbed, corrugated or embossed over its entire
surface, when it may be of No, 25 USS gauge (.U1-9
inch),
g. Prateedon of Metal. All metallic parts of enclo.
nares shall Le galvanised or -therw;+e pr¢t<ded Ir¢m
snrrcafcv.
ARTICLE 610—CRANg9 AND HOISTS
6101. Scope. The prov;.ious of this article shall
aL1y to clic fvataliatf:,^ ni .rare. rune runw+YL
}.: rte, ar.A .roncr+'. In.talla+:oAa iu is ranirms Imo•
,mistl uomplY w.th I- pruvige,11 W soul% 508J.
rf .arse:, L ria I ax4 Ari.ra < Arrr
jWilling
.
6111. Types of CordocCen4actms shall be
c( u:< ru..bss-e¢vered t7p< tarepl;
212 ARTICLE 610
a. Exposed to High Temperatares. Conductors
exposed to —ere external (real, and those between
1e951-1 and conmrt plates, if not exposed to nmis.
lure, shall be a,br.tos insulated (Types AA or :VA),
or if the temper.nure lore not rxceed 90C (194F),
slow -burning ('Type Sit). If exp.md to moistme. such
conductor, shall be rubber -covered or Type AVL. If
rubber -covered conductors are Rr011 the group
shall he taped with a liamrproof covering.
b. Contact Conductors. Contact conductors along
runways, crane bridges and monorails may be bare
and may be of hard drawn copper, or aluminum, or
steel in the form of lees, --Ries, tee rails, ar other
Stiff shapes
t Flexible Conductors. Flexible conductors may
be used to convey current and where practicable, able
reels or take-up devices may be employed.
d. Vamiahed Cambric Conductors, Varnished.
Cambric conductors (t) -pe V) or asbestos varnished
cambric (type AVA and AVD) may be used in dry
locations.
6112. Conductor Sizea. Conductors shall be of the
followingails .
s. Currant -Carrying Capacity. The allowable me -
rent -carrying capacities of conductor. shall be as
follows:
CRINES AND HOISTS 245
Current -Carrying Capacities of Conductors Having
Rubber or Thermoplastic Insulation which Supply
Luse said Hoist Motors
AafpERFS
Sire Fer afvwr, its.�nq Far scars.. H..inr
AwG JSAa rted 60\linute 5. and 15 Slinure
rime Staenn Shdo-em< kmm�
16 10 ]1
14 10 22
12 25 28
]0 35 39
8 45 50
657 67
5 65 72
4 77 85
3 90 99
2 107
1 130 143
0 160 176
00 "121S
000 245 27U
0000 J69 no
250 350 3g5
350 46011 0 510
400 515 570
450 565 610
500 620 65U
The allowable current -carrying capacities of con.
doctors having oiler than ruL.m: .r thrrmapLsuc
Insulation. supplying nwtors of 5-, 15,, 3U-, or N3-
minule ratings, shall be as given in Tables I and
Chapter 10, increased by 10 per rent,
Farthe carrying capacity of conductors between
eomrollera and resat... sec sect(.. 4313,
b. Minimum No, 14, Conductors shall .rot be
smaller tion Na 14 e.ccpt,
1, On small cranes and h-411. No. 16 rally be used
gd the I-J.IWrs are protected against mccln
ailnl's, lCal in ury.
2. On operating eircufts Na 16 —)r be used pro-
dded she conductor. arc protected agamat —hauled
,,.jury.
;J
Is
6
Dat ARTICLE 610
e. Contact Conductor. The size of contact wires
A14 be not less than the following:
H�"M bani,— end Sire of
ua on wire
0.30 feet Na 6
31.60 feet No. 4
over 60 feet No. 2
6113. Whing Method. Conductors shall be enclosed
in eaecsvays, except:
a. Bare Conductor. Pare onductors may be used
as coulact Conductors.
dubtar0paen eConpuet ar�i SI ectursgnccdfnotebecon.
en-
closed.
C Flexible Connertona Where flexible contt•
tions are nrec,-, 1 m. vrs and similar equip•nenp
JuetOrr rubbrv. .,. d a iblereor Cao ePProvp iilc non•
metallic cnclo„ c nay be employed.
d. Pendent Punt -Burton Stations. Where mol.' I
conductor cab i. ssr•I n•iW a SusP%ded r`uN ut, n
station, tlw si.iio• muss be supported in some saris•
d cwry man,. r •at will protect the electrical con.
doctors again., B rain.
I-av6•ing racftc�ay shall comply
wifhmil nthe Provisions of
sections Stir. std 3.707,
115.
r.
ate" y m. revoo one motof- cvme or hoist is r.. common returnncon-
doctor of prover current- carrying capacity may be
used.
Contact Conductor
8121. ftssllimem of Contact Conductors. Bare
contact conductors shall conform fo the following:
ontact
ires. If
conduCors theyµshall be secured atrI Ic endused s by means
on approved insulators in lthatsthcde3 all
be so
htoitmounted
dila
placement of the ,vire will note
ot bring the lamer within
less than lya inches from the surface wired over.
b. SuPPorts Along RRX—y% hfafn contact con-
ductors carried along runways shall be supported on
insulating suppors.placcd at intervals not exceeding
CRANES AND mOISTS eta
20 feet. and these supports shall be ,.....ling execpl
for grounded rail conductor as providcJ in pargrapls
I
of this section. Surh coductors shall be separated
not less Than 6 inches except for monorail hoists
where a spacing of mol Irss ,ban J inches may be used.
Where necessary, intervals be,,,, In insulating sup-
yarla may be increased up to 40 feet, the separation
between conJuctors bang incrrastI proportionately.
C Sapporo on Bridges. Bridge contact conduc-
I— shall be kept at least 2y inches apart and, i( the
span at i.,s SO feet, insulating saddles shall be
placed at intervals not exceeding SO feet.
h 2 rmae. h Wn i$< d:mvw baweev vertu h Wranr
Wan d3f ircaa waere., o, a1,o
d.a!ong Supporta !or Rigid Cofactor, Canductars
seri&dnio section 6111-bndit" if
of the rigid t se
P L„shall 4- carried on i su•
lating supporta spaced at intervals ai not more than
fN limes the vertical dimension of the canJutlor, but
I' no case greater flsn 15 feet, and spaced apart . but
eiendy to Rive . Clear electrical seParnion of can•
ffi-
ductors or adjacent collectors Of not Tess than 1 roll,,
raa aTeranen Cireait Conductor. If... all, trae-
run nay ne P11 ma➢ be used as a <on-
ducmr of carrot for one Phase of a three phase oiler•
rating -tree.. system furnishing power ro the carrier,
'lllutfi kAr trolley, pmvidrd the (allowing conditions xre
1 The c"Ifir"or,
for auppl➢ing the other two
pha sea r.( the W+over supply $hail be inthe .,.
2. The power far all phm ,shall
an he obtained from
m>u! lmg trap stnrmer.
3. The -!;.Re ..onehall not ..reed 30) ycl[a,
4 Fh< rail 1+; 4a ant ""be shall be effrc.
_,ly even. r•, Prrl y
HSl sfanuer, oahly a/ the
t. Electrical Centinuiry d Coa
e<ris.e cl Joined
c�tl ii<aball Le
1-1-
111 ally Icued b press le a ennl•rmrua tknricll
«.r,cea:w.
K. Net to est Sup
1. ply Other F-quipinn[ r•onl:rt Inn•
dort•dull hs roti as Ir<deq far auY egaip-
maR oltar dao rtm mr,< s,r cores wbhh the
pr.:a.anly d<,.gcM to at(:e. y are
246 ARTICLE 610
h. Isolating or Guarding CCIPtontact Conductors. Ex•
admitted,
in locations to whici, only qualified persona are
admimeJ, contact conductors shall Le so isolated by
elevation or be Provided with auilablc Ruardc so ar-
ranged that persons cannot inadvertently touch Ill.
current.c... yfnX Parts while in contact with the
ground or will, conducting material connected to the
ground.
6122. collector!. col
lectera shall be so designed as
to reduce to a minimum $Parking between them and
the contact eondu<lo” and when operated in rooms
useJ for Um storage of easily ignitible combustible
fibers and nlalerials the requirements of section 5083
shall be camp led with.
Control
6131.
A'iscannRecj uY_ Conductor beDisco Disconnecting
tingvrMe the
runway contact canductora and the power supply,
Such disconnecting means shall consist of a molly
circuit switch or Circuit•break-" except that a general.
use switch may be used lehen the disconnecting means
is provided in accordance wills �eciion 6132. This
disconnecting means 511,111 be reaJily accessible anis
operable front the ground, shall be .rranged to be
lock," in tine open position, shall open all ungrounded
+gh of it" 'ralnenoruhioist and tithe ll brunw,,ydcoutap[
c-nduclors.
6132. Disconnecting Meana for Crime. if cranes
are operated from cages or cabs, a motor -circuit
a, nch r circuit -banker shall be pr6vided in the
lead. Iron Ibe runway contact conductors. The switch
m need banker shall be in the cage or cab or
mourned , n the bridge and operable from the cage
or cab %hex the trolley is a one end of the bridge.
6133. Rating of Disconnecting Means for Crane.
On both ahcrnuing-tureen[ and if
crane
Protective panels, the continuous ampere rating of the
and mmnswitch -0ineeran; actors,b I,rshall betno by sethnn50 per
cent of the combined short -time ampere ratings per
file motors, nor less than 75 per cent er the $um of
of
the ahorl•timt ampere ratings of Ili- motor. required
for any single crane motion.
TROLLEY CONDUCTORS yr
6134. Limit Switch A limit switch shall be pra
vidcd for upper limit of travel of erne hoist%
Overcuertat Protection
6141. Contact Conductors. The main cotta,[ con-
Jucwr shall be protected by an avtrcurcent device.
6142, Crane Moron, It marc than one motor is
employed on a Iran" cads motor�shail have individ-
ua] as•rrcurrem protection as Provided in Article 4d0,
except d„t if two motors operate a single haio, car-
riage, truck, or bridge, and arc controlled as a unit
by one contraller, the pair of motors ,;it, their leads
may be Protected by a single overeurrent device which
$hall be located in the cage or cab if Iherc is one.
6143. Redefors—Enclosure. 1[ a ,cone operaea
aver readily a vvell:ble material, m ¢ol" shall
be plxrd in a welbventilaitd caLincl composed of
non-rmnLnstiLle material so constructed that it will
mol emit panics or when metal, vxcePt where the
resisiara are IncaleJ iu a Ogg Or cab constructed of
non -co I orUble nstrri:d a9 o ran;loses the sides of
the cage or cab drum the door Ia a point at least 6
inches above the lop of tis rc islors.
6116 Grounding• \furor (ramex, rocks, the entire
frame oI a crane ur hoist, and ea.es of <oulrullera
elsll be graundad in ilie niannrr sPedfieA jn lr. ,,
256. Small pnrtab[I hails $hail Lc grounded when
required by sail,, 2545.
ARTICLE 4513—TROLLEY CONDUCTORS
61ST. Scope, The provisinro of thh article shall
apply to in.ud6tium or trolky wires and feeders for
supplying choreic latommivca and cars.
6152. Insulation o[ Trollay Wira, Trailey wires
shall have m Imo two separate and distinct insula.
tion tram Ibe f:round. A wa:
4b
62-
248
L
248 ARTICLE 620
elevators and dumbwaiters. Innallana in baxarJ-
ous locations shall also comply with Aati. Cie 500. In-
stallatfona in garages shall also comply with Article
510.
6202. Voltage Limitations The following voltage
limitations shall apply to elevator-coutrol and operat.
Ing equipment:
a. Gr Control System No part of any electric
circuit having a voltage in excess of 750 shall be used
on any car control system. Circuits of higher voltage
may be used in machine rooms or pent houses for
the operation of motors and brakes, provided that all
control and signal wiring is thoroughly insulated from
such porter circuits, and all machine frames and metal,
hand -operated ropes are permanently grounded.
b. Automatic Eievaton. The maximum voltage
permitted in (lie operating devices of automatic Cie.
vstor, having operating devices in the car and at the
landings, shall be 300 volts to ground.
mals Buttons The maximum voltage permitted
on C I' thepush buttons of elevator signalling circuits
shall be 300 volts to ground.
6203. Live Parte Enclosed. All live parts of elee.
trical apparatus in or on elevator can or in elevator
hoistw•ays shall be enclosed to protect against asci.'
denial contact.
5204. Insulation of Conductor. The insulation of
.conductors installed in or on elevator equipment shall
comply with the following:
a In Auxiliary Gutter. In auxiliary gutters used
in machine rooms, under controllera, starters and sim.
ilar apparatus for elevator machines, Conductors shall
be of the rubber -covered or thermoplastic covered
type.
b. Control -Panel Wiring. Conductors between
main circuit resistors and the back of control panels
1, all be suitable for in operating temperature of not
leas than 90C (194F). All other wfnng on control
WC (140F), shalless be of the mbbeto a rvcov<red aerature r tb<rmog-
Plastic Covered type or shall be a other type specially
approved for the purpose.
ELEVATORS 149
a Elevator Controller Circurb, Conductors or
groups al conductors having flame-retardant outer
cover shall rat be used as connection., for the operat-
ing circuits of elevator controllers unless such outer
covering is also moisture-reaistant
A+b<uo+ and ether rw.in.r b. rbine tmerinq+ are oat rcu
e- minded Ivr the eDerauns e,reviy +rhe «eerma whrn cora➢
may carry evouah sura.. is ..c+e the tomrel:er tv tuncnon tv
rwr«ay and tin mcontn Imctiovins may Is a its EaaN.
d. Traveling Cables Traveling cables used as flex-
-e connections bctuxcn the at aril the hoisdray
dull be types E or EO levator cable, or other ap-
proved type, anJ shall have a flame-retardant and
moisture.resistant outer Cover.
e. Fired Wiring. For wiring for elevator operal.
ing, control circuits, and signalling circuits, <onJuc-
lors shall be rubber.cm'creJ or thermoplastic covered
with :nsulatinn of not Itis than 2/W inch in thickness.
6265. Minimum S4e of Canductors- The minimum
afire of conductors for elevator wiring shall be as fol -
lawn:
a. For lighting circuits. No, 14, except that for
Ou:Lility two or more
'&,16 conJuctors may be used
io Dara0el hp traveling cas and oct the wr.
b. For elevator operating and control circuits, No.
Id
c Fcr signal dreuiha and fcrfoll6xturca, No. 18.
�t7641 We C.pl. sod.. The owing wiring meth -
a, In Hoiatwaya- Cun4uctnrs located in the hoist -
way. xc<DI trawling nblea snA can Juaon used in
ugna% ayn<m. c( Claasn 1 cr 2, -hall be instilled in
rigvl ,'ine mdun use d<rtrical me411it tubing, extt t that
Ika,t' «w4uit cr am:r n4 caLIt may be used be-
loes tar a-;-ld-kca, anehis- intelo<k,, push but-
ts. Gn Else Gr. Candu,%, Inv<lin Cable,on tY.e tar ,lull be run in rig,'4 t uiq ,enable,
metallic lubmg or wireways, except that chart runs
cL-
1. Fl ,,d a to wrddt oY< ! w¢crtd cable may be used
w to e Ifem
I......4 is place. til, and aro-urelY
uaud
if :
250 ARTIME 620
2. Type S card may be used as the flexible con-
nection between the fixed wiring on the car and the
switch on the car door or gale if securely fastened
in a position not liable to mechanical injury.
G Between Motors, Generators and Control
Panels. The conductors of circuits between motors,
generators,and eonvol panels may be grouped with.
out any additional insulation of the separate condue.
tors if the <amplete group is either taped or corded,
and such covering properly Pained with an insulatingg
F,int; pravided that such Conductors are not over 6
eet tang. are supported at intervals not more than
3 feet and are not so located as to be subject to
mechanical damage. If motor -generators are used
with elevator motors and hot], are located adjacent
to or underneath the control equipment and are pro-
vided with extra length terminal leads, such leads may
troller
extended to connect directly to the elevator con-
troller or momr-generator starter terminal studs with.
out regard to the cugmg upscity requirements of
Article 430 and 445; provided, that no such lead is
longer than 6 feet
Installation of Conductors
6211. Raceway Terminal Fittings Conductors
leaving raceways shall comply with the provisions of
sections 3008 and 3009, but in no case shall the met.
way
terminale less than 6 inches from the floor.
6212. Split Fittings. Split fittings or clamp fittings
may be used on exposed conduit or electrical metallic
tubing except where the conduit or tubing contains
feeders.
6213. Supports Supports for Pipes, conduits, and
armored cable shall be securely fastened to the guide
rail or hoistway construction.
6214. Number of Conductors In Raceway- The
number of operating and control -circuit canducton
installed in a raceway may be in accordance with
Table 9 of Chapter 10.
5215. Auxiliary Gotten. The restrictions of sec-
tion 3742 as to length of auxibary gutters, and of
section 3745 as to number of conductors fn auxiliary
gutters, shall not apply.
6216. Lighting and Slgnal Circuits Separate Can.
doctors of car -lighting circuits, and signal systems
ELEVATORS 251
when not an integral part of the elevator wiring ays-
t<m, shall be separated and run in separate traveling
cable, and raceways:
6217. Different Systetm In One Ghis or Racaway.
Conductors for elevator circuits, including ops ,ml`,,
control and power conductors, and signal conductors
when an integral part of [lie wiring system, may be
run in the same traveling cable or raceway system
when the power supply is from the same source, even
though the chancteristics of the voltage and/or cur.
rent maybe changed within the system by rectifying,
transforming or other converting device supplied
from the elevator feeder circuit; provided that all Con-
ductor, are insulated for the maximum voltage found
in the cable or raceway system, and the live pans of
the equipment are insulated from ground for this max.
imum voltage. Such a travelingcable or raceway may
also include a pair of telephone conductors to serve is
telephone in the car, provided such conductors arc
insulated for the maximum voltage found in the cable
or ""way system.
6218. Foreign Wires No electric conduit or cables,
except Ihose used to furnish or control power, light,
heat or signals for the elevator or hoiatways, rhall
have an liPening, terminal, oudet or junction within
the hoistway, but shall be continuous between out.
lets or terminals situated entrnly outside the hoist.
way.
Is Is va InhendM tv p<aawt tae las<rrvDtio„ o/ lcof revs ter
Elie Dmptae et avrr.rim. er Poems i sadnaar<. and Dnn
baa my av innai'sd /or hair Derroee
TravelingGbIn
623E GLIB Ansmbty. Travelling tablet for <ir.
acts other Ili ao si... I shall beof a <ompinte amm-
bly of steel and copper strand ,or may have one or
more supporting filen of cotton cr hemp rope, or of
cul -covered or rubber-rovered sled wve laid up
with the eonductnrs under the outer covering of Elie
,,his le cables containing six aro more <ond.non
die +I<Q supporting ,wands shall run atoight through
and nM be cabled will, the conduct en.
N37. Suapanaion Tnv<SnH cable. far ail signal
sin ma, and for all mbar rirauhs nit r.ver 100 Icer
in "Mill, may be suspended by ..liable clamps d
mVG
Gz
233 ARTICLE 630
the cables an so constructed that the weight of the
cable is not carried by the individual conductors.
6233. Hazardous Locatlons. fn hazardous loca-
tions, traveling cables shall be secured to explosion
Proof cabinets by heavy -duly rubber -bushed threaded
conneclor bushings scaled off at the enclosure as pro-
vided in ...tion 5015. For trssl,ng cables for use
in hazardous I...lions see Table 31.
6234. Protection for Swinging Cables. Wherever
the traveling cables in Swinging may cons ,n Con-
tact with projections or corners of the building con.
struction in the boistway, such as I beams, ledges
and the Tike, such irregular surface, shall be ,tad.
smooth by covering with heavy gauge sheet metal or
Other suitable means.
Control
6241. General. There shall be in addition to the
elevator controller, a means for disroll-cling all con.
doctors of the circuit to the elevator motor, or in the
case of generator Reid control. to the motor of the
molor•R<ncralor set which aupPl.Is current to the
elevator ma tor.
r(. Type. The disconnecting means shall be a
nsotor•circuit switch and may be (1) ire externally.
operable sa•it<h capable of being locked in the open
position, or (2) open switehe, or circuit -breakers on
three or more ertcuits, grouped on a switchboard ac.
ceasiblc to qualified persons only.
Is. Location. it shall be looted adjacent to sort
bevisible from the elevator machine, unless a di,con-
nect asvitch in the control circuit of the motor -genera.
for set is placed adjacent to and ,s visible frothe
elfrom the
machine.
6242. Limit Switches. Final over -nn limit switches,
mounted in the hoistway and up
by the mon-
ment of the car+ shall be provided for upper and lower
limits of travel for all levators, which shall act to
prevent movement of the car in both directions of
travel. See Article 510 for elevators located I.
gauges.
6243. Phas. Protection.. Electric elevators used to
convey persons, if operated by a polyphase alternat.
ing-current motor, shall be provided with a device
which will prevent starting she motor if;
ELEVATORS 273
a. The phase rotation is in the wrong direction, or
b. There is a failure in any phase.
Overcurrent Protection
6251. No. 16 Conductors. If No. ]8 conductor is
used for signal circuits, it shall be protected by fuses
rated at not to exceed 3 amperes.
Machine Room
6261. Gnarling Equipment The elevator machine
and controller shall be malalkd in . room set aside
for that purpose, ar isolated by elevation or by mean.
of an enclosure or wire grille or the like, to prevent
atcide,ta3 contact by persons or object, This room
may also contain other m>,,inery used for the con.
trol and signaling of the elevator.
6262. Clearance Araand Control Panel.. The fol-
lowing c1caransn shall be provided:
a Grouped Panel' If a group of three or nwr<
elevator<onlrol panels having wir,nq on the rear e
located in a single machine morn, shore shall be s
is
working space of at least J6 inches back of the live
parts. and not len than I8 inches e, at I .1 one side
o/ the group. There aluil oho be at least 76 inches
of working space in front of the panels.
b. Sirs& or Double PaneJa An installation con.
s,s1mR cf orve or Iwo panels .h.il have at least 24
Inches working span in the rear, and at last 36
inches working span in the hunt a the panel or
panels; and tiure shall be a l" on, M inch,, working
s;nta on one side if else panel Is s,nRk, .rid on each
aide d rhe panel i. a double one, Smaller eleatanco
pernsisriratharsed in <rrp:n a;"ific ease. by spec,.,
Tisa is nee in 414 w Iwt!4 I"
"
meua!'o aa.rrbc
, ria ma
tial oI
Ir �as.b �a4 tau � in'.:+riiw s ° ':*nutlr r coed.
ecus :i::) .gym rhe La.k el •a• ..�•,�%s.et....ne<cfrakar
Gro sia4m.
6271. Mcul Jtaceways Mtuhy to Cao Conduit
e.1 armcred c,U'< attar hr+l w elevator tare .ball be
I.—Jed to grwrd<d mea] Cane of the qr wish which
they m tan tits.
2" ARTICLE. 630
6272. Electric Elevation. For electric elevators,
the frames of all motors, elevator machines, Control-
lers and the metal enclosures for all electrical devices
in or on the car or in the hoistway shall be grounded.
6273. Non -Electric Elevators. Far elevators other
than electric, if any electrical conductors are attached
to the car, the nidal iun!e of the car, if normally
accessible w persons, shall Lr Kmm!deJ.
6274. Hand -Operated Cables. All hand -operated
metallic shifting ropes or cables slmil be grounded.
6275. Inherent Ground. Equipment mounted on
members of the structural metal frame of a building,
shall I:e'Jeemed to be grounded. ]Ictal car frame,
suPprttcA by metal hoisting cables attached to or
running over sheaeii or drums of elevator machines
shall be declined to he grounded when the machine
is grounded in accanlanee with Article 250.
ARTICLE 630—ELECTRIC WELDERS
6301- Scope. This article amplifies ar modifies
parts of Chapters 1 t,., inclusive of lhia code in order
to properly cover the operating conditions to which
electric welder insmilalions arc suh) .1,,;1. At'cord-
ingly the approprialc provisions of Chapt.rs 1 to 4
inclusive apply to the component parts of electric
welder mstallalions except as otherwise provided in
this article. This article covers extensively used t)•pe,
of welder. which require special treatment, as dislin-
guislred from welders which do not require special
treatment and welders not in common use and not
yet developed to the extent that rating and construe.
non standards are poss,hlC.
Transformer An Welders
6311 CaPylly of Supply Conductor.. The current-
nrrying capacity of conductors shall be as follows:
a Individual Welder.. The rated current-carr)•ing
capacity of the supply conductors shall be not less
than the rated primary current .(,the welder.
Is. Group of Welder, The rated current-carriirg
capacity of conductors which supply a group of
weld-•
era may be Ices than the sum of the rated primary
current, of the welders supplied. The conductor rat.
mg shall he determined in each ease a<cordinR to the
welder loading based on the use to be made of each
welder and the allowance permissible in the event
ELECTRIC WELDERS
that all the welders supplied by the conductors will
not be in use at the once time. The bad value used
for each welder shall take into account both the mag.
nilude and the duration of the load while the welder
,s in use.
<nC min<r1ar,Ae ritwro baled
rn ,m Measenr of he err
1 Ori
lup.r •eider,
to M.<r„r err rent Ia I,rJ
fcr Abe leurrh L. en w tiler, ,nil 6u
r n:a 1 lin cared pamv) <ar,mr ler
al off rhe the remainingB
p.!4r.., .hsu!d rro,iJe amNe marc,,, raterY under bi n
Nnamn rn4iueos ri ti ropnt m !hv ,ria nom termiadie
,vnreraJure el crit mn.lurran. 14rrcmy. v�lara bier than
rM1n,e Ynm are r.<nnw„Lk ,n <a , he.e car xurk i. ,n<F ,hat
a huh o!xrar,n. ilpry eY:I< for ir.J,r,Jual vel4era n imposa:lk.
6312. Overcttrsent Protection. Overcurrent pro-
w d.. A.11 be as pruviJal ,n pauKraphs a and b.
11 the nearest standar) rating of the overcu.. de-
vne used is under the value specified in 'hi, section,
or if the rating or setting specified results in unneces.
s.ry openmg of the oerrourr<nl dcvrce, the next
higher rating or setting may be used.
s. Por Welders. Each welder shall have overcur.
rent prwettion used or set at nal nx,re than 200 per
cent of the rated primary current u( the wlder, ox-
ecpr that an overcurrcnt Device is not rerluircd for a
welder having nn, 1, canJuetors protected by an over.
current device sited or set at not more lura 2.10 per
cent of tine rated Primary current of the welder.
b. For
C.ndueeora Conductors which supply one
or more welders ,lull be protected by an overcuncat
device rated or sit at not more than 200 per cent of
the cim uclor rating,
6717. Controger. A controller shall be provided in
the supnlY I unecli.n of each wcJdrr ,vindr a oat
equipped with a <ootroller moumcJ as an 'lot
par[ of tics welder. The controller shall be a molur-
<,rcuit switch or ,circuit -breaker. The ampere n!inR
.hall be not less than the rated primary eurtenl n
the w<,der, The horsepower rating of a switch used
as a controller shall be not less chin the numerical
value obtained Ly mubiplling the rated primary cur-
rent of the wilder by 01 LL2 oe 0.2i. rrspecuvelY.
for
210-, 440. and 550-1-0 t welders. Thea. faaun
apply to 2 -pole awilhes.
6314, Name -plata. A uamr-plate giving he bellow.
ing inlnrrnaGon ahall he prasv,Jcd: name ,f manulac-
mrer, (rr,laeucy; primary• svllage; rated primary cur.
r crit; max, I—i open•cucuil accandary voltage, .ted
387
7■
G a/
336 ARTICLE 650
secondary current; basis of rating• i.e., the duty cycle,
30 -minute rating or Wminute rating.
Motor•Generator Am Welder
6321. References, lfotor-generafor arc welder in.
stallations are coscred by the appropriate sections of
Chapters I to 4 inclusive apphcable to conductors,
motor, generators and associated equipment. Refer-
ring specifically to the motor supply connections, the
following sections apply to addition to such other pro-
visions as may be .7liable. Conductor rating, see -
lions 4312 and 431G Overcurrent Protection: for
motors, section 4323; for conductors, section 4342.
Comrollers, sections 4304, 4305 and 4383. Disconnect•
mg means, section 4407.
Resistance Welders
6331. Capacity of Supply Conductors. The cur-
rent -carrying capacity of the supply conductors neo-
cssary to limit the voltage drop to a value Permissll.
for the satisfactory performance of the welder is
usually greater than that required to Prevent over.
heating as Prescribed in paragraphs a and b.
a Individual Welders. The rated current -carrying
capacity for conductors for individual welders shall
conform to the following:
1. Varying Operation. The rated current -carrying
capacity of lite supplyy conductors for a welder which
may be up, led at diRcrent times at different value0
of primary curtent or duty. cycle shall be not less than
i0 per cent of the rated prmary current for scam and
automatically fed welder, ant 50 per cent of the
rated Primary current for manually -operated non-
automatic w•eld<ra.
2. Specific Operation The rated current-carrKing
capacity of the supply conductors for a welder wired
for a specific operation for which the actual primary
current and duty cycle arc known and remain on -
changed shall be not less than the product of the
actual primary current and the multiplier Riven below
for the duty cycle at which the welder will be
operated.
D"'
Crete
(Mr cmc) _ 30 a0 70 25 20 IS JO r.3 3.0 or Ins
M. Zuer — .71 .63 .35 .30 .IS .30 JO, .a7 ,22
b. Croups of Welders. Theaced current -carrying
capacity of conductors which 6upply two or more
ELECTRIC WELDERS sv
welders shall be not less than the sum of the value
obtained as explained in paragraph a of this section
for the largest welder supplied, and 60 per cent of
the values of, as explained in paragraph a of
this s«tion for all the other welders supplied.
e Explanation of Terry, (I) The sedprimary
current is the aced lova multiplied by 1,000 and
divided by the rated P...r voltage, using value.
given on the name -plate, (p) The actual primary
current is the current drawn firom the supply circuit
during each welder operation it the particular heat
ap and control setting used. (3) The dote cycle is
the percentage pI the time during which the wdJer
is loaded. Por instance, a .Pot welder supplied by a
hundr d system (216,000 cycles per hour) making four
hundred IS -cycle welds per hour would have . duty
cycle .4 28 per err. (100 multiplied by 15, divided
by 214800, multiplied b 100), A scam welder oyer.
dung 2 cedes ' Pe and 2 cycles "off' would have a
duty cycle of 50 Der ,at
6772. Overcurre, ,*,h` goo Overcurrent rotec•
lion shall b< as prav+drd in It e n.it, ph. a and b of
ovethisrcur_m device us,,, is et standard Eating of the
in this s«tion, er if the curds the value specified
song or setting specified
refulta in unneessary turning a( the overcurrenl de -
vitt, Elie put higlice rating or selling may be used.
a. Por Welder Fadi welder shall have an over-
eu«enc device rated or set at not more than 700
cent of the raced primary current of the welder, per
sept V. an ove_u m dente is o., required for a
<urMe,
de having
rate 1 llr circuit Lrrnecled by an over-
errt of n:e rand rimer c rant more than y)0 «
D Y urte<t of the welder. p
b.
For
Corducton. C"41eC,,.a whirls supply one
or mere welder shall be
device nod or set at not
.Ciro tnanY+an overeurient
the ccndunur rating. s0 per sent of
beaker
6777. sDi.eonnectint Mean., A switch or circuit.
hall be Prm,daJ t.y wh,:h each cord« and
urcuitt!lJh<+tcarrrnt marry inatup" hoot rhe snpyly
nen:ng mean shall be nut less thea rhe this dawn.
The aappiy ci�uawn h maysEa •00d sum thiel niele.
.and as the welder
2S8 ARTICLE 640
disconnecting means if the circuit supplies only one
welder.
6334. Nac-Plate. A e -plate giving the lot
fact
lowing Inmnamformation shall be provided: name of manu-
facturer, frequency, primary voltage, rated kva at 50
per cent duty cycle, maximum and minimum open-
etreuit secondary voltage, short-circuit secondary cur-
rent at maxis... secondary voltage and specified
throat and gap setting.
ARTICLE 640—SOUND RECORDING AND
SIMILAR EQUIPMENT
6401. Scope. This article shall apply to install.•
liana of equipment and wiring used for sound -record-
ing and reproduction, cen(ralized distribution of
sound, public
tronic organs. address, speech -input systems and elec-
6402. Application of Other Articles. Except as
modified by this article, wiring and equipment from
source of power to and between devsces connected
to the interior wiring systems shall console wish the
requirements of Chapters 1 to 4, inclusive, of this
code, and wiring and equipment for public-address,
epeech•input, radio-frequency, audio -frequency sys-
tems, and amplifying equ,Pm,n associated with ratio
receiving station, in centralized'
distribution systems,
shall complY with Article 725.
6407. Number of Conductor in Raceway. The
numberof shall comply conductor,
iitcTables 4 to Il of Chapterrl0 ex ep
with
as follows:
a. Special permission may he granted for the in.
nallatios of two 2 -conductor lead -covered cables in
inch conduit, provided Ih< cross-sectional arca of
each aisle does not exceed .I1 square inch.
b. Special permission may be gamed for the tn-
EH1111ttol of two 2 -conductor N0. 19 lead -covered
cables in 35 to conduit, provided Ilse sum of Ilse
eraaa•sectienal areas of the cables does not eacecd
32 per cent of the internal cross-sectional area of the
conduit.
6404. Wirewaya and AuaOiary Gotten. Wireways
and auxiliary gutters shall comply with the require.
menta of Articles 362 and 374 with the following ex-
50l•\D ACCORDI\G all
eeplions where used for sound -recording and repro-
duction:
a Number of Conductors in Raceway Conductor
in ss•ieways or guuvrs shallnot fill the raceway to
more than 75 per ,of of its depth.
b.AuxiltaryGult<r Covera, If the cover of amil.
tory ,.,go
tiers is flush with the flooring and is subject
to the mm•i++g of have obJcris it shall be of steel
al least s inch to thickness; ii not subject to moving
of heavy object, as in clic rear of Patch or other equip-
ment panels, Else cover slsall be at least Na 10 USS
gauge (.1345 inch).
C' Metal•Trough Raceways. Metal -trough race-
reaya nsay be installed in concealed places tf mit in a
Mnight Imo between outlet or juneltpn base,, Covera
Of boxes must Le accessible. Edge, of meal must
be rounded at outlet or junction bole, and all rough
projections smoothed In P_m abnmon ai insulation
or conducing. Raceway. made of section, shall be
bonded and grounded as prescribed to ,«tion 2575.
d. Oroundi",'In
g Wirewaya and Aaatliacy Goners.
hfetl coir ", and auxiliary guurrs "hall b< ground•
ed in accordance with the requirement, of Article 250.
If the Ilir<waY or auxiliary gutter does not contain
Power supply wire,, the gniundioR conductor need
not be larger than No. 14 copper or it equivalent
1f the wirer aY or auxiliary go,,,,contains pow«
supply wires, thesigrounding condurtnr slwll not be
smaller than the ze for iu on 2595,
6405, Grouping of Conductor. Conductors of dif-
ferent systen+s grouped in the same conduit or other
metallic enclosure, or in portable cord, or cable,,
shall comply with the following requiremem,:
s. Power -Supply Conductor, Power•,upp1Y coo-
durlor. shall be properly identified and ,hall be used
,,it,Y for supplying paver ,0 the equipment to which
the other conductor, are connected.
b, Lead, to Motor -Generator or Rotary Converter,
Input lad, to a nmror•g<n<rucr or sh
11112 converter
,hall be run eparalely from the output :cads.
e. Conductor Insulation The cnsr,Juclon all be
inaulaled individually. or _11_iv,ly in droupa, by
in,uWion at I.... equivalent to rhos on rhe power•
,
260 ARTICLE 640 262 ARTICLE 660
supply and other conductors, except where the power.
supPly slid other conductors are separated by a lead
sheath or other continuous metallic covering.
d. Flexible Cords, Flexible cords and cables shall
be of types P, Ih, S, SJ, or other types specifically
approved for the purpose for which they are to be
used. The conductors of flexible cords, other than
Dosser -supply conductors, may be of a size not smaller
than No. 26 provided such conductors are not in
direct electrical connection with the Power -supply
conductors and are equipped with current -limiting
means so that the maximum power under any condi-
tion will not exceed 150 watts.
e, Terminale. Terminals shall be marked to show
their Proper connections. Terminals for conductors
Other than prover -supply conductors shall be sepa-
rated from the terminal, of 6he power -supply conduc-
tors by a .Pacing at leant as great as the spacing be-
tween power -supply terminals of opposite Polari(y.
6406. Storage Batteries. Storage batteries shall
comply with the following.
I.
Installation. Storage batteries shall be installed
in accordance with Article 480.
Is. Conductor Insulation. Storage -battery leads
shall be rubber -covered or thermoplastic covered.
a Ovemoment Protection. Overcurrent protea
tion shall be provided as follows:
1. "A" circuit, when supplied by branch•IightIng
circuits, or by storage batteries of more than 20 -am•
pere-hour capacity, shall have overcurrent protection
not exceeding 15 amperes.
2. "B" circuits shall have overcurrent protection
not exceeding I ampere. The overcurrent protection
shall be placed in each positive lead.
3. "C" circuits when supplied from branch lighting
circuits or from slang, batteries of more than 20
ampere -hour capacity shall have overcurrent Prot—
lion
not exceeding one ampere,
4. Overcurrent devices shall be located as near as
Practicable
to the battery.
6407. Equipment. Amplifiers and rectifiers shall
be so located as to be readily accessible. They shall
SOUND RECORDING 261
be suitably housed and shall be of a type approved
for the purpose unless otherwuc exprpsly permitted
by the authority entorcinR this code. Egmpmenl used
m hazardam locations shall be specifically approved
for the purpose.
a, Ventilation. Amplifiers and rectifiers shall be
so located as to provide sufficient ventilation to pre-
vent undue temperature rise within the housing.
b. Protection Against Mecl'Vul Injury. Ampli-
fien, rectifier', loud -speaker and other equipment
shall be so injlocated or protected as to guard against
myrik.l y such as might result in fire or per-
socal urhazard.
ARTICLE 550•—ORGANS
6501. GeneraL This article ahzll apply to Ihose
electric xrcuit oras parts of electrinllY oP<rated
organs which are employed for the control of the
sounding apparatus and keyboards. Electronic organa
,loll 640. comply wit
cle h the aDPropriate Provisions of Arti-
6502. Some, o[ Energy, The source of energy
shall be a self-ucn<d generator of not over IS volt.
or a primary battery.
6503. Insuladon—•Gc.ramil,, The generator shall
be ,or driving
in t, - bora the ground and from the
..,or driving i1, .r both the Rencrator and the
m .tc frame, shall be grounded in the manner pre -
4101 -Conductors.
scribed in Article 250.
6501. Conductors. Condueton
follo•xmo: shall comply with
Itm
a. Site. No conducts shall be smaller than No.
26. and the common reran condoc(or shall be int
a_r than No. 14.
b. InsuLtkrt. Conductors shall hav
tub , he, asbdtm, ca tone s e er
the common -return rondo<yr s"1i<4 shall 1,< rubber•
Al,eor AfA)r oliow-Isntmn not -warred p Des AA.
or silk in y fc satunte•1 w,lh ftYYe SIJI ll:c. �uuun
c CepdactMa to IIs Csbl wnf6nc ,( d--1
r<Ivn <hnduaor,
and e.nvatoEae<pl the <.mr..on•
keeper, the W. sections and he inside Ura .roan
e .Coon <G.a01<, CGn•
0
doctors shall be cabled. The common -return con-
ductor may be placed under an additional covering
enclosing both cable and return conductor, or may
be installed as a separate conductor and may he in
contact with the cable.
d. Cable Covering. Th, cable shall 6e provided
with one or more braided outer coverings, provided
that a tape may be used In place of an inner braid.
Unless installed in metal raceways the outer It
shall be flame-retardant or shall be covered with a
closely -wound fireproof tape.
6505.Im'll"U.n of Condueton. Cables shall be
.,cutely fastened in place and may be attached di-
rectly to the organ structure without insulating sup
-
ports. Cables shall not be placed in contact with
other conductors.
6506. Overcunent Protection, Circuits shall It so
arranged that all couctor', except ndelse main supply
conductors and the common -return conductor, shall
be Protected from overcurrent by an overcurrent de-
vice of not greater than 15 ampere sting
ARTICLE 660. X-RAY EQUIPMENT
6601. Scope. The provisions .f this article shall
apply to all apparatus embodying X-ray operating at
any lrequcnc , !or medical use, for examination of
fabrics, metals, or fruits, or for any other purpose.
Unless approved for the Ncalion, 11ray and related
apparatus shall not be installed nor .',rated fn has.
ardour locations or opesated on a supply potential of
more than 600 volts.
Nnthmi, in this snick eba0 a evmlru,d a srecifyin. safe•
WsrJ+ {aims Jtrecq era r vrandary x err raJuuan. Svcb
and al11 ail A�vetKannW., S� dtrd nASA Z54. reap, of Part 1
6602. Overhead Condueton. For new equipment
uses on new insrallalions of X-ray apparatus, all to
-voltage m the high-voltage circuits that are not in
raceways shall be of the approved shockproof type.
When existing equipment employing uninsulated or
hare overhead conductors is moved to a new location,
or where reconditioned used equipment of the unin-
sulated or bare conductor overheat type is resold for
installalia at a new location, eh< authority enforcing
this code may require that the overhead stationary
X-RAY EQUIPMENT 26J
conductors be not less !Ilan 8 feel (ram the Ooor un-
frss guarded from contact. and that any connections
from the X-ray tuba to exposed overhead uninsulated
or Uare conductor shall be made with high-voltage
cables of the approved shockproof type.
6603. On Fluoroscope Tables. Leads on fluoro-
a<ope
tables shall be aJ,qua(ely insulated or be pro-
aided wit" barriers which will guard against b inad-
vertent conn<L
6601. MSlfammeter. Ef one aide or mid•point of
the hig
h-vohaE. tire., is RrounJcd, eh< milliammetcr
shall be Connected to the grounded lead and need
not be guarded. ,
6605. Wiring Terminals. Equipment covered by
ih!s article shall be Provided with suitable suiting ter•
m- , or le.d, for Ilse connexion of conductors of
al least (he size required by the load corresponding
to the input rating of Ilse equipment.
6606. Connection to Supply Circuit, X -n app.-
ralus Permanently Installed O,all be Connecled to the
power supply LY mean, of q wnnig method meeting
the general requirement of this code, except that
apparatus Properly supplied by branch circuits not
larger than . JO-ainPe bands circuit array be sup
•
er
plied Ihroulilt suitable Plug and 1, .vyd-ty cable or
cord Transportable Xray aI.Par.ms .t any capacity
may be connected to its power supply by suitable
temporary on and heavy -Jury Calle or cors.
A disconnecting meas. of adequate -Pacity shall be
provide) in a loca(i.n readily attess,Lle from Iha
X-ray control. For apparatus requiring 11$ -volt lino
fuss of JO ampere or less a Plug and receptacle of
proper sire ant of an approve) make may serve as a
disconn«ting means.
Control
6611. Stationary Equipment, The low•vo!taRe cir-
eust of the n<P-up transiormcr shall contain a xrruit-
ble.ker having no exposed h,, parts and .1_1, shall
under all operating .ondiOons protect the udi-
f.", a I,.R vuhage [ran, ornscrsl isosuchl th( to branch
""n lurwg a ourren( rating lower Our' the current
cling ,f Ilte circuit-hr<akrr are mPni I for adequate
pnuenion far Ilu.rnscopi: ant sh—p—ic
I my shall Le addcJ far she promctiva of Ihcse cir<uila.
UZ
764 ARTICLE 660
it is recommended that, if possible, the circuit -breaker
protect all circuits; namely, radiographic, Ouoros<opto
and therapeutic circuit& the circuit -breaker shall be
installed as a par[ of the equipment or directly adja•
cent theretd. The circuit breaker shall be manually
operable or else there shall be at Icast one other
ewItdl which is manuslly operablc in the low voltage
circuit ot, the step-up Transformer either as a part of
the equipment or directly adjacent thereto.
6612. Portable Equipment. Portable equipment
shall comply with section 6611, excePt that no circuit•
breaker is required when the high-voltage parts. In-
dudinR the X-ray tube, are within the single metallic
enclosure which n provided with n means for
Ing.
The circuit -breaker, when required, shall be la
effort in or on the portable equipment
6613. G1ntml. In addition to complying with sea
tions 6611 or 6612 as the case may be, medical hray
apparatus shall be provided with controlling means
as !.,Imus:
a Radi.grappbie Type, A timer shall be prwhied
and controlled by a asvnch which shall be destened If
.Pen automatically except when held closed by the
operator.
b. ItluorottoD1. Type. A awitell aM1ali be provided
which shall be designed to open automatially except
-ben held closed by the operator.
e Therapy. A timer ahall be provided which is
not of the repeating type.
6614. Industrial X•ny Apparatus. Radlognphk
and Flaor.scupie Types, A switch which shall ba
designed to open automatically except when held
closed by the operator, or a timer shall be provided.
6615. Foot Switch. Switches operated by foot Pres•
tore should be provided with a shield over the con•
tact button to avoid accidental closing unles, the
e uipmenI is of the fully enclosed aha:kproof �rpe,
When used for radiographic work, the foot switch
flail, return aummatially to the X-ray off position
when foot pressure is removed. The foregoing retom•
stendation shall have mandatory effect fn the race of
K -ray equipment for industrial use.
6616. Independent Co.troL If more than one piste
sf
:'vcuit sit. eacchh Piece
aoperated from the acme high-voltage
ece or each group of apparatus as a
XRAY FOUMNIENT 765
unit shall be •provided with ,high-voltage switch or
equivalent disconnecting means. Thio die .wit c or
means shag be constructed, enclosed, or bated ct as
ur
to avoid contact with its live pada
Ttandormen and Capadtow
6621. Oencril. Traw(ormcn and capacitors whitM1
are part of in 'Dray ap aratus shall not be re aired
to conform to the reg0 real of Articles I, and
460 of this code,
6622• Dnhdng Capadt.r Char
rent-carcying path of( ge. Unlem all cur.
tors connected th<rewith,Dara at 1, d feet,fromddoor tlw
un leas ;when, within a8 bit to unauthorized persons, or
enclosures of feet from the floor are within
nparitors shall bended metal or insulating mal<rial,
Provided with an automatic mean;
Vantformert Primary
the platen whenever the
of a.Dp1Y. D ry is disconnected from the source
6611. General Cor _rdm
Installations, all h,Eh* lh pparatua used on new
within grounded enclosure,, narh shall b< mounted
suitable insulating media mayEnhet cur. oil, or other
Wall voltage from the grouned, us<d to insulate the
1st ln' apparatus <mpl.ying o e enclosure. When e:-
ductor. i, moved to a new � yHoyPe overhead e.n-
ditioned used apparatus of the n• or where recon.
enforcin
g .thio anode may a new r.;.'If. ", outhyyhpmpit,
part. within 8 feet of the Z" that all hiRb_11age
<ontut by bvrirn of grnotd dbm Protected agaimI
by apVrove•1 iraulatin material. «aI, or protected
R
Qo n;t apply it the high-rehagt pThe art quireme to
�a ab•. don...pr.... d _il,hI. °0h are Drcvided with
rack circuit to the
e rnrh nsunit q ,pit whPe°tl�<t,do..r pot
to ked I-
Ths conn<I, ,rem she ; pp.o m slat outside
S wary Le made with high.v 4aovrrhead candor•
sh.ckpr..! type. 8e.f tha
6612. Encl.aarea .! Wood. {y
taining ,ugh-v;'b ar para .tali •ot<n reshlnetl cart•
approve., Art•...srant rnateriai.b, with
Data ,hail have adeq.. ,pacing fr.m walla of she
766 ARTICLE Gro
cabinet Ifiglt-voltage equipment containing oil shall
not be installed in wooden cabinets. C. meta shall
provide sufficient ventilation for safe operation of lh.
equipment therm.
6611. Therapy Tttbcs and Fqufpment X-ray tubes
used in le, shall be mounted in enclosures of
grounded metal or insulating material approved for
the purpose unless otherwise expressly permitted by
the aulhorily enforcing Chia code. Unless fully on.
closed in cabinets or cases of grounded mewl or at
Pinsulating materials, ail high-voltage parts
of generators, rectifiers, filter, and cooling equipment
shall be installed in a aepante room or enclosure.
Suitable arrangements shall be provided whereby the
switch controlling the supply circuit to such equip•
ohe door
fusuehnt vroom or enclosure be is locked fr mtthe outside.
6674.G
rounding. Non -current -carrying metal Darts
of tube ahnds, fluoroscopic and other apparatus shall
be grounded in the =nner prescriUcd in Article 250.
ARTICLE 670—MACHINE TOOLS
General
6701. Scope. The proviaiona of this article apply
to the electrical equipment for motor -driven, complete
metal -working machirtea not portable by hand, having
one or more tool and work holding devices used for
progressively removing metal in the form of chips.
6702 Application of Other Article. The
'allow.
ing provisions cover the requirements for electrical
wiring and equipment on machine fasts within the
,cope of this article. The3 an in addition to or
amendatory of the applicable provisions of other arti-
elea of this code, which apply except as modified in
this article.
111 Im"
ch nelrun, hale marked wherecPlial ly,nsibltmTo
to
show the voltage, full -load current and frequency re-
quired for each external circuit supplying the machine
tool For a multi -motored machine tool, this full -load
current marking shall be not less than the sum of the
I,
current, required for all mato.. which may
be in operation at one time under normal conditions
of we. [f only a afngle motor fa used, the motgr
namrplate may nerve if ploidy visible.
MACHINE TOOLS
res
6701. Lfehdng, Lfghtfng fixtures which art a part
of or attached to any machine tool shall conform to
the following;
a, Vdhge. The lighting cilcuit voltage shall not
exceed led voila betw•e<n conductors and shall be
a grounded circuit.
U' PIe:iWe Card• Flexible cord if used shall be .f
a type suitable for hard usage (see Table JI
shall b< rmistant to coolant and oil. It shall b ar�
ranged so it cannot be damaged by moving part` of
the machine,
6711. Conddt Canductoo s�ha I be to rigid
conIll.,, except as provided m sections 6712 to 6714.
Inclusive.
6712. Flulble Mehl Conddt F7<xible metal epn-
duit may Le uxd only where nttea+sry to .,
fluible connections
for ...if or inf"y tot mora
menta, as m minor terminals.
6717. Continuously Moving Pana. Wiring connea
lions to continuously _;ring P air of a machine tool
shall be rr approved type, extra-flexlble, non-_en11k.
covered, multi•e;ndudor cables Cunduct.ra shall on.
In
_ aecU;n 6722. In lieu o! cable, indrvi-hal con.
dudon enclosed in 8exibie robing may b< used The
tubing and its fitting, shall be approved for the Dur.
Pose, and conductors in such tubing .lull be ...id.
ered as subject to oil or coolant.
6711. ComDarmaents and Roc
menta and raceway. within l swan Comport-
<hine tool ma he be In_ewprk of a ma-
Ad<d the Y wed to enclose conductors, pro.
and areY are isolated .tom coolant and oil reservoirs
entirely <ndoud.
tonipannu<nu Conductors in machine
won a and neewaya dull be arcured and ao
e d that they ,-ill not be subiect to mecha.kal
injury or abmsmn.
an6713. Number of Bella In Conddt If a run .f
d metal conduit doe. nut exceed
and 111, rc,i.. fill does 1 tea in length
,he cross sectional area n, not txcred . per « rt of
moots Of section 7471 shall not apply.it he require.
6721. Sires pe C.nducton
tor1 on o mdtted 0111—t and control condos
r m masdunea shag not be .walk. control
No.
14 cusp, as IullowR
76. ARTICLE 670
a.Conductor Ni Moving Para• (bPPCr condi<-
ton for control PUfllOar to continuously moving
parts may be No. 16 if all such conductors are insul-
.led for the maximum voltage of any conductor in
the cable or tubing.
b. Coodacton to Electronic and Precl•ion Devices.
Copper conductors to electronic and precision devices
may be No. Z0, u<ep! if ppulled into raceways they
OX
be not smaller than No. Ig.
6722. Typo. Conductors shall be of a type .it
able for conditions of use. a an oil. mm ,
multi -conductor insulation
cable shall have an oil• and itercmoisture,,
resistant insulation with aflame -retardant outer cov-
ering.
6723. Identification o! Condmmn. Conductors
shall be identified either by color code or by other
distinctive means. \Yhite or natural gray eobnng
.hall be used only for a grounded conductor and
green only for a conductor used to ground the tram.
of equip.enL
Control Equipment '
6731. Mounting. Controllers shall be mounted In
such a manner as to guard against mechanical injury,
oil, coolant, dust, and dirt.
6731. Irs Macbine Comparttttenr. Compartments
In the column or base of a machine may serve as en-
closures for control equipment if the following provi-
shim sure complied with:
a. Thickness of MetaL The wall thickness shall
be not less than No. 14 USS gauge it of sheet steel,
not less than l5 -inch if of cast metal, or not less tban
3732 -inch if of malleable iron.
b. Covent ComDar" U shall have tight -fitting
hinged covers, not thinner than aDecified in paragnDh
a. Covers shall have adequate means for fastening
securely in a closed Positiot
e Control Endostves. Compartments used for
control enclesures shall be readily accessible and shall
not contain moving Porta not directly connected to
:11 tr, cal control equipment, and shall be so located
as toguard the control devices against oil, coolank
chips, and dirt.
d. Vmthig. A compartme"closing closing group con.
trot equipment with branch circuit filling .3 speci-
MACTIME TOOLS 269
bed in Daragnph b of section 6742, shall have a dear
opening of at least 2 square inches• vented to another
compartment within the column or base and having
at least one-half the volume of the control compact•
mc.L
'No Plane Opening. Compartments enclosing
control equiPinent shall not be open to the floor or
foundation upon which the machine rests
6733. Not in Machine Compartment. Controllers
not in machine compartments shall comply with the
following.
a. Controller" with overcurrent prot<dion as per -
42 by section 6742 may be mounted on the out -
aide o[ the machine tool Or on the floor as close to
the machine tool as poafble provided the enclosures
comply with all the Provisions Of section 6732
b. Other controller may be mounted on the out -
aide of the machine tool are elsewhere if they comply
with the provisious of Article 430.
Motor Branch -Circuit Onremrent Peotectlon
6111.Hrsrech Circuit's Any motor on a machine
tool may'b< supplied Iron an individual bench cin•
cult m accordance with the provision of Article 430,
or may be connected to a branch circuit which alsq
suppbr other maters on the same machine tool in
accordance with the Proviaivns of either section 4343
or of union 673.2. The renductdn 'applying all mo-
to on a single machine tool may be consid<r<d a
single bnnrh circuit ii all of t,,,c_otor are Pro-
t«tad in accordance with the proviaioro Of defier
aecuan 4343 or of section 6742,
6142 SerarJ Motes on Ow Branch Citcdl Con.
hollers and rnrninR evercueent protective devi<a for
two or more motor cennected or
of a 'nRle e branchcircuit
rmachine tcol need n1.he circuit
et he rthe
p"', tae c pIkd with; @ all
of the following pro -
a. Motor -Randa[ Prot"dos. Each run or shall
b< Protected by a tactor-rimnm; O......rent Prciec•
live demo
H Racing elf fNsreurrent Davlcas. The branch
ebeuit shwa have overcurrent prot%ion Of • rasing
<:,"I to that specified in lefties 4]42 for the largest
mason connected to the crtuit, plus an amaunt egwl
0
Y70 ARTICLE 670
to the sum o[ the full -load current ratings of all other
motors an lire machine tool which may I. in oper-
lion at one time under normal conditions of use and
which are connected to the same circuit. In no case
shall overcurrent protection be more than 200 am-
peres at 250 volts or less, or 100 amperes at GOO volts
or Ices.
e Enclosures. Enclosures for control equipment
and running protective devices enclosed in machine
compartments, or mounted on or adjacent to the ma-
chine, shall comply in all respects with the provisions
of sections 6732 or 6733.
d. Conductors. The conduction of the branch cir-
euit shall comply with the provisions of paragraph It
of section 4343.
Protection and Grounding
6751. Protection Against Damage. If the failure
of one motor to operate while others continue to rua
could cause damage, they shall be ro o
cnnected that
the trippinli of any overload or undercurrent device
will result in stopping all of these motors
6752 firottnding. All machine tools within the
scope of thus article, in
connected portable
equipment, shall be cQcctively grounded as specified
in Article 250.
6753. Moving Parts. A machine part that troves
on grounded metal quids or supporting ways shall
be considered As adequately grounded if the movable
Past may not readily be removed by band.
EMERGENCY LIGATING 271
CHAPTER 7. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 700—EMERGENCY LIGHTING
7001. Where Required. The provisions of this ars
licle shall apply to systema or circuits for supplying
emergency illumiwtion only when such Systems or
circuiu arc,
elsewhere in this code or by
municipal, slate, or other codes. See section 5202.
See Nnioud Pin Pntecdon Anxiatioe Rngdins Exiu Cede.
7002 Systema of Las Than SD Volts. If. source
of aupPly at tell than 50 vol. is employed as one of
the ayst<mi. the installation shall also comply with
the provisions of Article 720 of this code.
7003. Scope, Emergency lighting shall include all
required exit llRlits and all other lights specified as
necessary to Provide sufficient illumination to enable
persona t0 ace their way out of the building.
7004. Tem and Maintenance. Systems shall be
operated and tested sufficiently frequently to asium
their !n.m;crumrc in proper operating condition, and
halterie. shall be maintained in fully charged condi•
tion.
]t b remmmnded Lha (n,wNun rvrindUo ha.in` lurytb
Jon e•ndnct te,t rhe comylrte ynrm u2<. +-.al ,iw and
2edaiemy dier..ra°°'
Current Supply
701E Source. Current supply shall be such that in
event of emerge.y within the building or group of
buildings concerned, emergency lighting shall be avail•
able. calces may comprise:
. Oneservice, and a ,torahs battery of sufficient
capacity to aupPly and mainlam at or los than 91
per ant full voltage the total load of the circuiu
carrying lights for emergency illumination for A
period of at least M hour, Automobile balleries, or
lead batleri<s of other than the sealed, a b.tt li Ape.
are not considered suitable.
b. One service and a generator set• driven by some
form of prime mover and of capacity mffkient to
supply circuiu carrying emergency illumination load,
with suitable mean for automatically starting the
generator on (ailuro of the normal aervics.
391
6JP
777 ARTICLE 700
C. Services as widely separated, electrically and
Physically, as the available facilities allow.
d. Connection on supply side of the main service if
su0icicntly separated from main service to prevent
simultaneous inttrtuption .f supply through as occur-
rence within the building or group of buildings served.
It is resvmmrndW rho where .avhhlt end in arab Icsadsm
a' haspitzl ops, ane.¢ rima, wpararc and indiv,Jwl aerwtta be
ngwteJ fee emer¢aip hibune.
7012. Derangement Signals. Audible and visual
signal devices shall be provided where possible, to
give warning of dcrngcment of emergency illumina-
tion current sources jeopardizing their Proper fungi•
tinning, and to indicate when batteries Or generator
sets are carrying the emergency illumination load.
Circuits
7021. Provision for Lights. Lights shall be pro-
vided and so located and supplied a. fo provide, with
one service interrupted, emergency illumination with-
out appreciable delay. The installation of lights
would ordinarily require either sae of the following:
a. An emergency lighting system, independent of
the general lighting system, with provisions for auto*
maticnlly transferring, by meam of devices approved
for the purpose, the emergency system from a defec-
tive supply to another supply.
b. TWO or more separate and complete systems
with independent current supply each providing emer.
gency lighting. Unless both systems arc kept lighted,
means shall be provided for automatically lighting
either system upon failure of the other. Either or
Doth systems may be a part of the general house
lighting system if circuits carrying lights for emer-
gency illumination are installed in accordance with
other sections of this article.
7022. Independent Wiring. Wiring shall be kept
entirely independent of all other wiring and equip-
ment and shall not enter the same fixture, raceway,
box or cabinet with other wiring except as permitted
in sub -paragraph b of section 7021.
7023. Connection of Appliances. No appliances or
lamps, other than those specified as required for emer-
EMERGENCY LIGHTIVG 277
gency illuminatiob, shall be supplied by such circuits
except as provided in sub -paragraph b of section 7021.
Control
7011. Switch Required. Circuits for emergency
illummation shall be controlled through one switch
accessible only to authorized persons.
703E Location. This switch shall be located prel-
enbly in the lobby; otherwise at a place convenient
to the main cornute to the building.
7013. Other Switches. 1e. addition to the above
switch, there may be:
a,A switch at the main ¢rv;ct or on the control
Panel
of a special current wurce.
1s, A switch located adjacent to the emergency
switch, or a1 automatic light•....... d device approved
far the purpose, to control separately those lights on
the exterior of rbc building which are not required
for mirution when there is sufficient daylight.
7034. Stag. Co._, Prohibited. Circuits shall not
be connected to or controlled by a stage lighting con-
1roL
Overemrent Prolatlon
7041• Service. Service oeem...ent devices o.ly
may be plated ahead of he brauch-circuit ovtrcurtent
dCvtG.e.
704E AraasibL Only In Authorized person:. The
branch-efrcuit overcurrmt devims 'Fall be aeceas161e
to authorised 0nly.
ARTICLE 710—CIRCUITS AND EQUIPMENT
OPERA ING) AT ORE THAN BETWEEN CONDUCTORS VOLTS
7101. Qm..L Thi. ani<I< shall .;Ply to in.t lW
Non' operating at more Than 64 -it. betwee. eons
d.cl.re.
7101. Application Of Ocher Arefciea, Except u
mod.fied by this artia<, amirn of mor. than U10
,it, .has mrinrm to aCtlinn. 2161 to 2125, tr ludvC
a<atinnt 2115, 23+71. 2.IR2, anA a<rlinns 2.1;7 to 2342.
m 1—— 1.811nnq fincres aF.ail cnnkwm to Arlicle
a10, .ratan shad curet.+m to Article 436; Iramform•
271 ARTICLE 710
tisshall conform to Article 450; capacitors shall con-
form to Article 460; electric discharge sigma shall
conform to Arlicle 600; X-ray equipment shall con-
form to Article G60; and outside wires shall conform
to Article 730.
7103. Insulation and Interrupting Capacity. Con.
ductorR devices and equipment shall have an insula-
tion or separation bttween parts of different potential
and between live parts and the ground, sufficient for
the particular voltage employed, Interrupting devices
shall have an interrupting rating al the CuCuit voila'.
sufficient for the maximum current to be interrupted.
7104. Constant -Current Systems. Elsewhere than
in substations and transformer vaults, constant -cur.
rent systems shall not be installed in buildings, and
lamps or fixtures on series circuits shall not be at-
tached to exterior of building walls unless the walls
are of fire -resistive construction.
Installation of Combustion
7111. Wiring Method. Except in generator, taus.
former, switching and motor rooms, and for servieo
runs of muhiple conductor cable approved for the
purpose, as permitted in section 2387, conductors shall
C ran rigid conduit, duct, or armored cable specially
approved for the voltage.
7112. Conductor Location. All circuits of more
than 15,000 volts between cond.lems'shall be installed
only in transformer vaults, Substations, and fire -renis.
tame motor rooms, except as permitted for X-ray
equipment in Article 660, Conductors in conduit or
duct and enclosed by concrete, brick, or equivalent
fire-resistant material not less than 2 inches thick
shall be considered outside the building.
7113. Open CooductonSupporta and Separation.
3f open work is employed, the Conductors shall be
supported on insulators of glass, porcelain, or other
material approved for the purpose. Open conductors
shall be separated not less than 8 inches from each
other, except at apparatus and devices. They shall
be not less than 2 inches from the surface wired over,
and for voltages exceeding 2500 not less than 3 inches.
Conductors and their supports, including insulators,
shall have the strength and aubility to insure main.
OVER 600 VOLTS 777
tenant. of the required clearance in rise of short.
Circuit Current.
7114. Conductor Covering. Open insulated con,
ductors shall have a game -retardant outer covering.
The conductor covering shall be stripped back one
inch from the terminals so as not to touch them. If
insulated conductors are provided with a conducting
or mculized shielding tape over the insulation and
under the outer covermg, this ehieldinR tape shall bt
:tripped back a sof. distance for the voltage employed,
■ stress cone made, and the shielding tape adequately
Founded at the terminals.
1111. Lead -Covered Conductor. Whre duc-
tor. emerge from a lead sheath, they aheatl brnne pro.
tected from moisture and mechanical injury by a
pothead or by other means which will give equivalent
protection. The lead sheath should be continued over
splices.
7118. Conddt to Enter Fitting. Conduits shall en.
ter and be secured to the casing. shields or enclosures
of apparatus or to terminal boxes bolted or otherwise
secured to the citing, .hi,!d. or enClosme, except in
generator, tramformera switching and motor room.
and in sub.tatiom.
7117. Shielding of Rubber-In.dated condoctorta
11 nen-leaded, fibraur-covrred,e rubber -insulated Con.
doctors for permanent imtallailon operate at voltage.
higher than those indicated in the followin� table
tied under the e,mdiliom mentioned, they all. I be of
a typpo having metallic or semi.conducting shielding
for the purpose of confmmg lhev diel, C field. The
send -conducting shield .hall be an approved type.
Ydn'e in ger Ahsv
w'hnh �h„Iwa. Ie. 4-4
MerMd el Neoral
OZ.
Inaraaa.a.
G.—k4
uWd
In ducts or metal conduits
in wet or damp locations....... 2 2
In ducts or meal conduits
rat pcnnanm'I dry luta4on9 .... 61 it
On in+utmon, only if multiple
conductor ...................... 6 3
car,P�.nn+n iW,aen� ImWu"1 am be��,i, uaMaa�. rosea a aahiirw,
39Z
67
776 ARTICLE 710
mttov, alaaa luso, n m and silk. darsiftd ar [arils ateruh
sed app cad oar the ivmlm,on m eletuinl cern and eJd<a
iSvrposMpdq menl0e conduits iv some cera
mar caned.
s�ie4m monture b altar formaum of wens and Ohm lounge
:00it y cable kt roluges above 3000. Far ,oniven. a pray
dee it mar ba desirable to shield blow the Iimib siren.
This rule is necessary because of the susceptibility
to damage of rubber -covered conductors by eeronq
which Occurs at the higher voltaga..P2fucularly un-
der alternately moist and dry conditions.
7118. Grounding of Shielding. The shielding of
shielded cable, whether of the metallic or semicon-
ducting type, shall be grounded. preferably at two or
more points. Stress cones shall be made at ail term-
inations of shielding, as in potheads and joints,
Uvarv.nded 'tkwing normally has a p,-aov
tisl abe graund
acts shadd be sets., as a lire condvcb.
Control
7131. General Sections 7132 to 7144 shall apply
only to circuits and apparatus supplied through ser•
vice equipment. They shall not apply to equipment
in vaults under the sole control of the supply com-
party.
7132 Separate Control. Each transformer or bank
Of transformers operating as a unit, and each other
operating unit of apparatus shall, except as provided
in section 7143, be separately controlled.
7133. Step -Up or Step -Down Unita If a generator
operates with a transformer or a bank of transform -
era as a unit for stepping up or stepping down the
voltage, they may be controlled as an opeating unit.
7134. Series Trip Coils. Series trip mils connected
directly to the circuit, unless guarded or isolated by
elevation, should not be used with panel- or panel-
frame-mountad oil circuit -breakers on circuits exceed.
ing 750 volts. It is recommended that the use, without
a transformer. of aeries trip coils in alternating -
rent circuits exceeding 750 volts be avoided.
7135. Enclogme of Apparatus. Switches, circuit.
breakers, and control apparatus on circuits exceeding
5,000 volts between conductors shall have a metal en-
closure such as meraLenclosed switch -gear, trucks,
and cubicles, or be installed remotely controlled in a
fire-resistant awitchroom or motor room or in a vault
complying with sections 4541 to 4548 inclusive.
OVER 600 VOLTS 177
If live parts of equipment in metal enclosures are
accessible by means of a door, the door shall be pro-
vided with a lock se tlut it cannot be opened by un-
authorized persons, or with an interlock which will
dmvopening unless the Parts thereby exposed are
arttt
If connected to a chisalt exceeding 1S,000 volts
between conductors, such apparatus $lull be installed
only in a vault which complies with sect -ions 4541 to
4548 foclusive.
7136. OR Clecdt-Bnakpra and OB Switches to M
IseLted. Oil circuit -breakers and oil switches shall
be located away from other apparatus wherever pr-
ticable. If mounted in a cloud compartment means
shall be provided to indicate whether the breaker fa
open or closed. Unless installed in dead front type.
ama
utotic disconnecting -witch-gear equipment, sm
able air break isolating (di$coanecnitg) switches shall
be installed to isolate each oil switch or oil circuit
breaker from the source of sapply in .ray ease where
isolation cannot be effected otherwises
J, It teammmdnf tLt an r�,irha ward to emvol caw
furram b ouu.de the ndv cmway the vandarmeaa
7137. Switches to Be Safely AcOmshle- All switches
.ball be as located that the point from which they sus
operated is palely accessible to qualifird and author-
laed persona lseialing awitchts shall be accessible
to q-11fi<d persona only. Strikes should be provided
no bath ides of isolating awitchea
7138. Warning Sign. Unit,., isolating switches
are w ioter!Ocked that they ,genet be opened under
lard, signs shall be mstal!e4 at irolafiog switches
warning against opening them while they are carry-
ing correct.
Ovacurmat P Ot.ct{gn
7141. General. Each opmtfeg _it of aPpanm.
aha? be ......fed len. overrurr<n, H a mortally or
power operand circuli -breaker "i -Pt as provided in
urti�n 71 q, which win u,"Impt all ingrcund,d can
dactora
7147. Number of 01- UNta The number
of arerc.meat cad -Is ah,'l Le a aPerf ed io T.ble 2a,
Chapter 10.
6
Ae ARTICLE 710
7143. Fuaes. Fuse, of suitable rating and type,
which conform to section 7103, may be used on cir-
cuits of not more than 15,000 volts, for the following
purposes:
**For the protection of individual feeder er branch
circuits at
the point where they receive their supply.
If there is more than one such circuit, there shall be
a manually or power operated circuit -breaker between
Clic Point of origin of such circuits and the source of
supply.
Is, For the protection of motors as specified in
Article 430.
a For the protection of transformers as specified
in Arade 450.
d For the protection of other classes of apparatus
by special permission.
7144. Injury From Fosea Fusible cutouts shall be
so installed that the blowing of the fuse will not re-
sult in injury to persons or damage to other equip.
ment. They al It be accessible to qualified attendants
only.
Muton
7151. General. Motors operating at more than 600
volts shall comply with the P,evisiens of Article 430.
Services and Service Egtdpment
7152 GeneraL Services and service equipment shall
comply with Article 230.
Transformers
7153. General Transformers operating at more
than 600 volts shall comply with the provisfoas of
Article 450.
G arding
7161. Live Parra to BeGuarded. Ifaccessible to
unqualified persons, all rive pard, including
ing conduc-
tion, shall be enclosed or isolated.
7167. Isolation by Elevation. To secure Isolation
by elevation, the distances above the floor or working
surface shall be not less than given in Table 32, Chap.
ter 10.
715L Working Span. Except N ststion4 smbata-
tions and vaults, under the sole control of the supply
OVER dm VOLTS Ir,
company, adequate working space shall be provided
adjacent to current -carrying Parts upon which repair$
or adjustments must be made while such parts are
alive. The dear space when removable guards are
taken away shall be not less than given in Table 33
of Chapter 10. If live part. are exposed on opposite
aide, of the working space, a clear space of not less
than 4 feet shall be provided.
7164. Alr-Break Switches and Fossa Air -bleak
isolating switch,. and frac, shall .be accessible to
qualified persons only.
7165. Generator, Switching and Motor Ronan to
Be Locked. Generator, ,witching. and motor rooms
shall ba see ...ly locked except while a qualified oper-
ator i, present.
Grounding
7171. General. Except in station., substations and
vaultsunder the Sole control of the supply company,
<ntlo..m, of metal and all non -current -carrying parts
of equipment or apparatus shalt be grounded in the
manner apecified in Article 250.
ARTICLE 720 -CIRCUITS AND EQUIPMENT
OPERATING AT LESS THAN 50 VOLTS
7201. Gen -L This article shall apply to i -WI. -
lions operating at less than 50 volt., direct current
or alternating current, except such as are treated in
Articles 650 and 725.
7202. Larger Current at Lower Voltages Condue-
ton, devices, and equipment shag have current ratings
aufficsent for the greater current required to deliver
equal power at the lower voltage than at uaual volt-
ages.
7203. Conductors. Conductm� shall be not am+Ily
lh.n No. 12, and for appliance bench <ircu!ta avpply
ing more 0..one appliance or appliance receplacity
caaductor. shall be not smaller than No. IQ
7204. 11--h Circa[. Net more Than 8 lamphold-
er. or receptacle,, nor a total load of more than 320
wade, shall b. connected to a branch circuit Motee,
er aPpti..c,. o1 rating more tiara 320 writ. $lull
h..e a sepanls branch circuit.
393
90
110 IRTICLE 125
7205. Lampholden. Standard lampholdcn of rat-
ing not las than 660 wets shall be used,
7206. Receptacle Rating, Receptacles shall have Is
rating not less than 15 amperes.
7207. Receptacles Requittd. Receptacles of not
less than 20 -ampere ming shall be provided in kit-
chens, laundries, and other locations where portable
appliances arc likely to be used.
7208. overcurrent Protection Overc.... nt protec-
tion shall comply with the provisions of Article 240.
7209. Batteries. Batteries shall conform to the fol-
lowing:
.'Location. Batteries shall be located in rooms
or spaces having natural ventilation.
Is. Support. Battery jars and cells, if not composed
of insu'.ating material such as glass or hard rubber,
shall be mounted on insulating supports of glass or
Porcelain.
7210. Grounding, Equipment and circuits shall be
grounded as follows:
L Machines. The grounding of frames of engines
or generators is not required.
b. Conductor. One of the circuit conductors shall
be grounded if conductors are run overhead between
buildings, or if the circuit is supplied through a trans-
former from an ungrounded circuit or from a ground-
ed circuit of more than 150 volts.
ARTICLE725 — REMOTE -CONTROL, LOW-
ENERGY POWER AND SIGNAL CIRCUITS
7251, Scope. Provisions of this article shill apply
to remote -control
circuits, low-energy power circuits
and signal circuits, as defined in Article 100, Defini-
tions.
The I, hi., of W..rdde ve vot h mnded "a
m rt
mausenercl, Io.Kv<rp or ritual circuit, wb!eh farm ,v im<rril
yon
at devur,
7252. Hanrdous Locations. Circuits or equipment
coming within the scope of this article and installed
in hazardous locations shall also comply with the
appropriate provisions of Article 50v.
7253. Clasafficatkn, Remote -control and signal cir-
cuits shall be classified as follows:
RRYOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS sal
L Class,1 CireuitL Control and signal circuits in
which power is not limited in accordance with section
7281.
b. Clan 2 Cir uhu. Control and signal circuits in
which the power i7 limited in accordance with section
7281.
7254, Low-Entrgy Pewar Circuits, Circuits which
are neither rents.control nor signal circuits, but
which have the power limited in accordance with
section 7281 shall, for the purpoat of this code, be
treated as Class 2 remote -control circuits.
a.
v^are rtNlaliv. ds
gonr! lenemal
t m.uderN to
7256, Remm.-Generol and Sigyl CiIt N Com- .
mmdcadon Cables. Remote-romrol and signal air-
cmts, which use conductors in the same cable wish
communication circuits, shall, for the purpose of this
anule, be c'a Ifirl a communication circuits and
meet the requirements of Article 800, of this code.
Clan 1 37a ems
7261. Wiring Mehad. Conductors and equipment
of Clan I rTins..scrawl and signal systems ,lull 1u
frstaRcd in ar. rdae cath the rrqurzem.a'. of the
app'.Primt articles in Chapter 3 of This eadq except
a. provided fu aee'!.aa 7ZG2 !0 7265 inclusive
7262. Other Articles. The wiring method required
in aresion 7261 docs not 2VP!Y where other articits
of this code aP.ci&ally Mini or require o1hR
methods leer remo:«anvo car a:gnal circuits Ste
Annie G:O, E!r sawn, !cr oamp:,,
7263, Conductor Sizes. 7:oa. I8 and 16 gauge coa-
do: ,.,.n r.:+v hr u+<•I if nn!a0ed
M. rare •.vay or a
rat.:< aPVrused Int Ih< PSR^=st, er in 6rx:ble tondo
in x -,,dIw,c snth the r•rpvueanf al Artiel< UA.
7264. Caoductor 17ra IbL CoMuctrra larger
Ilan `:o. 11 0111 he ru .Ser-rerered TVP, R, Ihrrrt:a
plastic covered Tyre T. "r"' :er ay"vrwrd type. uloid
csnncgan Noa. Is an, I6 Ravi• mall have an in -
.
.t feast equal w Ihat cf Typa RP.32 rvbber-
212 ARTICLE 723
covered pr Ty -p, TP thermoplastic -covered future
wire. Conductors approved for the purpose having
rubber Insula ion of a thickness I... than specified
above or having other kinds of insulation may be used,
7265. Mechanical Protection of Remote -Control
Circuits. Where damage to a remote control circuit
would constitute a hazard as covered in section 7255
all conductors of-ch.remntc-control circuits shall be
installed in conduit, electrical metallic tubing or be
otherwise suitably protected from mechanical injury.
7266. Over<urrent Protection. Conductors shall be
protected against overcurrent in accordance with the
carrying capacities of Tables I and 2, Chapter 10
except as follows:
L Other Article.. Where other articles of this
code specifically permit. or require other overcurrent
Protection. See sections •1372 and 6251,
Is. Conductors of Nos, 18 and 16. Conductors of
Nos. 18 and 16 shall be considered as protected by
overcurrent devices of 15 -ampere rating or setting.
e. Ominhin of overcurrent ProtecNoL In r,mat,,
control and signal circuits having main and branch
circuits, the branch circuits need not be individually
Protected against overcurrent. if the operating voltage
does not exceed 30 volts.
7257. Location of Overcurrent Protection. Over -
current devices shall be located at the point where
the conductor to be protected receives its supply un-
Ites the overeurrent device protectin the larger con-
ductor also protects the smaller conductor in accord-
ance with Tables I and 2 of Chapter 10.
7268. Circuits. Extending Beyond Ona Building.Class I remot<•control and signal circuits Which et,
tend aerially beyand one building shall also meet the
requirements of Articic 730, Outside Wiring.
7269. grounding. Class I remote -control and sig.
nal circuits shall be grounded in accordance with
Article 250 as follows:
a. If supplied by a separate control transformer
from a system having a nominal voltage to ground
of more than 150 volts.
Is. If ran overhead outside of buildings, and so ran
23 to be liable to accidental contact with power con-
ductors operating at a potential exceeding 300 volts.
REMOTE CONTROL CIRCUITS 2aJ
Limitation of S� Sy Luca -Control and
teres
7281. Limlcadon of Class 2 Systems. Class 2 re-
mote -control and signal ,yslem . depending an the
vols.", ,hall have the current limited as follows:
L Maximum IS Valu: 3 Arepena Circuits oper-
ating at not morethan 15 volts and having overcur-
rent protection of not more than 5 amperes rating.
If the current supply is from a transformer or other
device having inherent current -uniting characteristics
and approved for the purpose, or from Primarybat-
teries, the overcurrent protection may be omitted.
b. 15 to 30 Volts: 3 Amperes, Circuits openling
at more than 15 volts but not more than 30 vales, and
having evelcurrent protection of not more thane.3
amperes rating. ]f the current supply is from a enna-
former or atl,, device having inherent Voris.-Hrrit-
ing characteristics and approved far the purpose, or
from primary batteries, the overcurrent prottclion
may be omitted•
L 30 to 60 V.1w lye Ampern. Circuit. operating
at more than 30 volts but net more than 60 volts, and
having overcurrent protection of not more than l55
ra
amperes ting. If the current supplY is from a iran.-
former or ether device laving inherent current -limit-
ing characteristics and approved tar the purpose. the
overcurrent protection may be omitted.
6 60 to 150 Veit% I Ampere Circuits operating
at more Than 60 volts but not mora thou 150 volts and
having overcuritnt protection of trot more than l -
ampere rating, Provided that such circuit. are
quipped with current -limning means other than over-
turienl Protection which will limit the current" R
result of a fault to not exceeding 1 ampere
7282. overcurrent Protatdon and Mo®thag. Wh<ry
current is limited in class 2 syuems by mans of
overcurrent protection, such 9rotechon and It. mount-
ing shall be approved fpr the pmpo.e Orercurten,
proration of digerent ratings .hall not be of an inter-
ehisre atilt type. The ove....nt protection may •b.
in
n inttgra4 part of a Iran
afarmtr or tithe power
supply device approved for the porpesse
7283. R4anferme Rating. Transformer devices
.applying itan 2 ayWin, shall be approved for the
purpose and be —trilled in their rased outPat to ant
Ai
Is
291 ARTICLE 735
exceeding 100 volt-amperes. They altall be marked
where plainly ,•isiblc to show the voltaRc to be applied
to the circuit, and whether or not of the current -
limiting type.
A Iramformn Is c.midrnd u wades the 100 "It•vn{ert
rtvab<mcnt If the aTp—i-. !.mans Omit la rexhN as
a 100 wlkam;tre Imo '
Installation of Class 2 Remote•Control and
Signal Circuits '
7291. On Supply Side of pyeitarrent Protection,
Transformers or Current -Limiting. Devices Conduc-
tors and equipment on supply 9de of overcurrent
protection, transformers or current -limiting device,
'hall be installed in accordance with the appropriate
requirements of Chapter 3 of this code. Transformers
or other devices supplied from electne IiFht andpower
circuits shall be protected by an overcurrent device
with a rating or setting not exceeding 15 amperes.
7292 On Load Side of Overcursent Protection,
Transformer or Current -Limiting Dtviees, Conduc-
tors on load side of overcurrent Protection, trans-
former or current -limiting devices shall be insulated
and shall comply with the following:
a. Separation from Other Coodueton Conductors
shall be separated from conductors of electric light
and power circuits as follows:
1. Open Conductors. Conductors shall be sepa-
rated at least 2 inches from any light or power con-
ductors not in a raceway unless permanently sepa-
rated from the conductors of the other system by a
continuous and firmly fixed nonconductor, such as
porcelain tube, or flexible tubing, additional to the
m,ulation on the wire.
2. In Raceways and Boxes. Conductors of Class 2
remote -control and signal circuits shall not be placed
in any raceway, compartment outlet box, junction
box or similar fitting with conductors of, Class I re-
mote -control and signal circuits unless the conductors
of the two systems are separated by a partition, or
light and power circuits unless the conductors of the
two systems are separated by a partition, provided
that this shall not afiely to conductors in outlet boxes.
junction boxes or similar fitting, or compartment,
where such con across are iotrodu<ed solely for
power supply to remote -control or signal circuits.
OUTSIDE WIRING 29S
3. In Shafts. Conductors may be run in the same
shaft withconductors for light and power if the con-
0,dutsars the two ,))•steins are separated at ]cast
inches, or if the conductors of either sy'tem art en-
cased in noncombustible lubinR. In hoi aways con-
ductors shall be installed in rigid conduit or electrical
metallic robing except as provided for in paragraph
a of section 620&
h Vertical RMa Conductors benched together in
a vertical run in a shaft shall have a fire-resistant cov-
ering capable of preventing the carrying of fire from
floor to floor, except whtre conduct.. are encased
in noncombustible tubing or are located in a fireproof
shah bavmg fire 31OPS at each floor.
Tee kind of Inwlafinn for the and.o.'s ,Fall b, ,ultable for
lac
in to 1- de
tailors pl.<al,:^ I.ut i not rMe:ye:l tail
a nlunre +, rlarrd cn currant limitation to is
dant<reua
Ibat vck h crdu<t rt, .fie aro mora der a a U-4 er cora
ma& n
7293. Circles Extrndinty Beyond Ont Building.
Class 2 remote -control anA si{L,m,al tircuils which ex-
tend beyond one building ao4 are so run as to be
,object ro a<cidenul <ontatt with light or power con•
doctor' operxtlng ata potential exceeding 300 volts.
8021, and 8022 ishe AnkBrA requirements of sections 8011,
of this code.
ARTICLE 730—OUTSIDE WIRING
7301 fieops The reaviremcut, of this article shall
af•ply t. eleari<al e9mGment or wiring located on
Private or public Premises. attached to the outside of
or run between buildings or etrycture,, but shall nee
apply to wiring for signs and other enen,ions of in-
vrfor wi+mR, nor to equipment ar wiring o1 an eleo-
Dc or <ommuniwti.n ut+lny uad in the exercise of
its lunoli.n a, a U14 Mty, eat<pl as otherwise provided
in this
7381 A1tpSestion, of Other Articles Equipment
and widne icr .—ins ccndunor..ha11 comply wish
Article 210. Eguipmenl and v;i,ng IncaPod m has•
I'd-,
Incminn& shall n:mply wills Amide 500. Equ:M
.,or and waing_f.r Fins and .rattles lighting shalt
eon;ply with Arh t11 Egmprnens and wiring far
remota rail -i, ay pn5 er and ,: si cirtmis
,hail comply wi,h Artiste l7 and egmant and
wxir.7 for commaric.1i.n ciuuit> ah>II comply with
Spy ARTICLE 730
General
7311. Wiring Method. Outside svirinR may be in-
stalled as open conductors on insulating supporb, as
multiple -conductor tabic aPProvcd for 'be Purpose, in
rigid meati conduit. in busways as VroviJeJ in s<e-
ti.m 2331 and JW2, or in ekertical metallic tubing;
except that for circuits of more than WO volts run
on lite exterior, building I,dlx conductors may be in-
stalled it efeclrical metallic tulafnR only for sign and
outline lighting as providcd in Aside 600. Except as
prm•tded in section 2387, athcr canJuHon of more
than 6W
J.
shall be in,talled in rigid metal conduit
or cable approved for the purpose.
7312. Common Neutral. Far the supply of lighting
tquipmcrtl installed on a single pole or structure, the
bench urcuita sM1all comply with tie requirements of
Article 210 for multi -wire branch circuits. A common
neutral may be employed for the branch circuits, pro•
vided not more than 8 ungrounded conductors arc
used. Such a common neutral shall have a carrying
capacity not less thane the carrying saPaeity of
one of the ungrounded conductors.
7313. Conductor Insulation. Open conductors sup-
ported on insulators shall be of the rubber -covered
type, thermoplasticweatherproof (type \VP),
where within 10 feet of eras• bi itding or structure. Cnn-
ducto. in cables or raceways shall be of the rubber -
covered type or thermoplastic type, and in wet Inca-
tiont shall comply with paragraph b of stdion 3102.
Conductors for festoon lighting shall be of the rubber.
covered or thermoplastic type.
7311. Size of Conductors. The size of conductors
shall conform to the following:
a. Carrying Capacity. Conductors shall conform
I
the aliowahle current.carrying capacities of Tables
I and 2 of Chapter 10.
b. Overhead Spans. Overhead conductors shall
net be smaller than No. 10 for spans up to 50 feet in
length, sad not smaller titan No. 8 for longer spans.
Q Festoon Lighting. Overhead conductors for
festoon lighting shall not he smaller than No. 12 un-
less supported by messenger wires.
d. Over 600 Volta Overhead conductors of over
600 volts &hall not be smaller than No, 6 MIC33 in
OUTSIDE WIRING 297
cable. Conductors in cable shall not be smaller than
No. 8.
of.. Conductors
7321.Supporta Open conductors ,ball be sup-
ported as follows:
a Open Conductors Open c.nducton shall be
supported on glass .r Parcdain knobs• racks, brackets,
or strain insulators, approved for the purpose.
b. Festoons. In spans exceeding 40 feet the con.
ductors shall be supported by a messenger wire sup-
ported by approved strain insulators. Conductors or
messenger wires shall not be atuched to any fire
cs,�pt. downspout or plumbing equfpmenL
7322. Spacings. Conductors shall conform to the
following spacings:
a Open Conductors Not Exposed to Weather.
Open conductors not exposed to the weather shall be
'uPpormd at intervals not rxmrdmR 4V, feet, and
shall be separated not less Than 2y5 inches from each
other and 1 inch from the surface wired over.
b. Open Conductors Exposed to the Weather.
Gxtept in
open spans, conductors exposed to the
wc.tlier shall be supported at intervals cot exceeding
9 het, uparatinR the conductors at least 6 inches
from each other and a1 Ir..t 2 in,hm from the surface
wiredover; provided tical auPPon. may be placed at
mlervals not exaed.a 15 her If e4liductara are a<p-
arated at least 12 Inches from each other, For JW
oohs or 1<•s,, c—luno. may have a sepamwn of
not less than 3 inches if supports are placed at fnwr-
yIs not exceeding aid feet and conductors are not
less Uun 2 inches from the surface wired over. In
open span, conductors shall be separated at least 12
inches from each other.
e. Over 600 Valu. Except fn open ,Pana, open
conductors on circuits of over 6!x1 valt, &hail be sep-
arated mol less than 8 inches from ea:h mh<r and
not less than 2 inc es from the aur! -ace wired over
for volug. of 2:00 volt. or Its, and 3 inch. for
volI
ages exceeding 2.00 volts. In open. spans, ron-
dunors shall be separated at trait I2 me hes Irons
cull other.
d. Separation from Other Conductors. Oprncon-
dutlurs shall be acP:rtaed fu: open nmductnn .f
.the, cir nit. or systems by not leu than a niche..
395
.40
r -I
L-A
3113 _ _ ARTICLE 730
e. Lbae Conducting. Line conductors shall have a
separation of not Iess than 1 foot except when placed
on racks or brackets. Line conductors suPPorled on
F11,11 shall provide a horizontal climbing space not
less than the following;
Power conductors, below communication
conductors . . ...30 in.
Power conductors alone or above com-
munication conductors:
Less than 300 volts ...........24 in.
Exceeding 300 volts .... . ....30 in.
Communication conductors below power
ronductor-321ce as power conductors
Common
r ication conductor alone or
above power conductors.. ... -1 .... ..
........... I.......... no requirement
7323. Clearance from Ground. Open conductors
shall be not less than 10 feel from the ground and
shall conform to the following:
A. Over Drivewaya. Conductors above alleys and
above driveways on other than residence property
shall have a clearance above ground of not less than
18 feet, and if more than 600 volts, 20 fact
It. Over Lots. Conductors supplying lights in
automobile parking lots and other similar commercial
areas ,shall have a clearance above ground of not less
titan 12 feet
C. Over Footwalks, Etc. On resmenti21 property,
and elsewhere across spaces accessible to pedestrians
only conductors between buildings shall have a clear-
ance of not less than 10 feet for conductors of not
more than 150 volts to ground, and 12 feet for higher
TelaRes to ground. Greater clearances shall be pro-
vided if, in the judgment of the authority enforcing
this code, it is necessary to prevent disturbance of the
conductors.
7324. Clearance from Buildings. Conductors shall
have a clearance from buildings as follows:
a. Over Roofs. Open conductors shall not be less
than 8 feet from the highest point of roofs but ser-
vice drops operating at 300 volts or less may be not
less than 3 feet from the highest point of roofs that
cannot be readily walker) upon, Conductors attached
to roof structures shall be substantially supported.
Wherever practicable, conductors crossing over build.
OUTSIDE WIRING ]'9
ings shall be supported on structures which are Inde-
pendent of the building.
b. Horizontal Clearances. Open conductors shall
be not less than 36 inches from windows, esdour,
porch, foe escapes, or similar locations and shall
conform to the following:
1. Zone for Fire Ladders. If buildings exceed 3
stories, or SO feet in height, overhead lines al'sll be
arranged %here practigb:e so that a clear space (or
zone) at least 6 iter wide will be left either adjacent
tothe buildings or beginning not over 8 feet from
h
"im, to faciliale the raising of ladders when nets-
sary fur fire fighting.
- Las Than 7500 Volts. Open conductors of Its
"ban 75. volts between conductors shall be at least
3 lett horimnbally from buildinxs unless 8 feel higher
than the roof.
3. Exceeding 7500 Volta Open conductors of
v:dagr between 7500 mrd 15,000 between conductors
'1139 be kept at hast -8 feet horizontally, and open
conductor of more than 15,000 colt, between con -
halt be kept at least 10 feel horizontally from
all 1•4i'din91 except central stations, sub.stations, and
ttansiorntnr vaults.
4. Service Droll. Service drops or final spans of
Geder la buildi.As -h-,h they sen'r or from which
th.y are fed oust necesarily aPProach the building
In •re closely than indicated, but they shall be kept
sway from windows, dans. porches, fire escapes or
similar loratmnv amt shall be run to the building In
sorb a way as to avoid -Y haaard.
7325. Protection on Buildings or Structure.. Where
eters cwduo— are ear§jrtt to mechanical disturb•
i,
seror are real ly attteslhle. they shall be protected
by nA.•1 metal ccnA.ait. Heel r'val metallic tubing, shsU
h:•: r.i muhipit a>r.Aurtor able af•DrevM. for die Pm-
ysv, or sha8 have equivalent protection.
7326. P""' -ort Poiea C.aeduann on a pule
.hall be pr ole; ted lona mcrhan.ral injury to a p'smt
at '-ast 8 fr•: fr. n tlx glrren,t. Such prola:cn shall
cm :I ea to sec ti•,n 711 i.
7327. Enuring BaldiLoops. Or -
H.'.4 6.11
penId.ug'lull
pas ,,;,w cuAb skming, noncom•
790 ARTICLE 730
bustible, non-absorptive insulating. tubes. Drip loops
shall be formed on the conduct0r3%Ut5ide the building.
Multiple -Conductor Cables
7331. Multiple -Conductor Cables. Multiple cables
of Type SD shall have insulating supports at intervals
notexceeding 15 feet and maintaining a distance of
not less than 2 inches from the surface wired over;
and shall be protected where within 8 feet from the
ground or where subject to mechanical injury. Mul-
liple•conductor cables of Type SE or ASE mounted
in contact with the building shall be supported at
Intervals not exceeding 4y feet
Raceways
7341. Raceways. Conduit and electrical metallic
tubing on exterior of building shall be made rain -
tight and suitably drained.
Underground Conductors
7351. Mechanical Protection. Underground con-
ductors shall be protected against mechanical injury
by being installed to duct• conduit, in the form of a
cable approved for the purpose, or by other approved
means.
7352. Draining. Underground conduits or ducts,
when not located below the frost line• shall be ar-
ranged to drip.
7353. Protection Where Entering Building. Where
underground conductors enter a building, they shall
have mechanical protection in the form of rigid or
flexible conduit• electrical metallic tubing, auxiliary
gutters, cables approved for the purpose, or other
approved means.
7354. Protection on Poles. Underground cond—
tore tarried up a pole shall conform to section 7326.
Futures
7361. Lampholden. Lampholdlrs shall be of
molded composition, or other approved material of
the weatherproof type, and if they are attached as
pendants shall have the connections to the circuit
wires staggered. If lampholder i have terminals of a
type which puncture the insulation and make contact
with the conductors• they shall be attached only to
conductors of the stranded type.
OUTSIDE WIRING 791
7362 Location of Lamps. For outdoor IiRltlieg.
lamps shall be located below
mersall live conductors. trans -
for, or other electrical equipment, unless clear.
once. ter other safeguards arc provided for relamp,.g
operations, or unless the installation is controlled by
a dko—ne<ting means which can be locked in the
.Pen position.
396
P
73
192 ARTICLE boo
CHAPTER 8. COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
ARTICLE 804—COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS
8001. Scope. The provisions of this article shall
apply to telephone, telegraph (except radio), district
messenger, fire and burglar alarms, and similar cen-
tral station systems. Circuits and apparatus coming
within the scope of this article and installed in Class
I hazardous locations, shall comply with Section 5024
of Article 500.
Ssch vroreniee "ewer" a are wmtial to safer"rd di
III outli .d1c3"in It— s `resnJivays b ,which they c. -abfecred
an Fn larwuucn,aovn< ger uiremaennis far R cots,+ blit a5u,dad
bl the Nniavil Uwrdool Fire Vvdcrwr,un.
Protection
8011. Protective Devices. A protector approved
far the purpose shall be provided on each circuit,
aerial or underground, so located within the block
containing the building served as,to be liable to acci-
dental contact with light or power conductors oper-
ating at a potential exceeding 300 volts, and on each
circuit run Partly or entirely in aerial wire or cable
not confined within a block.
The word •'islet" a used 'n this -rude .hon 6e rnmtrved
w mean • ru re or portion of a city, towv or villose cnclaud
by artier av Incladini We ill, w cvdxcd but vat mY Mc—
a. Location The protector shall be located in or
on the building as near as practicable to the point
where the conductors enter. In the case of an under-
ground entrance the protector may be.located at the
junction of the underground and the aerial wires.
b. Hazardous Locations. The protector shali not
be located in any hazardous location as defined in
Article 500, nor in the vicinity of easily fgaitible ma-
terial
-Protector Requirements. The protector shall
be mounted on anon -combustible, non-absorptive in-
sulating base and shall consist of an arrester between
each line conductor and the Round, and.. fuse in each
line conductor, the fuses protecting the larrester exceeppt
at specified in paragraph d. The protector termimla
COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS292
shall be plainly marked to indicate line, instrument,
and ground.
d ESeW-Shcathed Cable. Fuses protecting the
arrester may be omitted on circuits entering a build.
ing through metal -sheathed cable, provided the metal
sheath of the cable is grounded and the conductors
ler the cable are No. 24 or smaller.
8012. Installations of Conductor": Conductors from
the protector to the equipment or, where no protector
is required, conductors attached to the outside of, or
inside, the building -hall comply with the following;
a. Separation From Other Conductors. Conduc-
tors shall be ,Dl,alcd from conductors of electric
light and power circuits as follows:
1. Open Conduaota Conductors shall be sepa-
rated at least 2 inches from any light or power con:
doctors not in metallic raceways or meal -sheathed
cable unless permanently separated from the conduc-
tors of the other system by a continuo" and finnlY
fixed non-conductor, 3 , !tio"1 to the insulation on
the wire, such
as porcelain tubes or flexible tubing,
2. In Rueways and Boxes. Communication con-
ductor -hall not De Placed in any raceway, compare -
me,
r. outlet box, junction box or similar Dtling wilts
conductors for light and power circum or a Claes 1
signal and control circuits unless the conductor, of
the different systema are separaltd by a Partition;
provided, that this shall not IPPly to conductors in
outlet boxes, lurrtim haus or similar fittings tN
compartments where such <endeetoo are introduced
solely far yaw<r ",Ply to communication equipment
or for r Dozellaa to rematetamol equip—.t
J. Ia Shafts. Canducwo may be ran in the same
aka(t with c..doctor. far light ar.4 pe,;per it the con•
duht c! the two systema are either
system leant 2
(aches, or if the can, eel ,tu in either ayrt<m arc ea•
cau3 in ran-<rmb"Gbl< tubing.
D. Vertkal Rmis. Condacaen 'arched together in
" ecit , run in a shah shall have sire-re+isiant env
"i it 1. R of Drev<nnng the carrying of ire from
floor to O:.or, <.rrgt where cnadac tics are cowed
is nw ,.bu,t:bie tubing cr are heated in a Gr<proof
shaft having fire atr.Pa al rash May
�id ba tL anvi et uau6u.,v� ,-.rrwi wav14 .,.a.xMlly U
294 ARTICLE 800
4 dared an Use prayed" decks 0 atop a8 ditties" vdtaao
sad verous, '
Outside Conductors
8021. Overhead Conductao. Overhead conductors
entering buildings shall comply with the following:
a. On Poles, Where communication conductors
and light or power conductors are supported by the
same POI-. the following conditions shall be met;
1. Relative Location. The conductors should pref-
erably be located below the light or power eonductoU.
2, Attachment to Cross Arms. Conductors shall
not be attached to a erossares which carries light or
Power conductors.
3. Climbing Space. The climbing space through
signal conductors shall comply with the requirements
of section 7322,
b. On Rote. Conductors passing over buildings
shall be kept at least 8 feet above any roof which may
be readily walked upon, exceptsmall auxiliary build-
ings such as garages and the like,
m Cirouiu Requiring Protectors. Circuits which
require protectors (see section 8011) shall comply
with the following;
1. Ia"ulation, Single or Paired Conductors. Each
conductor, from the last outdoor support to the pro.
tector, shall have 1/32 -inch rubber insulation, except
that when such conductors are entirely within a block
the insulation on the conductor may be less than 1/32.
inch, but not less than 1/40 -inch in thickness. In ad.
dition, the conductor, either individually or over the
pair, shall be covered with a substantial fibrous cover.
ing or equivalent Protection. Conductors approved for
the purpose having rubber insulation of a thickness
It,, than sp.ificd above, or having other kinds of
insulation may be used,
2. Insulation, Cables. Conductors within a cable
of the metal-sheathedcable
type, or within a having
a rubber sheath of at least 1/32 -inch thickness and
covered with a substantial fibrous covering, may have
Paper
ar other suitable insulation. If the metal or
rubber sheath is omitted. each conductor shall be in-
sulated as required in sub-paragnph a-1 of this acc-
lion. and the bunched conductors shall be covered
COMMUNICATIOY CIRCUITS 2v3
With a substantial fibrous covering or equivalent cov.
ering.
J. On Buildings. Open conductors shall be sepa-
rated at least 4 inches from light or power coudue-
ton not in conduit or cable, unless permanently sepa-
rated from conductors of the other system by- a can.
linuous and firmly fixed non-conductor additional to
the insulation on the wires, such as porcelain lubes
orflexible tubing. Open conductors exposed to asci.
dental contact with light or power conductors oper-
ating at over 300 volts. and attached to buildings, shall
be separated from woodwork by being supported on
glaze, porcelain or other insulating material approved
for the purpose.
4. Entering Buildings, Except when a protector
is installed on the outside of the building, or the en.
tering conductors are in a cable or pass through nus.
onry, the conduaon shall enter the building either
through non-combustible, non-absorptive insulating
buahmgs, or through a metal raceway, Raceways or
buahmgs shall slip. upward from the outside of where
this cannot be done drip loops shall be formed in the
conductors immediately before they enter the building.
Raceways shall be equipped with an -Pproved service
head. Mare than one conductor may -mer through
• Tingle raceway or Uusbing. Conduits or o,be, metal.
lic
race wa3's located shod of the protector shall be
grounded.
8022. Lightning Conductors, A separation of at
least six feet shall be maintained between communi.
cation conductors on buildings and lightning conduct
ton.
Underground Circuits
8031. Underground Circuits. Underground can.
doctors of communaatian circuits entering buildings
Wall comply with the following:
& Not With Electric Light or Power Condoctoo.
Underground conductors shall not be P' cid in a
duct, handhale, or manhole containing -fee nc light
or power conductors, except in a ,,tion separated
Irom aur' coions. nductors by means of brick, concrete, or
Iii- partit
b. Vnd-,ground Block D1.1ribudon. Where the
anise Mlect viral s run uodergrouad and the eir-
397
296 ARTICLE 800
cult within the block is so placed a' to be free from
liability of accidental contact with electric light or
power circuits of over 300 volts, the insulation re.
quiremenls of sub•pangraphs al and e-•1 of section
8021 shall not apply, the conductors need not be
placed on insulating supports and no bushing. shall
be required where the conductors enter the building.
Grounding
8041. Grounding. Equipment shall be grounded
as follow.:
I. Cable Sheath. The metal sheath of aerial cables
entering buildings and which are liable to contact with
electric light or power conductors shall be grounded
or shalt be interrupted close to the entrance to the
building by an insulating joint or equivalent device.
L Protector Ground. The protector ground shall
comply with the following:
1. Insulation. The grounding conductor shall have
a 1/32 -inch rubber i ... hil n aid 'hall be covered
by a Substantial fibrous covering. Conductive apan 1/32-bich inb-
ber i sulatforonrovede or having otheg kindshot insulation may
be used.
1 Size. The grounding conductor shall not be
smaller than No. 18 copper.
3. Ron In Straight Line. The grounding conductor
Shall be run in as straight a line as practicable to the
grounding electrode.
4. Mechanical Injury. Where necessary, the
grounding conductor sball be guarded from mechan-
ical injury.
5. Electrode. The grounding conductor shall pref-
erably be connected to a water pipe electrode. In the
absence of a water pipe, connection may be made to
] continuous and erten,,,, underground gas piping
system, to an effectively grounded metallic structure,
or to a ground to or pipe driven into permanently
damp earth. Steam or hot water pipes, or lightning
rod conductors shall not be employedas electrodes for
protectors A driven rod or pipe used for gundi
rong
power circuits shall not be used for grounding com-
munication circuits unless the driven rod or pipe l
connected to the grounded conductor of a muIU-
COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS 297
grounded neutral power system. The requirement for
• separate driven electrode for communication circuits
and for power supply circuit grounding does not pro•
hibie bonding together such grounding electrodes
where bonding seems desirable.
6. Electrode Connection. The grounding conductor
&hall be attached to a pipe electrode by means of a
bolted clamp to which the conductor is soldered or
otherwise connected in an effective manner. If a gas
pipe electrode is used, connection shall be made be-
tween the gas meter and the street mala In every
use the connection to the grounding electrode shall
be made as close to the earth as practicable.
ARTICLE 810—RADIO EQUIPMENT
$101. Scope. This article shall apply to radio and
television receiving equipment and to amateur radio
transmitting equipment, but shall not apply to equip -
to
and antennas used for coupling carrierapply
current
to power line conductors.
}t h e.<ommenEed +oat rho Mods b rM Ib.M b aM
frNr eaaal�eA a ,a tee e�.ific m
sppa�. of Beata rdau.. w rwollatiw of mtem. rad I., I r
Pa ! Wdt+lbarind teat +a. N.Zal E;eou,ra lister Code.
8101 ADPlicadon of Other Article Wiring from
the &om<e of power to and between device. c .... cted
ro the interior wng system shag <owply with Chap-
ters 1 to 4, inclusive, exce0t as modified by archon'
6403, 6404 and 6405. Wving for dio-frequency and
audio•lrequencY equipmeit add rauenc
Iced .pcakcrs shall
c cdply with AM -11640.
Anneria Qntems--General
sill. Material. Antenna, e0ovter-Po4, and lead-in
conductor$ shall be of hard dawn copper, brinae,
capper-<bd and tar c+h<r hig4-ur<ngth, cnrroaioo•re•
si.tsnl mmerial. Sc(tdrawn era medium -drawn copper
may Le used for lead -o eenduacr. where the maxi•
mom $pan Letwc<n pants of support I. la. than 35
feel
8112, QOPPO"- Outdoor antler. and co uster.polse
.ad 1
n4,in <.oducton shall be -.W, .uDDerted.
They shall rot ee attached to poles or similar aruo
tetra carrying clean, Lght Or power wire. or cranial
I*
298 ARTICLE 810
wire' of more than 250 volts. Insulators supporting
the antenna or counter -poise conductors Shall have
sufficient mechanical strength to safely Support the
conductors. Lead-in conductors 3h211 be securely at.
lathed to the antenna.
8113. Avoidance of Contacts with Conductor of
Other Systems. Outdoor antenna, counter -poise and
lead-in conductors from an antenna to a building shall
not cross over electric light or power circuits and
shall be kept well away from all such circuits so as
to avoid the possibility of accidenlai contact. Where
proximity to electric light and power service conduc.
tors of less than 250 voila cannot be.avoided, the in-
stallation shall be such as to provide a clearance of
at ,.at two feet. It is recommended tbaLantsnna and
counterpoise conductors be so installed as not to cross
under electric light or power conductors. .-
8114. Splices. Splicea and joints in antenna and
counter -poise span shall be made with approved aplie.
ing devices or by such other recalls as will not appy
ciably weaken the conductors.
Soldttiva mar ardiwrls iw eapMM t. w.aitm roe medmtx.
Thercfon, hm
..vp n( i. emplored it .asaM h IndeRedml
al the mttlunieal Mppwt.
8115. Indoor Antenna. There are no requirements
for indoor antennas except that they shall have the
same clearance from the conductors of electric light
and power circuits and signaling circuits as is required
Ior lead -fn conductors.
Antenna Systems—Receiving Station
8121. Sloe of Antenna and Counter -poll. Outdoor
antenna and counter -poise conductors for receiving
station' Shall be of a size not less than given in the
following table:
Yinimdm sir. al Cnademvn
Wbea Mnimum Opus Spn Gen a la
L lb.. 77 /M le Or.r
11-41 7f.
.1101- Ise fat
Hard -drawn copper.... ig 14 12
Copper -clad steel, bronze
or other high strength
material ............. 20 17 14
Per cert tan( opus tab Iv r emdxtan .ut b eMuirod,
d.pmGn(m 0e Iran We a— see it. 11 and wad Iwdma
RADIO EQUIPMENT 299
8122. Size of Lead.Im Lead-in conductors from
outside antenna, and .== ..for for receiving ux.
tions, shall, for various maximum opeo 'Dan lengths,
be of such size as to have a tensile strength at least
as great as that of the conductor. for antenna a&
specified in section 8121. \Vhe, the lead-in consist:
of two or more conductors which arc twisted together
or are enclosed in the same covering or are concentric,
the conductor sire shall, for various maximum open
span lengths, be such tlut the tensile strength of the
combination will be at least as great as that of the
conductors for antenna 2' specified in section 8121.
8123. On Building.. Lead-in conductor attached
to buildings shall be so installed that they cannot
swing closer than two feet to the condunors o1 cu-
euits of 250 volts or It,, or ten feet to the conductors
of circuits of more than 250 volts, ex<ePt in the case
of circuits not exceeding 150 volts• if all conductor
involved are supported so as to insure permanent
arparation, the clearance may b< reduced but shall
not he less than tour incllea. The clearance between
lead-in conductor znd aq conductor forming a part
of . lightning to
system shall be not less than six
feet.
8124. Electric Supply Circuits Used in Liu of An.
tenm If an electric supply civ utt is used in lieu of
an antenna, the device by whieh the radio receiving
act is connected to the supply <i=Oil $hall be aP..
dally approved for the Purpose.
Antenna System—Traoawltting Stslloia
8131. Six' of Antenna. Antenna and counter -poise
conductors for mnamitting station shall be of a six.
out I..& than given in the following table:
Minimal Sic. oI Cenci ars
Whm Y.aa;am Dpea $9m bar. 1.
la.mm O
Yatald I'01ea tlD tea
Hard -drawn copper..... 14 10
C.Pper-tld steel, brow e
or other high strength
mal<rfal ............. 14 12
F., nr> Ica( spm Trona Wry d+edmilws M Metric
4rnmdls$ v to orae 1<uetb cad t4 ill avd ad {u.]�..
398
0
7S' 399
300. ARTICLE .10
8132 Size o1 Lead -In Copduetnra Lead-in con-
ductqrs for transmitting stations sM1.11, (or venom
maximum span lengths, be of a is. at least as great
as that of conductors for antenna as specified in sec-
tio. 8131.
8133. Clearance on Building. Antenna and coun-
terpoise conductors for transmitting stations, attach-
ed to buildings, shall be firmly mounted at (cast J
inches clear of the surface .f the butild Ing on non-
absorptive insulating 3.PPOIts. such as treata pins or
brackets, equipped with insulators having not less
than 3 -inch crag. •e and air -gap distances. Lead-in
conductors attached to buildingsshall also conform
to these requirements, except when [hey are enclosed
in a continuous metallic shield which is Permanently
and effectively grouded. In this latter case the
metallic shield may also be'used as a conductor.
6134. Entrance to Building. Except where Pro•
teeted with a continuous metallic shield which is per-
manently so effectively grounded, lead-in conductors
for transmitting station shall enter buildings by one
of the followipg methods:
a. Through a rigid, non-combustible, non-absorp-
tive insulating tube or bushing.
Is. Through an opening provided for the purpose
in which the entrance conductors are firmly seemed
ao as to provide a clearance of at least 2 inches.
a. Through a drilled window pane.
8135. Protection Against Accidental Contact. Lead-
in conductors to radio transmitters shall he so located
or installed as to ..,it. accidental contact with them
difficult.
Protectors
8141. Lightning Arresters—Receiving Station&
Each conductor of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna
.hall be provided with a lightning -arrester approved
for the purpose, except where the lead-in conductors
from antenna to entrance to building arc protected by
a continuous metallic shield which is permanently and
effectively grounded. Lightning arresters shall be
located outside the building, or inside the building
between the point of entranceof the lead-in and the
radio set or transformers, and as near as practicable
RADIO EOUIPME\T 301
to the entrance of the conductors to the building.
The lightning arrester shall not be located near com-
bustible material nor, in a hazardous location.
8142. Lightning Arresters---Transinitting Station..
Except where protected by a continuous metallic
shield which is Permanently and effectively ground<J,
a',
antenna is Dermanently and effectively ground-
ed• each conductor of a lead-in for outdoor antenna
shall be provided svilh a lightning arrester or other
auiub1, means which will drain static charges from
the antenna system.
Oemmding Conductors—Oeaenl
SOLMaterial. The grounding conductor shall,
unless otherwise Pact ad. be of copper, copper -clad
bro
steel, nze, or other corrosion -resistant material.
515L Insulation. The grounding conductors may
be ummulated.
8153. Support& The grounding conductors shall
be securely fastened in place and may be directly
ana<he" to the ...lace wired over without the use 01
intulatmg support&
5154. Mechadcd Protect"'& The grounding con-
ductor shall be protected when txDmed to mechani-
GI Injury.
8155. R_in BttalSbt Lt -a
grounding con-
ducl°r shall be run in as straight a line as Practicable
from the equipment 1. the grounding e'.eclrad,
ai54 Grou.d Elactzod& The grounding conductor
f'fu1ll bei t^ ,,,,ad 81 In 83 uh AOir le Mode as epeci-
GrOunding Cadoeters—Race(ving 8tadora
5161. Insidotd
e or Gds BuUding, The Pound-
ing mrde.... may be run either ior4e at ;_nide the
Gutld.og.
5162. Sia* N Pmtmtive Ormmd• The protective
pa.rdina cncdc: o:r Icr n«firing nations shall be
MI .—:It, than No. N upper or !j, 17 <oppv-
dao &eeel or bronae. Prot 114 that where whapy ins
,,.4. Ib. bedd.rg it aha& oral be amat]er than No. Ig.
30r ARTICLE 010
8163. Common Ground. A single grounding con-
ductor may be used for both protective and operating
Purposes.
If • i.& conductor Is ao used, the around t—Iml a its
equirmevt shaulJ be wnnected to the V.- 'I'st of W
KOtKtlee Jlhl.l
Grounding Conductors—Transmitting Stations,
8171. Size of Protective Ground. The protective
Pound conductor for transmitting stations shall be
as large as the lead-in, but not smaller than Na 14
copper, bronze, or copper -clad steel.
8172. Size *10 perating Grounding Conductor. The
oPCraling grounding conductor for nan.milting sib
lions shall be not less than Na 14 copper or its equiv-
alent.
Interior Installation—General
8181. Clearance From Other Conductors. Except
as Provided in Article 640, all conductors inside the
building shall be acParated at least 4 inches from the
conductor of any other light or signal circuit unless
separated therefrom by conduit or some firmly fixed
non-conductor such as porcelain tubes or flexible
tubing.
8182. Radio Nolle Suppnaetin. Radio inlerfercnce
elimilntars, interference caPacitora or radio noise
suppressors connected [o power supply Ica4s shall be
of a tpPe approved for the purpose. They shall not
be exposed to mechanical injury-.
Transmitting Stations
8191. General Transmitters shall comply with
the following:
a. Enclosing. The transmitter shall be enclosed
in a metal frame or grille, or separated from the open
aling apace by a barrier or other equivalent means,
all metallic parts of which are effectually connected
to ground.
b. Grounding of Controls. All external metallic
handles and controls accessible to the operating per.
sannel shall be effectually grounded.
No dreult Iv "ewr of 170 -11. shouts hsee Rey pate• en
tvto d,r<n rom A complete deaJlrone trK of &.itch•
is preGrred.
RADIO EQUIPMENT 303
a. Interlocks on Doom All access doors shall be
provided with interlocks which will disconnect all
voltages in excess of 350 volts when any access door
is opened.
d Audio -Amplifiers. Audio-amplificra which are
located outside the transmitter housing shall be suit.
ably housed and shall be so lorxted as to be readily
accessible and adequately ventilated.
0
74,
301 CHAPTER 9
CHAPTER 9. CONSTRUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter of the code describes the general char.
sacristies of fittings, materials, and devices of the
tyPes commonly employed in installations for which
Provision are given in other chapters of this code.
It is intended as a guide to the classification and
identification of types. Such derails of construction
as are included in this chapter are given as descriptive
information and not as a complete basis for judgment
of devices or materials.
The section numbers of this chapter arc derived
from this chapter number, the article number to which
the section refers, and a serial number. In the sec-
tion number 92401, the first figure (9) indicates the
chapter number; the next three figures (240), indi-
cates that the section refer to Article 240, Overcur-
rent Protection; and the last number (1), that this I -
,he first item in this series. Cross references are
therefore omitted as the group of three digits fol-
lowing the figure 9 indicates the article referred to
Cartridgo Fusee and Fuseholden
92401. Dimensions. Cartridge fuses and fusehold.
ers shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table
34 of Chapter 10.
92402. Terminals. The terminals of standard cart-
ridge fuses and fuseholders shall be of the ferrule type
for ratings of 0.60 amperes, and of the knife -blade
type for ratings of 61-600 amperes.
92403. Marking. Fuses shall be plainly marked
with the ampere rating and the name or trademark of
the maker, and the voltage for which the fuse is de.
signed shall be provided on a paper label which shall
be navy blue for 250 -volt fuses rated at 15 amperes tar
less, green for 250 -volt fuses rated at more than 15
amperes, and red for 600 -volt fuses.
Link Fuses and Ftuelholders
9240S. Dimensions. Link fuses and fuseholders
shall have the following dimensions in inches:
CONSTRUCTION Jar
Arsimum Sepvagon
Yan�olUM�l bliaimum
Ampere1ps <itr. PoLrnprp•,iw 1)iww
Net over 125 volts
601.1500 ly, IyS
Not over 250 volts
601-1500 2144 2
For 3 -wire systems, link fuses, and fuseholders shall
have the break distance required for circuits of the
Pit
of the outside wares, except that in 125.250-
volt systems with grounded neutral the fuses and
fuscholden. In 2•wire, 125 -,.It branch circuit. may
have the spacing specified for out over 125 volts,
92406. Spacing, A space shall be maintained be.
tween the fuse terminala of link fuse, of the .ams
polarity of at least Y inch for voltages up to 125, and
of at last 4i inch for voltage, from 126 to 250. This
is
rhe minimum distance allowable and greater .spa.
ration &hall be provided if practicable.
92407. Marking. Link fuses shall be Stamped with
g0 per cent of she maximum current which they can
carry indefinitely.
92406 Material. Contact surfaces or lop3 of link
f.sea .hall be of, copper or aluminum having goad
eleefrical connecticn, -1 the fusible part of IM
strip.
Condue'eva
91101, Omera. Insulated conductor, shall eotr
forms to the following:
a. Marking. Wires, cables and <Ord. Of all liens
<areI s w<alherPloof and paper-mauluM wire shall
have a contin?w, disbnrt.ve rnarkin4 ao that their
Hake` may Ise readay i+tenti6<d. All wires, cablm
and cord, shall also be plainly taggM or mar4<d n
frdbws:
I. TF -e maximum working rclfage for which the
wire was t<.Ied or ,ppro•ed. This mar ba .fisted
for .!cw•burn:og, sUw-Lerning Z' "'pror,l, w .0".
mol
pom1 asbs........... 4 avis<hb?ard warm.
2. Th, word, ^ti aticral Fleuricsf Coe Standard.'
3- `tame of the in -of", ... """"y and, it
dt.-I. trade name cf eke
306 CHAPTER 9
4. hlondt and year when manufactured. This may
be omitted (or siow-burmfng, slaw -burning weather-
proof, and weatherproof wires,
S. The proper type letter for the particular style
of wire or cable as given in the following sections.
Is, Identification of Insulation. All rubber -insula.
ted, fibrous -covered conductors and all thermoplastic.
insulated conductors, No. 14 and larger, shall have a
readily identifiable permanent marking to indicate the
grade of insulation; except that single -conductor,
code -rubber insulated, fibrous -covered conductors hav-
ing a lead sheath; and multi -conductor cables, ar.
mored cable, and nonmetallic -sheathed cable havi
ng
code -rubber or non•nwisture-resistant thermoplastic
insulated conductors, need not be so marked.
e, Classification. In addition. to the type lettere
specified in the table in paragraph a of this aecuon,
the following letters shall apply:
1. A type letter or letters used alone indicates a
single insulated conductor,
2, D. The letter "D" used as a suffix indicates a
twin wire with two insulated conductors laid parallel
under an outer fibrous covering,
3. M. The letter "11" used as a suffix indicates an
assembly of two or more insulated conductoa twisted
together under an outer fibrous covering,
4. L. The letter "L" used as a suffix indicates an
outer covering of lead.
S. Voltage. Type letters, when used alone, indi.
cate conductors for use at not more than 600 volts.
Conductors for use at higher voltages shall be indi.
Bated by adding numerical suffixes to the type letters
as follows;
10—for use at not more than 1000 amts
20—for use at not more than 2000 volts
30—for use at not more than 3000 volts.
40—for use at Dot more than 4000 volts.
50—for use at not more than 5000 volts.
7k ,?lima •o7urm refev 4 to 1. the tabtu are the operadn�
e —'h v iu- phafra or tin Ic anJ t.ophar< anima, an
phase anuma ah arounderd tar un,mundrd neuual
6. Label. All NEC standard conductors shall be
examined and tested at the factory and, if approval,
shall be labeled before shipment.
CONSTRUCrIOX cep
d. Identified Conductors, Single insulated conduc-
lora of No. 6 or smaller, intended for use as identi.
fied conductors of circuits, except conductors of the
weath,,Pro?f t Pe (type WP and SOW), shall have
an outer identification of a white or natural gray color.
Twin and twisted -pair conductors and threeconductor•
cables shall have one conductor, and four -conduct?,
cables shall have at least one conductor identified in
this manner.
thdr outer ?wren, finhhed to .haw < whit, er
n but h..... r.... facer threads i the braid,
murrce al ,:anufxune, arc mnu laN u mai
Single conductors, intended for use as unhlentified
conductors, and conduct -s other than the identified
conductor in multi—iductor cables, shall be fin•
ished to show a color or combination of colors other
than, and contrasting with, white or natural gray. For
identification requirements for conductors larger than
No. 6 xe P—r ,ipl, b of section 2005.
s, Conductor Construction. Insulated conductors
for ur< at ON volts or Ices alull conform to the pro•
vuiona of the following table.:
/ a I
F-0
3w CHAPTER 9
z
O
Q
.Z.
N
0
F
V
.7
O
0
O
u
177
I
CONSTRUCTION Im
]10 CRAFTER 9
Mlle �d^< :S:�ARS°3IRa9 „�=aR433 n
oESE�E s � I,a A9
��R <g�=RR443 �R44 �RRR44F
,R MATT3
=2HAil Wl S„TZ'8I .
b-„3- 3�
Lis I' I
g sa
CONSTRUCTION RI
2e
E
1�
e
u
93
F
yy
�
eaaabaa
aag`_aga
°si
pSaaggg
aag`pebn
�sR
�i3 22E
�E#;SE
R
EEF2EEE
a�a�a�t
RR33
A4
-A43^88
EF•.FE
d
yyeas
'AFX
RAV
da
S
:_ �t„-0S�±bS•..1-+9
s<
=.$�,=3R
b.1�„38
So?
e'
e
h
1 k
�yy
Fo
Tji
I
��
]10 CRAFTER 9
Mlle �d^< :S:�ARS°3IRa9 „�=aR433 n
oESE�E s � I,a A9
��R <g�=RR443 �R44 �RRR44F
,R MATT3
=2HAil Wl S„TZ'8I .
b-„3- 3�
Lis I' I
g sa
CONSTRUCTION RI
i
I
u
F
yy
rEai
=25
aj
22.
raa2a�'
tU7522
Ab h
RR33
A4
-A43^88
EF•.FE
d
RAV
da
S
e'
e
b
i
I
0
7'$
317 CIIAPTER a
I. Inadatfon Thickness—Over boo Volts. The thick-
ness of insulation for conductors fat Use at over 600
volts shall conform to the following:
Thicknesses of Rubber Insulation for
Rubber -Covered Wires and Cables,
in 64tbs of an Inch
CotWurtoi Sfry
Cbnifi—h"
Awa or 11063
C 6
IOW
Aw,pr }!CA
RIO
R10
RIO
RIO
RSO
14-0
I
S
7
9
10
6
S 6]
j
213 son
6
6 7
6
10
10
713.300
Sol -1000
1001.7000
8
9
10
11
301.10 00
1001-tOW
1
a
9
9
9
.
10
10
11
II
17
Thicknesses of Varnished -Cambric Insulation for
Single -Conductor Cable, in 64th. of an Inch
Ce.Nu Sire
Fm Vahaaea Net F-10A3lC1!
Awa or 11063
C 6
IOW
3000 than IOW
5000
t 0
.0
i o°
7
8.2
10
1-2
a
a
6
S 6]
j
213 son
6
6 7
6
10
6 7 - e
7 1
Sol -1000
1001.7000
7 3 1 .t 7 3
7
a
I 7 6
a a 9
10
10
Thicknesses of Varnished-Canalsde Insulation for
Multiple -Conductor Cable, in 64thi of an Inch
Conductor SimPar
Whrtes Na Eueedln■
Awa or 11063
C 6
C00
COB CH C B
11
t 0
.0
i o°
8.2
a 0
6.
S is
0
5 7 6 J 6 1
713 306
3o1 -IOW
6 1
6
6 7
6 D 6 6 1 6
116 1 7/
1601.2000
7 1
7 1
7 3 1 .t 7 3
The Ricknew fi,m 1, columns heeled 'C' are ler the Inco-
nnien c the Mrd ideal
mrd—...
Th.cisco iv the mlumvs
headrd'0" see for the thick—. of
the wwJi belt of iawl.U...
CO\STRUCTION 711
Thick.— of A.beatos and V—ithed-Cam•
brit Insulation for Single -Conductor Cable,
Type. AVA, AVB and AVL, in Mil.
Conducmr tet N'aR Varvuhed Cambrle 1nJ Hall
sire ^'�`"el NJ W.0
A14CYr Far Vyn.ra Not £.,M
1000,5000 loce ]WO Jtoo 1000 SOW I0o0Sono
IN IS IS 60 -W IW 120 25
14/0 30 43 W 80 IW 720 SD
513 -SW as IS 60 ro IW 720 IO
3013000 36 a360 so IW 110 W
IWI :+VJ a0 7s 73 95 113 110 so
Armored Cable, TyPe. AC, ACV and ACL
93341. General A,..,cd cable for 600 sella or
lets shall conform to the following:
.. Conductors. The conductor, shall comply with
the r<gmrements fo( the type of conductors used. The
Individual conductara harmg a fibeoua covering shall
have such a covering for their emirs length and, ex•
sept for lead•covered cable, m<h covering shall be se
treated as to be flamc•reurdam and meistur -resistant.
b. Marking. The cable shalt carry distinctive mart-
en throughout its entire length, both in the -.due-
tor and the armor, to that their makers may be «ad -
By identified.
Non-metallic Shathad Cabl.
93361.Crustal. Nammeta!4e sheathed cable shall
I,,*—to lbs falAwmg:
a. Conductors. The mnducters thaB comply with
the re,-uvemmb for the 'T el conductor used, ea•
cep, ..hat 06 braid need be prOsidy d.re..ly aver the
,.,ben covoiag.
11. !lumbar and Typo of CondartO Cable shall
be ayproved type. in urea :Ina 14 to /, inclusive, and
Is
.Cditicn to Na tc,ust<d ecaduetcra may have - an
g(m C:ng GtuWn<a n1Y.
appre.<d d+e c3 -'Y. ca
t<d capper ".d -to, lar
e Marking. Tke cable shall bass s V.eiinu0a, din
tin ire a:ah;ng so .at the maker may be readily
id<nt;e.d.
31, CIIAPTER 9
Rigid Metal Conduit
93461. General. Rigid conduit as shipped shall be
in standard lengths of 10 feet including coupling, one
coupling to be furnished with each length. Each
length shall be reamed and threaded on each end.
Steel conduit shall hive an interior coaling of a char-
acter and appearance, and non-ferrous conduit of cur-
roston-resistant material shall have suitable markings.
so as to readily distinguish them from ordinary pipe
commonly used for other than electrical purposes.
Electricnl Metallic Tubing
93481. Genm eral- Electrical metallic tubing shall
conforto the following:
a Crga Section. Tke tubing, and elbows and
bends !or use with the tubing, shall have a circular
cross-section.
b. Finish. Tubing shall have such a finish or I ... t-
ment of outer surfaces as willprovide an approvsd
Permanent means of readily distinguishing it, when
mstalied, from rigid conduit.
e. Canneet._ When the tubing is coupled to -
gather by threads, the connector shall be it. deslgns!
as to revent bending of the tubing at any part of the
thread.
Surface Metal Raceway
93521. General. Surface metal raceways shall be
of such construction as will distinguish them from
Other raceways. Metal raceways and their elbows,
couplings and similar fittings shall be so designed
that the sections can be electrically and mechanically
coupled together, while protecting the wires from
abrasion. Hole. for crews or boll inside the race.
way shall be so designed that when -crews or bolts
A re in place their heads will be flush with the metal
surlacc
Cellular Metal Floor Raceway,
97561. General. Cellular mcut floorraceway, shall,
be so constructed that adequate electrical and me:
chanical continuityof the complete system will be se-
cured. They shall Provide a complete enclosure for.
the conductors. The interior surfaces shall be free
from burrs and sharp edges, and surfaces over which
CONSTRUCTION 113
conductor are drawn shall be smooth. Suitable bush.
ings or fittings having smooth rounded edges shall be
provided where conductara pass.
Bose, and Fittings
93701, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes and
Fittlng.. Outlet, switch and junction boxes and fit.
ting-, if of metal, shall conform to the following..
a. Corensian-Redasot. Boxes and fittioga, 1f of
meal, unless of eorro.-n•resiftanl meal shall be
well -galvanized, enameled, or otherwise properly
coated, inside and out, to prevent corrosion.
Bre ""k- WO fol Usi;aion in the uaa of base. and Brice
yretrnrd ft.. rc nun ra:rir br mamrk
!t it r mmenJ<J that the aralenira —ung be or ..duniva
n.... sure a raJm,um, un er unq iv orders ..rum b.—
It.
0. Thickness of Metal. For boxes and fittings net
over 100 cubic inches in sire, if constructed of sheet
tresis the metal 111.11 not be leas than No. 14 USS
gauge (.0747 in.) in thio -is. or if of cast metal shall
11.ve a wall thickness of not less than fS inch, except
that if of malleable iron, they shall have a wall thick.
',:. of not less than 3132 inch.
e Boxes Over too Cubic Inches. Bares of are.
100 cubic inches in size shall be composed of metal
and shall conform to the requirements for cabins
and cutout boxes, except that the corers may consist
of single gat sheet. secured to the box proper by
.crews, or bolts instead of hinges. Boxes haripg
covers of this form are for arae only for e"cl-ins
joints in conductor. or to (acililate the dewing I.
of
wires and cables. They are nos intended to cadose
switches, cutouts or other control device'
97703. Coven. Covera of boxes soil little,, shall
be of a Ihickness at least that specified for the wdf.
of boxes of Ilse tame material a, that used for the
cover and of the sire under conude,a iaa, or ,hall
be lined with firmly a,I.,hed insulating material nal
les. Ihan t/J2 inch in thickness Covers of poreeisio
or other approvtd inmlaling material may be used if
of such form and thickness as W afford the r<quitite
Protection and strength.
93707. Bushings. Cover a( outlet boxes and oul-
lel f 11 having holes through which fiesibli cord
402
-14
0
1'7
516 CHAPTER 9
pendantsmay pass, shall be provided with apP.,Sd
bushings or shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces,
upon which the cord may bear. 11 conductors other
than OexiLk wrJ may Pass through a metal cover,
there shall be provided a separate hole (or cath wire,
said butt being equipped with a btobfng of suitable
insulating material.
93704. Non -Metallic Boxes. Provisions for sup-
ports, or other mounting means, for non-metallic
boxes, shall be outside of the box, or the box shall
be sv constructed as to prevent contact between the
conductors in the box and the supporting screws.
Cabinet. and Cutout Box"
93731. Material Cabinets and cutout boxes shall
conform to the following:
a. Metal Cabinets and Boxes. )fetal cabinets and
cutout boxes shall be well galvanized, plated with
cadmium or other approved metallic finish, enameled,
or otherw'isc properly coaled, inside and out, to Pro-
,cut
It b recommem nded Ill., the Protn6ea eoatinH be pf ewductire
te
materiah ch od..u., da or <i.<, !n order w acture hem,
C.ellied ..t.,
b.Strength. The design and construction of cabi-
nets and cutout boxes shall be such as to secure ample
strength and rigidity. If constructed of sheet steel,
the metal shall be of not less than No. 16 USS gauge
(.0598 inch) in thickness.
e. Composition Cabinets. Composition cabinets
shall be submihed for approval prior to installation.'
93732. Spacing. The spacing within cabinets and
.,out
bpxes shall conform to the following:
"General. The spacing within cabinets and cut•
out boxes shall be sufficient to provide ample room
for the distribution of wires and cables placed in them,
and for a separation between metal parts of devices
and apparatus mounted within them as follows:
I. Baa,. There shall be an air space of at least
1/IG inch, except at points of support, between the
base of the devlte and the wall of any metal cabinet
or cutout box, on which the device is mounted.
(tl\hl Nl'CTION �t:
2. Doors—General. There shall be an air spare
of at Ieoat I inch between any live metal part (includ-
ing live metal parts of enclosed fuses) and the door,
unless the door is lined with an approved insulating
material or is of a thickness of metal not less than
N. 12 155gauge (.11140 indp, when the air sl+ace
shall be not I., flan me
)$ ls.
3- Doors—Link Fuses. There shall be a space of
at least 2 inches betwcen open link fuses and —tat•.
lined walls or metal, metal -lined or glass -paneled
doors.
I.
Idve Pane. Except as noted above, there slmll
be a, air space of " least 1!a",
Inch betwcen the wails,
bark gutter partition, if of metal, or door of anY caL-
inct or cutout box and the nearest exposed currcnt-
wrrymg parr, of devices mounted within the cabinet
if tl:e p.,cmi." do not <xcad 250 vola. This spac-
ings!+.i i be increased to at least one incl, ii the poun-
till s tatted 350 votes.
b, Switch Clearance, Cabinets and cutout box"
All
Le �bep on :ngh to aCnw the closing of the
doors when 30 ampere branch-eircuit panelboard
ba'1uh.. are in any position. qr sateen combination
tumor sacitches are in any position, or when otlur
Lng:ethrow radtches are oPered as far as their <on-
rirucrvo will permit.
c. Wiring $Cxr—VJhrt Regtdrtd Cpabh"" and
... : •1tv+rrs lir aparatus car-
I., Ill- 8 con-
y i h:arch r:rrpv, muter
-r „culla sad similar
v cT n4 qr a con-
aimg
. .. - sPxn am
. r „ .., e. Side gRiiera qr .ming
.1. , '11 ✓c—F,ncic.ms, Side wiring .Parrs.
ar.•',partments of rab�nea
_ :. rCRJertd tight CR[:hamrrr
:.a lir pl.l.•,r.nr r ,,rd:na
dee 6+111-
• r R,inet: pro-
.
. :'`I ic.a IS:a nhinst
11H CHAPTER 9
at points directly opposite their terminal connections
m devices within the cabinet, suck covers, barriers or
partitions may be omitted. Partially enclosed back
wiring spaces shall be provided with covers to com-
plete enclosure. Wiring spaces that arc required by
paragraph (c) of this section and which are exposed
when doors are open, shall be provided with covers
to comolete the enclosure.
Switches
93801. Marking. Sw'itchrs shall be narked with
the current and volage and, if horsepower rated, the
maximum rating for which they are designed.
93802. 6011 -Volt Knife Switches. Amiliary con•
!acts of a renewable urquid:-break type or the cgmv-
alrnt, shall be pe-Wd im all (").00h knife switches
designed for use in breaking currents_ over 200 am-
p". .
It le r.--d,d that ..ell .-M."-1— —1— br pmeided An
rw
ilI ditaurrent 1-1b. ra,ed at arse 250 vola.
93803. Multiple Fuses. Switches rated above 600
amperes, and therefore exceeding the rating of stand•
and cartridge enclosed fuses, may be arranged for
fuses in multiple provided as few fuses as possible are
used and 111, (uses arc of tLc same type and laung
and are so nmum<J ax to diminale a potential differ-
c+ue between the terminals of dm fuses.
Switchboards and Pa..Iboards
93841. Panels. Tim panels of switchboarJs shall
be made of moisture-re,istant, non-combustible Marc.
HAI.
93842. Hua -ban. Bus -bars, if rigidly mounted, may
be of bare metal,
93843. Protection of Instrument Circuits. Inelru-
ments, pilot lights, potential transformers, and other
Switchboard devices with potential coils, except where
the gpcntian of the oecrcnrrcnt devise might intro-
duce a hazard in the operation of devices, shall be
supplied by a circuit that is protected by standard
overcurvent devices of a rating not greater than Is
amperes, except that ivr ratings of 2 amperes or less
special types of.enclosed fuses may be used.
938", Component Parts. Switches, fuses, slid
fuseholders used on panelboards shall conform to the
CONSTRUCTION
requirements of Articles 240 and 380 so far as they
apply.
93845. Knife Switches. Knife switches shall be
so arranged that the blades, if exposed during opera.
tion, will be dead when the switches are open.
93846. Color -Coding. If switchboards or panel-
boards are provided with color markings to indicate
elm main
b. to
to u$ich branch circuit Ifus-bars are
ronnraeQ Ila colon shall conform W the color cod-
ing of seen.. 2112.
93847. Spacing.. Except at switches and circuil-
breakers, ae least the fo!lu\vfng distance hetwven bare
meal parts, b—ban, eta., slail be maintained.
PCP n�a lo�a dta
\Yhenr \11:14
nl.S pn Ite1J
the Same Fre, •Lira Rua
Sadxa In Art Ie Groand
Nal a•<r IS! rdti _ 1: Itch ff irah !S inch
Nm o.er 21'
-11,.. It ,nth finch 1. inch
N., ave, 'to rats - a mebe. l -h 1,.,h
At awitchee, enclosed fns", etc., parts of the amt
polarity nay he placed as close together as convert•
,taut m
I-
-til all.., unless close proximity
canoes exrcsalve healing.
•1'er eruin,� t<1.ern lire pan, ,til d,,,a el e,eion,, era aeb
psr.x,ay. • ,<a,..n van Il
h 11a h< nar<d that the ebn<e d:,+anre, ,ra rDe
M.," end it rrrnmm .1a1 ,hrt Roto d.a!,nea W adae�al
whertrer rte eurdineua v1a �erc,h
Flexible Cord.
94001, Lb 1I.. Flrxild, tarda 0ha11 he eaandned
and !entad it Ila factory and il.Al be labeled befor.
eLipnte
94002.Grounded Comduetor Identification. One
eamlucmr of it, .pible cards shall have a continuous
nurkrr re:,d1h' d.:law :h:na it from the mher c...
dm 0•r ar ,. n�•Ln ra:• the tdennlicanon shall co—st
of nuc u( ILc following:
A. Colored Braid. A I—id fitiM.-I f0 Show a
s1lnb or 1:nur.J r.: ay colo, and the bra,:l on the other
r. ar ln. 1. r ,n „mdacl•ns liniahed Io show a readily
J:•nugm>h,i,l,: •oh9
-1 , or c.Wis.
b.T.— in 11u1d. A tutee fn a braid of any
J., c:�uuaa,mg wi,h that of the braid and no trace
403
320 MAP 1 ER
I. the hnid of elm other Gond:'or or mnJuaors.
No tracer Stell be coed in 'he L+ I ,! any eondueror
III a dex+ble cord wbi,l. r• ,twin• c! hdmaor having
a braid finished to shots wh a of no d tray, except
that, in the case of t)Pr k 1'D ; 1 1 1 < ala laving
the braids oo 11. md+'id :I , u<h rs lini,hcd to
show ranine or natural Rr r, th JI,, ifymg marker
may consist of a lraa•• of any ar n the braid of
one conductor.
a Colored Insulation. \ v'• a nrm•ur:d grayy
insulation on one loud �.to an' ^+sola+ In �,(a read-
ily distinguishable ash - m col • on t dice 'on:
doctor
or cenducrnrs • r ••rd. Inenng o ,rayl. on
rhe individual con -lull r1 exv ;rt mrd' w4. ch have
insolation on the Ind,, lu:• co•' tactors intch at illi
the jacket.)
d. Colored Sepa... tr, c it, or namr. R, e
separator on ono c.nul.+or rad separator' of a rc. '-
ilr disrial: uid-lde a!h•1 ol, of die other onv ort
or condun,•n ,f a;rd, •cin it Ilatinn •sn the rad
vidual eonducmrs inaxml Jacket.
e. Tinned Conductors. O•, I olo-,r hat ins; In
individual strands tinned and th, other mndu.•mr or
mndncutrs InyinR the in • vi.' nl -+mods oration -•1 or
cord' hay. I, n-0 Itwo t' f+ liv,dual mn•l ort is
inlcgral a'it11 the Jarkcl.
I.
Surface Marking- 1 cD or. -:dor or gown- :o
located on the extrrnsr o: th, cot't as to idenniv I-
conductor for "•rats haviu: it .ul.o on on the indiv d.
ual conductors integral Nnh lie icket.
94003. Grounding Conductor Identification. A trn-
duetor intended to be used a a sounding c-,h—r
if provided with insulati,ah oil have a comi•moa
idcnl ifyh g marker readily d in, :ishing it from tee
other con4u:for or condurlot•. T.•• iiec- ying mar.•
rr shall consist of orae of i c fcl:owing:
a. Colored Braid. A bra' 1 finished to show a green
color.
b. Colored Insulation. For cords having no braids
on the individual conducl,•rs a green insulation on one
conductor.
d This &hon nm be con l-ol n nrohihidne the me d a con
ero
Aa int a Hrani-h as unaronndeJ nre!,n nn•lacror
to _J. hovn+a nu cealucwr used as a eruundvo, eenJucror.
94004. Inadmion—Required. The individual con-
ductor of all cords except those of IIM—siStant cord
"ISSTRUMOS 331
(Tynes
AFC. AFPO, \FPD, AFS, AFSJ, r\VPO,
AVI'U, CFC, CFPO and CFI'll) shall hare a rnbhcr
or %henmplastie covering, except that in Types S. ST,
SO, SJ, SJT and sJ0 cord one conductor intended
for use as a grounding conductor may he svitin ut I..
dividual insulation. •\ rubhcr compound shall be vul.
<anizcd except for asbrstas-<ovcr<A tinxei cord IT7•Pei
AT amt ATJ) and heater cord (Types 11C, hISJ
and 101)).
94005. Insol.tfon Thick.,.. The thickness or tine
rubber or thmmopl?,uc rat. •ries hall be not les,
than 1/41 incl for Tylaa\;, Arj. cT, CTJ, 1'•41,
1'O -4y PUSI-4J,
tIC. IISJ and IIPD. F., .she- types the nominal
thickness of the rubber or rh• •mo. Lstic em'erinN shall
be as given in the following vbb
Sire I Th. we,
AWI; 1_h
Is and
a • •H
Fbnure& I—Pho=len. Lamas, ReeePtaces
ansa R_
94160. Design and M.•rrul. Fixtures shall be
—1 an cSed ni n:rui, s .., I a• :I approved mate•
r:al and shat: be so>.:•i sat assemLled an to
ren are r,q ne n:rcf..nn.: s -,rah —41,d.
nd r:giJity.
R9mway', mdudmg h .e .nrrs thtrero, &ball be
_'t'
it,, rJRM1iYilOra n +y I< . aN 1 in and withd'awn
wnhrmt injury.
94101. Flaltme& F cart• shi l ronfotm to the
L!hlwiag:
a. Yattr[al Other Tkan Mata[. In all fixtures not
made tnn.c:y, of mnsl, w+v ays ,hath with
metal nn'.rs a, —ledaro.: r.a r dud <cveted enn-
dn_!•:r•se sr4 .Ih a rc •Imre•
rarm
u^.!rani r':c ware-..aY* .•.�. 'rr! mat lair nr x. r„lar
ty:n c -f r.••n-sbr: apt.vs Aa++r-: n-coo"'ul.'r Infufa-
h-ng r. -renal.
b• Meehanfcal Strength. T.Imo -std for arms and
tiara- w: ere pr.v did —:' •n+ ,"cnida slu'1 Le not
7:: CIL\I'TER 9
less than 0.040 inch in th:cknesv and when provided
will, rolled (pressed) threads shall be not less that
0.025 inch in thickness. Arms and other parts shall
be tasencd In
prevent Mining. \Ictal <anapics sup-
porting lamlhholdcrs, sladrs, etc., exceeding g Ibs.,
or inc ,Ip .ning is I vni plug rrmplarlca, shall Le
not Icss than 0.0_'0 inch in thickness. Clihu( canopies
stall I,e nn[ less flan t6010 inch "I"'" nude of steel
and not less linin 0.020 inch when rat other metals.
Pull type canopy su•itcLca ,hail rat Uc inxrtml in the
rimi of metal canopies which arc Icss than 0.025 inch
in thickness notes, the riots are rvinforccd by A.
turning of a bead or the cquival<nt. Pull type canopy
est itches, whether mounted in the tins or elsewhere
:n 'Leet metal canopies, shall be located not more
Than 3I, inches front the center of the canopy. Double
se[ screw,, double canopy rings, a screw ring, or
equal method shall be used where the canopy supports
a pill[ type switch or pendent receptacle.
Thr glare 'MA— requbemmts apple to mmaur<n:mn made
an finished (famed) —pe,
o Wiring Space. Bodies of fixtures, including
portable lamps, 'loll pe-ide ample spate for Splices
and taps and for the tnaullation of devi.cs, if any.
d Fixture Studs. Fixture studs which are not
parts of oulet boxes, hickeys, tripods, and crowfeet
shall be made of steel, malleable iron, or other ap•
proved material.
it. Insulating Joints. insulating joints shall be com-
posed of materials especaily approved for the pur-
i— Those which are not designed to be mounted
with screws or bolts shall have a substantial exterior
metal casing, insulated from both screw connections.
L Portables. Portable table and floor lamps and
fan motors on ceiling fixtures may be wired with ap•
proved rubber -covered conductors, provided the wir-
ing is not located so as to be subject to undue Incating
from limp&
g. Cord Bushing& Bushing or the equivalent shall
be provided where flexible cord enters the base or
stem of a portable lamp. The bushing shall be of :n-
mlating material unless a jacketed type of cord is
used.
CONSTRI'CYION JJ
h. Testa. All wiring shall be free frons short-cir-
cuits and grounds, and shall be tested for these dejecta
prior to being connected to the circuit.
I. Live Part.. Exposed live Paths within porcclsin
fixtures ,lull be suiaLunilY rcccsseJ and six located as
o shake it improbable that wires will come in contact
b- 1 i There stall be a spacing m at Icast Y; inch
beture. live parts and the u:ounlhnN plane of tlw
fixture.
Lampholdera
94102. General. Lampitolden $hall canfornl to
the Ulowing:
a, Inmlatlon. The outer metal -he]l and the cap
shall be Lmed with msul-ng u-I<rhal whdch -hall
prevent the shell amt cap from Lecvnuns a hurt u(
the cucuil. Tile [in ng shall not extend beyond the
metal aI., I more 11-n )e invh, bol 11-11 prevent any
Curren Pcarrymp: p.hl of the lane base irons being
eaposcd "I"'” . Ianp is :n the
lanphnidins device.
b. Lead Whet& Lead sires, furnished as a part
If N•eatlsty;r. ,.l I-1,111lders and intended to be ex.
posed after ms-Ilatwn, -hail be of app --d' 'vana-
ed, rubber-c.,vned conductors, not less than No, 14
gause (\a. IS gauge for candelabra sockets), and
&lull b< sealr.i in place or mb"wiat made —might.
C - Sanded Lampholder& Switched Lmphofdera
f
shall IS
ocod; cmrtruetion fiat [be-witcLmg mesh•
graham :n1e•rupns the electrical :onnecf.an to the cera -
ter cunt&, The swdching mechanism may also in.
!<rrupt tic electrical <ann<ctioo to the screw shell if
eonnec[i•n to the center comet :, simultaneously
Inhere.{et4
4 icrew.Shell Uniphold<ra Screw -shell lanry!-
1, -L a :hill be lased aocrnhng m J:anwtrta of
larnp Lairs, as Candrl.Lry Imermedutr• llcdmm,
Adry<dimn,
21/.12 inch, 1 and DfogIt base: 6 tog rre;ecnvrl y t�
urcA, loch, ll/I14 inchan,l 1,'i in:h
noasinal can, with "n."..1 aPeciao, - the Io1low-
Ins fable:
CoQ
gl
Us CHAPTER 9
I.nnoa- Mtsnn-
5lr<n{e Uxaw RCYY
Hoa. Hn•
Amp it ao
CTau
Di... W.I. Voila Voluie Wait. V.I. Yolup
Candela6n rrtt In. 73 175 a• 75 X75 1
Intermedi"e 71/33 In. 75 175 75 50 1
Imodium I m. 750 350 7 660 250 6
Ad di.. I l/16 in. 6611(x) 750 6 60 7650
HC.YI I% ie. 75o 'SO 1500 50
1500 750 1500 600
(a) Tbi ndnn aY be I... only ,e I-A.M., talc. a
awiesh n Uoiam wb„h proJucer kosh a quick "make" and a
,.i&'% ... Y' -coo.
'
Msiasum Iam9l",.. and rccepueka ..J, rxJwo��
small. shan We loi.t.a.1 ire ar 0 1eJ
Iirh I, gamma, Chrntmaaaree lishun( Om6u anJ umihr Par-
"
ur•
poser
Fm Akm for 5[edium Ove Keybmphuld"a and Raga•
.cin ace roe Axile 730.
Incandescent Lamps,
94103. Banca. .Incandcsccnt lamps shall not be
equipped with medium bases if above 300 watts "t.
ing, nor with mogul bases if above 1500 watts. Above
1500 watts special approved bases or other devices
,hall be used.
Rosettes
941D4. Rosettes. Rosettes shall conform to the
Its
llowing:
"Rating. Rosettes shall be "led at 660 watts,
250 volts, with a maximum current rating of 6 sot -
Peres.
b. For Exposed Wiring. If designed for use with
exposed wiring, rosettes shall be provided with bases
which shall have at least two holes for supporting
screws, shall be high enough to keep the wires and
terminals at least 'y6 inch from the surface wired
over, and shall have a porcelain lug under each termi-
nal to prevent the rosette being placed over projec-
tions which would reduce the separation- to less than
% inch.
CONSTRU(T10N 575
e For Use With Boxes or Raceways. If designed
for use with conduit boxes or wire raceways, rosette
base, shall be high enough to keep wires and termi-
nals at least A inch from the surface wired over.
'd. Fmelesaa Fused rosettes shall not be used.
e. Non -separable. Separable rosettes which make
possible a change in polarity shall not be used.
Flush and Reeeued Fixture
94105. Ffuah and Recessed Flatu"& Flush and
accessed future, shall conform f.111 following:
a. Temperato". Fiatwea shall be ao conal"<led
that adjacent combustible material will not be aub-
Jett to temperatures in excea of 90C (194F).
Is. Enelwu". Sheet metal enclosures shall be
protected again" corrosion by galvanizing. plating
er other equiva.<nt heal -resisting coaling. and shalt
not be leas than N. 22 USS gauge (.0299 inch).
e IAmP Stop& Where enclosures a" of a size
which pumila the use of lamp' which will permit the
em
tperature l"I"'Picified in sub -paragraph a to be
exceeded, limp "oPs shall be provided to prevent the
", of ercea..is. lamps.
it, V. of fielder Prohlbitsd, No told,, shall be
uxd in the mmtmn:on of the fixture b-
-
ox
e. L in phuld".. lampholdera of the atr<wdh<II
type shall be of porcelain unless apetiallY aPDrm¢d
for the purpose. Comm., if used, shall be of the
h ia'r.•heat IyPI
1. Cozldermr lo.atatiaa. Reee..wd fiatur<a shall be
-cd wnh type AF or Al fixtare wire.
3.16 CHAPTER 9
Electric Discharge Lamps 1
94106. General. Fixtures constructed for electric
discharge lighting in addition to conforming to the
applicable requirements for electric discharge light-
ing, and the general requirements for all lighting fix-
tures, shall conform to the following. For signs and
outline lighting, see Article 600.
a. Lampholde". Lamphelden shall be classed ae•
cording to the dimensions and sppacings of the pins
in the lamp bases, as short. in ih< following table.
CLASS RATING PIN DIMENSIONS
";-I- b S inx
Small Riido 75 wales 3/31 in. 9q2 n. 5/I6 0.
60 war.
Sundard Itiain 6 3/52 rm 9/33 ii 1/7 in.
latae nipin 660 vralu 1/. tn. Ds 1. 23/33 m.
Ssandard
Srnak Pin "a waua 5/16 .. 5/16 to
Mercury -Vapor Lamps
94107. Hnciosure of RI dsto" oral Reguiato". Re.
shines or regulatts" for mercury-vapor lamps shall be
enclosed in noncombustible cases and treated 33
sources of heat.
Moto" and Controllers
94301. Bushings. Soft -rubber bushings may be
used to protect lead wires where they pass through
the frame of a motor, but only where they will not be
exposed to oils'
grease, oily vapors, or other sub-
stances having a deleterious effect on rubber.
94302. Auto -Transformer -Dedgm An auto.
transformer starter shall provide an off position, a
running position• and at least one starting position.
It shall be so designed that it cannot rest in the start-
ing position, or in any position which will render
inoperative the overcurrcnt protective device in the
circuit.
94303. Rheostats. Rheostats shall conform to the
following:
L Internal Comsectioca. Motor -starting rheostats
shall be so designed that the contact arm cannot be
left on intermediate segments. The point or plate
on which the arm rests when in the starting position
shall have no e:ectrical connection with the resistor.
CONSTRUCTION 337
b. Uodre-voltage Release, Mr•s
ototarting rheostats
for direct-current motors shall be equipped with auto -
magic devices which will interrupt the supply belts"
the speed of the motor has fallen to lea. than one•
third it, normal vslue.
94304. Identifying Code Letter. Code letter,
marked on motor name•piata 10 ?how motor input
with locked rotor ,hall be in accordance with the fol.
lowing table:
CWa Ribroh�Amperee
brut 1!n llermpY.rq
nsY LxkN Aom
A................................ 0- 3.14
B................................ 3.15- J.54
C................................ J.SS- 3.99
D................................ 4.0 - 1.49
R................................ 4.$ - 4.99
F................................ 5.0 - 5.59
G................................ 5.6 - 619
11 ................................ 6.3 - 7.09
J 7.1 - 7.99
K................................ 8.0 - 8.99
L................................
109.0 ::.!:99
- 11. 9.99
N............................... .
N........................ ......... 11.2 -12.419
9
R.......' ......................... 11.5 -13.99
14.0 -and up
Ike a6ma 46es isus dvpmJ rmrdud or sM W lo..Nuiara
slut Manula"wcn Aaaa:u:on.
Genersto"
M31. Bushings. Soft -rubber bushings may be
used to protect lead wires where they pair through
lbs frame o[ g<o<ratOrs, but only where they will not
be <sptsa<d to oil& grease, oily vspur& or other sub.
.tauce' having a deleterious effect on tubber.
Tranaformera
94501. Can orEncloaurc m
Dry -type tr.naftsr<r,
shall be provided wnh a non-combustible moi"uro-
"si'unt qx or enclo'ure width will Provide reason•
aId, protection again,, the auid
oreign olrntal insertion Qf
f.jrtta.
,¢05
�a
8 =-
323 CHAPTER 9
94502. Lad. The Drimary leach of trnaformer
supplyying Class 2 remote -control and aienal circuit'
may be smaller that/ No14 but nae spoilerOehaa Nw
proa•ided they are not over I2 inches long, Gave
insulation at least equal to type RF -32 rubber -covered
future wire, or approved equivalent.
Capacitors
"WI. Casa and Supporta. Capacitors shall be
provided with non-combustible eases and supports.
Relator and Reactors
94701. Contacts. Fixed and movable contacts shall
be so designed that arcing will be kept at a minimouL
94702. Material. Reactors shall be composed of
non-combustible materials, and shall be mounted on
goo -combustible baaea. ,
CHAPTER I—TAnLES. DIAGRAMS. EXAMPLES Jn
CHAPTER 30. TABLES, DIAGRAMS
AND EXAMPLES
TABLE l—ALLOWABLE CVRRENT-CARRY-
INO CAPACITIES OF CONDUCTORS
1N AMPERES
Not More T� Twee T onducrvton in Raceway or Gbla
lim@
ImaR,��.•R.a'1gMAn
AatYCYaR A `
710 CHAPTER 10—TABLES. DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES
TABLE 2—ALLOWABLE CURRENT.CARRY•
INO CAPACITIES OF CONDUCTORS
IN AMPERES
Singlo Conductor in Fr... Ar..
l
ao
.w
;
.11-
.,;
1
I
6•a
•fin
Y
'IR'1y—
Art
'hn RO
Ilhal
R.0.
4a+
'hw
elyna
rrpa TA buW
yar•
4'nrG Gm
ar��{10 1tm
and4 Ie pq
Ar
U]nyur
A�
Ar
twra
TrDr
A
ml�y
81�
Frlyr
TWT
�Iyq
�.}yq
1A!
!
�
I�py
}b 83
yuy�q�p
8d Ib5
Y6
1
peptaly
17J
1
L�qo
Ib
1t'
o
�i�
lad
M
a��3's;"
u its
}aWa3
Tia.
�
1
_
IN,
coo
a~icEa
�
s
�o
rr
to
jra
bid
Fo'O
i�
eida
cm
lo-
Iwo
s�
}}iQy��
!W.4
i8N
�L8o
toio
nu
u
tse
Iso
toxo
t5
oro
slay
iifd
ilii
aan
aaa
fiib
iidi
l
ao
.w
;
.11-
.,;
1
I
is
CHAPTER 10—TABLES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES fit
Pw nphnanen of Tape Leer n, sed for rwoaobrd ala. ,f
31 1u<rnra for rhe a condo wr lorulareoiu, r« u flus
JJo. d 9J1o1. Par innall,rim suiremmra, ear, ,e I- a10a,
and rhe risco ,flicks N tau exult.
1. Aluminum Conductor. For aluminum conduce
fora, the allowable current -carrying capacitie shall be
taken as 8
4 pct em Of those given in the 'table for
the .kind of saes of Copper conductor with the
acme kind of insulation.
2 Bare Conductor. If bare conductor arc used
with insulated conductor., their allowable current•
car <agacity shall be limited to flue Permitl<d
for the insu ated conductor with which they arc used.
3. AOOlieaeb,...,r n• -u_ -__ _
rovide4 in
Table Mora Tban 11Tbree Conductor in A eode
Raeaway,
give the allowable car rent•Carrying capacity
for not more than three Conductors in a raceway or
cable cable. If the number of conductors in a raceway or
cAParrrys Of from
Conductor shall the reduced rt agoyp<g
cent of the valuer in Table 1. ❑the number of Con•
doctors in a raceway or Cable is Irom J l0 9, the allow -
be current.carrying capacity of each conductor .hail
be reduced to 70 per cent of the values in Table 1.
5, Neutrl Conductor. A neutral canluctor hi,
carries only the unbalaneJ current from coker con.
dusters, as in the case of normally balanced circum
in three ii "tore eonduCror, shall hot be counted
in determining curr<n r-carrYing e.Pacific' as Provided
for in the Precedi ng
paragraph.
fn sort <irtun Ora cf vn phw . and rax cru.
weal o/ ,erne, J�hare rrvem, <tnmm ��.wdw�ur r
thVpreaimar<Ir rhe , e Nrrenl a tae asst <ondxrxa soul e� vot
e efm. <amidrred a u<mnl :oaavar.
6. Uitimala Insulation Tem
shall conductor* he a..onxted
"'p"
ern such a was
wfth r..p<ct to the kind of cir<vir, the wiring metho j
employed, or the number of '-'.donor, that the lim_
g t<mperrur< of tb< canductn wiB be exceeded,
). Use of Conductor. With Higher Operating Tero•
....furca If the room t<nrperature is wuhur to da
greet C of rhe maainmm allowable operating tempera•
lure a/ the insula lion, it is demrable t use an ni li.
lotion wiW a Lidlmr maabnunt "i
'S
operating
JJ: CHAPTER 11)—TARI.ES. IJLaGR �aI S. EXAMPLES
temperature; although insulation can be used In a
room temperature approaching its maximum allow.
able operating temperature limit if the current is re-
duced in accordance with the table of correction fa,
tors for diRerent room temperatures
8. Voltage Drop, The allowable current -carrying
capacities in Tables I and 2 are based on temperature
alone and do not take voltage drop into consideration.
9. OVlRnrrent lection. if the standard ratings
and eettinga of overt _, devices do not correspond
with the ratings and settings allowed for conductors,
the neat higher standard Wring and setting may be
used, but not comeedino 150 per cent of the allowable
Carrying wPacity of the conductor.
10, Deterioration of Insulation, it should be noted
that even the best grades of rubber insulation will
deteriorate in time, so cvcntually will need to be ra
placed.
TABLES—ALLOWABLE CURRENT -CARRY-
ING CAPACITY OP FLEXIBLE CORD AND
FIXTURE WIRE IN AMPERES
l!1'! an Rwn P6 F.t
}leaRle Cwd
a,:ann Wtra
p 4
aM
nVArar
Ruaber
ryN
&YpVn�
two
Taw
CO bra
T
T pr
Ni c,
No,
•�y�,,..
T
cj.,i
peb•
anvrnF
lOae
R R
PaifJ
♦/,!)4 '
'Iyo,.
CFPn•
{<�pa
T�'
T4r
nus-
4r
�Y•
!tinnn
ry�C
Awa
kJL
mlAo�rpMo
TArn
qy
Yy tl,�a<
Ill(`Y'
IIPd.
nW
ATM
AVPn
As
e«a mMn
A,'G•
ITMe'
aYJa
U. -I
bvw
0
��CA
AM..
■r-
Is
u
a e
"i
io
to
ii
--
it
Ao
as
sa
a
'
e
as
--
they «< - __ _ _._.... .. .. ........ .„..
vpcud to hisA umverawrea vd mtere rninsa are
«r�tvra .«omiapr. "Ti «ri wed.
CAAPTER 10—MULES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES JJJ
MORE THAN THREE CONDUCTORS IN A CORD
Tabic J ai<{a rhe allo.a6le
�eme'[a�rrehethansroWrae0ev�er noatirr<"rrcJoufn<ta«n Irnnnaarn iinwt_I d eiabpkron. tfar
od«f.hieunrnt<�eibdIourttrohwet
abJl
TABLE 4—NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN
CONDUIT OR TUBING
Rubber Covered, Types RFd2 R, RH, RW and RU
Thormsplestfc, Tppes �'Fd T and TW
OOnn to Nme Con u<tors
For man than siv <ovdunara «< TaMa 9.
f5re K<ucv{ J01 J, J4ya, Wad J4861
5!r Nae 4 rs i.tb t and T.
G.W6e e,relt '� len pr k�+A �irl4�,ra1 t2.4f.:<awdat
�!< rn.aa,leal el r n.arur r f.�,n re.J, m end
au,•LJ - lleaa adc:t cr r.b,rt eaJ U
334 CRAPTER 10—TADLES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES
Tables 4 to 11. Tables 4to 11 apply only to Co..
plete conduit systems, and do not apply to short
sections of conduit used for the protection of exposed
wiring from mechanical injury.
TABLE S.—NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN
CONDUIT OR TUBING
Lead -Covered Types RL and RHL 400 V.
(.5M Stolons ]4!a and JaW
Nutnbw of Camluctu, io One CeaJult «Tablet
PI« skateCa d-1 a-Conluelor yGndnelor
Aw'O
bICSI Gbl< tibia Gbla
I lala�4 1�a1a1f I1a�a 4
The aba.e aian an�lr to rtraiaht mm r 'th xmival aR<etr
eSunalmr ro •n < {Aon too aaanenhnda.
}n sMiaa Ni0 tot W:Ja io <erWuil.
CHAPTER AO—TABLES. DIAGR-IMS. F.XAMp1.,5 JJJ
TABLE 9—NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN
CONDUIT OR TUBING
More Tban Nine Conductors
Rubber-Cov<red Types RF -J2. R, RIf, RW, RU,
Thermoplastic Types TP, T, and TW
•n'hen Specially 1'e<mlrrN bl Thi, CNe
tJrc vcuun Jot,
was atarAmam "a- or W Wotan to 000dun « 7ubw
awu y N
rob lees I i b erce Jereb AM Jnea
ie iu is I si ii eis
�
ais
a.—
•Mar t'ne cmduclo.. a < IvrmfnN in a ainefe ranJril
rp ndhani.nwml . m Jar`and ro u rvlla: Jar {.can
aIIJ Garan rnamn. .«aura fJIJ: ,.cn Ma.6rr,. u.r,p, W.1 J:
e.erna <pl c.Wuawa, ane.n
TABLE Il—COMBINATION OF CONDUCTORS
ls'n acute, J46c ar.I Jayal
For groups or combinations of conductors not in.
eluded in ""Tab” d to '), it is mcommeeded
that the conduit or tubing be of such sire that the sum
Of the cross-sectional areas of the individual conduc-
lora will not be more than the percentage of the in-
terior eroas•ee<ti.'a] area of the conduit or tubing
than as shown in the following table:
Per Cent Area of Cooduit or Tubing
—�= _ nawpn er rbwN,avr
urr
rNe Mwbn lop{ 4W N.'eeMJ _ A I a �� <<p
rpr��VgMr .p�.rr , r p I tl I so
4
In•rr. I F.,,1 �I wrrli ti Iv k�
wal.m w la. -.r tea er pi`rnr
rVew•Y Jpr wrap,:tby !ad{4
J•v{aarri 'i' -"i" uJ 1 \w�rr, rnnJarr«a in a eon
M,
■
0
3!6 CII APTER I0 TARLES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES
S10 \ul< w Tibl< 11 (M do f ro duil or nNne for
o rom.
b Iron• f Iduclw+ I i IudN in TaM1le A.
Sae TaLlea wl! w 19 far dlulenrioln o/ raodarlorr, roodvq
evd lubivg.
Table. 12 to 17. Tables 12 to 17 give the nom-
inalsize of conductors and conduit or tubing recom•
mended for use in computing size of conduit Or tubing
for various combinations of conductors. The dimen•
.ions represent average conditions only, and while
variations will be found in dimensions of conductors
and conduits of different manufacture, these variations
will not affect the commutation.
CHAPTER In—TARI.F.S, nl.\GR\SIS. EXAMPLES JH
Us CHAPTER 10—TABLES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES
TABLE 13—DIMENSIONS OF RUBBER -
COVERED AND THERMOPLASTIC
COVERED CONDUCTORS
wp
Aw0
T]a+nrax. n. nu, nw
Tips rr, T, Tw, Ro..
AICtl
AVtunlIXrapeym
sPgprroT AM
ApPwx.DWA. Avg=
IMM1p
Ices
M�Iu
IwM py, 1&vs
le
le
.IN
.IN
.o.eler
lw
:IIX 1 ON
It
la
!'M Ila .1]I
aiM la .wo
'03]0
.Ixl .ola
li
u
x'M la
sM lea an•
.van•
ww.
;ile :dlri
id
An
AN,
1P.,
:ide ;ani
.axe .ww
o
•
iW
.ux
EJe
'3� .pa19
m m
.Inl
.IMa
.lev
:ioi
?
sli
aaa
b
W
.apa :my
A141,
.xlpl
,Mp
Ca
iue
av
x90
:9°3i°
.a9oa
•rae .Mn
wu
I:wi
.eai
:Ales
rot` :eiv"i
apv
Luv
.vasa
1p� .eu9
90
.vle
[3
]N�0
jjj
1 b8�
a.na
14'421 ]} l
W3
_
Laia
1 ewa
i ili i a'40wee
1p�
19rA
i a a
1 xvl
a moa]
i
0. a° 1 M•i
l00
1 mol
x M]s
1 9ali
i eii
moa
i'uil
a mry
i eiIs
I an ap
• 'The dimewiam for T,e< RW eandua]9n: 1•v It— dim -
A9nr w be orad fn( new rY 1 W., Ib< fire v( vduit
pr �u4in. for owbirulionr of ccn�lasunarx nam Ihv.n Tahla a,
Ya IB to Na Ade.........
..; \w 6 and Iar�cy aVaadpy to !ia
CHAPTER Jp TADLES. DIAGRAMS. EXAMPLES J19
TABLE 16—DIMENSIONS OF LEAD -COVERED
CONDUCTORS
Type. RL and RHL
PICa96unpe <baluslw TW
AWai\ICaI em �•
1%.O. Arr• xIL AM Illaq, i Amp
a} lualw llil 2 Ince. Nr In• IUM. Pp. la.
Al
Is
iai :^ui i.�
1 1.1 M5 ] n a nY
I [< 1 1^Y
I Ya 1 In Y.e9 a xY
104
TABLE 19—DIMENSIONS OF CONDUIT
OR TUBING
.L•
Inl•nYl
O.an11w
Mr
3y
I a0•
1•Iwsl
nawwq I
Mfr
ky
IMM1p
Ices
Isar
Ism«
2.
u
'1a
i
i
I
i ,°ilei
x w �
°
i nKir°
m m
Aim
FIs
s Is
iii
°les
xs ea
¢0$ .a
8s'
NO CHAPTER Ia—TAnLE5. DIAGR6315, EXAMPLES
TABLE 17—DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS -
VARNISHED -CAMBRIC INSULATED
CONDUCTORS
_ Types AVA. AVB. Rad AVL
saaept AVL wtiere Nl �auo we niaeded° mp urea, nranOM;
VARNISHED -CAMBRIC INSULATED
CONDUCTORS
Type V
VTh\eIvlNlienu Icrnrubbereor�re'd6soednilchiar�7>>dpe R�mc<Pt
for m. It and IT ahich have l/bJdn<b inavlatian 1 r rarnlahed•
umbrie d x/Winch iwulatwn for [[u44-11- d eleduavn
and for No. 8 hich has ]/biil<h 1naWation for varni]hed•
ambrie and V6ilvch aWalivn (or rvbber.mvrrd <onducurL
Sm lahle n action 9]101. Tahle! 1 and h y, therelart. 68
wed far tFe m I.er of varniaM1ed<ambrie inwlaled ecnducton In
a mndurt or Ilbin6.
r11AMR In_T.%III.FS. DIAGRA3IS. EXAMPLFi !ll
TABLE ]E—PROPERTIES OF COPPER
CONDUCTORS
:A I�� Iwaa
Tlm ACA
TIm AYD
T_AVL
daa
A=
ApApgl.
yq
paq
AI'mrr.
S�YWT
A^{Yoi
ApCrOi
AADR°L
.111
il'.
i
9!1))1Y=1—os
BaV.rlay.
p�
C=
Ilaol<tea
nOl, 11
u
Is
.x{a
.ar
.—ina
.wa
axo
.aw
l0
sea
.ais 9
.wa
.6a1 •
.xsa
.an
aw
.WI
Ir
1 l.a
ilii
1 M,
ai
.'
za gw"ana600
b
iif
.ilasi
1
i
Ix]
183
aip
.Opa
.1a0
.Ila
]
.Jla
.yyn6
TM
.aY3
.lan
.193
,Iba
AW
.610
.Ihl
55pp
1
.pii
Y05
.bio
.]xp
.nx0
:]W
.,?.x6op
n.lwra
an
:iw
wnw00
tnbb
.
.Aeaw)
]8n
San
.aY
.818
.eW
.Rla
.v1u
.b:a
1:010
:600
cal
Iw
a
Coa=
alp
.ew
pw
I:wo
.MY
.lw
.ebo
Law
LIw
.x�ty
.pa0
Ow
bS0
1 IJ]
1 IM
.pa!
1 wa
i WS
I Iia
.Ola
1 01
1Sa6 .180
1
1. x116
I
ano
1 w
Lbw
1 Ire
1 w
1 aw
Lai
e50
lw
1x10
1.a1
1_]10
1.18
1 ]wR
Tao
1 ]13
1 all
1x9
1 a!
1.]JS
1 TW
1.99
N.
1 alb
1 110ili
l Ii
1818a:b
I.J9
1 }1!
1.13
IIlOala
1.116w
I,FO
l:Iw
Lap
saaept AVL wtiere Nl �auo we niaeded° mp urea, nranOM;
VARNISHED -CAMBRIC INSULATED
CONDUCTORS
Type V
VTh\eIvlNlienu Icrnrubbereor�re'd6soednilchiar�7>>dpe R�mc<Pt
for m. It and IT ahich have l/bJdn<b inavlatian 1 r rarnlahed•
umbrie d x/Winch iwulatwn for [[u44-11- d eleduavn
and for No. 8 hich has ]/biil<h 1naWation for varni]hed•
ambrie and V6ilvch aWalivn (or rvbber.mvrrd <onducurL
Sm lahle n action 9]101. Tahle! 1 and h y, therelart. 68
wed far tFe m I.er of varniaM1ed<ambrie inwlaled ecnducton In
a mndurt or Ilbin6.
r11AMR In_T.%III.FS. DIAGRA3IS. EXAMPLFi !ll
TABLE ]E—PROPERTIES OF COPPER
CONDUCTORS
:A I�� Iwaa
• Am (� n ,. c� r ..1 a r .. tFa..a • a."-n.e c uai to
t'a War<•J rd.artrltt al a Ntan.:.d Wr. "
ihr r• rm to IFR ra':+tanr�,.;a�_af'vm COru!q 11
1 :. �.:�,}InM+an rJ v t Fa •bnr. aL..n ;°
A--
e.n '-r t.e l..a.ni Lat.r.Aa
Sbln r:aeA. raf .r r..n rn ry Oar F1 .•aAw a v< Y
:rrUt c+1, nrrl .r., tv an iaWw-'/cayrgr r!m ro. a In.,tw
Fcr T86h1 19, a<r La19u :I].
341 CIIAPTER I0 -ARLES. nlAr.R%3f.R, F.XAMPI.P.S
w:uq
p
nru
IIniS
.an
.Ir.
yq
paq
In:iapq
'yai�I1 V1
1➢
IL
,��11yy111pp!
_,ITI
..4R
_?A
.111
il'.
i
abr q
p�
S.
V 3
Yf/pl
��
.IxIMI.nn1
611
831
aq
1}I�
!�
111!
Ilga
lli
00 ],n.V i
a�jcac esg
ImnYq
rxn/
el
Ir
1 l.a
ilii
1 M,
ai
.'
za gw"ana600
b
iif
.ilasi
i
• Am (� n ,. c� r ..1 a r .. tFa..a • a."-n.e c uai to
t'a War<•J rd.artrltt al a Ntan.:.d Wr. "
ihr r• rm to IFR ra':+tanr�,.;a�_af'vm COru!q 11
1 :. �.:�,}InM+an rJ v t Fa •bnr. aL..n ;°
A--
e.n '-r t.e l..a.ni Lat.r.Aa
Sbln r:aeA. raf .r r..n rn ry Oar F1 .•aAw a v< Y
:rrUt c+1, nrrl .r., tv an iaWw-'/cayrgr r!m ro. a In.,tw
Fcr T86h1 19, a<r La19u :I].
341 CIIAPTER I0 -ARLES. nlAr.R%3f.R, F.XAMPI.P.S
CMA"ER l0—TABLES. nLIGRA3IS. EXAMPLES 113
409
-
jai
cv wV'
i f15
114"
,5;'
ails
J 3 S01 } e985�.
as >
W�
V 3
n .,
.v.
0A : wta
a ��33 a :•
AL =-a: Ha
Z3
00 ],n.V i
a�jcac esg
LS_ Si [
cFip
°Sa`5 8.1
QrioSr,C: s.=E
see
.'
za gw"ana600
b
Al
ap--
CMA"ER l0—TABLES. nLIGRA3IS. EXAMPLES 113
409
,g
Na C11APTER 10—TAULF.S• DIAGRAMS. EXASIPLES
CHAPTER le—TAPlXS. DIAGRASI[. ECASIPLES J<S
m®mF1
a g��
e�va�5
ggL ayy-- gg ppyyppyypp Igjls�'
hnt11111i31UR 3?"SB3?�ia: I:
Jae VIIAITER IU—TAULES. DJAGMAtS. E3A31PLES
TABLE 21—FULL-LOAD CURRENT -
Direct -Current Motors
TABLE 22—FULL-LOAD CURRENT-
Singlo-Phase A.C. Motors
np
11lC
xbY
a50Y
rIP
Inductvn Tylrc
�
SRuirt<IC'ave
and \\amd
AmPrr<+
Rolar IVnll) 1'c-er Slcwr
Ill'
1'
ii.J
13
is
baa
3i.a
Y s
—
J
9
IJ
6 0
x <
!ie
s—
N
IM' I
in'
ie o
—
te
Yi
38:
is
sro
nIi
as,
s<
ul
xv]
sao
Ise
Iso
el
rs
>a
Its
6ie
fla
4X 11♦
IW
PUJ
a i
i�.
xti0
)Ix
I9p
TABLE 22—FULL-LOAD CURRENT-
Singlo-Phase A.C. Motors
np
ury
xmv
as]v
Two -Phase A.C. Motors (4 -wire)
Inductvn Tylrc
Slnrhrwnu+ T)n
SRuirt<IC'ave
and \\amd
AmPrr<+
Rolar IVnll) 1'c-er Slcwr
Ill'
1'
ii.J
°a a1
baa
3i.a
Y s
—
J
NN as
1.1
!
x <
_asm
s—
wR
IM' I
a�
ie'
u�pnndina 2JIY.o1��•muux fu011wl t'urreni �4>rlo sndral5 Der
nor raMclirrl>.
Chex values f fullJeaJ olrrmt are for rr. wr+ run<inR al
arid+ usual (or behN .-tar+ and maws Jh nam:al t<r�
as art<natic+. alewa+ hudt far nln<iall> bw -Peed+ ar hleh
nan�eVlate rvr xio�iretinp r.<haN�n4eRY�el4 ent, to M1irh rax the
CHAPTER le—TAVLES. DIACRASIS. EXAMPLES !<l
TABLE 23—FULL-LOAD
CURRENT -
Two -Phase A.C. Motors (4 -wire)
Inductvn Tylrc
Slnrhrwnu+ T)n
SRuirt<IC'ave
and \\amd
AmPrr<+
Rolar IVnll) 1'c-er Slcwr
Ill'
IIIiV 1I0V <wV
$SUV JJtVV !:u\' —WV 550\' lJa:V
1—
—
IK
NN as
1.1
!
x <
—
1.J —
s—
)5f_-
10
iA IL
In
—
te
c<
I•W Sa
al 11 Ys <) !N Y
ell
I.Y CS
5J IJ 111 as 11
11
Iln
— ISX71
:It 1111.
61 16 1-e 57 IJ
Y) ]1 I+' YJ )a I)
1.3
4X 11♦
IMI 6 < Ila i
PUJ
— !II Hs
Iv ]I lal 110 e
• IT<u c lu i f II I -YJ rn r a f m,N v t
c�`rnu.val I li1cN : .1 1h dNu 1 <
t Ira. 311 1- 11 S rll)I I.. Q A 6. �M1
d t is n ! .S Mr n rR 1AIt I
iF SO n1 aJ I r e 1• t Ne amv< k-r<a aW.1�l •La
vlt VRcd h> 1 I uJ 115 aWeae 'Y
410
34S CHAPTER 16—TAIILIS. DIAGRAMS. EXAMPLES
TABLE 24—FULL-LOAD CURRENT'
Thrce-Phase A.C. Motors
lndcai<m T7fe Srnmmneu< Tlpe
S'.d_. Case and \Sound Haar fZZ" Power Paaor
A.rt Anry<r<r
1• IIOV '.'aV 1+1\• 55(1V 1JWV 110 I+OV $WV '3CO
Vi a E 1 .e — — — —
la 11 ]S 1. ii
IVa
lu S
1s
l.0
—
—
' mi.—nor anJ racwr
atani0g)
—
—
Squirr<I.e. avd gym
Sl'STF]t5
1.3
1
Twn (one in cam {ondann.
—
—
—
—_
5
— I5
1.5
6
—
--
—
—
—
i0
Nrul<al S .1<m 41 11.inR
"..'s
n:de 3✓rt. a ].rear.
' tertr .._
256
_— 250
Mme than ]o amvRa_
aoD
aro
WYundaomr
ISO
_— 150
Die"t.... em
7•\Vire. "I'Lavr Af, fr.m.
Tree !ew in nm <anJmwr.
Not nwm tban 30 R.P.
150
250 Iso
Mere man 50 M.P__
ISO
J6
:b
J
5+
:>
23
S.1
J1
— rb
JL
]I
R.5
63
Jl
36
6.S
<0
— IW
SS
11
10.5
66+J
Pun Ic<u m ealb wwsuvwl.
JS
8
sn
125
OJ
W
IJ
IIX1
51
N
10
09
JS
— 183
JS
95
bn
71
16
19
Ill
Ib1
61
81 "
51
65
1E
IS
IM
— 1+6
IdJ
YB
JS
]11
!fd
BS
2e
I.
IN
'3
JO
200
— +OJ
44
19:
19
—
210
103
40
For fullJmd wrrrnta of 26] and 2C0 call motor', incruw me
......wooing 2:ur.I, molar (uli lead tunrrn by 6 and l0 Iwr
ail. <aY<rlrwlY.
Thrw aelvrr ! lid wi wrr,it are fee roman r n11 ar
im�1a uawl ler n4eh<d mcm<+ anJ mmert uh normal wry e
charartrrinwa.rr hlmara�vill"nnin4 �,rr�lm,lio w�Arha mehlhe
nanw;la�er curn"1 canoe ehovhl hr '. car
IF, 90_and N In-tt P. F. the A— ORurt' ihwld La
CHAPTER 10—T.ARI.FS, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES 319
TABLE 26—MAXIMUM RATING OR SETTING
OF MOTOR -BRANCH -CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE
DEVICES FOR MOTORS MARKED WITH A
CODE LETTER INDIKVANG LOCKED
ROTORH hnr ar FOLoro:m Cone..
F((u < Ronne Cwwnilrea'an ti,rlin[
Tr9e ul Mmar Tahh'.� JiCal. Inalan. f:ma
lece<ar
unmr I, e,
CIO, TY:e T!N
All A( —.11 It-- ace
ir.„l V n<hrcnaur m^lir!
w:lh [u1lariu6e, revue
tar reu{ar rnrvve:
lode lenrr A.... ISO — JN
Iili[t P w %. ]
C.i
150
AU AC uvirreI r..4
n±ih`yalowaa Iwmer
mn:y�
C«e frtlrr A_.__ ISO I50
Co -le ierrn n
Code Lellar F
•. t' -.r eli n 1.<V. le {t .NWa
TWl
aM<I”,
gal a..d ua9f1
he calve ei<a w ('e rmn a• , a
car .spa 1e+n aA4::•uak. timrl,m:l 1)rt a!<irwil kr<aYw'
wh..h n. I aiw Ls m Lhw1 r iv �rRtwb 111).
11) RpY•' iuw�r :w"t rhe lawuaed is E`e'Dera vDr fa.arW
wwen�D+mpr• ae., .M1rO .ran vy a. nw rrapraatmr cri'
;� SwA a, :` lb•vp bole. n•l ea in e.�'o(: Na��",:� A
For It omrs CGt srealked ee Teble 27 a Cade Letter,"
330 CHAPTER lo—TABLES, DIAGRAMS. EXAMPLES
TABLE 27—MAXIMUM RATING OR SETTING
OF MOTOR -BRANCH -CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE
DEVICES FOR MOTORS NOT MARKED WITH
A CODE LETTER INDICATING LOCKED
ROTOR KVA
P.. Coir or Fou Luo C.Aund
Paw Amin¢ ClrtuipDr<ahrr Saline
TJPO of Momr (Sn2iw 11=ol 'Ilmi
Tahle.O, Cai• unrom Limit
Omm 7, 0.9, 10) T)De 'TJIw
Singiep6ve, all tifeJ.__
300
250
• S' 'rrrlta¢e and qm
' <h (toil collas.,
(See Dudrami 1 m 19)
f5aw Snliun 21'S fur me vrt<urr
' mi.—nor anJ racwr
atani0g)
700
_ 150
Squirr<I.e. avd gym
Sl'STF]t5
Oramuml L'ma.
hroncua (auto• 1...
Twn (one in cam {ondann.
D.G Unertun.lyd,
Na nmrt two JO w•
2N'ire, Single cchane AG r
U.C. Una SYrre CrwndN.
On. n nr<vunJ.J ruudxlu.
Fre. 31.
perea
250
_ 200
Mare than ]0 amprrea.
200
— 200
Hi hots r'u5rrrlea[e
lie (enc iv n<h rcnduaer.
from ] Igdare,
.
at marc thaw 30 am-
Net
N
Nrul<al S .1<m 41 11.inR
"..'s
n:de 3✓rt. a ].rear.
' tertr .._
256
_— 250
Mme than ]o amvRa_
aoD
aro
WYundaomr
ISO
_— 150
Die"t.... em
7•\Vire. "I'Lavr Af, fr.m.
Tree !ew in nm <anJmwr.
Not nwm tban 30 R.P.
150
250 Iso
Mere man 50 M.P__
ISO
III 150
For ..ruin <u 1liei< le mr vAi t«ifel • e r«tion' I321,
4J+: and 15+9. Th valu Rivm n the Iwo -Wafv mv<r
Ib coling, of onnadiu'u41e, umeliml. tJpprra al eirevilLreaL<n
which may al,,,W moJiard it in aec — u+_.
SJo<hmnOva momm al tba Iewmr'ue taeappeed tlpe (muaDy
650 R.1•.]I. or lower) ouch w arc vasa m Jrire reciyrxmme
<9mprenon, pump!, els. whim hart up mloadN,r require
• tore ranoor enwit6reaher ae115n[ is ewua o1
300 prr test
el fullWad 1vrtm1
For motors marked with a Coda Letter,
bee Tablo 26.
10—TABLES, DIAGRAMS. EXAMPLES 311
TABLE 28—NUMBER OF OVERCURRENT
UNITS, SUCH AS TRIP
COILS OR RELAYS,
FOR PROTECTION OF CIRCUITS
(See Dudrami 1 m 19)
f5aw Snliun 21'S fur me vrt<urr
1 pralKlien of r lurmn
is¢rn<ul, r<..non 1JJ1 (or 5(mrur and n(ticn aJt1 for Molerrl.
•
•Xnmr.er onJ l.<alien of
Sl'STF]t5
Oramuml L'ma.
2 -Wire, Alnrlr-phnv A.C. er
Twn (one in cam {ondann.
D.G Unertun.lyd,
trR. 11.
2N'ire, Single cchane AG r
U.C. Una SYrre CrwndN.
On. n nr<vunJ.J ruudxlu.
Fre. 31.
2 Wirr, vinl�Ie phare AC. r
O.C.• Mr.l paanl Craurd<d.
Ti-: rano in rxh rondmlor.
ere. Ja.
)•\Vire S:n¢Irpl:rre A.C. De.
Twe (enc :n each eanduclor.
rind Iwm li'hn., w:rb
Neutral.
U.".
tr[. 1).
Si.
2 W:rr, :lin fe.Dha'e 1e 4,d
lie (enc iv n<h rcnduaer.
from ] Igdare,
t,e• 3).
Nrul<al S .1<m 41 11.inR
"..'s
n:de 3✓rt. a ].rear.
CinuR
]•Wiry, Sinalephaw A.C. ar
A.C.
'IM1rae revue in each d'.U.C.
Unaruund<d \a
F:e. bl.
]-N'ir., .5,ealel•Iraae A['.
.1C,
Two r.;re in mh
Vr D.C. lire:m.l<J \<Ylls!.
•<t Yl ne:nral Nm1uc4V
7•\Vire. "I'Lavr Af, fr.m.
Tree !ew in nm <anJmwr.
man P'rm U:aren=del,
t16. aJ.
7N'ire, 'd'M1aw. A(:. L'cm-
Twu IAne .gab prmo:u Y:r
mon Wrn I:mackd.
•<r . ,m.v med...m
F:<'vl,cun
6WIre, 3Phaae, VnpwmlA,
Pao• (ear .n crab aecdv<Ier.
rhaa<a Seppaarate-
2.r1.•Luanw
GXt
S:r :
N.iv ..rU rl..
N.—A, SM,— 2.
l haae !rJ-
veal.
I1'baw,
z.:,,
.en ,;
ws:Ju:,<vl.fru.
1\VIu, Unenuvded,
th-w .. m aa:h am:JaaO•r.
t•d 'ib.
SWire, l•1'ba.e, I Wiry
Grwn.IIJ.
Two i-
he m a.M1 ne•ac�JN
raaJma.r. Fre. Ii:.
3
).YY'n., I I'bax. GrwrndrJ
Tb—ln"r
Keuaral.
ere. •
].\5'nr. J rb,x. Mid rr,,�iol
Tbrm l:.ee m cuh <ardxwr.
Grcund<I
70m irae in each :mrmvrdwl
Na _r,.l.
taCJa:Da t:a. •'lea
1 N.,., 51•hur, l'na•avdri
Pun Ic<u m ealb wwsuvwl.
1._nal
tae. 19j.
•1 An ra'r nl v",1 vi1
drai[<<VI rca!
( ii•t J' i r e1
1<IyYr:t ,amtaoal•.a: <i a <C feel {<inrJVrmra aid
'4
1 f
sTT
2Ai
f3m
84P
353 01MaTF.R In-. TAnf. S, WIGR ISM. EXAMPLES
a amondaq ov<rmrrmt adnpinRR Jmire Eittrr two or lbrn
umnJarY YerNrrmt trirpin6 Jevicra m.Y le u+eJ 'Ih three
Iurtrn[ vawtmmrn n a Jy4au aratcm mdar a thea •born
I. FiNru If avJ 1$
\\'hen thrn ela
I urr<nl eranslormarc M tnalead v/
1min awnurteIrmin
DR 4'.—show in 3'IRYrta
I7
.d. IL, the secmJarY IriPrmR dnicra maf ro st e! lhrn
.—d.,ovrnurrevt Uirrine Jevrea or Iwo >mondn3 ovrr<ur
rnl n+W�inH demon r�W r<aidual Nlreul leipPir.H devie<
3. a! a
le rmaa Sn h'iIL.
J. \\Tmr a -.&HH devi<a an not available with thmor
four onrrurrm[ unite a+ re5uircd i the ta41<, it is Mmissia+iLle
[o aeha4lu4 two ovrtNrren[ units and u e Iva when three er<r
curt<n[ uniu are uI1W /or. tm oremurrrn[ unin and Iwe Tuan
.. '. four ovd I. 1 . .4 a u11N tor. The tune ar tua<a
art. Le.lacW in the mvJu<mn [ rontalninl an evercurtrnt
unit Thi : nmi<e. however, of wt>Iitminq Iwo /m met<ur-
rmt urdta i w a diuouraHed for oLvicw reawna.
CHAPTER lo—TAn LFS. OIAGR\HS. EXAMPLES III
TABLE
29—DEMAND
LOADS FOR HOUSE-
HOLD ELECTRIC RANGES
AND
OTHER COOKING
APPLIANCES
OVER IY4 kw RATING.
Celmn. A m Le u.N in all <a+ rot u olhmiy Mrmined
J
iv Sme
bdo..
]IkmarlE
Sn Nmn)
Demavd Faclma (See Nm• J)
NIJYRFR OF
RA.VGPS COLUMN A COLUMN 0
COLVHN f.
t]al <s<r 13 (Len Than Jsk
(J$ kw ae 35k
tr RauvHJ
Xr RalioH)
4vr RatY.gJ
I
H 4w
k954
J
it h
nR
LHs°%
]]q
3
N 4w
N'RA
41
!
1)M1
23 Y
11%
J3R
JO
NA
11 �
ii•R`a
!2q
1S 4
4.
So I.
W4.%
R
]lR
ill
31
31 is
ie%
19
J. X.
a�
2.%
b
Jf N
J]•n
'%
JL R
11
IL tr
'n
NR
=dR
'JJ
ji
kr
iv t�
AR
ii^Rv
=L,p
6R
:1
40 Yw
fJR
]L'
344
11+1',
Icr <uh rinn
> "
3.R
at sa
Js 4. dw Y
1tS
fdR
]IM
6l t orn
k. 1•a raeh
Iu'.n
J'/t
Xa'.4
IM1Y•
PLR
Nin I. Onr 13 k. u 31 b Runa Pcr taupe lath•
rM.u.:w1 rar•1 rtxer Iban It a: L.1 a_ cn +hen 31 L t?re
Ai -'+r
tq 41h 11.. .a:d...l Kn neaa ea. : u Ye.
Nara 3 Orm 3; `. V `zw Y'rn••. eJi A,u.Y nrted mu
k Ea -+a ! ae.�s"lb 61•arm e1 c. Ib m .+.1 m.na A M
f.<m.a::a. aY urm.c.t 1!r ao...s ,ai naan ry,<ya 1. luuad
<. +r auv-.m ...-..:ari.v +.+.Par•
354 CHAPTER nJ—TARLF.S. MACRAHS, EXAMPLES
Sete J. Over N: kw to ea( kw. In lice of the melhed Drs
n -A, Ih< IoW for r Yca irdividwllT ratty mora
IM1an Ij3 X. M1ut not mart than .1; k -
.1
r rnaY 4 moaiderN
Ihr wm of the nartwylat<_ratings LI aE th< ranRl, multiDliM
Lr the drmanJ fxwn •J«dn•1 in Cdumna n rr C for the girrn
nvm4r of rams.
Smu 1. Ranch Ci—it ,d with
circuit load far ona
anRl maT be comPutN iR xwrJaace wit8 We about table,
CIfAPTER I1 TABLES, DJAGRAHS, EXANpLEJ 333
S
gg�g8
a OH T
O
1
99yy
;oy7
q d 66
. a �-4. ^^99__Ral;a7:8
I
Q
ME
I�FV � qry��• • a:
r
S R mdR GG
F aJ`Sd>a a�a7 t
f• I�' d ea a -
gg E
G lay Is=xax2asagsx�
4/2
e
a9
556 CHAPTER W—TABLES. DIAGRIMS. FXAMPLES
a
CHAPTER lo—TADLES. DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES ,33
°l!;a �j h ... �9 a1 E� 3g 3 i .39
-> �> -> a 5> i> z> C>
F l
C GL- a qga8y
Lag
A h5t} v v y 4 p
jLla•}e i 7
L� j`I•i R�.
i L
1 339 CIIAI?F.R [0 TADLM DIAC.RA31S. EXAMPLES
CHAPTER 10—TABLES. BIAGRAM9. EXAMPLES 359
NOTES TO TABLE 31
M151A,v anJ 1`osi iS,",n i oGt.c: Fi oYaia; n AN Mo.
l
2. c4vducr0n Y! {vurN rn Iy i-1
rn
]. T-1'061 is 1n uae on{r nh wble Iwya. yonabla
r di rmiand au:Auncq. OnaWe «b od amus aPDlun¢a
�Mch are vY liaule re b! med Irryun�r avd .hen nilar
3. Try! AT. CT. ATJ nd CTJ n lulubl< for IW Iv ImYha
vpr ea Mie9 si9Yr ttti .Len YSuhN dl«rlr. ar Or of
«ajaiY r y of p'ry. '•• . p4rubla ,PPlun<e r,rN Y 50 .Yla
eu !del aep rLal u "'I.V deatGli{r pl 5!a wrd
4 YenliaL 73y� AI�aN ATI are ler un aalr .irh heuin9
ayW:aT
!. Try! R b wi4vle far me 4v wk m9eL
3. R43br filly w <arniahW eamLri< u«, maT M aaLYilu{N
!er Ib! lever L-rY
ST are aviul:l< for x on thealrt ran;
rllre 6r<:.Ie n�Js are wrmdM Lr
FO. he ba
m>,r re ! wmwrile ,nemLlr (arnl
ar.J r�rr.• n tnaheel• ••1 rh< mlirlayal rent«wra
m•r aea ?e`n 1'.ore auyt.vrl•n! I.11r.r of '11un o Leny'
rei:e. �• el ...e,ncerenJ o ru44r r•.rrveJ rtr�1 1 e Ia.J y
,.: Y B- r-•.t_w.r ender 1`n< r•n: r4. 4f Ic.`uMl. ill
re:a.. n-�� . < 4. - < e•�n«t<r:'�E< .1eel .eyy«Re6
me:J. :�I . , :Lau;r '16icuLe avJ vY la gLIN rY {ha
For Tablla 31 and 33. !!! page 362.
U
46
qj--
all
1.4
z?yry
ray
x0
I
�
o
d,
c
s
s
3
S
Sa
o3 a
I'o
°s
I
z
8
<
°c
p-1
y
y5
5
y
xa,
4�
g^I
9
8w9
V
a
CHAPTER lo—TADLES. DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES ,33
°l!;a �j h ... �9 a1 E� 3g 3 i .39
-> �> -> a 5> i> z> C>
F l
C GL- a qga8y
Lag
A h5t} v v y 4 p
jLla•}e i 7
L� j`I•i R�.
i L
1 339 CIIAI?F.R [0 TADLM DIAC.RA31S. EXAMPLES
CHAPTER 10—TABLES. BIAGRAM9. EXAMPLES 359
NOTES TO TABLE 31
M151A,v anJ 1`osi iS,",n i oGt.c: Fi oYaia; n AN Mo.
l
2. c4vducr0n Y! {vurN rn Iy i-1
rn
]. T-1'061 is 1n uae on{r nh wble Iwya. yonabla
r di rmiand au:Auncq. OnaWe «b od amus aPDlun¢a
�Mch are vY liaule re b! med Irryun�r avd .hen nilar
3. Try! AT. CT. ATJ nd CTJ n lulubl< for IW Iv ImYha
vpr ea Mie9 si9Yr ttti .Len YSuhN dl«rlr. ar Or of
«ajaiY r y of p'ry. '•• . p4rubla ,PPlun<e r,rN Y 50 .Yla
eu !del aep rLal u "'I.V deatGli{r pl 5!a wrd
4 YenliaL 73y� AI�aN ATI are ler un aalr .irh heuin9
ayW:aT
!. Try! R b wi4vle far me 4v wk m9eL
3. R43br filly w <arniahW eamLri< u«, maT M aaLYilu{N
!er Ib! lever L-rY
ST are aviul:l< for x on thealrt ran;
rllre 6r<:.Ie n�Js are wrmdM Lr
FO. he ba
m>,r re ! wmwrile ,nemLlr (arnl
ar.J r�rr.• n tnaheel• ••1 rh< mlirlayal rent«wra
m•r aea ?e`n 1'.ore auyt.vrl•n! I.11r.r of '11un o Leny'
rei:e. �• el ...e,ncerenJ o ru44r r•.rrveJ rtr�1 1 e Ia.J y
,.: Y B- r-•.t_w.r ender 1`n< r•n: r4. 4f Ic.`uMl. ill
re:a.. n-�� . < 4. - < e•�n«t<r:'�E< .1eel .eyy«Re6
me:J. :�I . , :Lau;r '16icuLe avJ vY la gLIN rY {ha
For Tablla 31 and 33. !!! page 362.
U
46
360 CHAPTER 1D—TABLES, DIAG%%MS, ESAMPLES
TABLE 34
Table of Dimensions of the National'Electrical Code
*Standard Cartridge Enclosed Fuses
(Sre -i.. 93101)
A
Ey),—g t•Ci
Form 1. CARTRIDUE FUSE-11mk 1-1-c'
CIIAP'TER I0 TABLES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES 161
TABLE 34—Continued
Table of Dimensions of the National Electrical Code
Standard Cartridge Enclosed Fusee
(See rani.. 97101)
Poem I CARTRIDGE FUS—kW1e 0L0. Co......
D
I
A
U
C
Wonting Surfaca
Dimon
Widta
p.. ria a.
of Pe Ww
Term,
on.
wedrl
1
N -1N
i
IPc�
of
Vellear
Neth
Ur<r
.1
Caip.
CUip
Ivtrr
C'e0eeitr
Tercan4
Cllr
(siq
1100NI
177000
Amyero
IocEo
1
Ioeao
Iodla
S.`30 er
altt
j
I
1
e1•Re
080
9119
9
� a
1
lit
Y
A'r
slow
3 9
33000
4 0
WIND
� Prj
0
la
11fo�00
1e1•eW
W 10j,
a
='�,
Nor arer
600
e1M
9
c8 —� 16i
�5t
4,
ti �
-K
4
bI-p
'
sl•I00
n '
d
I0I'3q
631Y4
Tn.
� 11ry
9
8
I
lt�
1
a1W1
4. 131
9
e�
CIIAP'TER I0 TABLES, DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES 161
TABLE 34—Continued
Table of Dimensions of the National Electrical Code
Standard Cartridge Enclosed Fusee
(See rani.. 97101)
Poem I CARTRIDGE FUS—kW1e 0L0. Co......
D
It
C
--
Wonting Surfaca
Minimum Venice) Clor.ao
p.. ria a.
of Pe Ww
Term,
on.
wedrl
1
N -1N
iD,Pin.0
1 lnada
Termra I
CrPurq
e1 Te.min.l
B:e..a
ovrrde of
TJLI
Okla
Amgar
Ivtrr
Inran
Iaea�
660Ja
88000
10 S
11 0
1100NI
177000
11 7
18 a
TABLE 33—WORKING SPACE
(See -sale.
_
Minimum Clear Space Adjacent to Use Pam
altt
j
I
1
e1•Re
600
J 3
'y
1614a
slow
3 9
33000
4 0
T
4 11
u�
3 6
11fo�00
o--6
CDAPTF.R 1e—TAn1.FS, 111.t('.R\615. EXA3IPLI'S 363
Is
N -N
ti �
-K
s •
bI-p
nPma
363 CHAPTER 10—TABLES. DIAGRAMS, EXAMPLES
TABLE 32—ISOLATION BY ELEVATION
•
(Sa aenton 7163)
Distance of Live Parte Above the Floor or Other
Wonting Surfaca
Minimum Venice) Clor.ao
.f Uoraardrd F1
Volkee Detweev Pb—. Fat !veto
w
1
61W
11000
a 0
9 0
73000
9 3
31001
P 6
11000
9 10
660Ja
88000
10 S
11 0
1100NI
177000
11 7
18 a
TABLE 33—WORKING SPACE
(See -sale.
7163. For vnityo below 6:0, res rection 1112)
Minimum Clear Space Adjacent to Use Pam
Mtoimum Ilorirontal Clauses
VveuardeJ la
VW1aee Delwon PhuaFto
600
J 3
3100
Uses
J 3
3 1
slow
3 9
33000
4 0
660110
4 11
88000
3 6
11fo�00
1 1
CDAPTF.R 1e—TAn1.FS, 111.t('.R\615. EXA3IPLI'S 363
DIAGRAMS
141911-1 1to 19 eho inR Number of 0—current
Unite each as TripCoils or Relay- for the PI-Ir611en
of Circuits as regared by Table 28.
E F,
Ip,
�rwa
1p 4—
Iqr 1 I'ff
d-4., I TFfT
�Ir�y�j'{—�'IrI7 T _
PR3----_I----m.----L�`e�
4 m
j
3" CHAPTER i-TAnLFS, Dh.\GRAMS, EXAMPLES
rITAPTF.R lo-TARLFS. DIAGR,\MS. RXAMPLE1 AS
— Nae t ce TW- is
366 CHAPTER 10 -TABLES. DIAGILSMS. EXAMPLES
MOTOR FEEDER .*BRANCH CIRCUITS
Article IJa
Feeder Overcurrent
protection
ec<1.n a36t Feeder Conductors.
r.1.
17-7 fechan 431.
C
*Motor- Controller
gect,on 4,111 to o,90
MOTOR
Sewndary rtuit for
Wound-ra91. Motor.
Secondery
C(ecuit Secondary Controller
Coilducturs
Sec<i.n 4313
......yianpnleJih Secondary Resistor
!ht iarre tore
Fik—, 20
EXAMPLES
Due to limitation. on paper, it has become necee-
sarye. to craft the Examples from this edition of the
Cod
APPENDIX
INTERPRETATION PROCEDURE
OF THE ELECTRICAL COMMITTEE
Ad .ped Lr rhe Elnrtn.l t'cmmme<. 19:3
Amexded to a. 011,11.3 l—,ner, 1931
The following is the formally an Procedure
for securing Inmrprelation, of the current edition of
the National Electrical Code.
There 111.11 be a standing committee of the Electri.
cal Committee 10 be known as the Interpretations
Committee. This—unitle. slut[ consist of:
(1) The Chairman of the Electrical Committee,
ex-alficio, who shall be the Chairman of the Inter.
Initiation, Committee.
(2) The Electric,[ Field Engineer. ex -officio,
who shall be the Secretary of the Interpretations
Committee.
(3) The Chairman of that Article Commiut<
which has charge of that paragraph or section o1
the cote for which an nicrpretat-, is re0uesteJ,
and
(4) At least two other members or alternates of
the regular Electrical Committee p<rwnneL
In other words, the entire personnel to constitute
a panel from which the Chairman may draw, depend.
ing upon availability, experience, keow:,,,u , and in-
terest. (Provide.), however, that no member or aller-
male .lull he eligible who is actually concerned wnh
a comm -141 Alunian to which the specific question
I., interpre4tion applies.)
Thou desiring an int<rprealinn shall supply the
Chairman with five iJentical copies of a —1—et in
which Al -11 aPp... specific reference to a single prob-
lem, paragraph, ar rection. Sv:h > aUtttnent shall
be on tlw basinro..tafi....y of the <n4vuer and .hall
bt duty sigced.
3v
��r
aeo,ml 4aa1 1.'4749
Motor
5rcfeiclT
IrFle,
Disconnecting Means
s<a1on 411o(toaan.
lee4i3ccr1 .n uetory
.312
a1MGtef-rynnlnq yVEf•
current Device
Section 4)21 to 433)
*Motor- Controller
gect,on 4,111 to o,90
MOTOR
Sewndary rtuit for
Wound-ra91. Motor.
Secondery
C(ecuit Secondary Controller
Coilducturs
Sec<i.n 4313
......yianpnleJih Secondary Resistor
!ht iarre tore
Fik—, 20
EXAMPLES
Due to limitation. on paper, it has become necee-
sarye. to craft the Examples from this edition of the
Cod
APPENDIX
INTERPRETATION PROCEDURE
OF THE ELECTRICAL COMMITTEE
Ad .ped Lr rhe Elnrtn.l t'cmmme<. 19:3
Amexded to a. 011,11.3 l—,ner, 1931
The following is the formally an Procedure
for securing Inmrprelation, of the current edition of
the National Electrical Code.
There 111.11 be a standing committee of the Electri.
cal Committee 10 be known as the Interpretations
Committee. This—unitle. slut[ consist of:
(1) The Chairman of the Electrical Committee,
ex-alficio, who shall be the Chairman of the Inter.
Initiation, Committee.
(2) The Electric,[ Field Engineer. ex -officio,
who shall be the Secretary of the Interpretations
Committee.
(3) The Chairman of that Article Commiut<
which has charge of that paragraph or section o1
the cote for which an nicrpretat-, is re0uesteJ,
and
(4) At least two other members or alternates of
the regular Electrical Committee p<rwnneL
In other words, the entire personnel to constitute
a panel from which the Chairman may draw, depend.
ing upon availability, experience, keow:,,,u , and in-
terest. (Provide.), however, that no member or aller-
male .lull he eligible who is actually concerned wnh
a comm -141 Alunian to which the specific question
I., interpre4tion applies.)
Thou desiring an int<rprealinn shall supply the
Chairman with five iJentical copies of a —1—et in
which Al -11 aPp... specific reference to a single prob-
lem, paragraph, ar rection. Sv:h > aUtttnent shall
be on tlw basinro..tafi....y of the <n4vuer and .hall
bt duty sigced.
3v
��r
9Z
• 760 APPENDIX 770 INDEX
when applications involve actual field situations
they shall so state and all parties involved shalt be
named.
Two general forma of Endings will be recognized:
(A) Those making an interpretation of the lit-
eral text;
(B) Th... O M,l; an interpretation of the in.
tent o[ the r.ectrical Committee when a particular
rale Was Sd.rptird.
The findings of the Interpretations Committee will
be in its name and for the Electrical Committee as a
Whole.
The applicant will be informed of the finding
Prompt iJ frAlowmg its having been determined.
From time t0 time these findings, serially numbered
but n•< otherwise identif%ed, will be bulletined to the
Electrical Committee mailing list, including the Tech-
niceJ P.O.
When the Standing Committee on Interpretations
repo" to the Electrical Committee at its regular
me<tinga, a statement shall be made as to extent of
concurrence of the members of the special committees
in the several separate findings covered by the report.
No previous or other advices shall be released as to
minority views, if any,
The Interpretations Committee personnel serves as
volunteers, and will endeavor to follow businesslike
methods for expediting the disposing of its docket.
It cannot be responsible for it coming to pass that
authorities enforcing the National Electrical Code or
other electrical wiring standards, decline to acquiesce
in or otherwise recognise the findings.
Each Article Committee will be expected to give
appropriate consideration to the text of any section
or paragraph which has produced an Interpretation
Finding to the end that suitable revision of the text
involved may be recommended to the Electrical Cum.
mittee.
Requests for Interpretations should be addressed
to the National Fire Protection Association, 60
Batterymarth Street, Boston 10, Mass.
INDEX
Non: 51m1 of the Na d rpteuiom
used thrvughoul Ihi1
<We are d<enN ;d Ani�IR 140 which article ahoWJ be conauhN
whrn koFnR up • mbimh In Ibe new• cede arc rcmml cath
«lion ;I p�o<+ded wish a title, Far a
mon ttmclno codes of
trhe Imihr uL'<a1 reler w he union
� Ibis index fi!rt Uoe
hnd;nn. In
anhf
the rnerrnrn the um0<r onlr is nam.
Snn<n, which foll<w in Ib< teat ahauid alto be wnraltN.
Mid
<
A id fumes, arc Carrnire vapors
incrlhn
:rm Calu<nwa "�
Aru<ie am
All
__ um
Ahemrtine runmta in metal �r,rcbaura
Aluminum <mdunan
3131
'016
__�.__.__,._....JIOb,
Ts11a I and 2
An«h nnuna for _
AnvJa '10
Le,J car N .:l9J, 1111,
110:, 9!131
J10J. On11 6 JI )111
Arricle IN
c.nvnamr .._i; ....._..,._,._
Ap01rr�N dd fi 1 _ at
.._I:Js
k9mp <
10`• A•wrla Idp
Are lan+:a
Ar<InR la encbaun of '�"" '
-,1103' SJaa, 71u
p
.4...lahnl
1 a
p earere:l
C<nrtN
ILIarnY iJrnlhu rt+w'.\nnle
1'dar IY d l -. a<.:n
Rew,r,n
Ru6lnr R.lr.J -
Yulurc d a:0
Serri.<
v+unalliaR
Mlnwsm d . ..S,Ye'•i
J10t, Illu
Aflnl<f aroifb<d cam'nie _.....
rempeulur< I+,.:pmxa
Alun. <andu<wrr in .
];1J, JSa)'An1IN
wmnmw{v ep'u.mmr
-- 1mrW, uire
AWamm�crmn Incurs
Aucu,nnalwana ._._. _..
k;mne dirLlrc lumen
� ,91Y!
... ..1007, SS•f
a1N
.J9J, 1111, `113, 110], &911
116_
IJOJ, 15+1,
.�n:ne J: a, J10J.
\'arn;aLed r n:4ri< earnN
A.1•na
I,a,! <nrdnnFlr. rn Cuva:xun, nc. ,a,.rr,
A.iiAe n9
Ava rvm6xpu Im1m —._.. _ .
AmM J'a
aau•on
Amrk Ica
9Jah1
.7ou
AA .
r•
fa:<Irr r'<f, < Iw•I.+m <1
1209
Arlvk J1'
Avan <uekl ....
Artkir UO
! nun.«Uta 5'•l. 91'01
Ilei
InWJW:ra Jr6J1, Jfl, Y'^1, yfA, J. al, ll)n,
tart,
Jaa. A.e•;e rap, baa
(.coma a kee <mIG•w.m..
31st, llsa.
Nu a
_ Jori
v>i. lip, 341, lAn
rhl�i oud«,wa ,n
7209
40
ur and car blunt. aI Standard 9r 'adanal fiord W Kia —
Undlrwdnrl.
Car nes upnip. <9nduct111 __,...1101, 7101, Tables I, 7 and 3
Ueo mdand, I" (ndm till-
U,_
un Tabic ]
a(m9r ri1<ultr, cmJand
Nalral fcMera ""—"- 1'11
Cellularconal dwr mtt�aY, ...�_'�,_.= ,;{pjiele91561
CireuipbrlaYeq De6Ntkn f _.._,.,_.j,__..____,Anide
IraWklioa'.�__JJSI, I3g9. 2631 TIO!. 7136 ]0151 100
7611. , 67x7
6]'). 1110. Table to
tIW
Ctal I arc Osir. Cirruin
Clan 1 end 2 5,0�aa1 Ankk 723
M. 1, 11 and I11. IlanNam I«atlona .r__._..Ankk 300
Qe Of —dl.- -AlightaDl 3,is. 7210. ]]II, RII"_ ]633
F.Imton
712]
�P_..�...___._ 7N6, 77iD,
Swh<hle,.. . T�bkl 7T, J7
W., 1«aiem _._._.____......__.�._._]1v1. J1a1. 7721
INDEX
UI
_.._..._...__....._..
.. ... _.__ 110
INderl,a of
IM
Unnwnl R AYenrma
1116
1110, T LI 1 N«e IV
_.__�.. _.__..
.... ....ItW 1113
:rm Calu<nwa "�
Aru<ie am
Snrure rap
pin,l l! C.
111!
-..,Arlide 100
_._.._. ...
-- ...
..._ ..___..-9JNI
..Table JI
....__.. ......_,
1c! 911151
!101, 93101
1 1In rapacilY __._
_. L.. 1103. 1106, TAI,,, J and
,,.wrade
frrl<rn<
MI,Commun,mlion
INderl,a of
.6011
Unnwnl R AYenrma
1116
1110, T LI 1 N«e IV
Dlliel<nt a 1
Ihmmn.n,n, of .._.
1011
.. � 1'al•I<f IJ to n
Snrure rap
pin,l l! C.
111!
-..,Arlide 100
I;aurc ..
4rounJN u I 117.1, 1Jfl
Ilia. Tatle 18
•JJI, lav), 1511, JI01,
fAenu0ra ' n
43101. 91001
- 9JIu1
In ml+ll•11<
Inanknaa '6
1016, JI01
Le,J car N .:l9J, 1111,
110:, 9!131
J10J. On11 6 JI )111
9JId1 1 fin 1 anJ 16
\I.Ii4..i�m alae 1 Aa
...,. .9]101
7101, 41-.1111
Slulara
Neural , .Y rac:,p
raldea I .nl II
....
.
b. r M1ear r U!
. 9)161
.4...lahnl
1 a
p earere:l
_ JJUJ, 1101. 911n1
ILIarnY iJrnlhu rt+w'.\nnle
1VA 1151, SI W, fJ:VIA 9101'
Rew,r,n
Ru6lnr R.lr.J -
lln1; 91101, TA:,.IJ�M i)
Serri.<
v+unalliaR
_ lnak 11n
ArlRln 115 !N Ron
NI•.w.LVr+,i'R
Slow humn•e wvmv;..rd
Sl.andeJ
JIn.. 91101
.. lint 911 VI
"— �Jtca, bk 16
rempeulur< I+,.:pmxa
11-01' 1r1:. v1101,
Thrrmotlnlirlib.
TaLka 1 nJ 2, Nan a and I
Tyl•h kll<r,
. - . - a lM. 91101
I uJeryraunJ
Lnmaulal<J
.J9J, 1111, `113, 110], &911
116_
IJOJ, 15+1,
.�n:ne J: a, J10J.
\'arn;aLed r n:4ri< earnN
116], 9!101
w'ealh<rr,n••f .. .._..
w, Inuu..na �
.. JIV1, 91101
Com14n, Ra<ewaYa
JIV2
Anic' Jab
u,iln
r
9Jah1
U . .I,uf ,r•
lnr�iw<+ ry
Ja61, a.n1
7aLk l9
ry
372 UNDU
.pl-
1111, 1215, ]JIS. JJ62, AnSck N0. 3111,
neo, lszz, Jazz, Ja.z nos nu lea
331
— Yin'
INDEX III
ftth. 6231
AJO
c "—
lira park . 1311, ri
1 417
374 INDEX
J75
F—. I121
ISIa, 712
1
Fu 0v
M4 m
paj
2j;
F—g. it
W7
240
=V —'rw
013 ii6J3
z
414
11 0. TAI U
lt�o' -.j5 A,G 1. 3.1
.. I
.......
14131,
sloj
win ... . ........
I-ibl —d.
6."j
5107
4311
10J. 4 I4W
M,
2
Du
4.51. 1H1
Ptllray K[n
16—w
J,!J. 44111,9441
G
.....Ilanrd
51
.5. 4, 1
G'—d . . ....... 1-1—
5450, b 4101
5.5i: '07
Alternatinf
"J"s
1 417
374 INDEX
INDEX
J75
21
ISIa, 712
1
MM—I o6 d-.
--a' ".
2191Furmcw.
44
35133—
24114.,
2"434
W7
240
IM., IM
013 ii6J3
z
G .....•.... moe
11 0. TAI U
lt�o' -.j5 A,G 1. 3.1
.. I
.......
.
sloj
win ... . ........
I-ibl —d.
6."j
5107
In
Du
G .1- Ih 1116
T., .... ...
fnenl ruin
16—w
J,!J. 44111,9441
G
.....Ilanrd
51
.5. 4, 1
G'—d . . ....... 1-1—
5450, b 4101
5.5i: '07
Alternatinf
A,ud, J50
m b.d,fi,
SJJ
A -h
R....
21 1
Col. .
'j, 5151
W41
.j5I.
cond.a.
6j. ,
Fl..—
1451, 23y1,
2541,
w. "p : Z. 1061, 5.0
. - . ... ..
' 3611,a23
Conero0rl
WWI
C .... .
'511 '314710i.'J:I 644 14
'ib
2511
1311. 2114
d:,:
--is", 2$ZJ: 2593
9 —.2581. Z..
�235'8'j
Z54J. MY:
On runflnral
2564, 2'3j6j, jj'9711
2594
INDEX
J75
Fquipmev4 oyer aw "1.
F
ISIa, 712
1
MM—I o6 d-.
--a' ".
2191Furmcw.
Iuv4 _.
35133—
44JJ. 4111,
4111. 3019. 1061, ]019
W7
w+l• -------------- 26M.
1111.
44JJ. 4111,
4111. 3019. 1061, ]019
IM., IM
6'.
Slaving
0-1 bl'Ilh 'veruill-it
61W
67,41
176 LfDzx
J7e INDEX
Burg ora«con Soil
0 ...
5012
ISM:
o ...
It 11vin..'. h =01,:
0
Z�l
Anill.j.
Is
mer c
Iloinr,
s d i.,.Iio.
me
44"N
T=J,.;� -i� 1W-1- 6
1w
mold— —1, s.d.t. .-I
IWnlifualiml of RauWin4 wiry ..)359, SOlt, 3061 7081, 91001
11WII4vU<t M.lun .1 ,Wcul 100, 3110, JSZ1
1,
47"
dt-b"O "P-
4M. 4JOS. 4317, 4611. 2.11
410
I.dw 3018
'103.4261
4%
So
Neutral feeders, dee
.,4
of
1. 1 "d 2
40
='T�'"L2UR. 1 .1 9
RZ.-Zill
3W
94101
341
4161
11,
JW
-z
IW.=—ian. A
1"..I., 7w
Owe.
o .
24
. I 45wo..
Odtkkw1
ZAIG
Siv. d cmadlit.
uH 72.
--d— 730
amu or ntI,l. -Is. 2305, 4191111
c I'll
3,01
7117
Mb M M =7". ....... _Aw. 324
0 Wa L-
. ......
F- Ii,b,, 8.
7121
Z—Z!Q��UIS. Adid, 3100
Fi..,,. I.,
I d,.Ib.,.
Ml 1w. Im,
..d—
oo pots
7116
Igl
III4I._
d-
73,
It 06
1.1'. IA. 4Z3?
MI. 116
T
Pbll Land __L_ 4172
f.�, 615
d
111,tZ� 1111. 2111. 1*11. 111�.211t. WI,
_&,tkk 110
Wirini
0., m
PI-Ictim—_AItid.2'oA1fd111
wIW
_?J"OI
=t
—
1,0 1Ib 4211
,M
....... 110
1,2,
3310
-
c 4607
R1. Ua.
1111 1
M4
720
d "I'l."114 414
0.,L., .......... ... 6ma
14
41 16
amp aldf gu 2."SNU u
It, 11uld 11dtw, m C,,d. I.. r
—Fes625,
H.W.. 7Nt
and from
E= 24A
G.dil.
Z-34!,. Table 29
40J. 4M
23% ..a
1.
1 41
ld 7
NS,. 24ir -405
I,
C- 4454
G= 240
INDEX 377
INDEX 329
6'.
Slaving
0-1 bl'Ilh 'veruill-it
61W
67,41
Ha UZ 1.4"' ,",
h,
Itkk 430. TIMI. 24
237,1
m vi,A F.,-- -k
Pk LIP
7-�7'�-.79411X
..
6'.
Slaving
0-1 bl'Ilh 'veruill-it
61W
67,41
Ha UZ 1.4"' ,",
h,
Itkk 430. TIMI. 24
237,1
m vi,A F.,-- -k
ON'—
7-�7'�-.79411X
..
'169
Anill.j.
Is
.34, 111. j4,111,
R -1-1-9J 111-9
4M. 4J46.
1411
1,
.14,11
0
JJ7191
IN
=Tbl
4161
11,
31.
.%,,,,, r4i,
..:Arad. av
41
6lolms and 6-11-.
Itkk 430. TIMI. 24
21
ON'—
131 d. 441i
'169
1
14,mrcunml
.34, 111. j4,111,
R -1-1-9J 111-9
4M. 4J46.
1411
JJ7191
IN
131 d. 441i
1411
5.11
31.
.%,,,,, r4i,
I? S-
1.
725 13,
MF. .
7'A
3613
31-18
93!41
r'.1 tuO.
m
j:IS. 2114. 2111. --J,
'1-'4. 2"1.
1•<inl
J-15
1 1 35 jot?
3"1. "111,
jw. 35 t 14'1 V`IJI 5.1l4 4::1
d.
A
T.,Wa 1. 19
7341
—A
T
lws
R.d .
I.
1.
INDEX al
INDEX JN
MF. .
—34N
r'.1 tuO.
m
j:IS. 2114. 2111. --J,
'1-'4. 2"1.
1•<inl
"" JJBe
INDEX al
382 INDEX
INDEX JN
MF. .
—34N
r'.1 tuO.
m
%f
1•<inl
"" JJBe
el allstthmerl
.Table JO
A
JI
r.61, ji
T
I.
M7. Z 4
4.1
Cuvuvl
;IJI
4
ms
ID' 1,
. .fitly
. ravda .......
.",Om 411
1113
k tw
382 INDEX
INDEX JN
E--Ily .1—bl.
—34N
r'.1 tuO.
m
%f
,:i1
7.
r.
.Table JO
A
JI
r.61, ji
T
I.
M7. Z 4
4.1
Cuvuvl
;IJI
4
ms
ID' 1,
. .fitly
. ravda .......
.",Om 411
1113
k tw
I'%'., T,
c
ar k-
----- T.M.
- . .. . ....
Certmt—It
T.M. 3
4. c:. U.
T— 11"12 R. Nil. UU. RXV, T. TIM
TIME
-ttw;—Y.—,r'
....Table 4
TW. 5
RU.
Talk 9
TW, 11
—I ."., d I I.b..
Vi—i— 4 o r:dr:ce—
TAI. 12
RIV, Rl'. TF.
TINI
T. TIV TAlk
TBill.
11
T I6
419
INDEX JN
F1.15111 1
fadk 23
T.
. ..
... . .....
,:i1
r.
.Table JO
JI
r.61, ji
T
-4. ,311: 12jil
M7. Z 4
:11
I'%'., T,
419
420
l'nJspoond mnJucico _ _.3]OJ, 7014, JI02 7,1.;
l'vJerl1��Ivor esrna:om �"—'� __Arrir�LL JI/
� Underlloor raG.waYa _ —,_Asic4e 751
Vapgr IamN. 9110] 1
\'arm>heJ cambric
-41a1;1 rra ._.__.__1102, 97101
\'sella for uanalermera �_—�� '
Srrvicca iv .._"'—•_^'--..__....__ 1311
...,.1109, 790
7020
\'o.uHe drop—_..__,�_�203, q12, 7aDlea 1 avd vote a
,,/1 41 i3, 7001
klMric diukareo M1ztutn �...._.._...__.._..__...9J. 1191
l9esberyr.of iaaufatiun ___ _. ]101. 9]101
670
Controllers �- .�.•�.•— _. 6117
AfotorGrneraror addera'.�.._.,._--� _�... 6114
6711
Orrrcgrrem uatian ""
61711
613
Wet laotieoa, rr UamP Inatiwa.
Wires, see Ccndesma.
\Vare ..... asRNm ...__._ ........_...___..,.1117. 7WJ. 1009
lVir<lua, arc e9vi9mrnh
RirtwaP............
...___.__,+_. ,_Aside ]62
Wsioe msbWa. Hcrxral mlr.._____._._,_. =A-1, JW
Arm.rnl eaDle ... .. Artwk J1a, 97711 '
AwiliarY Raaer..._._�^��—
' Nare eonJuttor fe�lsa � _ � .Ani;Ir l2t '
Cellular msal fluae rarrwaya
irle ....\riirle 736 I
F.Ittmal msallic tn4ioe __.,_____Anlele NR 9NH1
FleaiDle meal eOnduN _ __..Aside JSO
KnoWn6auhc k. emaalN'_ ._Aside R1
Nommdallic ahesikN rahle _ ____�Astele ]J6. 9)161
Nen W?mN satrwiov. _ _,Asidr NI
Nwe w11—terPro9l whine --_. Aside 710
Opeq
Over 600 vela _ ]III
�e9�'•Nr mrthad� 1107
igrfar< metal eaeevar -- _ _':��ii(srle iib
Wki.H nn rbiGDe' . rw Standar] -of National Fire Pra.
IMigq Aaagriatiaq.
X -'Y ._ _.___.4tidq 660
SECTION 2.
This Resolution shall be in full ce and effect from and
after its adoption.
Atn yo r
Read in full at a regular meeting of the Board of Commissioners
on i„ 1948
Adopted by the Board of Commissioners on 1948
Recorded by Sarah Thurman, City Clerk oyn ! ^1948.
�✓ U� lZl./.ra.. �
City Clerk